HEC-WAT

Watershed Analysis Tool

User's Manual

Version 1.0
September 2017

Approved for Public Release. Distribution Unlimited. CPD-88

 REPORT DOCUMENTATION PAGE Form Approved OMB No. 0704-0188

The public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching
existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this
burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the Department of Defense, Executive
Services and Communications Directorate (0704-0188). Respondents should be aware that notwithstanding any other provision of law, no person shall be
subject to any penalty for failing to comply with a collection of information if it does not display a currently valid OMB control number.
PLEASE DO NOT RETURN YOUR FORM TO THE ABOVE ORGANIZATION.
1. REPORT DATE (DD-MM-YYYY) 2. REPORT TYPE 3. DATES COVERED (From - To)
September 2017 Computer Program Documentation
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 5a. CONTRACT NUMBER
HEC-WAT
Watershed Analysis Tool User's Manual 5b. GRANT NUMBER
Version 1.0
5c. PROGRAM ELEMENT NUMBER

6. AUTHOR(S) 5d. PROJECT NUMBER

CEIWR-HEC
5e. TASK NUMBER

5F. WORK UNIT NUMBER

7. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES) 8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NUMBER

US Army Corps of Engineers CPD-88
Institute for Water Resources
Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC)
609 Second Street
Davis, CA 95616-4687
9. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES) 10. SPONSOR/ MONITOR'S ACRONYM(S)

11. SPONSOR/ MONITOR'S REPORT NUMBER(S)

12. DISTRIBUTION / AVAILABILITY STATEMENT

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
13. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

14. ABSTRACT
The HEC-WAT (Watershed Analysis Tool) software provides an interface that will streamline and integrate the analytical
process using the tools commonly applied by the multi-disciplinary teams of USACE offices so that more efficient and
coordinated modeling and planning may be performed. HEC-WAT is a tool that will help USACE offices perform water
resources studies and/or system-wide studies, it can also be used for smaller studies as well, like a CAP (Continuing
Authorities Program) study.

The HEC-WAT graphical user interface (GUI) streamlines and integrates a water resources study using software commonly
applied by multi-disciplinary teams in USACE. HEC-WAT is not replacing existing software but rather it's an interface that
allows unique pieces of software to work together (i.e., HEC-HMS, HEC-SSP, HEC-RAS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-DSSVue,
HEC-FIA, etc.). Software is incorporated in HEC-WAT through the use of a plug-in. The plug-in concept means that
HEC-WAT does not "know" anything about the software application code; the individual pieces of software provide the
analytical computations, while HEC-WAT provides the framework to coordinate the study. The graphical user interface is
illustrated and described in detail in this manual.
15. SUBJECT TERMS
HEC-WAT, software, interface, integrate, analytical process, tools, multi-disciplinary, teams, USACE, water resources
study, CAP, study, graphical user interface, GUI, HEC-HMS, HEC-RAS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-FIA, plug-in, concept,
computations, framework, hydrologic, hydraulic, economic, environmental, social impact analyses, modeling, results,
models, reporting, visualization, data, sharing, rainfall-runoff analysis, river hydraulics, reservoir system analysis, flood
damage analysis, flood impact analysis, statistical analysis, ecosystem response analysis, measures, trade-off analyses,
alternatives, simulations, analysis periods, events, schematic, map layers, map windows, program order, reservoirs, levees,
common computation points, stream alignment, impact areas, model linking, Without Project Conditions, panes, tabs,
toolbars
16. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF: 17. LIMITATION 18. NUMBER 19a. NAME OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON
a. REPORT b. ABSTRACT c. THIS PAGE OF OF
ABSTRACT PAGES
U U U 19b. TELEPHONE NUMBER
UU 562
Standard Form 298 (Rev. 8/98)
HEC-WAT
Watershed Analysis Tool

User's Manual

September 2017

US Army Corps of Engineers

Institute for Water Resources
Hydrologic Engineering Center
609 Second Street
Davis, CA 95616

(530) 756-1104
(530) 756-8250 FAX
www.hec.usace.army.mil CPD-88
Watershed Analysis Tool, HEC-WAT, User's Manual

2017. This Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC) documentation was developed with U.S. Federal
Government resources and is therefore in the public domain. It may be used, copied, distributed, or
redistributed freely. However, it is requested that HEC be given appropriate acknowledgment in any
subsequent use of this work.

Use of the software described by this document is controlled by certain terms and conditions. The user
must acknowledge and agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of usage before the software can
be installed or used. For reference, a copy of the terms and conditions of usage are included in Appendix
L of this document so that they may be examined before obtaining and loading the software. The
software described by this document can be downloaded for free from our internet site
(www.hec.usace.army.mil).

HEC cannot provide technical support for this software to non-USACE users; therefore, non-USACE
individuals and organizations should use any internet search engine to locate a vendor that can provide
support for the HEC software of interest. However, HEC will respond to all documented instances of
program errors. Documented errors are bugs in the software due to programming mistakes not model
problems due to user-entered data.

This document contains references to product names that are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners. Use of specific product names does not imply official or unofficial endorsement.
Product names are used solely for the purpose of identifying products available in the public market
place.

Microsoft, Windows, and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp.

Solaris and Java are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

ArcGIS, ArcView and ArcInfo are trademarks of ESRI, Inc.

AutoCAD is a trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
List of Figures ..........................................................................................................................xvii
List of Tables ........................................................................................................................ xxxiii
Foreword................................................................................................................................xxxv

Chapter

1 Introduction
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................1-1
Flood Risk Management .............................................................................1-1
1.2 Purpose .........................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Overview of HEC-WAT ..................................................................................1-3
1.3.1 Identifying a Study ........................................................................1-4
1.3.2 Creating a Study ...........................................................................1-5
1.4 Starting HEC-WAT .........................................................................................1-7
1.5 Organization of Manual ..................................................................................1-7

2 HEC-WAT Framework
2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Plug-In Concept .............................................................................................2-1
2.3 HEC Software Integrated into HEC-WAT .......................................................2-2
2.3.1 Hydrologic - HEC-HMS .................................................................2-2
2.3.2 Reservoirs - HEC-ResSim ............................................................2-3
2.3.3 Hydraulics - HEC-RAS ..................................................................2-3
2.3.4 Consequences - HEC-FIA ............................................................2-3
2.4 Other Software ...............................................................................................2-3
2.5 Tools ..............................................................................................................2-4
2.5.1 HEC-DSSVue ...............................................................................2-4
2.5.2 HEC-SSP .....................................................................................2-4
2.6 How Does It All Work .....................................................................................2-5
2.6.1 Traditional Approach.....................................................................2-5
2.6.2 HEC-WAT Approach.....................................................................2-6
2.7 Flood Risk Management ................................................................................2-7

3 HEC-WAT Interface
3.1 Panes ............................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Tabs...............................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Menu Bar .......................................................................................................3-5
3.4 Toolbar.........................................................................................................3-10
3.5 Map Windows ..............................................................................................3-11
3.5.1 Opening Map Windows ...............................................................3-11
3.5.2 New Map Window .......................................................................3-13
3.5.3 Tools...........................................................................................3-15
3.5.4 Zoom with Mouse .......................................................................3-15
3.5.5 Detach Map Window from the Desktop Pane..............................3-16
3.5.6 Synchronous Map Windows .......................................................3-16
3.5.7 Properties of a Map Window .......................................................3-17
3.5.8 Create a Graphics File of a Map Widow......................................3-18
3.5.9 Printing a Map window ................................................................3-19

i
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Chapter

4 Create and Manage Studies

4.1 Manage Studies .............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Create a New Study......................................................................4-1
4.1.2 Open an Existing Study ................................................................4-4
4.1.3 Close a Study ...............................................................................4-6
4.1.4 Save a Study ................................................................................4-6
4.1.5 Study Details ................................................................................4-6
Map Properties ..........................................................................4-7
Contacts ....................................................................................4-7
Model Info ..................................................................................4-7
Simulations ................................................................................4-9
Plugins .......................................................................................4-9
4.2 Study Directories and Files ..........................................................................4-10
4.3 Automatic Backup Files ................................................................................4-13

5 GIS Layers
5.1 Concept of Layers ..........................................................................................5-1
5.2 Map Layers ....................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Map Layer Formats.......................................................................5-1
USGS Digital Line Graph (.dlg) ..................................................5-1
AutoCAD® DXF (.dxf) ................................................................5-2
Arc Shapefiles (.shp)..................................................................5-2
GeoTIFF (.tif) .............................................................................5-2
Raster Image .............................................................................5-3
USGS DEM (.dem) ....................................................................5-3
ArcInfo® DEM (.asc) ..................................................................5-3
SMRMP (.smrmp) ......................................................................5-3
ASCII NetTin (.net).....................................................................5-4
LizardTech® MrSID® (.sid) ........................................................5-4
Virtual Format (.vrt) ....................................................................5-4
Open Street Maps (.osm) ...........................................................5-4
5.2.2 Add Map Layers ...........................................................................5-4
5.2.3 Remove Map Layers .....................................................................5-5
5.2.4 Shortcut Menu for Map Layers ......................................................5-7
5.2.5 Geographic Reference for Map Layers .........................................5-8
5.2.6 Setting Visualization Scales – Map Layer ...................................5-10
5.3 Primary Layers .............................................................................................5-11
5.3.1 Stream Alignment Layer .............................................................5-11
Shortcut Menu .........................................................................5-12
Stream Alignment Properties ...................................................5-13
Streams ................................................................................5-14
Stream Nodes .......................................................................5-15
Stream Junctions ..................................................................5-17
Scale.....................................................................................5-17
5.3.2 Simulation Layer .........................................................................5-18
Shortcut Menu .........................................................................5-18

ii
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapters

5 GIS Layers (continued)

5.3.3 Schematic Layer .........................................................................5-19
Shortcut Menu .........................................................................5-19
Schematic Properties ...............................................................5-20
5.4 Layer Visualization Scaling ..........................................................................5-21

6 Building the Base Schematic

6.1 Concepts........................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Elements of a Schematic ...............................................................................6-1
6.2.1 Stream Alignment .........................................................................6-1
6.2.2 Common Computation Points (CCP) ............................................6-1
6.2.3 Measures ......................................................................................6-3
6.2.4 Impact Areas ................................................................................6-3
6.3 Study Element Tools ......................................................................................6-4
6.4 Measure Tools ...............................................................................................6-5
6.5 Create the Default Schematic ........................................................................6-6
6.5.1 Create a Stream Alignment ...........................................................6-6
6.5.2 Add Common Computation Points (CCPs) ...................................6-8
6.5.3 Add a Reservoir ..........................................................................6-10
6.5.4 Add Impact Areas .......................................................................6-12
6.6 Create Additional Schematics ......................................................................6-13
6.7 Existing Schematics .....................................................................................6-15
6.7.1 View a Schematic .......................................................................6-16
6.7.2 Edit an Existing Schematic .........................................................6-16
6.7.3 Save a Schematic .......................................................................6-17
6.7.4 Mak a Copy of an Existing Schematic .........................................6-17
6.7.5 Delete a Schematic.....................................................................6-18
6.7.6 Schematic Properties ..................................................................6-18
6.7.7 Export Schematic Layers ............................................................6-18

7 Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

7.1 Create an HEC-WAT Study .......................................................................7-1
7.2 Build the Without Project Conditions Schematic ........................................7-5
7.2.1 Adjust Map Layers ........................................................................7-5
7.2.2 Create a Stream Alignment ...........................................................7-7
7.2.3 Add the Background Internet Map ................................................7-9
7.2.4 Add Common Computation Points (CCPs) ...................................7-9
7.2.5 Add a Reservoir ..........................................................................7-12
7.2.6 Add Impact Areas .......................................................................7-13

8 Importing Models
8.1 Importing Individual Models .......................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Import an HEC-ResSim Model ......................................................8-1
8.1.2 Import an HEC-HMS Model ..........................................................8-3
8.1.3 Import an HEC-RAS Model ...........................................................8-5
8.1.4 Import an HEC-FIA Model.............................................................8-6
8.2 Importing a CWMS/HEC-RTS Watershed ..................................................8-8

iii
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Chapters

9 Time Window – Analysis Period

9.1 Analysis Periods – Study Tree ...................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Create an Analysis Period ............................................................9-1
9.1.2 Delete Analysis Period(s)..............................................................9-3
9.1.3 Individual Analysis Periods ...........................................................9-3
Edit ............................................................................................9-4
Save ..........................................................................................9-4
Save As .....................................................................................9-4
Delete from Study ......................................................................9-5
Analysis Period Properties .........................................................9-5
9.2 Analysis Period - Modifiers ........................................................................9-6
9.2.1 Time Window Adjustment .............................................................9-6
9.2.2 Time Window Modifier ..................................................................9-8
Script Tab ................................................................................9-13
Simulation Editor......................................................................9-15
9.2.3 Time Window Interval Generator ................................................9-16
Simulation Editor......................................................................9-18
9.3 Analysis Periods – Alternative and Simulation Manager ..........................9-20
9.3.1 Create an Analysis Period ..........................................................9-20
9.3.2 Delete Analysis Period(s)............................................................9-20
9.3.3 Individual Analysis Periods .........................................................9-21
Edit ..........................................................................................9-21
Save ........................................................................................9-21
Save As ...................................................................................9-21
Delete from Study ....................................................................9-22
Analysis Period Properties .......................................................9-22

10 Create and Manage Alternatives

10.1 Overview .................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Default Alternative – Without Project Conditions ......................................10-1
10.3 Alternatives - Alternative and Simulation Manager ...................................10-1
10.3.1 Create an Alternative ..................................................................10-2
10.3.2 Delete Alternatives......................................................................10-6
10.3.3 Individual Alternatives .................................................................10-6
View.........................................................................................10-7
Save ........................................................................................10-7
Save As ...................................................................................10-7
Delete from Study ....................................................................10-8
Alternative Properties...............................................................10-8
10.3.4 Toolbar .......................................................................................10-9
10.3.5 Menu Bar ....................................................................................10-9
10.3.6 ToolTips ......................................................................................10-9
10.4 Alternatives – Study Tree.........................................................................10-9
10.4.1 Create an Alternative ................................................................10-10

iv
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapters

10 Create and Manage Alternatives (continued)

10.4.2 Individual Alternatives ...............................................................10-10
View.......................................................................................10-10
Save ......................................................................................10-11
Save As .................................................................................10-11
Delete from Study ..................................................................10-11
Alternative Properties.............................................................10-12

11 Create and Manage Simulations

11.1 Program Order.........................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 HEC-WAT Main Window.............................................................11-1
11.1.2 Alternative and Simulation Manager ...........................................11-2
11.1.3 Create a Program Order .............................................................11-2
11.1.4 Delete a Program Order..............................................................11-4
11.1.5 Edit a Program Order ..................................................................11-4
11.2 Simulations – Alternative and Simulation Manager ..................................11-5
11.2.1 Create a Simulation - Table ........................................................11-6
11.2.2 Create a Simulation - From another Simulation - Table...............11-8
11.2.3 Create a Simulation – Toolbar ..................................................11-10
11.2.4 Create a Simulation – File Menu ...............................................11-11
11.2.5 Delete Simulation(s) .................................................................11-11
11.2.6 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu – Table ............................11-11
View a Simulation ..................................................................11-12
Edit the Model Alternatives of a Simulation ............................11-13
Remove a Simulation from the Active Map Window ...............11-14
Edit a Simulation ....................................................................11-14
Model Linking Editor ..............................................................11-15
Compute a Simulation............................................................11-15
View the Compute Log of a Simulation ..................................11-17
Simulation Results .................................................................11-17
Save a Simulation ..................................................................11-18
Delete a Simulation ................................................................11-19
Simulation Information ...........................................................11-19
Browse Run Folder ................................................................11-19
11.3 Simulations – Study Tree .......................................................................11-19
11.3.1 Create a Simulation ..................................................................11-20
11.3.2 Delete Simulation(s) .................................................................11-20
11.3.3 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu .........................................11-20
View a Simulation ..................................................................11-20
Edit the Model Alternatives of a Simulation ............................11-21
Remove a Simulation from the Active Map Window ...............11-21
Edit a Simulation ....................................................................11-21
Model Linking Editor ..............................................................11-22
Compute a Simulation............................................................11-22
View the Compute Log of a Simulation ..................................11-22
Simulation Results .................................................................11-23
Save a Simulation ..................................................................11-23

v
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Chapters

11 Create and Manage Simulations (continued)

Delete a Simulation ................................................................11-23
Simulation Information ...........................................................11-23
Browse Run Folder ................................................................11-24

12 Model Linking
12.1 Model Linking Editor ................................................................................12-2
12.2 Dynamic Linking ......................................................................................12-5
12.3 Select Source Data ..................................................................................12-9
12.4 Data Locations.......................................................................................12-10
12.5 Model Linking Report .............................................................................12-11
12.6 Model Linking Editor – Study Tree .........................................................12-13
12.7 Model Linking Editor – Alternative and Simulation Manager ..................12-14

13 Final Study Setup - Deterministic

13.1 Define Plug-Ins for a Study ......................................................................13-1
13.2 Adjust Map Layers ...................................................................................13-3
13.3 Lookback Window – HEC-ResSim (only) .................................................13-5

14 Computes/Results - Deterministic
14.1 Compute – Single Simulation ...................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Study Tree ..................................................................................14-1
14.1.2 Compute Menu ...........................................................................14-2
14.2 Compute – Multiple Simulations...............................................................14-3
14.3 Compute – Individual Model Alternatives .................................................14-4
14.4 Compute through a Specific Model Alternative ........................................14-5
14.5 Compute Log ...........................................................................................14-5
14.6 Results Menu...........................................................................................14-6
14.7 Content Pane...........................................................................................14-8
14.8 Schematic ..............................................................................................14-10

15 Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute Option

15.1 Overview .................................................................................................15-2
15.2 Random Numbers....................................................................................15-2
15.3 Realizations, Life Cycles, and Events ......................................................15-3
15.4 FRA Plug-Ins ...........................................................................................15-3
15.4.1 Hydrologic Sampling ...................................................................15-4
15.4.2 Fragility Curve Sampler ..............................................................15-4
15.4.3 Performance Metrics ...................................................................15-4
Expected Annual Damage (EAD) .............................................15-4
Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP) .....................................15-4
Assurance................................................................................15-5
Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP) .............................15-5
15.4.4 Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) ................................................15-5
15.4.5 Benefit Calculation Tool ..............................................................15-5
15.5 An FRA Study ..........................................................................................15-6

vi
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapters

16 Output Variable Editor

16.1 Scalar Values ..........................................................................................16-3
16.2 Frequency Curves ...................................................................................16-5
16.3 Results ....................................................................................................16-5
16.3.1 Histogram Viewer .......................................................................16-6
16.3.2 Variable Viewer ..........................................................................16-7
16.3.3 Frequency Viewer .......................................................................16-7

17 Fragility Curve Sampling

17.1 Overview .................................................................................................17-1
17.2 HEC-WAT Fragility Curve Sampling Prerequisites ...................................17-3
17.3 HEC-RAS Breach Configuration Considerations ......................................17-5
17.4 Import HEC-RAS Breach Locations .........................................................17-7
17.5 Create Fragility Curve Alternatives ..........................................................17-8
17.6 Fragility Curve Editor ...............................................................................17-9
17.7 Individual Fragility Curve Alternatives ....................................................17-11
17.7.1 Edit ...........................................................................................17-11
17.7.2 Save .........................................................................................17-12
17.7.3 Save As ....................................................................................17-12
17.7.4 Rename ....................................................................................17-12
17.7.5 Delete .......................................................................................17-13
17.8 Multiple Fragility Curve Alternatives .......................................................17-13

18 Model Skip Rules Editor

18.1 Create a Skip Rule...................................................................................18-2
18.2 Building Logical Expressions ...................................................................18-3
18.3 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box .........................................................18-4
18.3.1 Operator .....................................................................................18-5
18.3.2 Table Lookup ..............................................................................18-5
18.3.3 Scalar .........................................................................................18-6
18.3.4 Time Series ................................................................................18-7
18.3.5 Time Window ..............................................................................18-8
18.3.6 Delete .......................................................................................18-10
18.4 Model Skip Rules Editor – Comparison Operator ...................................18-10
18.5 Model Skip Rules Editor – Available Actions ..........................................18-11
18.5.1 Default - If .................................................................................18-11
18.5.2 Else If .......................................................................................18-12
18.5.3 Else ..........................................................................................18-12
18.5.4 And ...........................................................................................18-12
18.5.5 Or .............................................................................................18-12
18.5.6 Selection ...................................................................................18-12
18.5.7 Select List of Models to Skip .....................................................18-12
18.5.8 Comment ..................................................................................18-13
18.5.9 Delete .......................................................................................18-13
18.6 End Condition ........................................................................................18-13

vii
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Chapters

19 Performance and Economic Metrics

19.1 Available Performance and Economic Metrics .........................................19-1
19.1.1 Expected Annual Damage (EAD)................................................19-1
19.1.2 Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP) ........................................19-1
19.1.3 Assurance...................................................................................19-2
19.1.4 Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP) ................................19-2
19.2 Performance Metrics Alternative ..............................................................19-3
19.2.1 Create.........................................................................................19-3
19.2.2 Edit .............................................................................................19-6
19.2.3 Save ...........................................................................................19-6
19.2.4 Save As ......................................................................................19-7
19.2.5 Rename ......................................................................................19-7
19.2.6 Delete .........................................................................................19-8
19.3 Model Skip Rules Editor...........................................................................19-8
19.4 Model Linking ..........................................................................................19-8
19.5 Results ....................................................................................................19-9
19.5.1 Select Event Results...................................................................19-9
19.5.2 Plot EAD ...................................................................................19-10
19.5.3 EAD Output Report ...................................................................19-10
19.5.4 AEP Histogram .........................................................................19-12
19.5.5 LTEP Histogram .......................................................................19-12
19.5.6 Performance Metrics Output Report..........................................19-13

20 Final Study Setup - Flood Risk Analysis

20.1 Define Plug-Ins for an FRA Study ............................................................20-1
20.2 Adjust Map Layers ...................................................................................20-3
20.3 Lookback Window – HEC-ResSim (only) .................................................20-5
20.4 FRA Specific Model Alternatives ..............................................................20-6
20.4.1 Hydrologic Sampling ...................................................................20-6
20.4.2 Fragility Curve Sampling .............................................................20-7
20.4.3 Performance Metric Alternative ...................................................20-8
20.5 Model Skip Flags .....................................................................................20-8
20.6 Time Window Modifiers ...........................................................................20-8
20.7 Create an HEC-WAT FRA Simulation ......................................................20-9
20.8 Manipulating FRA Simulations ...............................................................20-13
20.9 Model Linking ........................................................................................20-13
20.10 Output Variables ....................................................................................20-14

21 Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

21.1 Compute – FRA Simulation .....................................................................21-1
21.1.1 Study Tree ..................................................................................21-1
21.1.2 Compute Menu ...........................................................................21-5
21.2 Compute Manager ...................................................................................21-5
21.3 Compute Log ...........................................................................................21-5
21.4 Distributed Compute ................................................................................21-7

viii
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapters

21 Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis (continued)

21.5 Results Menu...........................................................................................21-7
21.5.1 Select Event Results...................................................................21-7
21.5.2 Simulation DSS File ....................................................................21-7
21.5.3 Output Variables .........................................................................21-9
21.5.4 Hydrologic Sampling Results ....................................................21-11
Plot Hydrograph .....................................................................21-11
Plot Event Distribution............................................................21-12
Plot Maximum Flows ..............................................................21-13
Correlation Table ...................................................................21-14
Plot Shape Set Frequency .....................................................21-15
Output Report ........................................................................21-15
21.5.5 Fragility Curve Results ..............................................................21-16
Plot – FC (Fragility Curve)......................................................21-17
Output Report ........................................................................21-17
21.5.6 Performance Metrics Results ....................................................21-18
21.6 Content Pane.........................................................................................21-18
21.7 Schematic ..............................................................................................21-19

Appendices

Appendix A References ..................................................................................................... A-1

Appendix B Tools
B.1 HEC-SSP ............................................................................................ B-1
B.2 HEC-WAT Options Dialog Box ............................................................ B-3
B.2.1 General Tab ......................................................................... B-3
Load Last Study at Startup ................................................ B-3
Show Startup Screen ......................................................... B-3
Automatically Save Study on Exit ...................................... B-4
Restore Layout .................................................................. B-5
Sync Study Tree to Map Window ....................................... B-5
Study Save Interval ........................................................... B-6
Show Tooltips .................................................................... B-6
Cascade Internal Windows ................................................ B-6
Recent Studies Menu Count .............................................. B-6
B.2.2 System Properties Tab ......................................................... B-7
Add a System Property ...................................................... B-7
Edit a System Property ...................................................... B-8
Delete a System Property .................................................. B-8
B.2.3 Threads Tab ......................................................................... B-9
B.2.4 Plug-Ins Tab ......................................................................... B-9
B.2.5 Compute Colors Tab .......................................................... B-10
B.2.6 Debug Tab ......................................................................... B-10
B.2.7 WAT Plug-Ins Tab .............................................................. B-11

ix
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Appendices

Appendix B Tools (continued)

B.2.8 DSS Timing Log Tab .......................................................... B-11
B.2.9 ECC Tab ............................................................................ B-12
B.2.10 HMS Tab ............................................................................ B-13
B.2.11 RAS Plugin Tab .................................................................. B-13
B.3 Console Output ................................................................................. B-14
B.4 Logs .................................................................................................. B-15
B.4.1 HEC-DSS Log .................................................................... B-15
B.4.2 ResSim............................................................................... B-16
B.4.3 RAS .................................................................................... B-17
B.4.4 FIA ..................................................................................... B-17
B.5 HEC-WAT Memory Usage ................................................................ B-18
B.6 Graphic Elements ............................................................................. B-18
B.7 Model Alternative Usage ................................................................... B-19
B.8 Simulation Compute Engine Manager ............................................... B-20
B.9 Compute Timings .............................................................................. B-21

Appendix C Setting Up the Coordinate System

C.1 Geographic Referencing ..................................................................... C-1
C.2 Coordinate System Types ................................................................... C-3
C.2.1 Google/Bing Web Mercator .................................................. C-3
C.2.2 Geographic Coordinate System ............................................ C-3
C.2.3 Universal Transverse Mercator Coordinate System .............. C-4
C.2.4 State Plane Coordinate System ............................................ C-5
C.2.5 Albers Equal-Area Conic Coordinate System ....................... C-6
C.2.6 Lambert Conformal Conic Coordinate System ...................... C-7
C.2.7 Transverse Mercator Coordinate System ............................. C-8
C.2.8 Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) Coordinate System ............ C-9
C.2.9 Polar Stereographic (HRAP) Coordinate System ................ C-10
C.3 Well Known Text ............................................................................... C-11

Appendix D Using Map Editor

D.1 Shapefiles (.shp) ................................................................................. D-1
D.1.1 Line ...................................................................................... D-2
D.1.2 Polygon ................................................................................ D-5
D.2 USGS Digital Line Graph (.dlg) ........................................................... D-8
D.3 Elevation Options Dialog Box ............................................................ D-10

Appendix E Using the Color Chooser

E.1 Swatches Worksheet .......................................................................... E-1
E.2 HSB Worksheet .................................................................................. E-2
E.3 RGBA Worksheet................................................................................ E-3

x
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Appendices

Appendix F Stream Alignment

F.1 Creating the Default Stream Alignment ............................................... F-2
F.2 Existing Stream Alignments ................................................................ F-6
F.2.1 View a Stream Alignment ..................................................... F-7
F.2.2 Remove a Stream Alignment from the Active Map Window .. F-7
F.2.3 Save a Stream Alignment ..................................................... F-7
F.2.4 Make a Copy of a Stream Alignment .................................... F-7
F.2.5 Rename a Stream Alignment ................................................ F-8
F.2.6 Delete a Stream Alignment from the Study ........................... F-9
F.2.7 Stream Alignment Properties ................................................ F-9
F.2.8 Reverse Direction of All Streams in a Stream Alignment ...... F-9
F.2.9 Import from an HEC-WAT Stream Alignment...................... F-10
F.2.10 Export an Existing Stream Alignment.................................. F-10
F.3 Edit a Stream Alignment ................................................................... F-11
F.3.1 Streams .............................................................................. F-12
Edit a Stream ................................................................... F-12
Rename a Stream ........................................................... F-13
Delete a Stream............................................................... F-13
Disconnect a Stream ....................................................... F-13
Reverse Direction of a Stream ......................................... F-14
Graphically Edit a Stream ................................................ F-14
Add Vertices to a Stream............................................. F-14
Move the Vertices of a Stream .................................... F-15
Delete Vertices from a Stream..................................... F-15
F.3.2 Stream Nodes .................................................................... F-15
Establish Stream Stationing ............................................. F-15
Delete a Stream Node ..................................................... F-16
Graphically Edit a Stream Node ....................................... F-16
Add a Stream Node ..................................................... F-17
Move a Stream Node .................................................. F-17
F.3.3 Stream Junctions ................................................................ F-17
Edit a Stream Junction..................................................... F-17
Graphically Edit a Stream Junction .................................. F-18
Move a Stream Junction .............................................. F-18
F.4 Change Stream Alignment Properties ............................................... F-18
F.5 Digitize a Stream Alignment .............................................................. F-20
F.6 Save Stream Alignment Data ............................................................ F-21

Appendix G Measures
G.1 Reservoirs...........................................................................................G-1
G.1.1 Create a Reservoir ............................................................... G-1
G.1.2 Existing Reservoirs ............................................................... G-4
Edit a Reservoir ................................................................. G-5
Rename a Reservoir .......................................................... G-6
Remove a Reservoir from a Schematic.............................. G-6
Delete a Reservoir ............................................................. G-6

xi
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Appendices

Appendix G Measures (continued)

Add Schematic Notes for a Reservoir ................................ G-7
Graphically Edit a Reservoir .............................................. G-7
Add Vertices to a Reservoir ........................................... G-7
Move the Vertices of a Reservoir................................... G-8
Delete Vertices from a Reservoir ................................... G-8
G.2 Levees ................................................................................................G-8
G.2.1 Import Levees....................................................................... G-8
G.2.2 Create a Levee ................................................................... G-10
G.2.3 Existing Levees .................................................................. G-11
Edit a Levee .................................................................... G-11
Rename a Levee ............................................................. G-13
Remove a Levee from a Schematic ................................. G-13
Delete a Levee ................................................................ G-13
Add Schematic Notes for a Levee.................................... G-13
G.2.4 Save Measure Data ............................................................ G-14

Appendix H Common Computation Points (CCP)

H.1 Import Common Computation Points .................................................. H-1
H.2 Create a Common Computation Point................................................. H-3
H.3 Exist Common Computation Points ..................................................... H-4
H.3.1 Edit a Common Computation Point ....................................... H-5
H.3.2 Rename a Common Computation Point ............................... H-6
H.3.3 Delete a Common Computation Point................................... H-6
H.3.4 Graphically Edit a Common Computation Point .................... H-7
Move a Common Computation Point ................................. H-7
H.4 Save Common Computation Points .................................................... H-7

Appendix I Impact Areas

I.1 Importing Impact Areas ........................................................................ I-1
I.2 Create an Impact Area ......................................................................... I-3
I.3 Existing Impact Areas .......................................................................... I-4
I.3.1 Edit an Impact Area ............................................................... I-5
Rename an Impact Area ..................................................... I-6
Delete an Impact Area ........................................................ I-7
Add Schematic Notes an Impact Area ................................ I-7
I.3.2 Graphically Edit an Impact Area ............................................ I-7
Add Vertices to an Impact Area .......................................... I-8
Move the Vertices of an Impact Area .................................. I-8
Delete Vertices from an Impact Area .................................. I-8
I.3.3 Export Impact Areas .............................................................. I-9
I.3.4 Save Impact Area Data ......................................................... I-9

Appendix J Using HEC-DSSVue

J.1 HEC Data Storage System Concepts................................................... J-1
J.2 Overview of HEC-DSSVue in the WAT ................................................ J-1
J.3 Open a DSS File ..................................................................................J-4

xii
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Appendices

Appendix J Using HEC-DSSVue (continued)

J.4 Set Time Window .................................................................................J-4
J.5 DSS Pathnames ..................................................................................J-5
J.5.1 View of DSS Pathnames ....................................................... J-6
J.5.2 Sort DSS Pathnames by Parts............................................... J-6
J.5.3 Select Pathnames ................................................................. J-7
J.5.4 Clear Selected Pathnames .................................................... J-8
J.6 Visualizing Data ...................................................................................J-8
J.6.1 Plots ......................................................................................J-8
J.6.2 Tables ...................................................................................J-9
J.7 DSS Records .......................................................................................J-9
J.7.1 Rename Records................................................................. J-10
J.7.2 Duplicate Records ............................................................... J-10
J.7.3 Delete Records.................................................................... J-11
J.7.4 Edit Data Associated with Records ...................................... J-11

Appendix K Model Integration Tools

K.1 Stream Reach Alias ............................................................................ K-1
K.2 Junction Location Mapping ................................................................. K-3
K.3 Reach to Stream Mapping .................................................................. K-6
K.3.1 By Junctions ......................................................................... K-7
K.3.2 By Streams ......................................................................... K-10
K.4 Coordinate Information ..................................................................... K-14

Appendix L Editing Model Data

L.1 Overview ..............................................................................................L-1
L.2 Schematic ............................................................................................L-2
L.2.1 HMS ......................................................................................L-3
Subbasin Element ..............................................................L-3
Routing Reach Element ......................................................L-3
Junction Element ................................................................L-4
Reservoir Element ..............................................................L-5
L.2.2 ResSim..................................................................................L-6
Reservoir Element ..............................................................L-6
Junction Element ................................................................L-7
Routing Reach Element ......................................................L-8
L.2.3 RAS – Cross Section .............................................................L-9
L.2.4 FIA ......................................................................................L-10
Impact Area ......................................................................L-10
Structure ...........................................................................L-11
L.3 Edit Menu ..........................................................................................L-12
L.3.1 HMS ....................................................................................L-13
Basin Model ......................................................................L-13
Meteorologic Model ..........................................................L-14
Simulation Run .................................................................L-14

xiii
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Appendices

Appendix L Editing Model Data (continued)

L.3.2 ResSim................................................................................L-15
Edit Reservoirs .................................................................L-16
Edit Reaches ....................................................................L-16
Edit Junctions ...................................................................L-17
Edit Diversions..................................................................L-17
Edit State Variables ..........................................................L-18
Edit Alternatives................................................................L-19
Edit Run............................................................................L-19
ResSim Editor – Reservoir Systems .................................L-20
ResSim Editor – Overrides ...............................................L-20
L.3.3 RAS .....................................................................................L-21
Geometric Data ................................................................L-21
Steady Flow Data .............................................................L-22
Quasi-Unsteady Flow Data ...............................................L-23
Unsteady Flow Data .........................................................L-23
Sediment Data ..................................................................L-24
Water Quality Data ...........................................................L-25
Plan Data..........................................................................L-25
RAS Mapper .....................................................................L-26
L.3.4 FIA ......................................................................................L-27
Global Data Editor ............................................................L-28
Impact Area Editor ............................................................L-29
Structure Editor.................................................................L-29
Critical Infrastructure.........................................................L-30
Warning Issuance Scenarios ............................................L-30
Alternative Editor ..............................................................L-31
L.4 Study Tree and Content Pane ............................................................L-32

Appendix M Plots
M.1 Plot Window ........................................................................................M-1
M.2 Menu Bar ............................................................................................M-1
M.3 Tools ...................................................................................................M-2
M.4 Customizing Plots – Plot Window........................................................M-2
M.4.1 Shortcut Menus ....................................................................M-3
M.4.2 Plot – Title ............................................................................M-3
M.4.3 Plot – Markers ......................................................................M-5
Create a Marker.................................................................M-5
Edit a Marker .....................................................................M-6
Delete a Marker .................................................................M-9
M.4.4 Plot – Curve..........................................................................M-9
Customize Curves .............................................................M-9
Style Tab ......................................................................M-10
Label Tab .....................................................................M-12
Legend Item Tab...........................................................M-12
Quality Symbols Tab.....................................................M-12

xiv
HEC-WAT User's Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Appendices

Appendix M Plots (continued)

Hide/Show a Curve ..........................................................M-13
Add a Callout to a Curve ..................................................M-13
Hide/Show Callouts .........................................................M-14
Clear Callouts ..................................................................M-14
M.4.5 Plot – Spacers ....................................................................M-14
M.4.6 Plot – Viewport ...................................................................M-15
M.4.7 Plot – X- and Y-Axis ...........................................................M-16
Axis Label ........................................................................M-16
Axis Label Tab ..............................................................M-18
Scale Tab .....................................................................M-18
Tics Tab........................................................................M-19
Axis Tics ..........................................................................M-19
M.4.8 Plot – Legend .....................................................................M-19
Legend Panel ..................................................................M-20
Legend Title Tab ...........................................................M-20
Left/Right Block Tabs ....................................................M-21
Legend Panel – Customizing Curves ...............................M-23
M.5 Customizing Plots – Edit Menu .........................................................M-23
M.6 Configure Plot Layout .......................................................................M-23
M.7 All Plots .............................................................................................M-24
M.7.1 Default Line Style Options ..................................................M-24
M.7.2 Default Plot Properties ........................................................M-25
M.8 HEC-DSSVue User's Manual ............................................................M-25

Appendix N Printing and Copying

N.1 HEC-HMS ........................................................................................... N-1
N.2 HEC-RAS ........................................................................................... N-2
N.2.1 Printing ................................................................................. N-2
Plots .................................................................................. N-2
Tables ............................................................................... N-3
N.2.2 Copying ................................................................................ N-4
Plots .................................................................................. N-4
Cross Section Table .......................................................... N-5
Profile Table ...................................................................... N-6
N.3 HEC-ResSim ...................................................................................... N-7
N.3.1 Plots ..................................................................................... N-7
Save As ............................................................................. N-8
Copy to Clipboard .............................................................. N-9
Print Commands ................................................................ N-9
Print ................................................................................ N-9
Page Setup ..................................................................... N-9
Print Preview ................................................................ N-11
Print Multiple ................................................................. N-11

xv
Table of Contents HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table of Contents
Appendices
Appendix N Printing and Copying (continued)
N.3.2 Tables ................................................................................ N-13
Copy to Clipboard ............................................................ N-13
Display Data .................................................................... N-14
ASCII File ........................................................................ N-14
Print ................................................................................. N-15

Appendix O Glossary ........................................................................................................O-1

Appendix P Terms and Conditions for Use ..................................................................... P-1

xvi
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

1.1 HEC-WAT Study........................................................................................................1-3

1.2 Relationship of Alternatives and Schematics .............................................................1-5
1.3 Relationship of Alternatives and Analysis Periods to Simulations ..............................1-6
1.4 HEC-WAT Splash Dialog Box ....................................................................................1-7

2.1 HEC-WAT Framework - Basic ...................................................................................2-2

2.2 HEC-WAT Framework – Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute Option .......................2-7

3.1 HEC-WAT Main Window ...........................................................................................3-1

3.2 Study Pane – Study View ..........................................................................................3-2
3.3 Action Toolbar ...........................................................................................................3-2
3.4 Content Pane – Study View .......................................................................................3-2
3.5 Desktop Pane ............................................................................................................3-3
3.6 Message Pane ..........................................................................................................3-3
3.7 Maps Tab ..................................................................................................................3-4
3.8 Schematic Tab...........................................................................................................3-4
3.9 Select Simulation Results dialog Box.........................................................................3-8
3.10 Standard Toolbar .....................................................................................................3-10
3.11 WAT Tools Toolbar..................................................................................................3-10
3.12 Tools Toolbar ..........................................................................................................3-10
3.13 Maps Toolbar ..........................................................................................................3-11
3.14 Programs Toolbar ....................................................................................................3-11
3.15 Map Window............................................................................................................3-12
3.16 Display Simulation Map Window from Study Pane ..................................................3-13
3.17 Display Stream Alignment Map Window from Schematic Tab..................................3-13
3.18 New Map Window....................................................................................................3-14
3.19 New Map Window with Schematic Added ................................................................3-14
3.20 Synchronized Map Windows....................................................................................3-16
3.21 Map Window Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................3-17
3.22 Background Color Chooser......................................................................................3-18
3.23 Save Browser ..........................................................................................................3-18
3.24 Print Dialog Box .......................................................................................................3-19

4.1 File Menu Commands................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Create New Study Dialog Box ...................................................................................4-1
4.3 Open Browser ...........................................................................................................4-2
4.4 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box with Study Projection Information ................4-3
4.5 Select Map to Add Browser .......................................................................................4-3
4.6 Create New Study Dialog Box - Completed ...............................................................4-4
4.7 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab ........................................................................4-5
4.8 Open Study Browser .................................................................................................4-5
4.9 Study Details Dialog Box – Map Properties Tab ........................................................4-6
4.10 Study Details Dialog Box – Contacts Tab ..................................................................4-7
4.11 Study Details Dialog Box – Model Info Tab ................................................................4-8
4.12 Edit Description for "model alternative" Dialog Box ....................................................4-8
4.13 Study Details Dialog Box – Simulations Tab ..............................................................4-9

xvii
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

4.14 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab .....................................................................4-9

4.15 Example HEC-WAT Study Directory Structure.........................................................4-10

5.1 Raster Image File ......................................................................................................5-3

5.2 Select Map to Add Browser .......................................................................................5-5
5.3 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab ........................................................................5-6
5.4 Remove Map Layers from Study Dialog Box .............................................................5-6
5.5 Map Layer Shortcut Menu .........................................................................................5-7
5.6 Save Browser ............................................................................................................5-8
5.7 Attributes Table dialog Box ........................................................................................5-9
5.8 Map Default Properties for StudyName Dialog Box ...................................................5-9
5.9 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box ..................................................................5-10
5.10 Maps Tab - Stream Alignment Layer .......................................................................5-11
5.11 Stream Alignment Layer – Shortcut Menu ...............................................................5-12
5.12 Stream Alignment Properties Dialog Box .................................................................5-13
5.13 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box .......................................................................5-14
5.14 Stream Alignment Properties – Streams ..................................................................5-14
5.15 Choose A Color Dialog Box .....................................................................................5-15
5.16 Preview Changes ....................................................................................................5-15
5.17 Font Chooser ...........................................................................................................5-15
5.18 Stream Alignment Properties – Tic Marks ................................................................5-16
5.19 Stream Alignment Properties – Stream Nodes ........................................................5-16
5.20 Stream Alignment Properties – Stream Junctions ....................................................5-17
5.21 Create New Scale Dialog Box..................................................................................5-18
5.22 Simulation Layer – Shortcut Menu ...........................................................................5-18
5.23 Schematic Layer – Shortcut Menu ...........................................................................5-19
5.24 Drawing Properties Editor ........................................................................................5-20
5.25 Export Schematic Layers Dialog Box .......................................................................5-20

6.1 Stream Alignment ......................................................................................................6-2

6.2 Common Computation Points (CCPs) .......................................................................6-2
6.3 Measures...................................................................................................................6-3
6.4 Impact Areas .............................................................................................................6-4
6.5 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box .........................................................................6-7
6.6 Import Computation Points Dialog Box ......................................................................6-8
6.7 Name New Computation Point Dialog Box.................................................................6-9
6.8 Name new Computation Point Dialog Box at a Stream Junction ..............................6-10
6.9 Name New Reservoir Dialog Box ............................................................................6-11
6.10 Reservoir Pool .........................................................................................................6-11
6.11 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box ...................................................................6-12
6.12 Import Impact Areas Dialog Box ..............................................................................6-12
6.13 Creating a New Schematic ......................................................................................6-13
6.14 Create New Schematics Dialog Box ........................................................................6-13
6.15 Select Map Dialog Box ............................................................................................6-14
6.16 Creating a New Alternative ......................................................................................6-14
6.17 Create New Alternatives Dialog Box ........................................................................6-15

xviii
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

6.18 Schematic Shortcut Menu ........................................................................................6-16

6.19 Schematic Editor .....................................................................................................6-17
6.20 Save Schematic As Dialog Box ...............................................................................6-18
6.21 Properties for SchematicName Dialog Box ..............................................................6-19
6.22 Export Schematic Layers Dialog Box .......................................................................6-19
6.23 Export Browser – Common Computation Points ......................................................6-20

7.1 HEC-WAT Main Window ...........................................................................................7-1

7.2 Create New Study Dialog Box ...................................................................................7-2
7.3 Open Browser ...........................................................................................................7-2
7.4 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box – Default Coordinate System ......................7-3
7.5 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box ....................................................................7-3
7.6 Select Map to Add Browser .......................................................................................7-4
7.7 Create New Study Dialog Box - Completed ...............................................................7-4
7.8 HEC-WAT Main Window - RussianRiver Study – New Study Created .......................7-5
7.9 Map Layers Tree - Shortcut Menu .............................................................................7-6
7.10 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box ...........................................................................7-6
7.11 Default Map Properties for Dialog Box .......................................................................7-7
7.12 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box .........................................................................7-8
7.13 Maps Menu - Add Internet Map .................................................................................7-9
7.14 Import Computation Points Dialog Box ....................................................................7-10
7.15 Name New Computation Point.................................................................................7-11
7.16 Name new Computation Point Dialog Box at a Stream Junction ..............................7-11
7.17 Name New Reservoir Dialog Box ............................................................................7-12
7.18 Reservoir Pool .........................................................................................................7-13
7.19 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box ...................................................................7-13
7.20 Import Impact Areas Dialog Box ..............................................................................7-14
7.21 Draw an Impact Area ...............................................................................................7-15
7.22 Name New Impact Area Dialog Box.........................................................................7-15

8.1 HEC-WAT Main Window – File Menu - Import Menu Options ....................................8-1
8.2 Import Type Window ..................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Select Watershed File to Import From Browser..........................................................8-2
8.4 ResSim Import Window .............................................................................................8-3
8.5 Schematic Editor .......................................................................................................8-3
8.6 HEC-WAT Main Window after HEC-ResSim Import ..................................................8-4
8.7 HEC-HMS Main Window and Select Project File Dialog Box .....................................8-4
8.8 HEC-HMS Warning Window about HEC-HMS Project ...............................................8-5
8.9 Convert HEC-HMS Project Window ...........................................................................8-5
8.10 Select RAS project to import from Browser ................................................................8-5
8.11 HEC-RAS Importing Window .....................................................................................8-6
8.12 Import Alternatives Dialog Box...................................................................................8-6
8.13 Open Browser ...........................................................................................................8-7
8.14 HEC-FIA Import Alternative Table .............................................................................8-7
8.15 Alternative Specification Dialog Box ..........................................................................8-7
8.16 Import CWMS Watershed Dialog Box ........................................................................8-8

xix
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

8.17 Select Workspace File Browser .................................................................................8-9

8.18 Continue Import? Window .........................................................................................8-9
8.19 Importing CWMS Watershed Dialog Box .................................................................8-10
8.20 HEC-WAT Main Window After CWMS Import ..........................................................8-11

9.1 HEC-WAT Main Window ...........................................................................................9-2

9.2 Study Tree - Analysis Periods Folder - Shortcut Menu...............................................9-2
9.3 Create New Analysis Period Dialog Box ....................................................................9-2
9.4 Delete Analysis Period(s) Dialog Box ........................................................................9-3
9.5 Study Tree - Individual Analysis Period Shortcut Menu..............................................9-4
9.6 Analysis Period Editor................................................................................................9-4
9.7 Save Analysis Period As Dialog Box..........................................................................9-5
9.8 Properties for AnalysisPeriodName Dialog Box .........................................................9-5
9.9 Simulation Editor – Time Window Adjustment ...........................................................9-6
9.10 Time Window Adjustment Editor ................................................................................9-7
9.11 Time Window Adjustment Editor – No Change ..........................................................9-7
9.12 Time Window Adjustment Editor – Relative ...............................................................9-7
9.13 Time Window Adjustment Editor – Relative - Example ..............................................9-8
9.14 Simulation Editor – Example Time Window Adjustment - Relative .............................9-9
9.15 Create New Time Window Modifier Alternative Dialog Box ........................................9-9
9.16 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor .................................................................9-10
9.17 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Threshold Crossing ...............................9-11
9.18 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Minimum Time Window .........................9-12
9.19 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Maximum Time Window ........................9-12
9.20 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Script Tab .............................................9-13
9.21 API Pane – Displaying Information about an API Item .............................................9-14
9.22 JavaDoc Window – Display More Detailed Information about an API Item...............9-15
9.23 Simulation Editor – Simulation with Time Window Modifier Alternative ....................9-16
9.24 Create New Time Window Interval Generator Alternative Dialog Box ......................9-17
9.25 Time Window Interval Generator Editor ...................................................................9-18
9.26 Simulation Editor – Simulation with Time Window Interval Generator Alternative ....9-19
9.27 Alternative and Simulation Manager ........................................................................9-20

10.1 Default Alternative Name .........................................................................................10-1

10.2 Alternative and Simulation Manager ........................................................................10-2
10.3 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................10-3
10.4 Alternatives Shortcut Menu ......................................................................................10-3
10.5 Create New Alternative Dialog Box ..........................................................................10-3
10.6 Select Map Dialog Box ............................................................................................10-4
10.7 Create New Schematics Dialog Box ........................................................................10-4
10.8 Alternative Map Window ..........................................................................................10-5
10.9 Alternative and Simulation Manager – Additional Alternatives .................................10-5
10.10 Delete Alternative(s) Dialog Box ..............................................................................10-6
10.11 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Individual Alternative Shortcut Menu.............10-7
10.12 Save Alternative As Dialog Box ...............................................................................10-8
10.13 Properties for AlternativeName Dialog Box ..............................................................10-9

xx
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

10.14 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Tooltip ........................................................10-10

10.15 Study Tree – Individual Alternative Shortcut Menu ................................................10-10

11.1 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................11-1

11.2 Program Order Dialog Box ......................................................................................11-2
11.3 Alternative and Simulation Manager ........................................................................11-2
11.4 New Program Order Dialog Box ..............................................................................11-3
11.5 Selection Editor .......................................................................................................11-3
11.6 Program Order Dialog Box – Software Application Selected ....................................11-5
11.7 Select Program Dialog Box ......................................................................................11-5
11.8 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Table ............................................................11-6
11.9 Create New Simulation Dialog Box ..........................................................................11-7
11.10 Selection of Model Alternatives – Create New Simulation Dialog Box......................11-7
11.11 Alternative and Simulation Manager – Completed Simulation ..................................11-7
11.12 Study Tree with Created Simulation.........................................................................11-8
11.13 Content Pane ..........................................................................................................11-8
11.14 Select Simulation Selector .......................................................................................11-9
11.15 Create New Simulation Dialog Box - Blank ............................................................11-10
11.16 Delete Simulation(s) Dialog Box ............................................................................11-12
11.17 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu ......................................................................11-12
11.18 Select Map Dialog Box ..........................................................................................11-13
11.19 Editing a Model Alternative ....................................................................................11-13
11.20 Simulation Editor ...................................................................................................11-14
11.21 Model Linking Editor ..............................................................................................11-15
11.22 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu - Compute ....................................................11-16
11.23 Compute Progress Dialog Box...............................................................................11-16
11.24 SimulationName.log Editor ....................................................................................11-17
11.25 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu - Results .......................................................11-18
11.26 HEC-HMS Results – Global Summary Results ......................................................11-18
11.27 Properties for SimulationName Dialog Box ............................................................11-19

12.1 Model Linking Editor ................................................................................................12-1

12.2 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................12-2
12.3 Model Linking Editor – Simulation List .....................................................................12-2
12.4 Model Linking Editor – Model to Link List .................................................................12-3
12.5 Model Linking Editor – RAS Model Alternative Unlinked ..........................................12-3
12.6 Select Default Model to Link Dialog Box ..................................................................12-4
12.7 Default Model to Link List ........................................................................................12-4
12.8 Confirm Input from Model changing to Window........................................................12-4
12.9 Model Linking Editor – RAS Model Alternative to HMS Model Alternative ................12-5
12.10 Model Linking Editor – Individual Locations .............................................................12-5
12.11 Model Linking Editor – Completed RAS Model Linking ............................................12-6
12.12 Multiple Simulation using the same RAS Model Alternative – Base for Real
Time forecasting ......................................................................................................12-6
12.13 Model Linking Editor – RAS Model Alternative Already Linked ................................12-7
12.14 Dynamic Linkage Editor ...........................................................................................12-8

xxi
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

12.15 Dynamic Linkage Editor – Dynamically Linked Locations ........................................12-8

12.16 Select Source Data Location Dialog Box ...............................................................12-10
12.17 Data Locations Dialog Box ....................................................................................12-11
12.18 Select Report Type Message Window ...................................................................12-11
12.19 Print Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................12-12
12.20 Print Dialog Box .....................................................................................................12-12
12.21 Model Linking Report .............................................................................................12-13
12.22 Study Tree – Model Linking Editor .........................................................................12-13
12.23 Alternative and Simulation Manager ......................................................................12-14

13.1 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab - Deterministic ...........................................13-1

13.2 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................13-2
13.3 Study Plug-Ins Defaults ...........................................................................................13-2
13.4 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab ......................................................................13-3
13.5 Edit Polygon Properties Editor .................................................................................13-4
13.6 Default Map Properties for Dialog Box .....................................................................13-4
13.7 Edit Menu – ResSim – Lookback Window ...............................................................13-5
13.8 Lookback Window Dialog Box .................................................................................13-6

14.1 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................14-1

14.2 Compute Progress Dialog Box.................................................................................14-2
14.3 HEC-WAT Main Window – Compute Menu .............................................................14-2
14.4 Compute Manager Dialog Box .................................................................................14-3
14.5 Content Pane – Individual Model Alternative Shortcut Menu ...................................14-4
14.6 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu – View Compute Log ......................................14-5
14.7 Compute Log Editor .................................................................................................14-6
14.8 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu – HMS ....................................................14-6
14.9 HMS – Global Summary Report ..............................................................................14-7
14.10 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu – RAS .....................................................14-7
14.11 RAS – X-Y-Z Perspective Plot .................................................................................14-8
14.12 Content Pane – Shortcut Menu – Results – ResSim ................................................14-8
14.13 ResSim – Flow Summary Report .............................................................................14-9
14.14 Content Pane – Shortcut Menu – Results – FIA.......................................................14-9
14.15 FIA – Individual Structure Damage Report.............................................................14-10
14.16 HEC-WAT Schematic Shortcut Menu – Impact Area .............................................14-10
14.17 FIA – Aggregated Consequence Report – Life Loss Report ..................................14-11
14.18 HEC-WAT Schematic Shortcut Menu – Reach ......................................................14-11
14.19 RAS – Profile Plot ..................................................................................................14-12
14.20 HMS – Graph of HEC-HMS Routing Reach ...........................................................14-12

15.1 HEC-WAT Framework – Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute Option .....................15-1

16.1 Output Variable Editor .............................................................................................16-1

16.2 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................16-2
16.3 Select model name and model alternative name Variables Selector ........................16-3
16.4 Maximum Scalars Saved to simulation.dss File .......................................................16-4

xxii
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

16.5 Tabulated View of Maximum Scalars Saved to simulation.dss File ..........................16-4

16.6 Frequency Curves in the simulation.dss File............................................................16-5
16.7 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu – Output Variables ..................................16-6
16.8 Histogram Viewer ....................................................................................................16-6
16.9 Output Variable Viewer ............................................................................................16-7
16.10 Frequency Viewer ....................................................................................................16-8

17.1 Fragility Curve Editor ...............................................................................................17-2

17.2 HEC-RAS – Levee (Lateral Structure) Breach Data Editor ......................................17-2
17.3 Levee Fragility Curves at Different Points during a Fifty-Year Life Cycle .................17-3
17.4 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................17-3
17.5 Options Dialog Box – Plug-Ins Tab ..........................................................................17-4
17.6 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab ...................................................................17-4
17.7 HEC-RAS Main Window ..........................................................................................17-5
17.8 HEC-RAS – Unsteady Flow Analysis Dialog Box .....................................................17-6
17.9 HEC-RAS – Levee Breach Options .........................................................................17-6
17.10 Import Breach Locations Dialog Box ........................................................................17-7
17.11 Create New Fragility Curve Alternative Dialog Box ..................................................17-8
17.12 Content Pane – Fragility Curve Alternative Shortcut Menu ......................................17-9
17.13 Fragility Curve – Initial Setup ...................................................................................17-9
17.14 Defining a Fragility Curve ......................................................................................17-10
17.15 Table Fill Options dialog Box .................................................................................17-11
17.16 Sum Window .........................................................................................................17-11
17.17 Save Fragility Curve As Dialog Box .......................................................................17-12
17.18 Rename Fragility Curve Dialog Box .......................................................................17-12
17.19 Confirm Delete Window .........................................................................................17-13
17.20 Navigator Tool .......................................................................................................17-13

18.1 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................18-1

18.2 Model Skip Rules Editor ..........................................................................................18-2
18.3 Model Skip Rules Editor – Edit Logical Expression – Model was Skipped ...............18-3
18.4 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box .........................................................................18-4
18.5 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Initial Commands ..........................................18-5
18.6 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Operator List .................................................18-5
18.7 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Table Lookup – User Table ...........................18-6
18.8 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Table Lookup – DSS Table ...........................18-6
18.9 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Table Lookup – Time Series .........................18-7
18.10 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Scalar ...........................................................18-7
18.11 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Series – DSS from File .........................18-8
18.12 Select Time Series Dialog Box ................................................................................18-8
18.13 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Series – Time Series from Model .........18-9
18.14 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Window ................................................18-9
18.15 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Window – Specified ............................18-10
18.16 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Comparison Operator List ...........................18-11
18.17 Model Skip Rules Editor – Available Actions – End ...............................................18-11
18.18 Model Skip Rules Editor – Select Models to Skip Box............................................18-13

xxiii
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

19.1 EAD with Uncertainty Plot – PDF (probability distribution function) ..........................19-2
19.2 Assurance ...............................................................................................................19-3
19.3 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................19-3
19.4 Study Tree – Performance Metrics – Shortcut Menu ...............................................19-4
19.5 Create New Performance Metrics Alternative Dialog Box ........................................19-4
19.6 Performance Metrics Editor .....................................................................................19-4
19.7 Performance Metrics Editor – Annual Exceedance Probability Tab..........................19-5
19.8 Selector Editor .........................................................................................................19-6
19.9 Individual Performance Metrics Alternative – Content Pane – Shortcut Menu ..........19-7
19.10 Save Performance Metrics As Dialog Box ...............................................................19-7
19.11 Rename Performance Metrics Dialog Box ...............................................................19-8
19.12 Confirm Delete Window ...........................................................................................19-8
19.13 HEC-DSSVue – simulation.dss File .........................................................................19-9
19.14 Results Menu – Performance Metrics ......................................................................19-9
19.15 Select Event Results Dialog Box ...........................................................................19-10
19.16 EAD with Uncertainty Plot Dialog Box – Plot CDF .................................................19-11
19.17 EAD Output Report................................................................................................19-11
19.18 AEP Histogram ......................................................................................................19-12
19.19 LTEP Histogram ....................................................................................................19-13
19.20 Performance Metrics Output Report ......................................................................19-14

20.1 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab- FRA .........................................................20-1

20.2 HEC-WAT Main Window .........................................................................................20-2
20.3 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab ......................................................................20-3
20.4 Edit Polygon Properties Editor .................................................................................20-4
20.5 Default Map Properties for Dialog Box .....................................................................20-4
20.6 Edit Menu – ResSim – Lookback Window ...............................................................20-5
20.7 Lookback Window Dialog Box .................................................................................20-6
20.8 Hydrologic Sampling Editor .....................................................................................20-7
20.9 Alternative and Simulation Manager ........................................................................20-9
20.10 Create New Simulation dialog Box.........................................................................20-10
20.11 Create New Simulation Dialog Box - FRA Setup....................................................20-10
20.12 Create New Simulation Dialog Box - Selection of Model Alternatives ....................20-11
20.13 Alternative and Simulation Manager – Completed Simulation ................................20-12
20.14 Study Tree with Created Simulation.......................................................................20-12
20.15 Content Pane ........................................................................................................20-12
20.16 Map Window – Schematic of Current HEC-WAT Simulation – FRA .......................20-13
20.17 Model Linking Editor – Time Window Modifier Alternative ......................................20-14
20-18 Model Linking Editor – Performance Metrics Alternative ........................................20-14
20.19 Output Variable Editor ...........................................................................................20-15

21.1 HEC-WAT Main Window – FRA Compute ...............................................................21-1

21.2 Run FRA Simulation Dialog Box ..............................................................................21-2
21.3 Run FRA Simulation Information Dialog Box ...........................................................21-4
21.4 Compute Progress Dialog Box – FRA Compute ......................................................21-4
21.5 HEC-WAT Main Window – Compute Menu .............................................................21-5

xxiv
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

21.6 Compute Manager Dialog Box .................................................................................21-6

21.7 Compute Log Editor .................................................................................................21-6
21.8 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu – FRA .....................................................21-7
21.9 Select Event Results Dialog Box .............................................................................21-8
21.10 simulation.dss File ...................................................................................................21-8
21.11 Frequency Viewer – Default.....................................................................................21-9
21.12 Frequency Viewer – Variable List ..........................................................................21-10
21.13 Frequency Viewer – Select Location and All Realizations ......................................21-10
21.14 Navigator Tool .......................................................................................................21-11
21.15 FRA Results Menu – Hydrologic Sampling ............................................................21-11
21.16 Hydrographs Dialog Box ........................................................................................21-12
21.17 Flood Season Dialog Box ......................................................................................21-13
21.18 Primary Maximum Flow Frequency Dialog Box......................................................21-14
21.19 Cross Correlations Dialog Box ...............................................................................21-14
21.20 Shape Set Frequency Dialog Box ..........................................................................21-15
21.21 Output Report Editor – Hydrologic Sampling .........................................................21-16
21.22 Fragility Curve Plot Dialog Box ..............................................................................21-17
21.23 Output Report Editor – Fragility Curve Sampling ...................................................21-18
21.24 Content Pane – Shortcut Menu – Results – Hydrologic Sampling ..........................21-18
21.25 Schematic Shortcut Menu – Failure Location.........................................................21-19

B.1 HEC-SSP Main Window ........................................................................................... B-2

B.2 HEC-WAT Main Window .......................................................................................... B-2
B.3 Options Dialog Box ................................................................................................... B-4
B.4 Getting Started Dialog Box ....................................................................................... B-4
B.5 Save File Dialog Box ................................................................................................ B-5
B.6 Options Dialog Box – Systems Properties Tab ......................................................... B-7
B.7 Changes Not Save Window ...................................................................................... B-7
B.8 New Property Dialog Box .......................................................................................... B-8
B.9 Edit Property Dialog Box........................................................................................... B-8
B.10 Confirm Property Delete Message Window .............................................................. B-8
B.11 Options Dialog Box – Threads Tab ........................................................................... B-9
B.12 Options Dialog Box – Plug-ins Tab ........................................................................... B-9
B.13 Options Dialog Box – Compute Colors Tab ............................................................ B-10
B.14 Options Dialog Box – Debug Tab ........................................................................... B-10
B.15 Options Dialog Box – WAT Plug-ins Tab ................................................................ B-11
B.16 rasserver.log ........................................................................................................... B-12
B.17 Options Dialog Box – DSS Timing Log Tab ............................................................ B-12
B.18 Options Dialog Box – ECC Tab .............................................................................. B-13
B.19 Options Dialog Box – HMS Tab .............................................................................. B-13
B.20 HEC-RAS Computations Dialog Box ...................................................................... B-14
B.21 Options Dialog Box – RAS Plugin Tab .................................................................... B-14
B.22 Console Window..................................................................................................... B-15
B.23 HEC-WAT_DSS.log Editor ..................................................................................... B-16
B.24 ressimserver.log Editor ........................................................................................... B-16
B.25 rasserver5901.log Editor......................................................................................... B-17

xxv
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

B.26 HEC-FIA.log Editor ................................................................................................. B-17

B.27 Memory Monitor Dialog Box.................................................................................... B-18
B.28 Graphic Element Report Dialog Box ....................................................................... B-18
B.29 Filter Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... B-19
B.30 Model Alternative Usage Dialog Box....................................................................... B-19
B.31 Model Alternative Usage Dialog Box – Model Alternative List ................................. B-20
B.32 Simulation Compute Engine Manager .................................................................... B-20
B.33 Compute Timings Dialog Box ................................................................................. B-21
B.34 Not Timings Window ............................................................................................... B-21
B.35 Compute Timings Dialog Box – Location List.......................................................... B-22
B.36 Compute Timings Dialog Box – Table..................................................................... B-22

C.1 Map Default Properties for StudyName Dialog Box .................................................. C-1
C.2 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box ................................................................... C-2
C.3 Create New Study Dialog Box .................................................................................. C-4
C.4 Geographic Coordinate System ................................................................................ C-4
C.5 Universal Transverse Mercator Coordinate System .................................................. C-5
C.6 State Plane Coordinate System ................................................................................ C-6
C.7 Albers Equal-Area Conic Coordinate System ........................................................... C-7
C.8 Lambert Conformal Conic Coordinate System .......................................................... C-8
C.9 Transverse Mercator Coordinate System.................................................................. C-9
C.10 Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) Coordinate System .............................................. C-10
C.11 Polar Stereographic (HRAP) Coordinate System .................................................... C-11

D.1 Maps Tab – Content Pane ........................................................................................ D-1

D.2 Edit Line Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................ D-2
D.3 Edit Line Properties Dialog Box – Attribute Values ................................................... D-3
D.4 Select Color Dialog Box ............................................................................................ D-4
D.5 Edit Line Properties Dialog Box – Labels Tab ........................................................... D-4
D.6 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................... D-5
D.7 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box – Attribute Values ............................................. D-6
D.8 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box – Border Tab..................................................... D-7
D.9 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box – Labels Tab ..................................................... D-8
D.10 USGS Digital Line Graph Editor................................................................................ D-9
D.11 Color Chooser .......................................................................................................... D-9
D.12 Elevation Options Dialog Box ................................................................................. D-10
D.13 Elevation Options Dialog Box – Scale Tab.............................................................. D-12

E.1 Color Chooser .......................................................................................................... E-1

E.2 Color Chooser – HSB Worksheet ............................................................................. E-2
E.3 Color Chooser – RGBA Worksheet........................................................................... E-3

F.1 Stream Alignment Parts ............................................................................................ F-1

F.2 Relationships of Streams in a Stream Alignment ...................................................... F-2
F.3 HEC-WAT Main Menu – Maps Tab........................................................................... F-3
F.4 Map Layers Tree – Shortcut Menu............................................................................ F-3

xxvi
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

F.5 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box ........................................................................ F-4

F.6 Choose Shapefile Browser ....................................................................................... F-4
F.7 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box – Shapefile Name ........................................... F-5
F.8 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Doc – Example Shapefile ...................................... F-5
F.9 Stream Alignment Shortcut Menu ............................................................................. F-6
F.10 Save Stream Alignment As Dialog Box ..................................................................... F-8
F.11 Rename Stream Alignment Dialog Box ..................................................................... F-8
F.12 Properties for Stream Alignment Dialog Box ............................................................. F-9
F.13 Open Browser ........................................................................................................ F-10
F.14 Save Browser ......................................................................................................... F-11
F.15 Map Window – Stream Alignment ........................................................................... F-11
F.16 Stream Shortcut Menu ............................................................................................ F-12
F.17 Stream Editor ......................................................................................................... F-12
F.18 Rename Stream Dialog Box ................................................................................... F-13
F.19 Stream Node Shortcut Menu .................................................................................. F-15
F.20 Stream Node Editor ................................................................................................ F-16
F.21 Move a Stream Node .............................................................................................. F-17
F.22 Stream Junction Shortcut Menu .............................................................................. F-17
F.23 Stream Junction Editor ........................................................................................... F-18
F.24 Move a Stream Junction ......................................................................................... F-18
F.25 Stream Alignment Properties Dialog Box ................................................................ F-19
F.26 Creating a Stream .................................................................................................. F-20
F.27 Create New Stream Dialog Box .............................................................................. F-21

G.1 HEC-WAT Main Window ..........................................................................................G-2

G.2 Name New Reservoir Dialog Box ............................................................................. G-2
G.3 A Reservoir Added to the Map Window .................................................................... G-3
G.4 Reservoir Pool ..........................................................................................................G-3
G.5 Detailed Representation of a Reservoir Pool ............................................................ G-4
G.6 Rename Computation Point dialog Box .................................................................... G-4
G.7 Reservoir Shortcut Menu ..........................................................................................G-5
G.8 Reservoir Properties Editor .......................................................................................G-5
G.9 Rename Reservoir Dialog Box..................................................................................G-6
G.10 Notes: Dialog Box - Reservoir...................................................................................G-7
G.11 Import Levees ...........................................................................................................G-9
G.12 Choose Shapefile Selector .......................................................................................G-9
G.13 Name New Levee Dialog Box ................................................................................. G-10
G.14 A Levee Added to the Schematic ............................................................................ G-11
G.15 Levee Shortcut Menu.............................................................................................. G-11
G.16 Levee Properties Editor .......................................................................................... G-12
G.17 Rename Levee Dialog Box ..................................................................................... G-13
G.18 Notes: Dialog Box – Levee ..................................................................................... G-14

H.1 HEC-WAT Main Window .......................................................................................... H-1

H.2 Import Computation Points Dialog Box ..................................................................... H-2
H.3 Choose Shapefile Browser ....................................................................................... H-2

xxvii
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

H.4 Name New Computation Point Dialog Box................................................................ H-3

H.5 Name new Computation Point dialog Box at a Stream Junction ............................... H-4
H.6 Common computation Point Shortcut Menu .............................................................. H-4
H.7 Computation Point Properties Editor ......................................................................... H-5
H.8 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box .................................................................... H-6
H.9 Move a Common Computation Point ........................................................................ H-7

I.1 HEC-WAT Main Window ........................................................................................... I-2

I.2 Import Impact Areas Dialog Box ................................................................................ I-2
I.3 Choose Shapefile Browser ........................................................................................ I-3
I.4 Add an Impact Area to the Schematic........................................................................ I-4
I.5 Name New Impact Area Dialog Box........................................................................... I-4
I.6 Impact Area Shortcut Menu ....................................................................................... I-5
I.7 Impact Area Properties Editor .................................................................................... I-5
I.8 Rename Impact Area Dialog Box ............................................................................... I-7
I.9 Configuration Notes Editor ......................................................................................... I-8
I.10 Save Browser ............................................................................................................ I-9

J.1 HEC-DSSVue Main Window ......................................................................................J-2

J.2 Open HEC-DSS File Browser ....................................................................................J-4
J.3 Set Time Window Dialog Box ....................................................................................J-5
J.4 Pathname List Display ...............................................................................................J-6
J.5 Sorting Pathnames ....................................................................................................J-7
J.6 Plot Window ..............................................................................................................J-8
J.7 Tabulate Window .......................................................................................................J-9
J.8 Rename Records to: Dialog Box.............................................................................. J-10

K.1 HEC-WAT Main Window .......................................................................................... K-1

K.2 Stream Reach Alias Editor ........................................................................................ K-2
K.3 Enter Alias Dialog Box .............................................................................................. K-2
K.4 Confirm Deletion Window ......................................................................................... K-2
K.5 HMS Junction to Stream Mapper Dialog Box ............................................................ K-3
K.6 Study Tree – Models Node – HMS ........................................................................... K-4
K.7 JMS Model Alternative Map Window ........................................................................ K-4
K.8 Maps Tab – Turning Map Layers Off ........................................................................ K-5
K.9 Stream Junction Editor – Junctions Stream Stationing.............................................. K-5
K.10 HMS Junction to Stream Mapper Dialog Box – Completed ....................................... K-6
K.11 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab..................................................... K-7
K.12 Validate Changes Window ........................................................................................ K-8
K.13 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab – Automatically Match ................. K-8
K.14 HMS Reach – Upstream and Downstream Junctions ............................................... K-9
K.15 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab – Modifying.................................. K-9
K.16 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab – Completed.............................. K-10
K.17 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Streams Tab .................................................... K-11
K.18 HEC-WAT Main Window – Simulation Map Window ............................................... K-11
K.19 HEC-HMS Main Window ........................................................................................ K-12

xxviii
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

K.20 Stream Junctions Editor – Upstream and Downstream Stations ............................. K-13
K.21 Stream Node Editor ................................................................................................ K-13
K.22 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – Completed............................................................. K-14
K.23 Select HMS Projection Dialog Box .......................................................................... K-14
K.24 Open Browser ........................................................................................................ K-15
K.25 Select HMS Projection Dialog Box .......................................................................... K-15

L.1 HEC-WAT Main Window ...........................................................................................L-1

L.2 ToolTip Information from Schematic (Simulation Map Window) .................................L-2
L.3 Model Element Shortcut Menu ...................................................................................L-3
L.4 Subbasin Element Shortcut Menu .............................................................................L-3
L.5 HEC-HMS Editor - Subbasin......................................................................................L-4
L.6 Routing Reach Element Shortcut Menu .....................................................................L-4
L.7 HEC-HMS Editor – Routing Reaches ........................................................................L-5
L.8 Junction Element Shortcut Menu ...............................................................................L-5
L.9 HEC-HMS Editor - Junction .......................................................................................L-5
L.10 Reservoir Element Shortcut Menu .............................................................................L-6
L.11 HEC-HMS Editor - Reservoir .....................................................................................L-6
L.12 Reservoir Element Shortcut Menu .............................................................................L-7
L.13 HEC-ResSim Reservoir Editor ...................................................................................L-7
L.14 Junction Element Shortcut Menu ...............................................................................L-8
L.15 HEC-ResSim – Junction Editor ..................................................................................L-8
L.16 Reach Element Shortcut Menu ..................................................................................L-9
L.17 HEC-ResSim – Reach Editor .....................................................................................L-9
L.18 Cross Section Element Shortcut Menu ......................................................................L-9
L.19 HEC-RAS – Cross Section Data Editor ....................................................................L-10
L.20 Impact Area Element Shortcut Menu .......................................................................L-10
L.21 HEC-FIA – Impact Area Editor .................................................................................L-11
L.22 Structure Element Shortcut Menu ............................................................................L-11
L.23 HEC-FIA – Structure Editor .....................................................................................L-12
L.24 Edit Menu –HMS .....................................................................................................L-12
L.25 HEC-HMS – Basin Model Tab .................................................................................L-13
L.26 HEC-HMS – Meteorology Model Tab.......................................................................L-14
L.27 HEC-HMS Main Window – Basin Model Tab – Simulations Run .............................L-15
L.28 Edit Menu –ResSim .................................................................................................L-15
L.29 HEC-ResSim Main Window .....................................................................................L-16
L.30 HEC-ResSim – Diversion Editor ..............................................................................L-17
L.31 HEC-ResSim – State Variable Editor .......................................................................L-18
L.32 HEC-ResSim – Alternative Editor ............................................................................L-19
L.33 HEC-ResSim – ResSim Editor.................................................................................L-20
L.34 HEC-ResSim – Reservoir System Dialog Box .........................................................L-20
L.35 Edit Menu –RAS ......................................................................................................L-21
L.36 HEC–RAS Main Window .........................................................................................L-21
L.37 HEC-RAS – Geometric Data Editor .........................................................................L-22
L.38 HEC-RAS – Steady Flow Data Editor ......................................................................L-22
L.39 HEC-RAS – Quasi Unsteady Flow Editor.................................................................L-23

xxix
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

List of Figures
Figure
Number

L.40 HEC-RAS – Unsteady Flow Data Editor ..................................................................L-24

L.41 HEC-RAS – Sediment Data Editor ...........................................................................L-24
L.42 HEC-RAS – Water Quality Data Editor ....................................................................L-25
L.43 HEC-RAS – Unsteady Flow Analysis Editor.............................................................L-26
L.44 HEC-RAS – RAS Mapper Dialog Box ......................................................................L-27
L.45 Edit Menu –FIA ........................................................................................................L-27
L.46 HEC-FIA Main Window ............................................................................................L-28
L.47 HEC-FIA – Global Data Editor .................................................................................L-28
L.48 HEC-FIA – Structure Form Editor ............................................................................L-29
L.49 HEC-FIA – Critical Infrastructure Dialog Box ...........................................................L-30
L.50 HEC-FIA – Warning Issuance Scenarios Dialog Box ...............................................L-31
L.51 HEC-FIA – Alternative Editor ...................................................................................L-31
L.52 Study Tree – Simulation Shortcut Menu – Edit Model ..............................................L-32

M.1 Plot Window .............................................................................................................M-1

M.2 Plot Window – Element/Area Shortcut Menu Example..............................................M-3
M.3 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................M-4
M.4 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box – Font Box ..............................................................M-4
M.5 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box – Border Box ...........................................................M-5
M.6 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box – Background Box ..................................................M-5
M.7 Plot – Viewport Shortcut Menu .................................................................................M-6
M.8 Input Message Window ............................................................................................M-6
M.9 Point Location Dialog Box .........................................................................................M-6
M.10 Plot – Marker Line Shortcut Menu.............................................................................M-7
M.11 Edit Marker Line Plot Dialog Box ..............................................................................M-7
M.12 Plot – Marker Point Shortcut Menu ...........................................................................M-8
M.13 Edit Marker Line Properties Dialog Box – Marker Point ............................................M-9
M.14 Plot - Curve Shortcut Menu ....................................................................................M-10
M.15 curve name Properties Dialog Box..........................................................................M-10
M.16 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Style Tab – Point Box ....................................M-11
M.17 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Style Tab – Missing Value Symbols Box .......M-11
M.18 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Label Tab ......................................................M-12
M.19 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Legend Item Tab – Text Box .........................M-12
M.20 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Quality Symbols Tab .....................................M-13
M.21 Add Callout Message Window ................................................................................M-13
M.22 Plot – Spacer Shortcut Menu ..................................................................................M-14
M.23 Edit Space Properties Dialog Box ...........................................................................M-15
M.24 Plot – Viewport Shortcut Menu ...............................................................................M-15
M.25 Viewport Properties Dialog Box ..............................................................................M-15
M.26 Viewport Properties Dialog Box - Gridlines .............................................................M-16
M.27 Axis Label and Tics Shortcut Menus .......................................................................M-17
M.28 Viewport – Axis Label Properties Dialog Box ..........................................................M-17
M.29 Viewport – Axis Label Properties Dialog Box – Scale Tab ......................................M-18
M.30 Viewport – Axis Label Properties Dialog Box – Tics Tab.........................................M-19
M.31 Legend Panel and Legend Items Shortcut Menus ..................................................M-20
M.32 Edit Legend Properties Dialog Box .........................................................................M-21

xxx
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure
Number

M.33 Edit Legend Properties Dialog Box – Left/Right Block Tabs ....................................M-22
M.34 Open Browser ........................................................................................................M-22
M.35 Frequency Viewer Properties Dialog Box – Layout Tab ..........................................M-23
M.36 Configure Plot Dialog Box .......................................................................................M-24
M.37 Default Line Style Options Dialog Box ....................................................................M-25
M.38 Default Plot Properties Dialog Box ..........................................................................M-26

N.1 HEC-HMS Plot Results ............................................................................................. N-1

N.2 HEC-HMS - Print Dialog Box .................................................................................... N-2
N.3 HEC-RAS Cross Section Plot Dialog Box ................................................................. N-2
N.4 Print Options Dialog Box – HEC-RAS Plot ................................................................ N-3
N.5 HEC-RAS Profile Output Table – Standard Table 1 Dialog Box ................................ N-3
N.6 HEC-RAS Profile Plot Dialog Box ............................................................................. N-4
N.7 HEC-RAS – Enter the DXF Filename Browser.......................................................... N-5
N.8 HEC-RAS - DXF Export Dialog Box .......................................................................... N-5
N.9 HEC-RAS Cross Section Output Dialog Box............................................................. N-6
N.10 HEC-RAS - Enter Filename Browser ........................................................................ N-7
N.11 HEC-ResSim Plot Window ....................................................................................... N-7
N.12 Save Browser ........................................................................................................... N-9
N.13 HEC-ResSim - Print Dialog Box .............................................................................. N-10
N.14 HEC-ResSim - Page Setup Dialog Box .................................................................. N-10
N.15 HEC-ResSim - Printer Margins Dialog Box ............................................................. N-11
N.16 HEC-ResSim - Preview Dialog Box ........................................................................ N-12
N.17 HEC-ResSim - Print Multiple Dialog Box ................................................................ N-12
N.18 HEC-ResSim - Tabulate Window ............................................................................ N-13
N.19 HEC-ResSim - Table Export Options Dialog Box .................................................... N-14
N.20 HEC-ResSim - Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................... N-15
N.21 HEC-ResSim - Preview Dialog Box - Tables........................................................... N-16

xxxi
List of Figures HEC-WAT User's Manual

xxxii
HEC-WAT User's Manual List of Tables

List of Tables
Table
Number

1.1 Summary of Contents of User's Manual .....................................................................1-8

3.1 HEC-WAT File Menu Commands ..............................................................................3-5

3.2 HEC-WAT Edit Menu Commands ..............................................................................3-5
3.3 HEC-WAT View Menu Commands ............................................................................3-6
3.4 HEC-WAT Maps Menu Commands ...........................................................................3-7
3.5 HEC-WAT Compute Menu Commands .....................................................................3-7
3.6 HEC-WAT Results Menu Commands – Deterministic Simulation ..............................3-8
3.7 HEC-WAT Results Menu Commands – FRA Simulation............................................3-8
3.8 HEC-WAT Tools Menu Commands ...........................................................................3-9
3.9 HEC-WAT Window Menu Commands .......................................................................3-9
3.10 HEC-WAT Help Manu Commands...........................................................................3-10

4.1 Example HEC-WAT Directories and Files ................................................................4-11

5.1 Map Layer Formats Supported by HEC-WAT ............................................................5-2

C.1 Coordinate Systems Available in the WAT................................................................ C-3

J.1 DSS Pathname Parts.................................................................................................J-6

xxxiii
List of Tables HEC-WAT User's Manual

xxxiv
HEC-WAT User's Manual Foreword

Foreword
United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) policy states that USACE will analyze water
resources projects, including flood risk management projects, using a risk framework that
incorporates watershed and systems approaches. USACE's Hydrologic Engineering Center
(HEC) developed the Watershed Analysis Tool (HEC-WAT) to provide software to the field that
supports these requirements.

HEC-WAT helps a study team perform the necessary hydrologic, hydraulic, and consequence
planning analyses by integrating water resources software that is commonly applied by a multi-
disciplinary study team when conducting a water resources study. Many pieces of software
within the HEC suite of tools are implemented within HEC-WAT, thus allowing a study team to
perform many of the necessary hydrologic, hydraulic, and planning/ consequence analyses from
a single interface. The HEC software currently incorporated in HEC-WAT includes HEC-HMS
(hydrology), HEC-ResSim (reservoir operations), HEC-RAS (hydraulics), and HEC-FIA (flood
consequences).

The development of the Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) compute option within HEC-WAT software
allows a watershed or study area to be analyzed in a systems context using risk analysis and
also supports risk-based analyses and risk-informed decision-making. FRA uses event-based
Monte Carlo-style uncertainty sampling to evaluate the full range of possible conditions across a
watershed or within a system, which in turn provides a more complete picture of flood risk in a
watershed.

The goal of HEC-WAT is to help USACE offices perform all types of water resources studies in
a coordinated and comprehensive fashion. HEC-WAT accomplishes this goal through an
interface that allows the user to: load GIS based layers; establish stream networks and
schematics; identify locations where models would share information; define the modeling
software applications and their sequence order; import and edit existing models; develop new
models; organize and develop alternatives, analysis periods, and simulations; run modeling
software applications directly; and, view and compare alternative results.

HEC-WAT has been implemented following software guidelines that have been established at
HEC. The guidelines facilitate a common graphical user interface and look-and-feel for HEC
software in the PC environment. Recent HEC software implemented under these guidelines
include rainfall-runoff analysis (HEC-HMS), river hydraulics (HEC-RAS), reservoir system
analysis (HEC-ResSim), flood damage analysis (HEC-FDA), flood impact analysis (HEC-FIA),
statistical analysis (HEC-SSP), and, ecosystem function analysis (HEC-EFM). HEC software
implementation is under the guidance of Christopher N. Dunn, Director, Hydrologic Engineering
Center.

Design and development of the HEC-WAT software has been a team effort. The initial design
and concepts of HEC-WAT were done by Messrs. Christopher Dunn, Gary Brunner, Jeff Harris,
and William Charley. This group also included John DeGeorge of Resources Management
Associates (RMA). Once a draft design document was created, the formal design process
started and several other individuals joined the team: Michael Deering, Beth Faber, William
Lehman, Mark Jensen, William Scharffenberg, Joan Klipsch, Matthew Fleming, and Penni
Baker. The above personnel have also been involved in the development and implementation of
the FRA compute option. Development and testing of the final release was led by Lea Adams,
Chief, Water Resource System Division, Hydrologic Engineering Center.

xxxv
Foreword HEC-WAT User's Manual

Mark Ackerman, Ben Chacon, Ryan Ripken, John DeGeorge, and Shannon Newbold of RMA
developed the graphical user interface, developed the concept of plug-ins, implemented and
assisted HEC in the development of the plug-ins, and assisted with debugging and the overall
design of the program.

xxxvi
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 1 - Introduction

CHAPTER 1

Introduction
1.1 Overview
The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) conducts water resources management studies to
fulfill USACE's Civil Works mission. These studies begin with the definition of problems,
issues, and opportunities and continue through the planning process by formulating, evaluating,
and comparing alternatives. Various analyses are used to determine alternative performance and
related impacts so that appropriate decisions may be made. The studies often require
hydrologic/hydraulic, economic, environmental, and social performance and impact analyses. In
most cases, varying sections within a district office or through a Project Delivery Team (PDT),
perform these analyses independently with the reporting and visualization of modeling results
using independent models. For the project study, coordination, file/data sharing, logistics,
reporting of modeling results, and status reporting are often a problem for the PDT and modeling
teams as well as project management.

USACE determined that there was a need to streamline and integrate the tools commonly applied
by the district and division offices to perform water resources analyses so that more efficient,
transparent, and coordinated modeling and planning can be performed. The Hydrologic
Engineering Center (HEC) developed the Watershed Analysis Tool (HEC-WAT) to meet
USACE requirements for performing water resources studies in a comprehensive, systems based
approach. Modeling teams benefit because teams will be able to develop models in a closely
coordinated manner using a shared schematic; track progress of other models; and, automatically
retrieve results from previous model runs through the shared schematic, thus assuring a more
efficient and coordinated result. A graphical user interface (GUI) allows for data and results
sharing, facilitates the assembly of a common schematic; definition and representation of
alternatives; model setup; editing and implementation; and, direct data and results visualization.
The management team will benefit through the use of a tool that employs a common interface to
track project status through each modeling component and to display results during public and
project status meetings.

Flood Risk Management

USACE flood risk management (FRM) policy requires that USACE analytical processes include
methods and tools that employ integrated, comprehensive, systems and life-cycle based
approaches and risk-based concepts in planning, design, construction, operations and major
maintenance. These USACE methods need to incorporate systems response of projects when
considering load distribution and failure possibilities. USACE policy also states that project
performance needs to consider the system reaction to flood loading and how those loadings are
distributed across the watershed. A new capability was needed to focus on sustainability and to
employ adaptive planning and engineering capabilities. This new capability was also needed to
incorporate new information and knowledge about a project throughout its life to ensure project

1-1
Chapter 1 - Introduction HEC-WAT User's Manual

safety and performance requirements are addressed. From within USACE there is very little
guidance and few tools to support these requirements. Also, limitations of the current process
include difficulty in performing a system-wide risk assessment and incorporating a life-cycle
approach.

HEC-WAT includes an option that analyzes complex riverine systems while implementing the
flood risk management and systems requirements. Life-cycle analysis will be addressed in a
later version of HEC-WAT. The compute option, Flood Risk Analysis (FRA), allows a user to
perform plan formulation or system performance analyses while incorporating risk and
uncertainty analyses.

The terminology, analysis procedures, and output for the FRA compute option are consistent
with the following USACE guidance and requirements:

● ER 1105-2-100, "Planning Guidance Notebook" (22 Apr 2000), requires systems and life-
cycle approaches

● ER 1105-2-101, "Risk Analysis for Flood Damage Reduction Studies" (11 July 2017),
requires risk analysis for all flood damage reduction studies

● EM 1110-2-1619, "Risk-Based Analysis for Flood Damage Reduction Studies" (1 August

1996), specifies how to conduct risk analysis

● ER 1110-2-8159, "Life Cycle Design and Performance" (31 Oct 1997)

● ETL 1110-2-573, "Construction Cost Estimating Guide for Civil Works" (30 Sep 2008)

1.2 Purpose
The purpose of the HEC-WAT software is to help USACE study teams perform the necessary
hydrologic, hydraulic, and consequence planning analyses that are required for water resource
studies. The HEC-WAT framework allows a multi-disciplinary PDT to perform water resources
studies in a comprehensive, systems based approach by building, editing and running models
commonly applied by multi-disciplinary teams and saving and displaying data and results in a
coordinated fashion. The terminology, analysis procedures, and output used by HEC-WAT are
consistent with the requirements of USACE guidance and policy. HEC-WAT is designed to
facilitate:

● Entry of the appropriate data into each of the modeling programs is incorporated into the
HEC-WAT framework.

● Trade-off analyses among all study alternatives will eventually be a capability within
HEC-WAT through the use of consistent schematics, data, and tools. Results will be
easier to compare and contrast making the trade-off analysis easier to perform.

● The analytical process and enhanced coordination among study team members, while
producing more consistent results, and displays.

1-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 1 - Introduction

● The definition of alternatives through schematic representations, model identification and

sequencing, and tabular formatting.

● The assessment of study status by reviewing HEC-WAT outputs and reports.

● The review of modeling results at all modeled locations without the direct knowledge of
how the individual models generate those results. Those attending meetings can view the
results system-wide rather than reading the results for a few locations in a hard copy report
or poster.

1.3 Overview of HEC-WAT

HEC-WAT is software that orchestrates the building, editing, and running of a series of models
to help perform water resources studies while addressing the requirements prescribed by ER
1105-2-101. The software provides flexibility to offices in the performance of water resources
studies (Figure 1.1). The software can be used to perform small CAP (Continuing Authorities
Program) studies or large comprehensive studies. The HEC-WAT interface streamlines and
integrates the analytical process of water resource studies by using the software tools commonly
applied by multi-disciplinary teams. These software tools include hydrologic, hydraulic,
economic, and social impact assessment models.

Figure 1.1 HEC-WAT Study

The HEC-WAT tool allows USACE, partners, and stakeholders to conduct studies in a
coordinated fashion. Coordination begins as each model uses the common schematic that is built
within the HEC-WAT interface. The common schematic is a "road map" of the study area that
provides each team with the agreed upon nomenclature for the study area which should be used

1-3
Chapter 1 - Introduction HEC-WAT User's Manual

for each model and alternative. The individual models can be built and edited inside or outside
HEC-WAT, or imported from CWMS (Corps Water Management System) or HEC-RTS (Real-
Time Simulation) watersheds. Model results can be viewed from HEC-WAT by selecting
elements found on the schematic. Once the models are located (i.e., importing models, building
models) within an HEC-WAT study, the models can be run in a user defined sequence. The
storage of data is organized by DSS (HEC's Data Storage System) and a simple DSS linking
device is used to connect the models. The models, the input data, and the results are all stored in
the HEC-WAT's directory structure. Therefore, all data and files used to make decisions are
easily retrieved. Alternative analyses can be performed, and output from multiple alternatives
can be viewed concurrently making alternative analyses and alternative selection more efficient.

1.3.1 Identifying a Study

An issue at the beginning of any project feasibility study is the definition of study extent, the
without-base year alternative and the array of potential project alternatives. HEC-WAT helps to
alleviate these issues by allowing the project study team to jointly define extents and alternatives
through schematic representations, model identification and sequencing, and tabular formats.

The study team, under the direction of a Project Manager (PM), conducts an initiation meeting to
introduce the team to the project and study objectives. The PM will also define the problems and
identify opportunities within the study area. A typical study team could be composed of a PM,
GIS (geographic information system) specialist, hydrologist, hydraulic engineer, geotechnical
engineer, water manager (reservoir), economist (flood damage and other consequence such as
life loss), biologist (water quality), and planner.

After locating the watershed boundary and identifying the problems and opportunities of the
study, the team starts the analytical process by determining what data or models already exist and
what data and models need to be developed. Other HEC software performs data management
functions so that all required data is available in one location (DSS file) before a simulation is
computed. HEC-WAT does not perform these data management functions (i.e., extracting,
copying), therefore, if the study requires the use of observed, historical, or other model data, this
data needs to be stored in DSS files. This requirement is based on the way HEC-WAT links
model alternatives together and simulations are computed.

With a map in hand, the PM leads the study team on choosing the study boundaries, identifying
gage locations, sub-basin delineations, locations where models can share data (common
computation points), damage area centers, and location of measures (reservoirs, levees, etc.).
Once this information has been identified, someone from the study team will be chosen to setup
the base alternative (Without Project Conditions). This person should be someone with
knowledge of the study area.

With the study area defined, the study team needs to identify any models that may already exist,
what data is available, and what is the time window (analysis period) of the available data for the
base alternative (Without Project Conditions). Once the base alternative is set the study team
identifies names and gathers information for the additional alternatives. These alternatives could
include the use of additional flood risk management measures, environmental features, or
represent future conditions. The benefit of HEC-WAT is that each of the modeling teams is able

1-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 1 - Introduction

to use the identical schematic to perform their modeling with naming and other schematic
elements (e.g., stream alignment) being consistent across all models. Each alternative is tied to a
given schematic. Therefore, the alternative definitions are fully coordinated making for more
consistent modeling and modeling results.

1.3.2 Creating a Study

After the PDT has identified the study area, an HEC-WAT study needs to be created (Figure
1.1). A study, in HEC-WAT is a combination of data, models, and events required to analyze a
specific geographic area. The first step is to define the schematic for the base alternative, and
then schematics for other defined alternatives.

A schematic is a physical representation of a watershed boundary, stream alignment, and the

flood risk management and environmental measures to be modeled. One individual from the
study team builds the schematic for the base alternative. The first basic item of an HEC-WAT
schematic is the stream alignment, which is usually created by importing information from a map
layer (shapefile) or alternatively constructed within HEC-WAT (Appendix F). Once a stream
alignment has been constructed, and using the drawing tools available from within HEC-WAT or
importing information from a map layer (shapefile), common computation points (Appendix H)
and existing flood control or restoration measures (Appendix G) can be added to the schematic
and is available across all models. To aid in the placement of elements on the schematic,
background maps of gage locations, reservoir locations, sub-basin delineations, study boundary
areas, etc. can be added to the study.

By default, HEC-WAT creates the base alternative – Without Project Conditions first. The
study team has probably defined other alternatives that can be created, as well (Figure 1.2). An
alternative in HEC-WAT is a way to group a schematic with different operations and model
parameters. Once an alternative is created, the next step is to create analysis periods. Analysis
periods define the time window (events) that could be associated with an alternative. An event

Without Project Alternative B Alternative C

Conditions (e.g. re-operation) (e.g. new reservoir)

Schematic1 Schematic2

Stream Stream
Alignment Alignment

Impact Computation Impact Computation

Areas Measures1 Areas Measures2
Points Points

Figure 1.2 Relationship of Alternatives and Schematics

1-5
Chapter 1 - Introduction HEC-WAT User's Manual

is an occurrence of precipitation/snowmelt that leads to some sort of hydrologic response

normally associated with a specific time period. The event can be historical or hypothetical or
represent the upper limit of a precipitation runoff response.

Now that analysis periods and alternatives have been defined (Chapters 9 and 10), existing
models that have been identified for the study can be brought into the HEC-WAT study either by
importing (Chapter 8) or copying the files into the HEC-WAT directory structure. If models are
to be built, HEC-WAT provides two options. One is the ability to create the models through
HEC-WAT by accessing the individual pieces of software directly from within HEC-WAT. The
other option is to copy the files created by HEC-WAT to a computer, and then return the files to
the HEC-WAT study once the models are calibrated and validated. For example, if the HEC-
RAS (River Analysis System) model for a study needs to be built, within the HEC-WAT
directory structure, an HEC-RAS folder exists which contains the default HEC-RAS project
files. The user can copy these files to another computer, develop the HEC-RAS model, and then
copy the files back to the HEC-WAT study.

From the individual models, HEC-WAT is interested in the individual model alternatives that
have been defined. Each model has their own nomenclature for "alternative":

● HEC-HMS – run, simulation

● HEC-RAS – plan
● HEC-ResSim – alternative
● HEC-FIA - alternative

Throughout the rest of this User's Manual, all of the above will be referred to as "model
alternative". For example, a RAS plan, from within HEC-WAT, is referred to as "RAS model
alternative"

Once all the model alternatives have been added to the HEC-WAT study, simulations (Figure
1.3) can be created (Chapter 11). A simulation is a combination of an analysis period associated
with an alternative. For each of these combinations, model alternatives need to be selected, a
simulation computed, and results reviewed. The process is then repeated for the other identified
alternatives, and after several HEC-WAT simulations, alternative result comparison can be
reviewed.

Without Project Alternative B Analysis

Conditions (e.g. new reservoir) Period/Event1

Simulation Simulation
Without Project Alternative B-AP-
Conditions-AP-Event1 Event1

Figure 1.3 Relationship of Alternatives and Analysis Periods to Simulations

1-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.4 Starting HEC-WAT

When starting HEC-WAT, double-click the HEC-WAT icon on a user's desktop, or
from the taskbar click Start, point to All Programs, point to HEC, point to HEC-
WAT, and then click HEC-WAT. The splash dialog box for HEC-WAT opens
(Figure 1.4).

The splash dialog box (Figure 1.4) appears for a few seconds, and then the main window of
HEC-WAT appears. The user is now ready to start using HEC-WAT.

Figure 1.4 HEC-WAT Splash Dialog Box

1.5 Organization of Manual

The organization of this manual is shown in Table 1.1. A description of the HEC-WAT
framework and interface are provided in Chapters 2 and 3. Chapters 4 through 14 cover creating
and computing a basic (deterministic) HEC-WAT study. Chapters 15 through 21 provide details
on the HEC-WAT flood risk analysis (FRA) compute option. Appendix A contains the list of
references for this manual. Appendices B through N provide more detailed information on
specific items within the HEC-WAT framework. Appendix O is a glossary of terms used in this
manual.

1-7
Chapter 1 - Introduction HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table 1.1
Summary of Contents of User's Manual

If the user wants to find out… Refer to…

HEC-WAT Framework Chapter 2
HEC-WAT Interface Chapter 3
How to create and manage studies Chapter 4
How to work with layers Chapter 5
Building the base schematic Chapter 6
Creating a basic HEC-WAT study Chapter 7
Importing models Chapter 8
Time Window – Analysis Periods Chapter 9
Creating and managing alternatives Chapter 10
Creating and managing simulations Chapter 11
Model Linking Chapter 12
Final Basic HEC-WAT Study Setup Chapter 13
Computes and Alternative Analysis Chapter 14
Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute Option Overview Chapter 15
Output Variable Editor Chapter 16
Fragility Curve Sampler Chapter 17
Models Skip Rules Editor Chapter 18
Performance Metrics Chapter 19
FRA Simulation Setup Chapter 20
FRA Results Chapter 21
Tools available from HEC-WAT Appendix B
How to setup the coordinate system for map layers Appendix C
Map editors Appendix D
Using the Color Chooser Appendix E
Stream Alignment Appendix F
Measures Appendix G
Common Computation Points Appendix H
Impact Areas Appendix I
How to use HEC-DSSVue Appendix J
Model Integration Tools Appendix K
How to edit model data Appendix L
Plots Appendix M
Printing and Copying Data Appendix N
Glossary Appendix O

1-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework

CHAPTER 2
HEC-WAT Framework
A framework is a basic structure underlying a system or concept. In the case of HEC-WAT, the
framework allows for linkage of stand-alone modeling software, orchestration of modeling
inputs, and visualization of modeling outputs. The HEC-WAT framework and associated linked
components allows for the various PDT disciplines to work together in a flexible and transparent
environment to achieve a common goal. The HEC-WAT overarching framework allows a multi-
disciplinary study team to perform water resources studies in a comprehensive, systems based
approach. The HEC-WAT framework promotes the building, editing and running of models
commonly applied by multi-disciplinary teams including the saving and displaying of data and
results in a coordinated fashion. Performing a risk analysis in a systems approach is an
underpinning of the HEC-WAT framework including the Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) compute
option. The FRA compute option will analyze complex riverine systems while implementing the
flood risk and uncertainty analysis and systems requirements. The HEC-WAT software will also
allow a user to perform plan comparisons or system performance analyses while incorporating
risk analysis methods.

2.1 Overview
The HEC-WAT software allows USACE to meet its primary mission of managing the nation's
water resources in a holistic and comprehensive approach. HEC-WAT meets the planning
perspective for a PDT by allowing the team to perform an alternative analysis in an intuitive and
collaborative manner. This ease of use is provided by the HEC-WAT framework which
improves a study team's ability to facilitate transfer of information, convene as a team, provide
advice to stakeholders, and work collaboratively. The basic premise of HEC-WAT is to involve
modelers early in the process, thus encouraging a collaborative team approach to conducting a
water resources study. This coordination allows a study team to perform many of the necessary
hydrologic, hydraulic, consequence, environmental, and planning analyses orchestrated from a
single interface.

This central framework will allow study team members to: load GIS based layers shapefiles and
DEMs (digital elevation model); establish stream networks and schematics; identify locations
(common computation points) where models would share information; define the modeling
software applications and their compute sequence order; import existing models; and, develop
new models. The HEC-WAT framework will also aid in organizing and developing alternatives;
provide the ability to access and execute modeling software applications directly; and, view and
compare alternative results.

2.2 Plug-In Concept

HEC-WAT is not replacing existing software but rather the framework allows unique and
existing software to work together. The integration of the individual pieces of software within
the HEC-WAT framework is achieved through the concept of a "plug-in". The plug-in is what

2-1
Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

allows the individual pieces of software to integrate without requiring special code in HEC-WAT
to support the individual pieces of software. There are numerous ways to implement plug-ins;
therefore, the plug-in concept should not preclude a plug-in being developed for software that
might be included in the HEC-WAT framework in the future. HEC-WAT provides the analysis
framework but does not know anything about the individual pieces of software used. The
individual pieces of software provide the technical mechanics within the framework (i.e., editing,
reporting capability, computational analyses, etc.) and are not intended to contain any HEC-
WAT specific code. Further details about the plug-in concept will be detailed in the HEC-WAT
Technical Reference Manual (not available for Version 1.0).

2.3 HEC Software Integrated into HEC-WAT

The primary set of initial software to be used during the analytical process in HEC-WAT is
shown in Figure 2.1. The set of software available is:

• HEC-HMS (Hydrologic Modeling System)

• HEC-RAS (River Analysis System)
• HEC-ResSim (Reservoir System Simulation)
• HEC-FIA (Flood Impact Analysis)

HEC-WAT Framework

HEC-HMS HEC-ResSim HEC-RAS HEC-FIA

Plug-In Plug-In Plug-In Plug-In

HEC-HMS HEC-ResSim HEC-RAS HEC-FIA

HEC-WAT
Simulation
With Default
Program
Order

Model Results (simulation.dss)

Figure 2.1 HEC-WAT Framework - Basic

Other software and tools that are available with the HEC-WAT software include HEC-SSP
(Statistical Software Package) and HEC-DSSVue (Data Storage System Visual Utility Engine).

2.3.1 Hydrologic - HEC-HMS

HEC-HMS (http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-hms/) is a standalone software
application that is designed to simulate the precipitation-runoff processes of dendritic watershed
systems. The software is designed to be applicable in a wide range of geographic areas and is a
2-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework

generalized hydrologic modeling system capable of representing many different watersheds to

simulate either a single flood event or a continuous simulation that spans a couple of weeks or
multiple decades. A model of the watershed is constructed by selected modeling methods for
different components of the hydrologic cycle defining meteorologic boundary conditions. HEC-
HMS in the HEC-WAT compute sequence is a hydrologic precipitation rainfall-runoff model
that generally provides simulated flow at multiple locations within a watershed.

2.3.2 Reservoirs - HEC-ResSim

HEC-ResSim (http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-ressim/) is a standalone software
application that is used to model reservoir operations at one or more reservoirs whose rule-based
operations are defined by a variety of operational goals and constraints. The software simulates
reservoir operations for flood management, low flow augmentation and water supply for
planning studies, detailed reservoir regulation plan investigations, and real-time decision support.
HEC-ResSim in the HEC-WAT compute sequence is a reservoir simulation model that provides
regulated flow hydrographs. Results from both HEC-HMS and HEC-ResSim can be used by the
hydraulics model.

2.3.3 Hydraulics - HEC-RAS

HEC-RAS (http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-ras/) is a standalone software
application that allows the user to perform one- dimensional steady and unsteady flow and two-
dimensional unsteady flow simulations. HEC-RAS also includes sediment transport/mobile bed
computations and water temperature modeling. HEC-RAS contains four one-dimensional river
analysis components for: (1) steady flow water surface profile computations; (2) unsteady flow
simulation; (3) movable boundary sediment transport computations; and (4) water quality
analysis. The HEC-RAS Mapper tool that is available from the HEC-RAS interface, calculates
inundation boundary and water depth maps. HEC-RAS in the HEC-WAT compute sequence is a
river hydraulic model that computes the river stages, water surface profiles, and levee breach
information that is used to compute consequences by HEC-FIA.

2.3.4 Consequences - HEC-FIA

HEC-FIA (http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-fia/) is a standalone software application
that evaluates consequences using either continuously observed or simulated stage hydrographs
(hydrograph-based) or depth grids (GIS-based). For a specified analysis, the software evaluates
urban and agricultural flood damage, area inundated, number of structures inundated, and
consequences. Consequences include economic and life loss. HEC-FIA also provides
information to flood managers and emergency managers for emergency response activities.

2.4 Other Software

The plug-in concept allows study teams to add to the HEC-WAT framework other application
software that may be required for a study. These additions can be made with minimal changes to
HEC-WAT. Examples of additional software applications to HEC-WAT in the past are listed
below:

2-3
Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

• URC (Upper Rule Curve) - software used by CENWD for developing upper rule curves
for storage reservoirs in the Columbia River Basin watershed.

• ECC (Energy Content Curve) - software used by CENWD for developing the guide
curves (target pool elevations) for storage reservoirs in the Columbia River Basin
watershed.

• Hydrologic Sampling - when an FRA compute is being performed, the hydrologic

sampling will generate system-wide flood event samples for a Monte Carlo simulation.
The data produced by the plug-in can take the form of hydrographs or hyetographs
spanning the life-cycle of the system, usually fifty years (USACE, CEIWR-HEC).

• Fragility Curve Sampling – when an FRA compute is being performed and the HEC-
RAS model alternative (plan) is setup for levee breaching, sampling of levee failure
elevations from fragility curves is accomplished through the fragility curve sampling.
This plug-in defines the probability and elevation of failure at each levee that is part of
the system. Sampling is conducted and the result is an evaluation of the full range of
levee failure possibilities for each pre-defined location in the entire system (USACE,
CEIWR-HEC).

• Performance Metrics - risk for USACE is the measure of the probability and severity of
undesirable consequences (ER 1105-2-101). From these analyses, the performance of a
system's reaction to a flood must be reported. Performance and economic metrics
describe the capability of the system to accommodate a single event (Assurance); the
full range of events (Annual Exceedance Probability and Long-Term Exceedance
Probability); and, the average or mean of all annual damage (Expected Annual Damage).
These metrics assist in communicating risk and the Performance Metrics plug-in
generates these metrics. Not all FRA studies require performance metrics (USACE,
CEIWR-HEC).

The following sections detail the additional CEIWR-HEC software that has also been added to
the HEC-WAT framework.

2.5 Tools
Tools are CEIWR-HEC software applications that are not part of the HEC-WAT compute
sequence but are used by a PDT team during a water resources study. HEC-DSSVue (HEC Data
Storage System Visual Utility Engine) is used to view the DSS files where each software
application stores data. HEC-SSP (Statistical Software Package) might be used for statistically
analyzing data in a water resources study.

2.5.1 HEC-DSSVue
HEC-DSSVue (http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-dssvue/) graphs and tabulates data
that is stored in a DSS file. Over sixty mathematical manipulation functions are available for
operations on datasets within a DSS file, as well as data entry functions, and several utility and
database maintenance functions. Data can be displayed from a selection of dataset names or
2-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework

from spatially referenced locations with a map background. Common data stored in a DSS file
includes time series data, such as hourly or daily flow, stages, precipitation, elevation, and
storage data; curve data, such as rating tables and frequency curves; gridded data, such as
NexRAD (Next-Generation Radar) data; and a variety of other data types.

2.5.2 HEC-SSP
HEC-SSP (http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-ssp/) allows a user to perform statistical
analyses of hydrologic data. The flood flow frequency analysis capability is based on Bulletin
17B, "Guidelines for Determining Flood Flow Frequency" (1982) and Bulletin 17C (England, et.
al., 2015). The analysis includes a generalized frequency analysis on not only flow data but other
hydrologic data as well, a volume frequency analysis on high and low flows, a duration analysis,
a coincident frequency analysis, and a balanced hydrograph analysis.

2.6 How Does It All Work

The HEC-WAT framework allows for the linked application of the software commonly used by
multi-disciplinary teams in a water resources study. Individual models are built for the study. For
example, a PDT is conducting a water resources study and is using the following software -
HEC-HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA. Section 2.6.1 describes the traditional
approach to conducting a water resources study. Section 2.6.2 describes conducting a water
resource study using HEC-WAT.

2.6.1 Traditional Approach

A PDT is conducting a water resources study and is using the following software - HEC-HMS,
HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA. The HEC-HMS model for the study is built and run,
which provides data about uncontrolled flows into and downstream of reservoirs. This
information is stored to a DSS file.

Next an HEC-ResSim model is built and some of the required input would be results from an
HEC-HMS model. The modeler will find the appropriate data in a DSS file and will link that
DSS file to the HEC-ResSim model. The HEC-ResSim model is used to generate regulated
flow/stages, flow hydrographs, or stage hydrographs which are stored to a DSS file.

The hydraulics model, built using HEC-RAS requires input that has been created by HEC-HMS
and HEC-ResSim. The modeler will find the appropriate data in a DSS file and will link that
DSS file to the HEC-RAS model. During an HEC-RAS compute, river stages, water surface
profiles, hydrographs (unsteady analysis), and levee breach information, is stored to a DSS file.
Also, RAS Mapper (a tool in HEC-RAS) calculates inundation boundary and water depth maps.

The last model required for this study is an HEC-FIA model which computes economic and life
loss consequences. Depending on input requirements, HEC-FIA could require data from all of
the upstream models. The modeler will need to find the appropriate data (possibly from multiple
DSS files) and link the HEC-FIA model to the DSS files. HEC-FIA will evaluate urban and
agricultural flood damages, area inundated, number of structures inundated, and life loss
consequences.
2-5
Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

With the traditional approach, there is typically insufficient coordination across the PDT as the
individual models are constructed and simulated. Lack of coordination among the PDT can make
data management of the study files difficult. Reporting and visualization of modeling results is
also difficult because it is likely the individual models would have different naming
conventions, could be built to different datum and extents, and may not provide results at
locations needed by each model.

2.6.2 HEC-WAT Approach

A PDT is conducting a water resources study and is using the following software - HEC-HMS,
HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA. An HEC-WAT study has been created with a
schematic built by the PDT that will be used by most of the models. The models are brought in to
the HEC-WAT study and all models files are imported or copied into the HEC-WAT data
management system that is based on the HEC-WAT study name.

Now that all the models have been imported, simulations are created. For each simulation, the
individual models are selected for a defined alternative. After the simulations are setup, "linking"
between the models will need to be defined. Linking is the process within the HEC-WAT
framework that allows the individual models to communicate with each other and how data is
handed-off from model to model. The majority of linking in HEC-WAT is accomplished through
DSS mapping and the use of simulation names. Additional linking capabilities include
inundation boundary maps, water depth maps, and other DSS files.

For example, the HEC-ResSim model requires information from an HEC-HMS model. From the
Model Linking Editor (Chapter 12), based on a particular simulation, the modeler will link the
models. From a table that lists the available locations that were defined by the HEC-ResSim
model, the modeler will select HEC-HMS as the model that has the information needed. Then
the modeler will select the appropriate location/results from the HEC-HMS simulation to pass to

the HEC-ResSim model. Once completed, the linkage will be saved for the HEC-ResSim model.
All of the software that was included within the HEC-WAT alternative simulation will need to
be linked. Once all of the linking has been completed the simulation can be run.

The first model is an HEC-HMS model. The model is run and unregulated flows are saved to a
DSS file (simulation.dss). The unregulated flow from HEC-HMS now becomes inflow to the
HEC-ResSim model. Because of the linking that was defined earlier in the process, HEC-HMS
information stored in simulation.dss is used by the HEC-ResSim model during the compute. At
the same time the HEC-ResSim model is saving peak regulated flows/stages, flow hydrographs
or stage hydrographs to the simulation.dss file. Once the HEC-ResSim model compute is
complete, the HEC-RAS model begins running using HEC-HMS and HEC-ResSim information
from the simulation.dss file. HEC-RAS is saving river stages, water surface profiles,
hydrographs (unsteady analysis), and levee breach information to the simulation.dss file. HEC-
RAS (through the RAS Mapper tool) is also creating inundation boundary and water depth maps,
which are saved in the HEC-WAT study data management structure.

After the HEC-RAS model compute is complete the HEC-FIA model compute begins. Based on
the linking, HEC-FIA will retrieve HEC-ResSim and/or HEC-RAS results from the

2-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework

simulation.dss file and also will use the inundation boundary maps generated by HEC-RAS.
Once the HEC-FIA model compute is complete the HEC-WAT simulation is complete and
results can be reviewed from within the HEC-WAT framework.

With the HEC-WAT approach there is flexibility in the performance of water resources studies,
the PDT is able to perform the study in a coordinated fashion, the data management of study files
is centrally located within the HEC-WAT directory structure, alternative analyses can be
performed easily and review of analyses results is from a central location.

2.7 Flood Risk Management

The HEC-WAT framework also includes a flood risk analysis (FRA) compute option (Figure
2.2), which provides tools that will help a planner address the issues faced during a USACE
planning study, and specifically the requirement for systems, watershed, and uncertainty
analyses. The FRA compute builds on the HEC-WAT framework to provide a convenient
method of implementing a Monte Carlo analysis across multiple models for flood risk
management. With the initial HEC-WAT framework providing all the initial software that would
meet the needs of a performing a system-wide analysis, the FRA compute option allows a user to
perform plan formulation or system performance analyses while incorporating risk and
uncertainty capabilities. Chapter 15 provides further details on the flood risk analysis compute
option.

Note: Not all the models shown in Figure 2.2 are required to run an FRA compute. An FRA
compute could be configured with the Hydrologic Sampler and HEC-HMS only in the compute
sequence. This shortened compute sequence could be used to simply evaluate how uncertainty
around meteorologic information might impact flow frequency at locations within a watershed.

Figure 2.2 HEC-WAT Framework - Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute Option

2-7
Chapter 2 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

2-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

CHAPTER 3

HEC-WAT Interface
The HEC-WAT main window (Figure 3.1) displays the framework for HEC-WAT that allows
users to enter data, review data, create alternatives, run simulations, and view results. The Title
Bar (Figure 3.1) displays the HEC-WAT study title. After a study is opened, the name of the
study will appear in the Title Bar.

Figure 3.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

3.1 Panes
The HEC-WAT main window (Figure 3.1) is laid out in panes that allow the user to view HEC-
WAT study components at the same time or to display different, yet simultaneous, views of
study components. The HEC-WAT main window has four main panes. The panes are:

Study Pane Provides an overview of items that have been defined for an HEC-WAT
study (Figure 3.2). Based on the view (see Section 3.2), the Study Pane can
display information about alternatives; simulations; analysis periods; models
that have been defined for the study; what map windows are actively open;
the available schematics; stream alignments; measures; common computation
points; and, impact areas.

3-1
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 3.2 Study Pane - Study View

The Study Pane contains a toolbar of action tools (Figure 3.3), that will
allow the user to create, edit, display in a map window, delete, and, compute
an item that has been selected in the Study Tree (Figure 3.2). For example,
in Figure 3.2 a simulation has been selected and the available action tools
(Figure 3.2) are edit, display in map window, delete, and compute the
simulation.

Figure 3.3 Action Toolbar

Content Pane This pane provides details on selected HEC-WAT components (Figure 3.3)
in the Study Pane (see Section 3.2). For example, in Figure 3.4, for a study
view, an HEC-WAT simulation has been selected – Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb_1986. The Content Pane displays the elements of that
simulation. Information includes the alternative; the analysis period; the
program order; the model alternatives that were run; the time window; the
directory where the results from the simulation were written; and, the status
of the simulation. For a map view, the Content Pane displays the layers
associated with the selected map windows listed in the Study Pane.

Figure 3.4 Content Pane - Study View

3-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

Desktop Pane The Desktop Pane (Figure 3.5) is where the different map windows that are
available from HEC-WAT will display. For example, in Figure 3.5, the
Desktop Pane contains a map window of a selected simulation and a map
window of a selected schematic. These two map windows provide the user
with a graphical representation of a simulation and a schematic.

Figure 3.5 Desktop Pane

Message Pane The Message Pane (Figure 3.6) contains messages that the HEC-WAT
software is providing for informational purposes as a simulation progresses.
The information in the Message Pane is a record of HEC-WAT software
activities, records the opening of a study, opening map windows, accessing
DSS, and many other HEC-WAT activities.

Figure 3.6 Message Pane

3.2 Tabs
HEC-WAT tabs provide different views of the available components
of a study and users can perform certain operations for a study from
the tabs. The tabs can change the layout of the menu bar and
available information in the Study and the Content panes can be changed. There are three tabs:

Study The default tab (Figure 3.2) which provides a view of the study components in a
tree (study tree) in the Study Pane. Also, from the Study Tree a user can
create, edit, and delete alternatives, analysis periods, and simulations. From the
Content Pane (Figure 3.4) the user can view detailed information about items
listed in the Study Tree. This view also affects the HEC-WAT menu bar (see
Section 3.3).

3-3
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

Maps This tab (Figure 3.7)

provides a view (maps view)
of the available map
windows currently active in
the Desktop Pane (Figure
3.5). The maps windows are
displayed by type in the
Currently Opened Maps
pane (Figure 3.7). In the
Map Layers Tree (Figure
3.7) information about the
layers for a selected map
window are displayed. From
the Map Layers Tree, the
user can turn map layers
on/off, adjust properties of
the map layers, and order the Figure 3.7 Maps Tab
map layers for viewing in the associated map window. When the user switches
to the Maps tab the HEC-WAT menu bar options will change.

Schematic From this tab (Figure 3.8),

the user is provided with a
view (a tree) in the Study
Pane of the map layers that
are available in the study,
schematics that have been
defined for the study, and
available components -
stream alignments, measures
(levees, reservoirs), common
computation points, and
impact areas that have been
defined for the study. Also,
from the study tree, the user
can create, edit, delete, and
modify the elements in the
Schematic View. In the
Content Pane portion
(Figure 3.8) further
information is provided
about elements in the
Schematic View. When the
user switches to the
Schematic View the HEC-
WAT menu bar options will
change. Figure 3.8 Schematic Tab

3-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

3.3 Menu Bar

The menu bar of HEC-WAT provides the user with many commands to perform various
activities/functions.

The File menu (Table 3.1) allows the user to perform study management functions such as
creating, opening, closing, and saving an HEC-WAT study. The File menu also provides
commands that will allow users to provide information about the study team; select the software
applications or tools (plug-ins) that are needed for the study; import a CWMS watershed; import
other HEC software application's model alternatives (HEC-HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS,
HEC-FIA); open recently viewed HEC-WAT studies; and, exit the HEC-WAT software. The
File menu is available in all HEC-WAT views.

Table 3.1 HEC-WAT File Menu Commands

Commands Description
New Study Creates a new HEC-WAT study; opens the Create New Study dialog box.
Open Study Open an HEC-WAT study; open the Open Study Browser.
Close Study Closes the current HEC-WAT study.
Save Study Saves the current HEC-WAT study.
Study Details Opens the Study Details dialog box, has four tabs – Map Properties, Contacts,
Model Info, Simulations, Plugins. Provides general information about the HEC-
WAT study; user can turn on/off map window grids; and, change background color.
The user can also add information about the study team; list the models and what
study team member is responsible for a model's development; information about
simulations; and, disable/enable the plug-ins that are needed for the HEC-WAT study.
Import Menu items for importing into HEC-WAT: CWMS Watershed ; FIA; HMS; ResSim;
RAS
Recent Studies List the studies (last five) that have been opened.
Exit Exit the HEC-WAT software.

From the Edit menu (Table 3.2) the HEC-WAT user can create/modify/edit items that are the
building blocks of an HEC-WAT study. A user can manipulate alternatives and simulations;
establish the program order for a study; link the individual models of a study; modify the look
and feel of the common computation point layers (CCPs); provide aliases for the defined stream
segments in the HEC-WAT study; available FRA editors; and, access editors from application
software that are part of a study. The FRA specific editors allow the user to skip models during
an FRA compute, and select variables to save to the simulation DSS file. The above description
is available when in the Study View, the Edit menu in the other views is limited.

Table 3.2 HEC-WAT Edit Menu Commands

Commands Description
Alternative and Simulation Manager Opens the Alternative and Simulation Manager dialog box.
Program Order Opens the Program Order dialog box.
Model Linking Editor Open the Model Linking Editor.
Edit Computation Point Layers Opens the Computation Point Layer Editor.
Stream Reach Alias Editor Opens the Stream Reach Alias Editor.
FRA Menu items for FRA compute: Model Skip Rules Editor;
Output Variable Editor

3-5
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

HMS From this menu item the user can open the HEC-HMS
software and also access individual HEC-HMS editors.
ResSim From this menu item the user can open the HEC-ResSim
software and also access individual HEC-ResSim editors.
RAS From this menu item the user can open the HEC-RAS
software and also access individual HEC-RAS editors.
FIA From this menu item the user can open the HEC-FIA
software and also access individual HEC-FIA editors.

The View menu (Table 3.3) is where an HEC-WAT user can setup the HEC-WAT main
window. The user can select which toolbars and panes to display and not display; set display
units for plotting and tabulating (English, SI); create and use layouts of the main window;
manage layouts; which common computation point layer to display (Default, Fragility Curve);
and, a report of the common computations point available for the study. The View menu is
available in all HEC-WAT views.

Table 3.3 HEC-WAT View Menu Commands

Commands Description
Toolbars From this menu item the user can toggles on/off the following
toolbars that are available in the HEC-WAT framework:
Standard, WAT Tools, Tools, Maps, Programs
Study Pane Menu item that toggles on/off the Study Pane in the HEC-WAT
main window.
Message Pane Menu item that toggles on/off the Message Pane in the HEC-
WAT main window.
Status Bar Menu item that toggles on/off the Status Bar in the HEC-WAT
main window.
Set Display Units The user can set the display units for the HEC-WAT study -
English (default) or SI.
Save Layout Opens the Create Layout dialog box.
Restore Layout This menu item provides a list of layouts that a user can choose
from.
Layout Manager Opens the Layout Manager dialog box.
Computation Point Layer From this menu item the user can choose which common
computation point layer is to be displayed - Default or Fragility
Curve. The user can also select both layers.
Computation Point Layer Report Opens the List of Computation Point Layers dialog box.

The Maps menu (Table 3.4), can be used by an HEC-WAT user to setup map layers and map
windows for an HEC-WAT study. The user can set spatial properties; zoom the active map
window out to its full extents; add and remove map layers; open a new map window; adjust the
active map window's properties; save the contents of the active map window as a graphics file;
and, synchronize the current open map windows. The user can also add an Internet map to the
active map window, and view the map windows in either the watershed coordinate system or the
coordinate system of the Internet map. Other available commands include the ability to print a
copy of the active map window in the Desktop Pane (Figure 3.5); import various schematic
elements (stream alignment, impact areas, reservoirs, levees, computation points) from a
shapefile; and, export various schematic elements (stream alignment, impacts areas, schematic
elements) to a shapefile. The Maps menu is available in all HEC-WAT views.

3-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

Table 3.4 HEC-WAT Maps Menu Commands

Commands Description
Default Map Properties Opens the Default Map Properties for dialog box.
Zoom to All Menu item zooms to the full extents of the current map window.
Add Map Layers Opens the Select Map to Add Browser.
Remove Map Layers Opens the Remove Map Layers from Study dialog box.
New Map Window Opens a map window that displays the map layers selected for the HEC-
WAT study.
Map Window Properties Opens the Map Window Settings dialog box.
Save Map Image Opens a Save Browser that allows the user to save the active map
window as a graphic (*.wmf, *.jpg, *.png).
Sync Map Windows Menu item syncs the open map windows in the Display Area.
Add Internet Map Menu item provides a list of available Internet maps that can be
included as a layer in the HEC-WAT study:
Google Street Map Bing Satellite Map
Google Satellite Map Open Street Map
Google Terrain Map No Internet Map
Display Map Coordinates Menu item allows the user to toggle on/off the map coordinates for the
map window. Can be based either on a selected Internet map or the
study projection (default).
Print Map Opens a Print window that allows the user to make a printed copy of
the active map window.
Import Menu item that allows the user to import schematic elements from
shapefiles: Stream Alignment, Computation Points, Reservoirs, Levees,
Impact Areas
Export Menu item that allows the user to export define schematic elements to
shapefiles: Stream Alignment, Impact Areas, Schematic Elements
(opens the Export Schematic Layers dialog box)

The Compute (Table 3.5) menu is used to compute individual HEC-WAT simulations; compute
multiple simulations; view a list of simulations for the watershed that have been computed;
compute the active simulation or compute the individual models of the active simulation; and,
view the compute log for the active simulation. For an HEC-WAT study with multiple FRA
simulations there is an item for simulation failures. The Compute menu is only available in the
Study View.

Table 3.5 HEC-WAT Compute Menu Commands

Commands Description
Compute "simulation name" Menu item that computes the active HEC-WAT simulation.
Compute Manager Opens the Compute Manager dialog box.
Recent Simulations Menu item that list HEC-WAT simulations that have been computed;
opens the Run FRA Simulation – "simulation name" dialog box.
Simulation Failures Opens the Compute Failures for "simulation name" dialog box;
FRA compute only
Compute Menu item that allows the user to compute the active simulation or
compute the individual models of the active simulation.
View Compute Log Opens the compute log for the active simulation dialog box.

3-7
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

An HEC-WAT simulation must be selected for the Results menu to be active. If a simulation
has not been selected, from the Results menu, click Select Simulation, the Select Simulations
Results dialog box will open (Figure 3.9). From the Simulation list, select the simulation that
will be active. Click OK, the Select Simulation Results dialog box will close (Figure 3.9), and
a simulation Map Window will display in the Desktop Pane. The user will now be able to
select results items from the Results menu.

Figure 3.9 Select Simulation Results Dialog Box

The Results menu can be different based on the simulation type – deterministic or an FRA
simulation. For a deterministic simulation (Table 3.6) the user can view the simulation.dss file
and view results available from the individual models that were part of the simulation.

Table 3.6 HEC-WAT Results Menu Commands – Deterministic Simulation

Commands Description
Simulation DSS File Opens a DSS Viewer dialog box.
HMS Menu items that lists available HEC-HMS reports.
ResSim Menu items that lists available HEC-ResSim reports.
RAS Menu items that lists available HEC-RAS reports.
FIA Menu items that lists available HEC-FIA reports.

When an FRA simulation (Table 3.7) has been run, the user selects what results will be shown
based on realization, lifecycle, and event; view the simulation.dss file for the FRA simulation;
view (Histogram, Scalar, or Frequency) the various model output variables that the user selected
(Output Variable Editor); results from the hydrologic sampling (if part of the FRA simulation);
results from the fragility curve sampling (if part of the FRA simulation); results from the
individual models that are part of the simulation; and, performance metric results (i.e., EAD,
AEP, LTEP) if part of the FRA simulation.

Table 3.7 HEC-WAT Results Menu Commands – FRA Simulation

Commands Description
Select Results (realization, lifecycle, event) Opens the Select Event Results dialog box.
Simulation DSS File Opens a DSS Viewer dialog box.
Output Variables User can view the various model output variables that
were selected; view either by the Histogram Viewer,
Scalar Viewer, or Frequency Viewer.
Hydrologic Sampling Available hydrologic sampling results are: Plot
Hydrographs, Plot Event Distribution, Plot
Maximum Flows, Correlation Table, Plot Shape Set
Frequency, Output Report
Fragility Curve Available fragility curve sampling results are: Plot,
Output Report

3-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

HMS Menu items that lists available HEC-HMS reports.

ResSim Menu items that lists available HEC-ResSim reports.
RAS Menu items that lists available HEC-RAS reports.
FIA Menu items that lists available HEC-FIA reports.
Performance Metrics Depending on what the user has selected in the
performance metrics alternatives, available results are: a
series of EAD plot/reports (Plot EAD, EAD Output
Report); AEP Histogram; LTEP Histogram;
Performance Metrics Output Report

The Tools menu (Table 3.8) provides access to DSS data (HEC-DSSVue); access to the
Statistical Software Package (HEC-SSP); provides options for HEC-WAT (Appendix F); view
the log for HEC-WAT, view logs for DSS files and the individual models that are part of a
simulation; monitor memory usage; what graphic elements HEC-WAT knows about from the
other applications; information on how the different model alternatives are used for the study;
setup for distributed computing; and, if a simulation is running slowly, setup compute timings to
locate where slow down is occurring. The Tools menu is available in all HEC-WAT views.

Table 3.8 HEC-WAT Tools Menu Commands

Commands Description
HEC-DSSVue Opens the HEC-DSSVue application.
HEC-SSP Opens the HEC-SSP application.
Options Open the Options dialog box.
Console Output Opens the Console Window which contains the HEC-WAT
log for the study.
Logs Opens the DSS.log dialog box and the log files for the
individual models that are part of simulation.
Memory Monitor Opens the Memory Monitor window.
Graphic Elements Opens the Graphic Element Report.
Model Alternative Usage Opens the Model Alternative Usage dialog box.
Simulation Compute Engine Manager Opens the Simulation Compute Engine Manager dialog
box.
Compute Timings Opens the Compute Timings dialog box.

The Window menu (Table 3.9) is where the HEC-WAT user can control the appearance of the
map windows in the Desktop Pane (Figure 3.1) of the HEC-WAT main window. The Window
menu is available in all HEC-WAT views.

Table 3.9 HEC-WAT Window Menu Commands

Commands Description
Tile Menu item that allows the user to organize all of the currently opened map
windows in either a vertical or horizontal tile.
Cascade Menu item that allows the user to place one map window on top of the next in a
cascading fashion.
Next Window Menu item that brings the next map window in the list of currently opened map
windows to the top.
Previous Window Menu item that brings the previous map window that was on top to the top.
Window Selector Menu item that provides a list of the currently opened map windows.
Window Menu item that lists the currently opened map windows.

3-9
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

The Help menu (Table 3.10) allows the user access to HEC-WAT documentation; install the
example study; connect to the HEC-WAT web page; connect to the HEC website; and, display
current version information about HEC-WAT.

Table 3.10 HEC-WAT Help Menu Commands

Commands Description
HEC-WAT Quick Start Guide Opens the HEC-WAT Quick Start Guide.
HEC-WAT User's Manual Opens the HEC-WAT User's Manual.
Hydrologic Sampling User's Manual Opens the Hydrologic Sampling User's Manual.
Install Example Study Opens the Select Folder for Installing Example Study
Browser.
HEC-WAT Website Goes to the HEC-WAT web page.
HEC Website Goes to the HEC website.
About HEC-WAT Opens the About Box for HEC-WAT.

3.4 Toolbar
The toolbar area of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 3.1) provides quick access to the most
frequently used options from the HEC-WAT menu bar. There are six available toolbars from the
main toolbar:

Standard There are three tools available from the Standard toolbar (Figure 3.10). The
tools allow the HEC-WAT user to open a study, close a study, and save a
study. These tools have the same function as items under the File menu (see
Table 3.1).

Figure 3.10 Standard Toolbar

WAT Tools There are several tools available from the WAT Tools toolbar (Figure 3.11).
The tools allow the user to set the program order for HEC-WAT; to
manipulate alternatives, analysis periods, and simulations; link the individual
model alternatives; set up rules to skip models during an HEC-WAT
compute; and, select results from the individual models (output variables)
that will be saved.

Figure 3.11 WAT Tools Toolbar

Tools The tools available from the Tools toolbar (Figure 3.12) are variable
depending on what plug-ins are loaded. Two tools that are always available
are: access DSS data (HEC-DSS) and the Statistical Software Package (HEC-
SSP).

Figure 3.12 Tools Toolbar

3-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

Maps There are four tools available from the Maps toolbar (Figure 3.13). The
tools allow the HEC-WAT user to control the appearance of map windows in
the Desktop Pane (Figure 3.5) - create a new map window; synchronize
active map windows; tile; and, cascade. These tools have the same function
as items under the Window menu (see Table 3.9).

Figure 3.13 Maps Toolbar

Programs There are usually four tools available from the Programs toolbar (Figure
3.14) that represent the individual software applications available from
HEC-WAT: HEC-HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA. These
tools allow the user to directly open the selected software application's user
interface from within HEC-WAT. The tools available from the Programs
toolbar are dependent on which plug-ins are loaded.

Figure 3.14 Programs Toolbar

To toggle these toolbars on and off, from the HEC-WAT menu bar, from the View menu, point
to Toolbars, and select the toolbar the user wishes to toggle on and off.

3.5 Map Windows

Map windows (Figure 3.15) are used to graphically display stream alignments, schematics,
alternatives, and simulations. From an alternative map window the user can make adjustments to
the stream alignment. A schematic map window allows the user to edit, modify, and delete
measures, CCPs, impact areas, and make adjustments to the stream alignment. The simulation
map window is where the HEC-WAT user can edit individual model parameters and view
results.

3.5.1 Open a Map Window

There are a couple of ways to open map windows: from the Study Pane (Figure 3.2), double-
click on a stream alignment, schematic, alternative, or simulation; or, from the shortcut menu of
a stream alignment, schematic, alternative, or simulation.

To open a map window by double-clicking:

1. From the Study and Schematic tabs the user can double-click on stream alignments,
schematics, alternatives, or simulations to open map windows in the Desktop Pane.

2. For example, in Figure 3.16, from the Study tab, double-click on the Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb1986 simulation. A map window will open and display the model
elements for the simulation Without Project Conditions-RR_Feb1986.
3-11
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 3.15 Map Window

Figure 3.16 Display Simulation Map Window from Study Pane

3-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

To open a map window from a shortcut menu:

1. From the Study and Schematic tabs, from the shortcut menus available for stream
alignments, schematics, alternatives, or simulations the Display in Map Window
command will open map windows in the Desktop Pane.

2. For example, in Figure 3.17, from the Schematics tab, right-click on Stream Alignment.
From the shortcut menu, click Display in Map Window and a map window will open
displaying the elements for the stream alignment.

Figure 3.17 Display Stream Alignment Map Window from Schematic Tab

3.5.2 New Map Window

HEC-WAT provides a mechanism for the user to build a map window. Instead of double-
clicking on a simulation, alternative or schematic the user can build a new map window.

To create a map window:

1. From the Maps menu, click New Map Window, in the Desktop Pane a Map Window
will open (Figure 3.18), with the map layers for the study loaded.

2. From the Study and Schematic tabs the user can drag-n-drop stream alignments,
schematics, alternatives, and simulations on to a new map window. For example, in
Figure 3.18, from the Schematic tab on the Study Pane, click on the Without Project
Conditions schematic. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the schematic to the
map window. Release the mouse key, and the schematic for the Without Project
Conditions is displayed in the new map window, and the map window will now be a
schematic map window (Figure 3.19).
3-13
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 3.18 New Map Window

Figure 3.19 New Map Window with Schematic Added

3-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

3. To add an alternative to the Map Window, from the Study tab, on the Study Pane, from
the Alternatives list, select an alternative. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the
alternative to the map window. The elements that make-up the selected alternative will
now display in the new map window and the map window will now be an alternative map
window.

4. The user can save the map window by saving the study. This means that the next time
the user opens the study, the map window created will display.

3.5.3 Tools
The Tools appear in a toolbar on the left side of a Map Window (Figure 3.18). The tools
change the appearance of the mouse, as well as the functionality of the mouse.

Pointer/Selector Tool

The Pointer/Selector Tool is available on all HEC-WAT map windows. For a Simulation Map
Window (Figure 3.16), with this tool selected the user can right-click on model graphical
elements from the schematic displayed in the Simulation Map Window and from the shortcut
menu view results or edit model elements. When a New Map Window (Figure 3.18), an
Alternative Map Window, or a Schematic Map Window (Figure 3.19) are selected, with this
tool selected the user can right-click on the map window and from the shortcut menu edit the
properties of the map window; zoom to the full extents; duplicate the map window; and, detach
the map window.

Zoom Tool

The Zoom Tool is available on all HEC-WAT map windows and allows the user to view data
closely. To zoom in, with the Zoom Tool selected, hold the mouse button down and outline the
area the user wants to enlarge. To zoom out, click the right mouse button (right-click). The
zoom out is done by a factor of two and positions the clicked location at the center of the display
area.

The Pan Tool is available on all HEC-WAT map windows and allows the user to move in map
windows while zoomed in.

All of the other tools available from a Schematic Map Window (Figure 3.19) are described in
Chapter 6, Sections 6.3 and 6.4

3.5.4 Zoom with Mouse

In HEC-WAT map windows, if the user has a mouse with a wheel, the user can zoom in and out
on a map window by manipulating the mouse wheel.

3-15
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

3.5.5 Detaching a Map Window from the Desktop Pane

When a map window is opened, the map window is confined to the Desktop Pane of the HEC-
WAT main window. When several map windows are open, the user can use commands (Section
3.2) to arrange the map windows, but being able to view several map windows for comparison
and presentation becomes difficult.

HEC-WAT allows the user to detach a map window from the Desktop Pane, and then the user
can manipulate the map window outside of the HEC-WAT framework. This gives the user the
ability to manipulate the map window as needed for better presentation and communication.
From a map window (Figure 3.19), in the bottom right corner, there is a Detach Map Window
tool , click the Detach Map Window tool, and the tool changes to , now the user can
move the map window anywhere in the available display area. Clicking the Detach Map
Window tool will return the map window to the Desktop Pane on the HEC-WAT main window.

3.5.6 Synchronous Map Windows

The user can synchronize multiple map windows, which allows a user to review items in one
map window and then be able to view the same area of the watershed in another map window.
Open multiple map windows (Figure 3.19), for this example, a Simulation Map Window and a
Schematic Map Window have been opened. From the HEC-WAT main window and from the
Window menu, select Tile, the map windows should appear side-by-side as displayed in Figure
3.20. Using the Zoom tool in the Simulation Map Window, zoom-in on an area of the
watershed. From the Maps menu, click Sync Map Windows. Now the two map window are
synchronized, so any action done by the user in one map window will also happen in the other
map windows.

Figure 3.20 Synchronized Map Windows

3-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

3.5.7 Properties of a Map Window

The properties of a map window basically are the geographic extents (Chapter 5, Section 5.2.5),
the zoom factor, the available map layers, the grid, and the background color. The Map
Window Settings dialog box (Figure 3.21) provides this information and allows the user to edit
some of the map window's properties.

Figure 3.21 Map Window Settings Dialog Box

To edit and view map window properties:

1. From the Maps menu, click Map Window Properties, the Map Window Settings
dialog box will open (Figure 3.21).

2. From the Current View Extents box, the user can view the extents of the map window
and the current zoom factor.

3. The map layers associated with the active map window are listed in the table on the Map
Window Settings dialog box (Figure 3.21). The user can remove a map layer from the
active map window by clicking in the Selected column. For example, in Figure 3.19, if
the user does not want to display the map layer associated with the impact areas, click the
cell in the Selected column associated with RR_ImpactAreas.shp. Click OK, the Map
Windows Settings dialog box will close (Figure 3.21), and the map layer will no longer
display in the active map window.

4. By clicking Draw Grid (Figure 3.21) the grid that is displayed in the active map window
is turned off and on.

5. The default background color for the active map window is white. By clicking
Background Color (Figure 3.21); a Background Color Chooser will open (Figure
3.22). From the Swatches Tab click on a color, click OK, the Background Color
3-17
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 3.22 Background Color Chooser

Chooser (Figure 3.22) will close. See Appendix F for further details on the color
chooser. From the Map Windows Setting dialog box (Figure 3.20), click OK. The
Map Windows Setting dialog box will close and the background color of the active map
window will change.

3.5.8 Create a Graphics File of a Map Window

HEC-WAT allows the user to save the active map window to a graphics file for inclusion in
reports and presentations. HEC-WAT has three possible formats: Windows Metafile (*.wmf),
JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg) and Portable Network Graphics (*.png) which is the default.

To create a graphics file of the active map window:

1. From the Maps menu, click Save Map Image, a Save Browser will open (Figure 3.23).

Figure 3.23 Save Browser

3-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Interface

2. Browse to a location where the file will be saved, in the File name box type a name.
From the Files of type list select the graphics file type to create.

3. Click Save, the Save Browser will close (Figure 3.23), and a file with the appropriate
extension will be created in the selected location. The file will contain an image of the
active map window.

3.5.9 Print a Map Window

From HEC-WAT a user can print the contents of the active map window. Make sure that the
correct map window that the user wants to print is active before executing the following steps:

1. From the Maps menu, click Print Map, a standard system Print dialog box will open
(Figure 3.24).

Figure 3.24 Print Dialog Box

2. Choose a printer from the Name list (list of system printers), set options for the selected
printer (click Properties), print to a file, select number of copies, and enter a print range.

3. Click OK, the Print dialog box will close (Figure 3.24) and output of the map window
will print on the selected printer. See Appendix N for further details on printing from the
HEC-WAT

3-19
Chapter 3 – HEC-WAT Framework HEC-WAT User's Manual

3-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

CHAPTER 4
Manage Studies
Data management by HEC-WAT is largely done behind the scenes. Files are automatically
created and named by HEC-WAT, and the active software application utilized within the HEC-
WAT framework, to store information. Simulation information is stored in various DSS files
(dependent on the type of simulation), while HEC-WAT general information, alternative
descriptions, and simulation descriptions are all stored in ASCII text files.

4.1 Manage Studies

In HEC-WAT, the set of files associated with a particular
water resources study is called a study. HEC-WAT creates a
directory (folder) with the study name specified, and stores all
the files associated with the study in that directory.

Commands available from the File menu (Figure 4.1) allow

the user to create a new study; open an existing study; close
the current study; save the current study; provide details about
a study; import models into a study; select a study from the
most recently opened studies; and, exit HEC-WAT.

4.1.1 Create a New Study Figure 4.1 File Menu Commands

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the File menu, click New Study. The Create
New Study dialog box (Figure 4.2) will open.

Figure 4.2 Create New Study Dialog Box

4-1
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. In the Study Name box (Figure 4.2), enter a name and in the Description box, enter a
description of the new study.

3. In the Directory box (Figure 4.2), either enter the name of the directory where to store
the HEC-WAT study, or click , and an Open browser (Figure 4.3) will open. Navigate
to the directory where the HEC-WAT study will be stored, click Open. The Open
browser (Figure 4.3) will close. On the Create New Study dialog box (Figure 4.2) in the
Directory box the location will display.

Figure 4.3 Open Browser

4. The Unit System (Figure 4.2) for the study defaults to English (which is correct for the
RussianRiver study). The other choice from the list is SI (metric).

5. Next, the projected coordinate system of the study needs to be set. A map projection is
required to view locations from a curved surface on to a flat map. HEC-WAT will re-
project on-the-fly, but it is a good idea to have all the layers in the same projection. From
the Create New Study dialog box (Figure 4.2), click Edit (by the Coordinate System
box), the Map Coordinate Information dialog box will open (Figure 4.4).

6. If the study has at least one associated map layer that has the correct projected coordinate
system for the study, that map layer can be used to set the projected coordinate system for
the study. From the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure 4.4), click Load
from file (lower left corner of dialog box); an Open browser (Figure 4.3) will open.
Browse to where the map layer containing the correct projection is stored. Click Open,
now the Map Coordinate Information dialog box will contain information about the
projected coordinate system (Figure 4.4). Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information
dialog box will close (Figure 4.4). Now on the Create New Study dialog box the
Coordinate System box (Figure 4.2) contains the name of the projected coordinate
system (i.e., USA_Continguous_Albers_Equal_Area_Conic_
USGS_version) for the study.

4-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

Figure 4.4 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box with Study Projection Information

7. When creating the study the user can add map layers that the PDT has gathered for
defining the study area. From the Create New Study dialog box (Figure 4.2), click Add
Map Layers. The Select Map to Add browser will open (Figure 4.5).

Figure 4.5 Select Map to Add Browser

4-3
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

To copy map layers to the study directory area, from the Select Map to Add browser
(Figure 4.5), select Create Copy. Browse to where the map layers are located. Select
the map layers for the study. Click Open, the Select Map to Add browser will close
(Figure 4.5). The Create New Study dialog box (Figure 4.6) appears.

Figure 4.6 Create New Study Dialog Box - Completed

8. HEC-WAT creates a default alternative - Without Project Conditions. If the user wants
the default alternative to have a different name, several choices are available, including
Other which allows the user to name the default alternative.

9. Click OK, the Create New Study dialog box will close (Figure 4.5). The HEC-WAT
main window will now have the name of the study (i.e., RussianRiver) on the title bar
(Figure 4.7). A Schematic Map Window opens, which contains the map layers that
were added to the study in Step 7.

10. An HEC-WAT study has been created.

4.1.2 Open an Existing Study

There are two ways to open existing studies in HEC-WAT. One way is to open a study by
selecting it from the list of recently opened studies. On the File menu (Figure 4.1), point to
Recent Studies, from the list of the five most recently opened studies, click on the name of the
study to open, and HEC-WAT will automatically load the selected study. The second way to
open an existing study is described below.

To open an existing study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 4.7), from the File menu, click Open Study,
an Open Study browser (Figure 4.8) will open.

4-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

Figure 4.7 HEC-WAT Main Window - Maps Tab

Figure 4.8 Open Study Browser

2. From the Open Study browser (Figure 4.8), browse to the location of an existing HEC-
WAT study. By default, HEC-WAT is looking for a file with the extension *.sty.

3. Select the study name, click Open, the Open Study browser will close (Figure 4.8), and
the selected study will open in the HEC-WAT main window.

4-5
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

4.1.3 Close a Study

To close an active study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 4.7), from the File menu, click Close Study.

2. HEC-WAT keeps track of changes being made to a study by the major study components
– alternatives, analysis periods, and simulations. HEC-WAT will save the study, which
includes all the files associated with the individual software applications that are part of
the study (e.g., HEC-RAS, HEC-FIA).

4.1.4 Save a Study

To save a study, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 4.7), from the File menu (Figure
4.1), click Save Study. HEC-WAT will save the study, which includes all the files associated
with the individual software applications that are part of the study (e.g., HEC-RAS, HEC-FIA).

4.1.5 Study Details

One of the objectives of HEC-WAT is to provide information regarding the status of the study to
the manager or any other member of the PDT. Some of the information needs to be entered by
the study team. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 4.7), from the File menu (Figure
4.1), click Study Details, the Study Details dialog box (Figure 4.9) will open. This dialog box
has five tabs – Map Properties, Contacts, Model Info, Simulations, and Plugins.

Figure 4.9 Study Details Dialog Box – Map Properties Tab

4-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

The Study Details dialog box (Figure 4.9) displays the name of the study; the study description
(which the user can edit); location of the study file (*.sty); the selected unit system; the selected
coordinate system; the user name of the team member that created the study; and, the date and
time the study was created.

Map Properties
From the Map Properties worksheet, the user can set the synchronizing of map windows;
choose to have or not have a grid display on map windows (default is to have a grid); and, set the
background color of map windows (default is white). The Map Properties worksheet is the
default tab for the Study Details dialog box (Figure 4.9).

Contacts
The Contacts worksheet is where information regarding the study team is entered (Figure 4.10).
Information includes the team member's name; the user name of the team member; the team
member's responsibility on the study team; phone number; office symbol; and, the assignment
(i.e., specific model, creation of stream alignment, etc.) given to the team member.

Figure 4.10 Study Details Dialog Box – Contacts Tab

Model Info
Information from the Model Info worksheet (Figure 4.11) is related to the model alternatives
that have been defined for a study. HEC-WAT knows all model alternatives that have been
identified and to what software applications each alternative belongs. From the information
4-7
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 4.11 Study Details Dialog Box – Model Info Tab

identified on the Contacts worksheet (Figure 4.10), from the Model Info worksheet a user can
now identify the team member responsible for an individual model alternative; what team
member imported the model alternative; the date the model alternative was imported; what team
member modified the model alternative; the date the model alternative was modified; and, the
description of the model alternative.

If the model has a description, the Description column will display the description of the model
alternative. If there is no description, click in a Description cell, the Edit Description for
"model alternative" dialog box will open (Figure 4.12). Enter a description, click OK. The Edit
Description for "model alternative" dialog box will close and the entered description will appear
in the selected Description cell.

Figure 4.12 Edit Description for "model alternative" Dialog Box

4-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

Simulations
From the Simulations worksheet (Figure 4.13) a user can view information regarding
simulations. The information on this worksheet is gathered by HEC-WAT based on dates and
times, and the user name which was entered on the Contacts worksheet (Figure 4.10).

Figure 4.13 Study Details Dialog Box – Simulations Tab

Plugins
From the Plugins worksheet (Figure 4.14) the user can define what plug-ins are being used by
the study. By enabling or disabling the plug-ins listed, the user will define what plug-ins will be
used for the active study.

Figure 4.14 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab

4-9
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

4.2 Study Directories and Files

Figure 4.15 shows an example of how HEC-WAT organizes the directories and files that it
creates in the study directory. In this example, the study directory is /RussianRiver. As data is
entered, other files and subdirectories are created. Table 4.1 describes each directory and file
that is shown in Figure 4.15.

Figure 4.15 Example HEC-WAT Study Directory Structure

4-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

Table 4.1 Example HEC-WAT Directories and Files

File or Directory Name Contents
Study folder that is created when a user creates a new
RussianRiver
study (Section 4.1.1).
RussianRiver.sty ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created. Contains the name and description of the
RussianRiver.sty.bak
study, what user created the study, map coordinate
information, and references to the stream alignment
and the schematic data. The *.bak file is an automatic
backup file of the *.sty file.
ASCII text file created by HEC-ResSim when an HEC-
RussianRiver.wksp
WAT study is created. The file is specifically used by
RussianRiver.wksp.bak the HEC-ResSim model. Contains the name and
description of the study, location of stream alignment
file, and location of any map layers that have been
added to the study. The *.bak file is an automatic
backup file of the *.wksp file.
RussianRiver.projection ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created. Contains the projection information for an
RussianRiver.projection.bak
HEC-WAT study that was identified in the Map
Coordinate Information dialog box. The *.bak file is
an automatic backup file of the *.projection file.
RussianRiver.log ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created. Contains the basic information
RussianRiver.log.bak
creation/modification of a study. The *.bak file is an
automatic backup file of the *.log file.
Default.ag
ASCIISerializer text file created by HEC-WAT when a
study is created. Contains information for a default
Default.ag.bak analysis group. The *.bak file is an automatic backup
file of the *.ag file.
stream.align ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created. Contains the name, description, and other
stream.align.bak information that define the stream alignment (stream
stream.prj nodes, vertex points, stream element(s), etc.). The
*.bak file is an automatic backup file of the *.sty file.
The stream.prj file (created when importing a stream
alignment from a shapefile) contains the projection
information for the stream alignment.
Without_Project_Conditions.walt ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created; contains information on the default alternative.
Without_Project_Conditions.walt.bak Contains the name, associated stream alignment, and
other information. The *.bak file is an automatic
backup file of the *.walt file.
Without_Project_Conditions.sch
An XML file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created; contains information on the schematic
Without_Project_Conditions.sch.bak associated with an alternative. The *.bak file is an
automatic backup file of the *.walt file.
contacts.xml
An XML file created by HEC-WAT when information
is entered on the Contacts worksheet from the Study
contact.xml.bak Details dialog box. Contains information on the study
team that is entered: team member names, user name
of team member, software responsibility, phone
number, office assignment, and, team member
assignment. The *.bak file is an automatic backup file
of the *.xml file.

4-11
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

File or Directory Name Contents

modelAltInfo.xml An XML file created by HEC-WAT when information
is entered on the Model Info worksheet from the
modelAltInfo.xml.bak Study Details dialog box. Contains information on the
study team that can be linked to the individual model
alternatives. Information includes: team member
responsible for model alternative, who imported the
model alternative, date model alternative was imported,
team member who modified the model alternative, date
the model alternative was modified, and the description
of the model alternative. The *.bak file is an automatic
backup file of the *.xml file.
fia
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created. This folder contains all HEC-FIA model files.
hms
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created. This folder contains all HEC-HMS model
files.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
layouts
created. This folder contains the saved layouts for the
WAT Desktop Pane. Layouts also contain
information in regards to the divider locations; what
has been expanded and selected in the various panes;
and, other information.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
maps
created. Used to store map layers and GIS coverages
associated with a study.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
ras
created. This folder contains all HEC-RAS model
files.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
rss
created. This folder contains all HEC-ResSim model
files.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
ssp
created. This folder contains all HEC-SSP model files.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
w2
created. This folder contains all CEQUAL-W2 model
files.
Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
shared
created. This folder contains the default HEC-WAT
program order; contains the file that has information
from the Stream Reach Alias Editor; and, any other
files that might be shared for the study.
An XML file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
watProgramOrder.xml
created and stored in the shared folder. Contains
watProgramOrder.xml.bak information on the program order that can be defined
by HEC-WAT. Initially, contains the default program
order: HEC-HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and
HEC-FIA. The *.bak file is an automatic backup file
of the *.xml file.
StreamAlignAliasMgr.sam An XML file created by HEC-WAT when a study is
created and stored in the shared folder. Contains
StreamAlignAliasMgr.sam.bak information from the Stream Reach Alias Editor.
The *.bak file is an automatic backup file of the *.sam
file.

4-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 4 – Manage Studies

File or Directory Name Contents

Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when a study is
study
created. This folder contains the information created
from the Schematic Tab. Contains database files
(*.dbf, *.dbt, *.mdx) that contain the data when
creating measures, impact areas, and common
computation points.
Sub-folder created when an HEC-WAT simulation
runs
(deterministic or FRA) is computed.
wat Sub-folder created by HEC-WAT when either an
alternative, analysis period, or simulation is created.
Contains the sub-folders for alternatives, analysis
periods, and simulations.
Sub-folder of the wat folder that contains the
alts
information about HEC-WAT alternatives that have
been created for the study.
AlternativeA.walt
ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when an
alternative is created and stored in the alts folder.
AlternativeA.walt.bak Contains information on an HEC-WAT alternative.
Information includes: the name, associated stream
alignment, and other information. The *.bak file is an
automatic backup file of the *.walt file.
Sub-folder of the wat folder that contains the
aps
information about HEC-WAT analysis periods that
have been created for the study.
RR_1986.wap ASCII text file created by HEC-WAT when an analysis
period is created and stored in the aps folder. Contains
RR_1986_wap.bak information on an HEC-WAT analysis period.
Information includes: the name, start date and time;
and the end date and time. The *.bak file is an
automatic backup file of the *.wap file.
Sub-folder of the wat folder that contains the
sims
information about HEC-WAT simulations that have
been created for the study.
An XML file created by HEC-WAT when a simulation
Without_Project_Conditions-RR_1986.simulation
is created and stored in the sims folder. Contains
Without_Project_Conditions-RR_1986.simulation.bak information on an HEC-WAT simulation. Information
includes: the name; name of the associated analysis
period; and the names of the selected model
alternatives. The *.bak file is an automatic backup file
of the *.simulation file.

4.3 Automatic Backup Files

As elements are added to the study, such as a stream alignment, map layers, and data; the files
and directories displayed in Figure 4.15 are created, along with automatic backup files. For
example, a RussianRiver.sty file and a RussianRiver.sty.bak file are created when the study is
created. If a map layer is added for example, the .bak file would not have any reference to the
added map layer, the backup file reflects the state previous to the current changes. So every time
the study is saved, the *.bak file is updated to the previous state.

Automatic backup files are created for all study files, alternative files, analysis period files,
simulation files, and results files. DSS files are not automatically backed up. Since the .bak file
reflects the previous state of that file, the user can go back to the previous state by eliminating
4-13
Chapter 4 – Manage Studies HEC-WAT User's Manual

the .bak extension. This would allow the information for that previous state to become the
current state. The overall effect would be "undoing" all changes the user made before saving the
HEC-WAT study.

For example, if for some reason the stream.align file became corrupt, the user could retrieve the
stream alignment from the stream.align.bak file. The user would need to close HEC-WAT,
browse to the correct HEC-WAT study directory, delete the stream.align file, and rename the
stream.align.bak file to stream.align. Open HEC-WAT, open the correct HEC-WAT study, and
the stream alignment will be visible again.

4-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

CHAPTER 5

GIS Layers
In the construction of a study, the PDT meets to determine what data or models already exist and
what data is yet to be collected and what models need to be constructed. The team must decide
on the study boundaries, identify gage locations, determine sub-basin delineations, damage area
centers (impact areas), locations of measures (reservoirs, levees, etc.), and points (locations)
where models could share data (common computation points). From these discussion the PDT
must decide on the projected coordinate system for the study area and create layers based on the
projection. HEC-WAT will set the projection for the HEC-WAT study based on the projection
defined by the user.

5.1 Concept of Layers

There are several types of layers available in the HEC-WAT software. The Stream Alignment
Layer is specifically for the stream alignment. Map layers (GIS layers) are used in HEC-WAT
to visualize a system layout and or a flood inundation map. Map layers identify the projection for
the HEC-WAT study. HEC-WAT creates primary layers when a stream alignment, schematic,
alternatives and a simulation are created. This chapter covers map and primary layers.

5.2 Map Layers

To help visualize a study area, HEC-WAT has the capability to display maps of study features.
Sub-basin boundaries, watershed boundary, and stream gage locations, are just a few of the
digital maps of study features that can be displayed in HEC-WAT.

5.2.1 Map Layer Formats

Digital maps (GIS layers) are referred to as map layers in HEC-WAT. When a map layer is
included in a watershed, the software displays the map layer as GIS features, points, lines, and
polygons. In Version 1.0, the map layers are used for visual purposes only. In future versions,
depending on the type of map layer, the program will interact with map layers as data sources.
The map layer formats that HEC-WAT can display are listed in Table 5.1.

USGS Digital Line Graph (.dlg)

U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) Digital Line Graphs (DLG) are created from two sources using
manual and automated digitizing methods. The two sources are aerial photographs or
cartographic sources. DLG files are vector representations of the data. When HEC-WAT
interacts with a .dlg file a .dlgbin file is automatically generated for use.

5-1
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Table 5.1 Map Layer Formats Supported by HEC-WAT

Common Filename
Description Extension
USGS digital line graph .dlg
AutoCAD® DXF .dxf
Arc Shapefile .shp
GeoTIFF .tif
Raster image .img, .jpg, .gif
USGS DEM .dem
ArcInfo® DEM .asc
SMRMP .smrmp
Ascii NetTin *.net
Mr SID *.sid
Virtual Format *.vrt
Open Street Maps *.osm

AutoCAD® DXF (.dxf)

A Drawing Interchange File (.dxf) is created by a Computer-Aided Design (CAD) package,
AutoCAD®. This format is a tagged data representation of an AutoCad® drawing file. Tagged
data is where each data element is preceded by a group code. A group code is an integer
indicating the type of data element. The file created is a vector-based graphic. The DXF format
is commonly used for data export from other CAD and GIS programs.

Arc Shapefile (.shp)

Shapefiles are the native data structure for the ArcGIS® program. Shapefiles store non-
topological geometry and attribute information for the spatial features of a dataset. Usually there
are four files associated with a shapefile: *.dbf, *.shp, *.prj, and *.shx. The .shp file contains the
shapes (point, polylines, or polygons) that are displayed in the layer. Each shape has a record in
the .dbf file containing descriptive data called "attributes." The .prj file contains the projection
information for the shapefile. The .shx file contains an index that links each shape to its record in
the .dbf file. For more information on shapefiles, see the ESRI Shapefile Technical Description
available here: http://www.esri.com/library/whitepapers/pdfs/shapefile.pdf.

GeoTIFF (.tif)
A metadata standard which allows geo-referencing information to be embedded into a TIF
(Tagged Image File Format) file. The added metadata could be map projection datums,
coordinate systems, and any other information that will establish spatial references. A TIF file
stores raster graphic images and data within a single file.

5-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

Raster Image
The raster image formats supported by HEC-WAT are JPEG format (*.jpg) and Graphics
Interchange Format (*.gif). To access these file types, an *.img (ASCII text) file must be created
by the user outside of HEC-WAT. The file needs to contain the information shown in Figure
5.1, and this information needs to match the easting and northing parameters stated in the Map
Default Properties for StudyName dialog box (Section 5.2.5).

Image West=2051443. These are image boundaries

Image North=355443. that are determined by the user
Image East=2054925.6 and usually figured out by using
Image South=351947.4 a program like ArcInfo®.

Image URL = path and filename of raster image

(i.e., maps/lh_2m.gif)

Figure 5.1 Raster Image File

USGS DEM (.dem)

USGS publishes the file format USGS DEM (as of 2006 USGS no longer directly distributes
elevation data in the DEM format). A raster file format, .dem files usually contain terrain
elevations, but the file format can be used for representing any surface. The format, published
by the USGS, allows internal documentation of coordinate system, date of publication, etc.
These values are referenced horizontally, either to a Universal Transverse Mecator (UTM)
projection or to a geographic coordinate system.

ArcInfo® DEM (.asc)

An ArcInfo® DEM file is an ASCII file format representation of a grid generated by ArcInfo®.
The file consists of keywords followed by values defining the number of columns, number of
rows, lower left corner, cell size, no data value, and each cell value.

SMRMP (.smrmp)
The Segmented Multi-Resolution Multi-Parameter (SMRMP) file was created to incorporate
gridded data (namely, digital terrain grids, inundation depth grids, and arrival time grids) more
efficiently in HEC-FIA. When users add terrain and inundation data, the user is prompted to
convert to SMRMP format. The conversion is not required, but is recommended for higher
efficiency. The SMRMP file type is not recommended, and is only being maintained for existing
HEC-WAT studies which have used the SMRMP format. A conversion tool to export to any
another file format is not available.

5-3
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

ASCII NetTin (.net)

An ASCII NetTin is an ASCII file format used to represent a triangulated irregular network
(TIN). TIN data are stored in a simple format that defines the nodes, edges, and triangles
contained in the TIN. This format is common for transferring TIN data between software.

LizardTech® MrSID® (.sid)

The MrSID® (multi-resolution seamless image database) is a proprietary geo-referenced image
file format developed by LizardTech® for use with Geographic Information Systems (GIS). This
format compresses large raster image files like aerial photographs or satellite imagery for easier
viewing. Some MrSID images contain geo-referencing and positioning information and can be
placed in the watershed.

Virtual Format (.vrt)

The .vrt format is a format driver for GDAL (Geospatial Data Abstraction Library) and allows
for a virtual GDAL dataset to be composed of other GDAL datasets. The primary use of this
format is to group together a series of grids that should be associated together. This file format
allows multiple depth grids for the same event to create a mosaic single grid. Relative file paths
are saved in an XML format, as well as a histogram describing the frequency of cell values
across all grids within the vrt.

Open Street Maps (.osm)

An XML file created to store user preferences regarding streaming services. This file is
generated by HEC-WAT and is stored in the study's maps folder. This file should not be edited
by the user.

5.2.2 Add Map Layers

When a map layer is added to a study, HEC-WAT reads the coordinates of points, lines, and
polygons on the map layer and resets the geographic extents of the study to the smallest rectangle
that will contain all objects in a map layer. A map projection uses mathematical models that
transform spherical coordinates (latitude, longitude) to planar coordinates in a map projection
(X- and Y-coordinates). Data is projected onto a flat plane (surface) that can be converted
without stretching, and features will be referenced by a planar coordinate system. If a map layer
is not in the same projection as the study, HEC-WAT can "on-the-fly" re-project the map layer in
question.

To add map layers:

1. From the Maps menu, click Add Map Layers, the Select Map to Add browser will
open (Figure 5.2).

5-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

Figure 5.2 Select Map to Add Browser

2. The browser defaults to the study directory, but map layers can be retrieved from
anywhere on a computer. From the study directory is a maps directory, which is the
location where it is recommended that users copy various map layers. Using the project's
maps directory ensures the map layers are maintained within the project directory when
the project is opened on other computers.

3. To copy the selected map layer to the study directory, click Create Copy on the Select
Map to Add browser (Figure 5.2).

4. From the Select Map to Add browser, select the desired map layer format from the Files
of type list, locate the file of the desired map layer format, select filename, and click
Open. The Select Map to Add browser will close (Figure 5.2) and the map layer will
appear in the active map window. Also, if the user has chosen to have HEC-WAT copy
the map layer to the study directory, under the maps folder, the map layer file (s) will
appear.

5. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 5.3), select the Maps tab, there will now be
an entry for the added map layers.

5.2.3 Remove Map Layers

To remove map layers:

1. From the Maps menu, click Remove Map Layers.

2. The Remove Map Layers from Study dialog box will open (Figure 5.4).
5-5
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 5.3 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab

Figure 5.4 Remove Map Layers from Study Dialog Box

3. From the Existing box there is list of map layers, select a map layer by clicking on the
name.

4. In the Remove box, the name of the selected map layer will appear in the Name box.

5. Click Remove, a warning message will appear, asking the user if you really want to
remove the map layer from the study, click Yes.

5-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

6. The warning message will close, the Remove Map Layers from Study dialog box
(Figure 5.4) will close, and the map layer will be eliminated from the active map window.

5.2.4 Shortcut Menu for Map Layers

The shortcut menu (Figure 5.5) for map layers is accessed by right-clicking on any map layer
that is listed in the Maps tab (Figure 5.3). This list of map layers refers to the currently active
map window that is open in the Desktop Pane (Figure 5.3). The shortcut menu provides several
ways to manipulate map layers. This ability to manipulate depends on the type of map layer
(Figure 5.5), since HEC-WAT does not provide the same capabilities to all recognized map layer
formats (Table 5.1). The available commands are:

Figure 5.5 Map Layer Shortcut Menu

Expand – expands the selected map layer's tree; the tree provides information on the
available elements of a map layer, and details provided are based on what HEC-WAT
recognizes for the individual map layer format.

Collapse – collapses the selected map layer's tree; the tree provides information on the
available elements of a map layer, and details provided are based on what HEC-WAT
recognizes for the individual map layer format.

Move to Top – moves the selected map layer to the top of the tree

Move Up – moves the selected map layer up the tree one position

Move Down – moves the selected map layer down the tree one position

Move to Bottom – moves the active map layer to the bottom of the tree

5-7
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Show Legend – displays the legend for the active map layer in the tree structure.

Change Label – allows the user to change the label of the map layer in the Maps tab. This
does not change the filename of the map layer.

Properties – displays the properties of the selected map layer. See Appendix D for further
details on the available map layer editors.

Set Scale for Zoom-in – set the zoom-in visualization scale for the selected map layer

Set Scale for Zoom-out – set the zoom-out visualization scale for the selected map layer

Remove Scale Factors – disable or clear all scale settings for the selected map layer

Copy To – allows the user to make a copy of the Internet Map layer. A Save browser will
open (Figure 5.6), browse to the location on the computer where the map layer is to be
copied. Click Save, the Save browser will close and the file (*.osm) that contains the
Internet Map layer is saved.

Figure 5.6 Save Browser

Attributes Table – if the selected map layer is a shapefile, click Attributes Table, the
Attributes Table dialog box will open (Figure 5.7). Each shapefile contains a separate file
that provides information on the attributes of that shape file. The Attributes Table dialog
box provides the user with the attributes of the selected map layer (shapefile).

5.2.5 Geographic Reference for Map Layers

Map projections have been developed because the true image of places on earth would have to be
a three-dimensional solid (spherical globes). The sets of mathematical models that transform
spherical coordinates (latitude, longitude) to planar coordinates are contained within a map
5-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

Figure 5.7 Attributes Table Dialog Box

projection (X- and Y-coordinates). Data is projected onto a flat plane (surface) that can be
converted without stretching, and features will be referenced by a planar coordinate system. The
x-coordinate is referred to as "easting" and the y-coordinate is referred to as "northing". The user
can select the extent of this grid, the dimensions of the grid's cells, the units of measurement of
the grid, and even the location of the grid's origin. Because of this flexibility, a user can specify
and use virtually any grid coordinates convenient for water resources studies. To do so:

1. From the Maps menu, click Default Map Properties, the Map Default Properties for
StudyName dialog box will open (Figure 5.8). By default, the Map Extents tab is
selected.

Figure 5.8 Map Default Properties for StudyName Dialog Box

5-9
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The information in the Map Extents tab includes:

● Coordinate System. This box identifies the established coordinate system for a
study. To view the coordinate system, click View, and the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure 5.9) will open.

● Extents – Easting Minimum, Maximum, Northing Minimum, and Maximum.

These values (Figure 5.8) indicate the location of the left, right, bottom and top
borders (respectively) of the grid in the map window.

● Grow to Map Extents. When selected, HEC-WAT automatically sets the

geographic extents to define the smallest rectangle that encompasses all the objects in
the study.

Figure 5.9 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box

● Set Map Extents to Display. This will set the limits of the map window. If the user
zooms in on an area, and clicks Set Map Extents to Display (Figure 5.8), the Map
Default Properties for StudyName dialog box (Figure 5.8) extents will change to the
zoomed area.

Note that the geographic extents of map layers must be selected carefully to ensure that the entire
study is included. Further, the extents specified and the coordinate system used must be
consistent with the projection of the study.

5.2.6 Set Visualization Scales - Map Layer

The easy way to set the visualization scale for map layers is outlined in the following steps:

5-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

1. From a map window, the user can zoom-in to the point at which a map layer becomes
visible.

2. From the Maps tab, in the Content Pane, right-click on the map layer. From the
shortcut menu, click Set Scale for Zoom-in, the visualization scale is set automatically
for that map layer.

3. From the map window zoom-out, the selected map layer no longer displays. Inversely, if
the user wants the map layer to become visible as the user zooms-out, from the shortcut
menu click Set Scale for Zoom-out.

4. Visualization scale settings can be cleared or disabled for a map layer. From the shortcut
menu, click Remove Scale Factors, the current visualization scale for that particular map
layer is cleared.

5.3 Primary Layers

HEC-WAT creates primary layers when a user creates a stream alignment, schematics,
alternatives, and simulations. These primary layers appear in the Maps tab. Depending on
which type of map window that is open, the user will be able to access different primary layers.

5.3.1 Stream Alignment Layer

The Stream Alignment Layer contains the stream alignment that was imported or digitized and
is visible on the active map window. Access for the Stream Alignment Layer is from the Maps
tab, and is available from all map window types. This layer has sub-layers for each stream
alignment element, and can be accessed by expanding the tree for the Stream Alignment Layer
(Figure 5.10). To expand the tree, click the plus sign; to collapse the tree, click the minus sign.

Figure 5.10 Maps Tab - Stream Alignment Layer

When the tree is expanded, different sub-layers (Figure 5.10) for the stream alignment layer are
visible. There are three – Stream Junctions, Streams, and Stream Nodes. A stream junction
is where two streams connect, and is represented by a bright green circle on the stream
alignment. A stream node is a location (a dark green circle) on a stream that provides stream
stationing information. By default, HEC-WAT creates two automatically, and a user can add
stream nodes to a stream. A stream in a stream alignment is a multi-segmented line with

5-11
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

beginning and ending stream nodes. If the user does not want to see the stream junctions for the
entire stream alignment, clear Stream Junctions, and the stream junctions no longer are visible
in the active map window. To view the stream junctions, click Stream Junctions. This
procedure applies to all of the sub-layers.

Shortcut Menu
The shortcut menu (Figure 5.11) for the Stream Alignment Layer is accessed by right-clicking
on the stream alignment layer in the Maps tab (Figure 5.10). The shortcut menu provides
several ways to manipulate the Stream Alignment Layer. The available commands are:

Figure 5.11 Stream Alignment Layer – Shortcut Menu

Expand – expands the Stream Alignment Layer's tree; the tree provides information on
the available elements of the stream alignment.

Collapse – collapses the Stream Alignment Layer's tree; the tree provides information on
the available elements of the stream alignment.

Move to Top – moves the Stream Alignment Layer to the top of the tree

Move Up – moves the Stream Alignment Layer up the tree one position

Move Down – moves the Stream Alignment Layer down the tree one position

Move to Bottom – moves the Stream Alignment Layer to the bottom of the tree

Properties – opens the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure 5.12) which
allows the user to edit properties of the elements that are part of the Stream Alignment
Layer.

5-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

Figure 5.12 Stream Alignment Properties Dialog Box

Import – allows the user to import a stream alignment from a shapefile that has already
been added to the project. From the Import Stream Alignment dialog box (Figure 5.13),
the user will select a shapefile (polyline) and then import that shapefile, creating a stream
alignment.

Export – allows the user to export the stream alignment to a shapefile. A Save browser
will open (Figure 5.6), browse to the location on the computer where the shapefile is to be
copied. Click Save, the Save browser will close and a shapefile of the stream alignment
will be saved.

Stream Alignment Properties

For the Stream Alignment Layer, the user can configure the appearance of the streams and their
labels, configure the appearance of the stream junctions and stream nodes, and set the
visualization scaling for the Stream Alignment Layer. To configure these properties, from the
Maps tab, right-click on Stream Alignment. From the shortcut menu (Figure 5.11), click
Properties, and the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box will open (Figure 5.12).

5-13
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 5.13 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box

Streams
To change the appearance of all streams in the map window:
1. The user can set the width of the lines that represent the streams in the stream alignment
from the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure 5.12) from the Stream
Width list (Figure 5.14).

Figure 5.14 Stream Alignment Properties - Streams

2. The color of the lines that represent the streams in the stream alignment can be changed
from the Stream Color list (Figure 5.14). The default color is orange, there are several
colors to choose from, plus the user has the ability to create colors. From the Stream
Color list, click Custom, the Choose A Color dialog box (Figure 5.15) will open. See
Appendix E for further details on the color chooser.

5-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

Figure 5.15 Choose A Color Dialog Box

3. Either changing the width or color of the streams, can be previewed in the example to the
right of the Edit Properties box (Figure 5.16). For the changes to appear in the map
window, click Apply (Figure 5.12), and the map window will update.

Figure 5.16 Preview Changes

4. By default, the labels for the streams appear in the active map window. If the user does
not want the labels displayed, clear Show Stream Name (Figure 5.12); click Apply,
stream labels no longer display in the map window.

5. To change the font of the stream labels, click Choose Font (Figure 5.12), next to Show
Stream Name. A Font Chooser opens (Figure 5.17), select the font type from the Type
list, and select a size using the Size slider. Click OK, the Font Chooser closes, from the
Stream Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure 5.12), click Apply, the stream labels
display in the font and size chosen.

Figure 5.17 Font Chooser

5-15
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Tic marks appear on a stream representing the stream stationing of the stream. There are two
types of tic marks – minor and major. To change the appearance of tic marks in the stream
alignment:

1. By default, tic marks display on the stream alignment. If the user does not want tic marks
to display, clear Draw Station Tics (Figure 5.18). Click Apply (Figure 5.12), tic marks
no longer display in the active map window.

Figure 5.18 Stream Alignment Properties - Tic Marks

2. From the Tic Length list, the user can set the length of the minor tic marks. To change
the length of the major tic marks, from the Major Tic Length list (Figure 5.18), select
the length of the major tic marks. For the changes to appear in the active map window,
from the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure 5.12) click Apply, and the
map window will update.

3. By default, the labels for tic marks appear in the active map window. If the user does not
want the labels to display, clear Draw Tic Labels (Figure 5.18). To change the font of
the tic mark labels, click Choose Font, a Font Chooser opens (Figure 5.17), select the
font type from the Type list, and select a size using the Size slider. Click OK, the Font
Chooser closes, from the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure 5.12), click
Apply. Now all of the tic mark labels will appear in the font and size chosen.

Stream Nodes
To change the appearance of all stream nodes in the map window:

1. By default stream nodes display, if the user does not want to display stream nodes clear
Draw Stream Nodes (Figure 5.19), from the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box
(Figure 5.12) click Apply, the stream nodes no longer display in the active map window.

Figure 5.19 Stream Alignment Properties - Stream Nodes

2. The user can select the color of the stream nodes in the stream alignment from the Node
Color list (Figure 5.19). The default color is green, there are several colors to choose
from, plus the user has the ability to create colors. From the Node Color list, click
Custom, the Choose A Color dialog box (Figure 5.15) will open. Appendix E provides
further details on the color chooser.

5-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

3. The user can select the color of the outline of stream nodes in the stream alignment from
the Node Outline Color list (Figure 5.19). The default color is dark green, there are
several colors to choose from, plus the user has the ability to create colors. From the
Node Outline Color list, click Custom, the Choose A Color dialog box (Figure 5.15)
will open. Appendix E provides further details on the color chooser.

4. The user can set the width of the stream nodes in the stream alignment from the Node
Width list (Figure 5.18).

Stream Junctions
To change the appearance of all stream junctions in the active map window:

1. By default the stream junctions display, if the user does not want to display the stream
junctions clear Draw Junctions (Figure 5.20), from the Stream Alignment Properties
dialog box (Figure 5. 12) click Apply, stream junctions no longer display in the active
map window.

Figure 5.20 Stream Alignment Properties - Stream Junctions

2. The user can select the color of the stream junctions in the stream alignment from the
Junction Color list (Figure 5.20). The default color is darkgreen, there are several
colors to choose from, plus the user has the ability to create colors. From the Junction
Color list, click Custom, the Choose A Color dialog box (see Figure 5.15) will open.
Appendix E provides further details on the color chooser.

3. The user can set the width of the stream junctions in the stream alignment from the
Junction Width list (Figure 5.20).

Scale
Visualization scale can be set for the Stream Alignment Layer:

1. To set the visualization scale for the stream alignment to a default, from the Stream
Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure 5.12), from the Scale menu, click Set to
Defaults. The visualization scale is set automatically.

2. To enter a scale factor, from the Scale menu, click New. The Create New Scale dialog
box opens (Figure 5.21), in the Scale box, enter values for the scale factor.

3. Click OK, the Create New Scale dialog box closes (Figure 5.21), and the visualization
scale is set for the stream alignment.

5-17
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 5.21 Create New Scale Dialog Box

5.3.2 Simulation Layer

When a simulation map window is open, the Simulation Layer for that map window is
available. In Figure 5.22, the Simulation Layer is Without Project Conditions-RR_Feb1986,
which is the active simulation. When the tree expands, the different sub-layers that represent
each model in the simulation is displayed. Therefore, if the user did not want to display the
impact areas, clear FIA:GridsAndXSecsAlternative (Figure 5.22). The impact areas will no
longer be visible in the simulation map window. To view the impact areas, click
FIA:GridsAndXSecsAlternative. This procedure applies to all of the sub-layers of the simulation
layer.

Figure 5.22 Simulation Layer – Shortcut Menu

Shortcut Menu
The shortcut menu (Figure 5.22) for the Simulation Layer is accessed by right-clicking on the
simulation layer (i.e., Without Project Conditions-RR_Feb1986) in the Maps Tab. The shortcut
menu provides several ways to manipulate the Simulation Layer. The available commands are:

Expand – expands the Simulation Layer's tree; the tree provides information on the
available elements of the simulation.

Collapse – collapses the Simulation Layer's tree; the tree provides information on the
available elements of the simulation.

Move to Top – moves the Simulation Layer to the top of the tree

Move Up – moves the Simulation Layer up the tree one position

Move Down – moves the Simulation down the tree one position

Move to Bottom – the Simulation to the bottom of the tree

5-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

5.3.3 Schematic Layer

When a schematic map window is open, the Schematic Layer for that map window is available.
In Figure 5.23, the Schematic Layer is Without Project Conditions. The Schematic Layer
contains the graphical representations of the measures, common computation points, and impact

Figure 5.23 Schematic Layer - Shortcut Menu

areas. When the tree expands, the different sub-layers that represent each element are displayed.
Therefore, if the user did not want to the impact areas displayed in the schematic map window,
clear Impact Areas. The impact areas will no longer display in the schematic map window. To
view the impact areas, click Impact Areas. This procedure applies to all of the sub-layers of the
schematic layer.

Shortcut Menu
The shortcut menu (Figure 5.23) for the Schematic Layer is accessed by right-clicking on the
schematic layer (i.e., Without Project Conditions) in the Maps Tab. The shortcut menu provides
several ways to manipulate the Schematic Layer. The available commands are:

Expand – expands the Schematic Layer's tree; the tree provides information on the
available elements of the schematic.

Collapse – collapses the Schematic Layer's tree; the tree provides information on the
available elements of the schematic.

Move to Top – moves the Schematic Layer to the top of the tree

Move Up – moves the Schematic Layer up the tree one position

Move Down – moves the Schematic Layer down the tree one position

Move to Bottom – the Schematic Layer to the bottom of the tree

5-19
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

Properties – opens the Drawing Properties Editor (Figure 5.24) which allows the user to
edit properties of the elements that are part of the Schematic Layer.

Export Schematic – opens the Export Schematic Layers dialog box (Figure 5.25) which
allows the user to export the selected elements for the active Schematic Layer to
shapefiles.

Figure 5.24 Drawing Properties Editor

Figure 5.25 Export Schematic Layers Dialog Box

Schematic Properties
For the Schematic Layer, the user can configure the appearance of the measures, common
computation points, and impact areas. To configure:

1. From the Maps tab, right-click on a Schematic Layer. From the shortcut menu, click
Properties, the Drawing Properties Editor will open (Figure 5.24). The Drawing
Properties Editor has six tabs, which represent the elements available in the study.

5-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 5 – GIS Layers

2. Depending on the element (i.e., reservoirs, levees, etc.), the user can change the color of
the element, the size of the element, whether the element is drawn or not, whether the
label of the element is drawn or not, and what font and size of font the label of the
element is displayed in.

3. For example, from the Reservoir tab (Figure 5.24) the user can set the width and colors
of the different elements that make up a reservoir, whether to draw the reservoir polygon
(triangle), whether to draw the reservoir label, and set the font for the reservoir label.
The Triangle Fill Color, Triangle Outline Color, and Draw Reservoir Triangle affect
the polygon (triangle) of a reservoir. The Storage Reach Fill Color, Storage Reach
Outline Color, and Storage Reach Width affect the storage reach of a reservoir. The
Dam Fill Color and the Dam Width affect the dam of a reservoir.

4. By default, the labels for the reservoirs appear in the display area. If the user does not
want to display the labels, clear Draw Reservoir Name; click Apply (Figure 5.24), and
the reservoir labels no longer appear in the display area. To change the font of the
reservoir labels, click Font. A Font Chooser opens (Figure 5.17), select the font type
from the Type list, and either select a size from the Size slider or enter a size. Click OK,
the Font Chooser closes, from the Drawing Properties Editor (Figure 5.24), click
Apply. Now all of the reservoir labels will display in the font and size chosen. The other
elements in the Drawing Properties Editor have similar properties.

5.4 Layer Visualization Scaling

Layers may be set to become visible or invisible as users zoom-in or zoom-out on the active map
window. Generally, this capability allows the user to display finer levels of detail as users zoom-
in on regions in the map window and avoid clutter when displaying the full area. This might
include detailed map layers to become visible, and raster or other images to appear that are not as
distinguishable at a courser zoom level.

5-21
Chapter 5 – GIS Layers HEC-WAT User's Manual

5-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

CHAPTER 6

Building the Base Schematic

6.1 Concepts
Once a study has been created and background maps have been collected, the next step is the
development of the common schematic. A schematic is a physical representation of a stream
alignment, and the flood damage reduction and environmental measures that will be modeled.
The schematic also provides a common starting point for construction of compatible model data
sets. A common schematic assures the naming convention, measure identification and location
for the study is consistent throughout the modeling disciplines. The individual models can be
edited and those individual model results can be viewed from HEC-WAT by selecting the
elements found on the common schematic.

The common schematic will provide geo-referencing, stream referencing (stream alignment),
common physical features (measures), data exchange locations (common computation points)
and a set of features present for a particular modeling scenario (schematics).

6.2 Elements of a Schematic

The following sections describe in general terms the main elements of a schematic and the tools
provided by HEC-WAT to create schematics. Also, further details on each element are provided
in the appendices of this User's Manual

6.2.1 Stream Alignment

The backbone of any schematic is the stream alignment (Figure 6.1), and is the starting point in
creating a schematic. A stream alignment is a one-dimensional river coordinate system, which
defines the flow network. Also, from the stream centerline, stationing will be provided relative
to its global location and specific to the study. See Section 6.5.1 and Appendix F for further
details on stream alignments.

6.2.2 Common Computation Points (CCP)

Common computation points (Figure 6.2) are locations where one model transfers model
results to another model, where results are needed for model development or alternative analysis,
or where input boundary conditions are to be defined. The common computation points need to
be consistent for all models and should be placed on the stream alignment based on knowledge
of possible study alternatives. The entire study team should be involved in the definition of the
common computation points. For further details on common computation points see Section
6.5.2 and Appendix H.

6-1
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 6.1 Stream Alignment

Figure 6.2 Common Computation Points (CCPs)

6-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

6.2.3 Measures
Measures (Figure 6.3) for HEC-WAT include structural/non-structural measures (flood damage
reduction), and/or ecosystem measures. Structural measures are physical modifications
designed to reduce the frequency of damaging levels of flood inundation, and include dams with
reservoirs, levees, channelization measures, walls, diversion channels, pumps, bridge
modifications, and ice-control structures. Non-structural measures are activities that reduce
flood damage without significantly altering the nature or extent of flooding (e.g., flood proofing,
relocation of structures, raising structures). Ecosystem restoration measures are physical
modifications or other actions that improve the value and function of an ecosystem (e.g., channel
restoration, removal of drainage structures or levees). There are various measures that can be
defined for HEC-WAT, but this User's Manual will only focus on reservoirs (Section 6.5.3) and
levees (Appendix G). Other measures available in HEC-WAT are diversions, channel
improvements, off-channel storage, and other projects. Measures are not required for an HEC-
WAT study.

Figure 6.3 Measures

6.2.4 Impact Areas

An impact area (Figure 6.4) is any distinct portion of a study that is affected by rising or falling
stage in a stream, river, lake, or reservoir. The boundaries of an impact area are defined by a
closed polygon, and the user can characterize the effects of rising or falling stage by describing
the property, project, and/or population at risk in the area bounded by the polygon. Impact areas
are an optional element, and are only required when a user wants to compute impacts at damage
area centers in the study area, and an HEC-FIA model is part of the HEC-WAT modeling effort.
For further details on impact areas see Section 6.5.4 and Appendix I.

6-3
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 6.4 Impact Areas

6.3 Study Element Tools

There are tools available to view and create the study elements from the schematic map window.
These tools are as follows:

Pointer/Selector Tool – use this tool to edit, rename, and delete elements (does not
include stream alignment elements). Commands for editing existing study elements are
available by selecting the Pointer/Selector tool, and right-clicking on a study element.

Zoom Tool - use this tool to zoom in and out of map windows. To zoom in, hold the left
mouse button down and outline the area that will be enlarged. To zoom out, click the right
mouse button (right-click). The zoom out is done by a factor of two and positions the
clicked location at the center of the map window.

Pan Tool – use this tool to move the map window while zoomed in.

Impact Area Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit impact areas. See
Appendix I for further details on impact areas.

Computation Point Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit common
computation points. Common computation points are locations where one model transfers
data to another model, where results are needed for model development, or where input
boundary conditions are to be defined. Appendix H provides further details on common
computation points.

6-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

Stream Alignment Tool - use this tool to create, delete, and edit streams that make up the
stream alignment (Appendix F).

Stream Node Tool - use this tool to create, delete, and edit stream nodes and stream
junctions (Appendix F) on the stream alignment.

6.4 Measure Tools

Reservoir Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit reservoirs. Appendix G
provides further details on reservoirs.

Levee Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit levees. Appendix G provides
further details on levees.

Diversion Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit diversions. A diversion
has to be started on the stream alignment. To create a diversion, select the Diversion tool,
hold down the CTRL key, and click on the stream alignment. Each click creates a vertex
point along the diversion. When reaching the end point of the diversion, release the
CTRL key, and click. The user will be asked to name the diversion. After naming the
diversion, the diversion will appear on the active map window. Commands available for
editing an existing diversion are available by selecting the Diversion tool, and right-
clicking on a diversion.

Channel Modification Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit channel
modifications. A channel modification has to be created on the stream alignment. To
create a channel modification, select the Channel Modification tool, hold down the
CTRL key, click on the upstream end of the channel modification, release the CTRL key,
and drag along the stream alignment to the downstream end of the channel modification
and click. The user will be asked to name the channel modification. After naming the
channel modification, the channel modification will appear on the active map window.
Commands available for editing an existing channel modification are available by
selecting the Channel Modification tool, and right-clicking on a channel modification.

Off-Channel Storage Area Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit off-
channel storage areas. To create an off-channel storage area, select the Off-Channel
Storage Area tool and hold down the CTRL key while clicking the mouse button. Each
click creates a vertex point, which is the boundary of the polygon. When reaching the end
point, release the CTRL key and click. The user will be asked to name the off-channel
storage area. After naming the off-channel storage area, the off-channel storage area will
appear on the active map window. Commands available for editing an existing off-
channel storage area are available by selecting the Off-Channel Storage Area tool, and
right-clicking on an off-channel storage area.

Other Project Tool - use this tool to create, delete, rename, and edit other projects. This
tool enables the placement of elements that represent "other" projects, such as pump
stations. To create an "other" project, select the Other Project tool and hold down the

6-5
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

CTRL key and click. The user will be asked to name the "other" project. After naming
the "other" project, the "other" project will appear on the active map window. Commands
available for editing an existing "other" projects are available by selecting the Other
Project tool, and right-clicking on an "other" project.

6.5 Create the Default Schematic

When a new study is created in HEC-WAT, a default (base) alternative is created with either an
HEC-WAT default name (Without Project Conditions) or a user-defined name. After the
alternative has been created, the default schematic needs to be defined, this will have the same
name as the default alternative. The first step in defining the default schematic is to add the
basic schematic elements to the schematic - stream alignment, common computation points,
measures (reservoirs, levees), and impact areas.

The steps to define the default schematic are:

1. Once a study is created, the default schematic map window will open in the Desktop
Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1).

2. Add a map layer (Chapter 5) that will guide in creating the stream alignment. The user
can either digitize the stream alignment by hand or import a stream alignment using a
stream shapefile layer that has already been added to the HEC-WAT study. Section 6.5.1
provides further details on creating a stream alignment.

3. After the stream alignment has been defined, common computation points should be
added (Section 6.5.2) to the default schematic. Common computation points are
locations where the models associated with the alternative will hand off data to each
other, the user can view results, or locations where input boundary conditions are defined.

3. Now measures that describe the default alternative need to be added to the schematic.
There are several types of optional measures that can be added, this manual will
concentrate on reservoirs (Section 6.5.3) and levees (Appendix G).

5. An optional element to add to the default schematic is impact areas. Impact areas are
required if computation of impacts at damage area centers in the study area are required,
and an HEC-FIA model is part of HEC-WAT modeling alternatives. Section 6.5.4
provides further details on defining impact areas.

6. Once the default schematic is complete, be sure to save the schematic data. The user can
now create other alternatives and schematics based on the default schematic.

6.5.1 Create a Stream Alignment

The backbone of any schematic is the stream alignment, and is the starting point in creating a
schematic. A stream alignment is a one-dimensional river coordinate system, which defines the
natural downstream flow network. Also, from the stream centerline, stationing will be provided
relative to its global location and specific to the study. The alignment indicates where

6-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

confluences and bifurcations occur and provides a sense of distance and scale. Stream
alignments are composed of a series of streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions.

To import a stream alignment:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, click the Maps tab, from the Map Layers tree,
right-click on Stream Alignment. From the shortcut menu, click Import. The Import
Stream Alignment dialog box will open (Figure 6.5). The Shapefile Name list defaults
to the first line shapefile that HEC-WAT can find in the maps directory of a study; which
for this example (Figure 6.5) happens to be the shapefile that represents the stream
alignment for the RussianRiver study - RR_StreamAlignment.shp.

Figure 6.5 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box

2. From the Database Field Name list (Figure 6.5), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the streams - Name. Once a field name is
selected, the table below the Database Field Name list (Figure 6.5) will populate with
the streams contained in the shapefile. If there is an issue with any of the stream
segments the checkbox in the Import column (Figure 6.11) will not be selected. This
means the stream segment is not continuous and will not be imported.
6-7
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. Click Import, the Import Stream Alignment dialog box will close (Figure 6.5). Once
the import of the stream alignment is completed, a message window will appear letting
the user know that the stream alignment imported successfully. In the active Map
Window the stream alignment appears (orange stream segments; green stream nodes and
stream junctions).

Sometimes the streams in a shapefile are not in the right flow direction. Instead, of fixing this
issue outside of HEC-WAT, and if the user is aware of this issue before an import. From the
Import Stream Alignment dialog box (Figure 6.5), from the table, make sure the under the
Reverse Direction column, all of the streams are selected where the flow direction is not correct.
When, the stream alignment is imported, the flow direction will be corrected automatically. For
further information on Reverse Direction see Appendix F.

6.5.2 Add Common Computation Points (CCPs)

Common computation points (CCPs) are locations where one model can transfer data to
another model, where results are needed for model development or alternative analysis, or where
input boundary conditions are to be defined. CCPs need to be consistent for all models and
should be placed on the stream alignment based on the knowledge of possible study alternatives.
The entire study team should be involved in the definition of the CCPs.

To import CCPs from a shapefile:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from Maps menu, point to Import, click
Computation Points. The Import Computation Points dialog box will open (Figure
6.6). The Shapefile Name list defaults to the first point shapefile that HEC-WAT can
find in the maps directory of a study; which happens to be the shapefile that represents
the CCPs for the Russian River study - RR_CommonComputationPoints.shp.

Figure 6.6 Import Computation Points Dialog Box

6-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

2. From the Database Field Name list (Figure 6.6), select the field name in the attribute file
that contains the names of the CCPs - ID_Name. Once a field name is selected, the table
below the Database Field Name list (Figure 6.6) will populate with the CCPs contained
in the shapefile. If there is an issue with any of the CCPs, the checkbox in the Import
column will not be selected.

3. Click Import, the Import Computation Points dialog box will close (Figure 6.6). Once
the import of the CCPs is completed, a message window will appear letting you know
that the CCPs have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window the CCPs
appear as black circles.

A user can also add CCPs to the schematic manually by performing the following steps:

1. From the Schematic Map Window, find the location where a CCP needs to be added,
press the Computation Point tool .

2. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the common
computation point.

3. The Name New Computation Point dialog box will open (Figure 6.7). Enter the new
Name (required) and Description (optional, but recommended). Click OK, the Name
New Computation Point dialog box will close.

Figure 6.7 Name New Computation Point Dialog Box

4. The CCP will now appear in the map window as a black circle.

5. If a CCP is added at a stream junction, a slightly different Name New Computation

Point dialog box will open (Figure 6.8). Enter the new Name (required) and Description
(optional, but recommended).

6. From the Select the Placement of the Computation Point list (Figure 6.8), determine
exactly where the CCP will be placed. Choices are to have the CCP placed on the stream
junction, along one of the streams that form the stream junction, or none of the above.
For example, in Figure 6.8, the CCP will be placed on the stream junction.

6-9
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 6.8 Name new Computation Point Dialog Box at a Stream Junction

7. Click OK, the Name New Computation Point dialog box (Figure 6.8) will close. The
CCP will now appear in the display area as a black circle.

6.5.3 Add a Reservoir

A reservoir is the impoundment created behind dams, or behind navigation locks and dams. For
HEC-WAT a reservoir also includes the dam built on a stream to store water for uses such as
flood risk management, hydroelectric power generation, recreation use, and water supply, etc.

To add a reservoir:

1. From the Schematic Map Window, find the location where a reservoir needs to be
added, press the Reservoir tool .

2. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the upstream end of
the reservoir. Release the CTRL key; drag the mouse to the downstream end of the
reservoir and click.

3. The Name New Reservoir dialog box will open (Figure 6.9). Enter a Name (Lake
Mendocino) and Description (optional, but recommended) for the reservoir. Click OK,
the Name New Reservoir dialog box will close.

4. The reservoir will now appear on the schematic as a cyan triangle (reservoir pool), a blue
line (storage reach), a gray rectangle (dam), and two CCPs that represent the upstream
and downstream ends of the reservoir.

6-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

Figure 6.9 Name New Reservoir Dialog Box

5. The default representation of the reservoir pool is a triangle; the user can edit this triangle
if a more detailed representation of the pool is desired. With the Reservoir tool pressed,
double-click on the reservoir. The triangle (Figure 6.10) will now be green with a blue
outline color. Also, there are three vertex points (blue), and at the apex of the triangle is
the reservoir label, which is represented by a yellow circle.

Figure 6.10 Reservoir Pool

6. When a reservoir is created there are two CCPs that are created with default names. It is
recommended that the names of the two CCPs be changed. These two CCPs represent
the inflow and outflow junctions of the reservoir and should be renamed accordingly.

7. To change the name of a CCP, press the Computation Point tool , right-click on one
of the CCPs. From the shortcut menu, click Rename Computation Point; the Rename
Computation Point dialog box will open (Figure 6.11). In the Name box, enter the new
name, and in the Description box enter a description (optional, but recommended). For
example, in Figure 6.11, the inflow junction for Lake Mendocino has been labeled Lake
Mendocino Inflow Jct, and the outflow junction should be labeled Lake Mendocino
Outflow Jct.

6-11
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 6.11 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box

8. Click OK, a Confirm Rename window will open, asking the user to be sure that the
CCP is to be renamed. Click Yes, the Rename Computation Point dialog box will close
(Figure 6.11) and the new name for the CCP will appear in the map window.

6.5.4 Add Impact Areas

An impact area is any distinct portion of a study that is affected by rising or falling stage in a
stream, river, lake, or reservoir. Impact areas are an optional element, and are only required
when the user wants to aggregate impacts at damage area centers in the study area

To import impact areas from a shapefile:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from Maps menu, point to Import, click Impact
Areas. The Import Impact Areas dialog box will open (Figure 6.12). The Shapefile
Name list figures out whether there are any polygon shapefiles available in the maps
directory (e.g., RR_ImpactAreas.shp).

Figure 6.12 Import Impact Areas Dialog Box

6-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

2. From the Database Field Name list (Figure 6.12), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the impact areas - ID_Name (Figure 6.12).
Once a field name is selected, the table below the Database Field Name list will populate
with the impact areas contained in the shapefile. If there is an issue with any of the impact
areas the checkbox in the Import column will not be selected.

3. Click Import, the Import Impact Areas dialog box will close (Figure 6.12). Once the
import of the impact areas is completed, a message window will appear letting the user
know that the impact areas have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window
the impact areas appear as green polygons.

6.6 Create Additional Schematics

Section 6.5 described the steps for creating the schematic for the default HEC-WAT alternative
(i.e., Without Project Conditions). Additional schematics can be created if the HEC-WAT study
has other alternatives where something might be different, like adding a new project, or
removing a project from the study area. There are two ways to create a schematic, one is from
the Schematic Tab, and the other is when an alternative is created.

To create a schematic from the Schematic tab:

1. From the Schematic tab, on the Study Pane (Figure 6.13), right-click on the
Schematics, folder, from the shortcut menu click New. The Create New Schematics
dialog box will open (Figure 6.14).

Figure 6.13 Creating a New Schematic

Figure 6.14 Create New Schematics Dialog Box

2. In the Name box enter the name (required), and in the Description box, enter a
description (optional, but recommended).

6-13
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. Select a stream alignment that the schematic will be built around. HEC-WAT allows for
multiple stream alignments in a study. From the Stream Alignment list (Figure 6.14)
select a stream alignment.

4. Click OK, the Create New Schematics dialog box will close (Figure 6.14). In the Study
Pane (Figure 6.13), the Schematics folder will now contain the new schematic.

5. A map window will open in the Desktop Pane representing the schematic. Now the user
needs to review the new schematic to see if any adjustment need to be made to the stream
alignment; add/edit/delete measures; add/edit/delete CCPs; and, add/edit/delete impact
areas.

6. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane, the Select Map dialog box will open
(Figure 6.15). The user can choose whether to open the schematic in the current map
window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select Map dialog box (Figure 6.15)
and the Create New Schematics dialog box (Figure 6.14) will both close, and the map
window for the new schematic will appear in the Desktop pane. Now the user needs to
review the new schematic to see if any adjustment need to be made to the stream
alignment; add/edit/ delete measures; add/edit/delete CCPs; and, add/edit/delete impact
areas.

Figure 6.15 Select Map Dialog Box

To create a schematic when creating an alternative:

1. From the Study tab, on the Study Pane (Figure 6.16), right-click on the Alternatives
folder, from the shortcut menu click New. The Create New Alternatives dialog box will
open (Figure 6.17).

Figure 6.16 Creating a New Alternative

6-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

2. Enter the alternative name in the Name box (required), and an optional (recommended)
description in the Description box (Figure 6.17).

Figure 6.17 Create New Alternatives Dialog Box

3. Each alternative requires a schematic to provide the layout of the study area measures and
components. Select a previously defined schematic, or create a schematic for the
alternative from the Schematic list (see Step 6).

4. Click OK, the Create New Schematics dialog box will close (Figure 6.12). If there is
not a map window open in the Desktop Pane, the Create New Alternatives dialog box
will close (Figure 6.17) and a map window will open in the Desktop Pane representing
the alternative.

5. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1), the Select Map
dialog box will open (Figure 6.15). The user can choose whether to open the alternative
in the current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select Map dialog
box (Figure 6.15) and the Create New Alternatives dialog box (Figure 6.17) will both
close, and the map window for the new alternative will appear in the Desktop Pane.

6. If a new schematic for the alternative needs to be created, from the Schematic list (Figure
6.17), click <Create New Schematic>. Click OK, a No schematic was selected warning
window will open. The window is asking the user if a schematic needs to be created,
click Yes. The Create New Schematics dialog box will open (Figure 6.14). A name for
the schematic is automatically generated based on the name of the alternative. Review
Steps 4 and 5.

7. The schematic name will now appear on the Schematic Tab, under the Schematics
folder (Figure 6.13). Now the user needs to review the new schematic to see if any
adjustment need to be made to the stream alignment; add/edit/delete measures;
add/edit/delete CCPs; and, add/edit/delete impact areas.

6.7 Existing Schematics

After creating a schematic, the user can view the schematic; edit certain properties of a
schematic; save the active schematic; create a copy of an existing schematic; delete a schematic
that is not associated with an alternative; and, view an existing schematic's properties. All of
6-15
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

these tasks are accomplished through the schematic shortcut menu (Figure 6.18). To access the
schematic shortcut menu, from the Schematic tab, right-click on an existing schematic under the
Schematics folder, and the schematic shortcut menu will appear.

Figure 6.18 Schematic Shortcut Menu

6.7.1 View a Schematic

To view a schematic in a map window:

1. From the schematics shortcut menu (Figure 6.18) click Display in Map Window.

2. If there is not a map window open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1), the map
window for the selected schematic will open in the Desktop Pane. From the map
window the user needs to review the new schematic to see if any adjustment needs to be
made to the stream alignment; add/edit/delete measures; add/edit/delete CCPs; and,
add/edit/delete impact areas.

3. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1), the Select Map
dialog box (Figure 6.15) will open. Now the user needs to review the new schematic to
see if any adjustment need to be made to the stream alignment; add/edit/delete measures;
add/edit/delete CCPs; and, add/edit/delete impact areas., Click OK, the Select Map
dialog box (Figure 6.15) will close, and the map window for the selected schematic will
appear in the Desktop Pane.

6.7.2 Edit an Existing Schematic

To edit the description, or to add and remove measures from an existing schematic:

1. From the schematics shortcut menu (Figure 6.18) click Edit. The Schematic Editor will
open (Figure 6.19).
6-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

Figure 6.19 Schematic Editor

2. In the Description box the user can edit the description of schematic.

3. From the Measures box the user can add or remove measures from a schematic by
selecting the measures. For example (Figure 6.19), if the user decides for this schematic
not to include the Lake Sonoma, clear Lake Sonoma. Lake Sonoma will now be
removed from the schematic.

4. From the Schematic Editor (Figure 6.19), there is the ability to edit other schematics by
using the Navigator Button in the upper right-hand corner of the editor. Clicking
places the user at the first schematic, while clicking places the user at the last
schematic. Clicking or moves the user back (previous) one schematic and
forward (next) one schematic, respectively. The center of the navigator button indicates
the number of schematics and which schematic the user is presently accessing.

5. Click OK, the Schematic Editor will close (Figure 6.19), and if the map window
associated with the schematic is open, the measure will no longer display in the map
window.

6.7.3 Save a Schematic

To save the active schematic, from the schematic shortcut menu (Figure 6.18), click Save. Any
changes that have occurred to the selected schematic will be saved by HEC-WAT.

6.7.4 Make a Copy of an Existing Schematic

To make a copy of an existing schematic:

1. From the schematics shortcut menu (Figure 6.18), click Save As. The Save Schematic
As dialog box will open (Figure 6.20).
6-17
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 6.20 Save Schematic As Dialog Box

2. The information displayed in the dialog box represents the schematic the user has chosen
to make a copy of.

3. In the Name box, enter the name (required) of the new schematic, and in the Description
box, enter a description (optional, but recommended).

4. Click OK, the Save Schematic As dialog box (Figure 6.20) will close, and in the Study
Pane; under the Schematics folder the new schematic name will appear.

6.7.5 Delete a Schematic

A schematic can only be deleted as long as it is not associated with an alternative. For example,
in Figure 6.18, the Without Project Conditions schematic is associated with an alternative, so the
Delete from Study command does not display on the schematic shortcut menu. To delete a
schematic not associated with an alternative:

1. From the Schematic tab, on the Study Pane, from the Schematics folder, right-click on
a schematic that is not associated with an alternative. From the Schematics shortcut
menu (Figure 6.18), click Delete from Study.

2. A Confirm Manager Delete message window will open, asking the user do you really
want to delete the selected schematic. Click Yes, the schematic name will no longer
appear under the Schematics folder on the Study Pane.

6.7.6 Schematic Properties

The properties of a schematic include the name; description; when the schematic was modified;
who created the schematic; when the schematic was created; and, the file that contains the
schematic data. To view the properties of a schematic, from the schematics shortcut menu
(Figure 6.18), click Properties. The Properties for SchematicName dialog box will open
(Figure 6.21).

6.7.7 Export Schematic Layers

The user can export schematic sub-layers:

6-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic

Figure 6.21 Properties for SchematicName Dialog Box

1. From the Schematic tab, on the Study Pane, from the Schematics folder, right-click on
a schematic. From the Schematics shortcut menu (Figure 6.18), click Export
Schematic.

2. The Export Schematic Layers dialog box will open (Figure 6.22).

3. From the Export column (Figure 6.22) select the individual sub-layers that need to be
exported to a shapefile. Double-click in the associated cell for a sub-layer, under the
Export To column (Figure 6.22). In that cell (Figure 6.22), either enter the name of the
directory where to store the shapefile, or click , and an Export browser (Figure 6.23)
will open.

Figure 6.22 Export Schematic Layers Dialog Box

4. The browser name will be based on the schematic sub-layer that the user has chosen, for
example in Figure 6.23, the user has selected to export the common computation point
sub-layer. Navigate to the directory where the shapefile will be stored, enter a name in
the File name box (Figure 6.23), click Save. The Export browser (Figure 6.23) will
close.
6-19
Chapter 6 – Building the Base Schematic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 6.23 Export Browser – Common Computation Points

5. From the Export Schematic Layers dialog box (Figure 6.22), click OK. The Export
Schematic Layers dialog box will close (Figure 6.22) and the shapefile (all necessary
files) will be created in the selected location.

6-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

CHAPTER 7

Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

Now that the user has an understanding about the basic building blocks of what an HEC-WAT
study requires, the following chapter walks the user through the steps of creating a basic HEC-
WAT study.

7.1 Create an HEC-WAT Study

To create a new study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 7.1), on the File menu, click New Study. The
Create New Study dialog box (Figure 7.2) will open.

Figure 7.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

2. In the Study Name box (Figure 7.2), enter a name, and in the Description box, enter a
description for the new study.

3. In the Directory box (Figure 7.2), either enter the name of the directory where to store
the HEC-WAT study, or click , and an Open browser (Figure 7.3) will open. Navigate
to the directory where the HEC-WAT study will be stored, click Open. The Open
browser (Figure 7.3) will close. On the Create New Study dialog box (Figure 7.2) in the
Directory box the location will display.
7-1
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 7.2 Create New Study Dialog Box

Figure 7.3 Open Browser

4. The Unit System (Figure 7.2) for the study defaults to English. The other choice from
the list is SI (metric).

5. Next, the projected coordinate system of the study needs to be set. For this example
study, the study map layers are in the projected coordinate system, and that information
will be imported from one of the map layers (i.e., shapefile).
7-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

6. From the Create New Study dialog box (Figure 7.2), click Edit (by the Coordinate
System box), the Map Coordinate Information dialog box will open (Figure 7.4). The
dialog box opens with a default coordinate system (Google/Bing Web Mercator).

Figure 7.4 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box – Default Coordinate System

7. From the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure 7.4), click Load from file
(lower left corner of dialog box); an Open browser (Figure 7.3) will open. Browse to the
location of the map layer (i.e., RR_StreamAlignment.prj) that has the correct projection
for the study area. Click on that map layer, click Open, now the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will contain information about the projected coordinate system
(Figure 7.5). Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box will close (Figure
7.5). Now on the Create New Study dialog box the Coordinate System box (Figure
7.2) contains the name of the projected coordinate system (i.e., USA_Continguous_
Albers_Equal_Area_Conic_USGS_version) for the study.

Figure 7.5 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box

7-3
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

8. When creating the study, the user can add map layers that the PDT has gathered for
defining the watershed area. From the Create New Study dialog box (Figure 7.2), click
Add Map Layers. The Select Map to Add browser will open (Figure 7.6). To copy the
map layers to the study directory area, from the Select Map to Add browser (Figure 7.6),
select Create Copy. Browse to where the map layers are located, select the appropriate
map layers, click Open, the Select Map to Add browser will close (Figure 7.6). The
Create New Study dialog box (Figure 7.7) appears.

Figure 7.6 Select Map to Add Browser

Figure 7.7 Create New Study Dialog Box - Completed

9. HEC-WAT creates a default alternative - Without Project Conditions. If the user wants
the default alternative to have a different name, several choices are available, including
Other which allows the user to name the default alternative.
7-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

10. Click OK, the Create New Study dialog box will close (Figure 7.7). The HEC-WAT
main window will now have the name of the study on the title bar (Figure 7.8). A
Schematic Map Window opens, which contains the map layers that were added to the
study.

Figure 7.8 HEC-WAT Main Window – New Study Created

7.2 Build the Without Project Conditions Schematic

HEC-WAT by default will create a default alternative Without Project Conditions (see Section
6.1, Step 8). From the HEC-WAT main widow (Figure 7.8), the Schematic Map Window, will
contain the initial schematic for the Without Project Conditions. The next step is to build the
schematic for the default alternative.

7.2.1 Adjust Map Layers

Once map layers are in an HEC-WAT study, the user can make adjustments to those map layers.
From the HEC-WAT main window, click the Maps tab (Figure 7.8). Now the user can see
which Map Window is currently active and what layers make up that Map Window. To change
the color and the fill aspects of a shapefile do the following:

1. From the Map Layers tree (Figure 7.9), right click on a map layer, which happens to be a
shapefile. The shortcut menu that appears is for shapefiles. This shortcut menu allows
the user to expand/collapse the selected map layer; move the shapefile to different
7-5
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 7.9 Map Layers Tree - Shortcut Menu

positions in the tree (Move To Top/Move To Bottom, Move up/Move Down); show the
legend of the shapefile; change the label of the shapefile; edit the properties of the
shapefile; set/remove scale factors; copy the map layer to another location; and open the
attribute table of the shapefile.

2. From the shapefile shortcut menu (Figure 7.9), click Properties, the Edit Polygon
Properties dialog box will open (Figure 7.10). The selected shapefile is a polygon
shapefile. To edit the fill of the active map layer, from the Fill tab, change the color or
turn off the fill. For the example in Figure 7.10, the fill will be turned off. Click Display
Fill, the check mark will clear, meaning that fill is turned off.

Figure 7.10 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box

7-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

3. To change the outline color of the shapefile layer, from the Edit Polygon Properties
dialog box (Figure 7.10), click the Border tab. From the Color list, select a color
("darkred"). Click OK, the Edit Polygon Properties dialog box (Figure 7.10) will close
and the changes will appear in dark red in the Map Window.

4. To turn off a map layer - click in the checkbox by a map layer, that map layer no longer
displays in the map window.

5. To display the map window zoomed in, select the Zoom tool . Draw a box around the
map layers that are displayed in the Map Window. From the Maps menu, click Default
Map Properties, the Default Map Properties for dialog box will open (Figure 7.11).
Click Set Map Extents to Display, click OK. The Default Map Properties for dialog
box will close.

Figure 7.11 Default Map Properties for Dialog Box

This sets the extents for the Map Window so that when the study is opened the next time
the Map Window will be zoomed in to the tighter area.

7.2.2 Create a Stream Alignment

The backbone of any schematic is the stream alignment, and is the starting point in creating a
schematic. A stream alignment is a one-dimensional river coordinate system, which defines the
natural downstream flow network. Also, from the stream centerline, stationing will be provided
relative to its global location and specific to the study. The alignment indicates where
confluences and bifurcations occur and provides a sense of distance and scale. Stream
alignments are composed of a series of streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions. The stream
alignment can be digitized or imported from a map layer. This section provides the steps for
importing a stream alignment from a shapefile.

7-7
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

To import a stream alignment:

1. From the Map Layers tree (Figure 7.9), right-click on StreamAlignment. From the
shortcut menu, click Import. The Import Stream Alignment dialog box will open
(Figure 7.12). The Shapefile Name list defaults to the first line shapefile it can find in
the maps directory of a study; if that is not the correct shapefile, the user can choose the
correct shapefile from the Shapefile Name list (Figure 7.12).

Figure 7.12 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box

2. From the Database Field Name list (Figure 7.12), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the streams (default is Name). Once a field
name is selected, the table below the Database Field Name list (Figure 7.12) will
populate with the streams contained in the shapefile. If there is an issue with any of the
stream segments the checkbox in the Import column (Figure 7.12) will not be selected.
This means the stream segment is not continuous and will not be imported.

3. If the flow direction in the shapefile is not correct, click Reverse Direction (Figure 7.12).
and the system of streams will have the correct flow direction.

4. Click Import, the Import Stream Alignment dialog box will close (Figure 7.12). Once
the import of the stream alignment is completed, a message window will appear letting
the user know that the stream alignment imported successfully. In the active Map
Window the stream alignment appears (orange stream segments; green stream nodes and
stream junctions).
7-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

7.2.3 Add the Background Internet Map

Knowing where the watershed is located in reference to known locations can be quite helpful
when communicating with the PDT and stakeholders. From the Maps menu (Figure 7.13), point
to Add Internet Map, from the available list select the internet map that would be a good
background (Open Street Map) map for the watershed. The selected internet map will load and
appear in the active Map Window.

Figure 7.13 Maps Menu - Add Internet Map

This layer in the background might help with adding additional streams to the stream alignment;
locations of reservoirs; levees, other measures; impact areas; and, common computation points
(CCPs). Based on the known extents of the study area, the layer provides a view of the
watershed and surrounding area.

7.2.4 Add Common Computation Points (CCPs)

Common computation points (CCPs) are locations where one model can transfer data to
another model, where results are needed for model development or alternative analysis, or where
input boundary conditions are to be defined. CCPs need to be consistent for all models and
should be placed on the stream alignment based on knowledge of possible study alternatives.
The entire study team should be involved in the definition of the CCPs.

To import CCPs from a shapefile:

1. From Maps menu (Figure 7.13), point to Import, click Computation Points. The
Import Computation Points dialog box will open (Figure 7.14). The Shapefile Name
list defaults to the first point shapefile it can find in the maps directory of a study; if that
is not the correct shapefile, the user can choose the correct shapefile from the Shapefile
Name list.
7-9
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 7.14 Import Computation Points Dialog Box

2. From the Database Field Name list (Figure 7.14), select the field name in the attribute
file that contains the names of the CCPs (for the example in Figure 7.14 that name is
ID_Name). Once a field name is selected, the table below the Database Field Name list
(Figure 7.14) will populate with the CCPs contained in the shapefile. If there is an issue
with any of the CCPs the checkbox in the Import column will not be selected.

3. Click Import, the Import Computation Points dialog box will close (Figure 7.14).
Once the import of the CCPs is completed, a message window will appear letting you
know that the CCPs have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window the
CCPs appear as black circles.

A user can also add CCPs to the schematic manually by performing the following steps:

1. From the Schematic Map Window, find the location where a CCP needs to be added,
press the Computation Point tool .

2. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the common
computation point.

3. The Name New Computation Point dialog box will open (Figure 7.15). Enter the new
Name (required) and Description (optional, but recommended). Click OK, the Name
New Computation Point dialog box will close.

7-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

Figure 7.15 Name New Computation Point

4. The CCP will now appear in the map window as a black circle.

5. If a CCP is added at a stream junction, a slightly different Name New Computation

Point dialog box will open (Figure 7.16). Enter the new Name (required) and
Description (optional, but recommended).

Figure 7.16 Name new Computation Point Dialog Box at a Stream Junction

6. From the Select the Placement of the Computation Point list (Figure 7.16), determine
exactly where the CCP will be placed. Choices are to have the CCP placed on the stream
junction, along one of the streams that form the stream junction, or none of the above.
For example, in Figure 7.16, the CCP will be placed on the stream junction.

7. Click OK, the Name New Computation Point dialog box (Figure 7.16) will close. The
common computation point will now appear in the display area as a black circle.

7-11
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

7.2.5 Add a Reservoir

A reservoir is the impoundment created behind dams, or behind navigation locks and dams. For
HEC-WAT a reservoir also includes the dam built on a stream to store water for uses such as
flood risk management, hydroelectric power generation, recreation use, and water supply, etc.

To add a reservoir:

1. From the Schematic Map Window, find the location where a reservoir needs to be
added, press the Reservoir tool .

2. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the upstream end of
the reservoir. Release the CTRL key; drag the mouse to the downstream end of the
reservoir and click.

3. The Name New Reservoir dialog box will open (Figure 7.17). Enter the new Name and
Description (optional, but recommended). Click OK, the Name New Reservoir dialog
box will close.

Figure 7.17 Name New Reservoir Dialog Box

4. The reservoir will now appear on the schematic as a cyan triangle (reservoir pool), a blue
line (storage reach), a gray rectangle (dam), and two CCPS that represent the upstream
and downstream ends of the reservoir.

5. The default representation of the reservoir pool is a triangle; the user can edit this triangle
if a more detailed representation of the pool is desired. With the Reservoir Tool pressed,
double-click on the reservoir. The triangle (Figure 7.18) will now be green with a blue
outline color. Also, there are three vertex points (blue), and at the apex of the triangle is
the reservoir label, which is represented by a yellow circle.

6. When a reservoir is created there are two CCPs that are created with default names. It is
recommended that the names of the two CCPs be changed. These two CCPs represent
the inflow and outflow junctions of the reservoir and should be renamed accordingly.

7-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

Figure 7.18 Reservoir Pool

7. To change the name of a common computation point, press the Computation Point tool
, right-click on one of the common computation points. From the shortcut menu, click
Rename Computation Point; the Rename Computation Point dialog box will open
(Figure 7.19). In the Name box, enter the new name, and in the Description box enter a
description (optional, but recommended). For example, in Figure 7.19, the inflow
junction for Lake Mendocino has been labeled Lake Mendocino Inflow Jct, and the
outflow junction should be labeled Lake Mendocino Outflow Jct.

Figure 7.19 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box

8. Click OK, a Confirm Rename window will open, asking the user to be sure that the
CCP is to be renamed. Click Yes, the Rename Computation Point dialog box will close
(Figure 7.19) and the new name for the CCP will appear in the map window.

7.2.6 Add Impact Areas

An impact area is any distinct portion of a study that is affected by rising or falling stage in a
stream, river, lake, or reservoir. Impact areas are an optional element, and are only required
when the user wants to compute impacts at damage area centers in the study area

To import impact areas from a shapefile:

1. From the Maps menu (Figure 7.13), point to Import, click Impact Areas. The Import
Impact Areas dialog box will open (Figure 7.20). The Shapefile Name list figures out
whether there are any polygon shapefiles available in the maps directory of a study; if the
correct shapefile is not selected, the user can choose the correct shapefile from the
Shapefile Name list.
7-13
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 7.20 Import Impact Areas Dialog Box

2. From the Database Field Name list (Figure 7.20), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the impact areas (for the example in Figure
7.20 that name is ID_Name). Once a field name is selected, the table below the Database
Field Name list (Figure 7.20) will populate with the impact areas contained in the
shapefile. If there is an issue with any of the impact areas the checkbox in the Import
column will not be selected.

3. Click Import, the Import Impact Areas dialog box will close (Figure 7.20). Once the
import of the impact areas is completed, a message window will appear letting the user
know that the impact areas have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window
the impact areas appear as green polygons.

A user can also add impact areas to the schematic manually by performing the following steps:

1. From the Schematic Map Window, find the location where an impact area needs to be
added, press the Impact Area tool .

2. Hold down the CTRL key while clicking the mouse button. Each click creates a vertex
point (Figure 7.21), which is the boundary of the polygon. When reaching the end point,
release the CTRL key and click.

3. The Name New Impact Area dialog box will open (Figure 7.22). Enter a name, and if
needed, enter a description. Click OK, the Name New Impact Area dialog box will
close.
7-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study

Figure 7.21 Draw an Impact Area

Figure 7.22 Name New Impact Area Dialog Box

4. The impact area will now appear in the display area as a green polygon with a name.

Following the steps in this chapter creates the basic schematic elements for an HEC-WAT
watershed - stream alignment, common computation points, impact areas, and projects
(reservoirs, levees). Now this basic schematic can be used by the models that are required for the
watershed. The user will have choices at this point - to either build the individual models in
HEC-WAT or build individual models outside of HEC-WAT.

7-15
Chapter 7 – Create a Basic HEC-WAT Study HEC-WAT User's Manual

7-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 8 – Importing Models

CHAPTER 8
Importing Models
Besides building the models directly from the HEC-WAT framework, the PDT can chose to
import individual models or models from a Corps Water Management Study (CWMS) or an
HEC-RTS (Real-Time Simulation) watershed. This chapter will layout the steps for both import
mechanisms.

8.1 Importing Individual Models

When importing from individual models, it is recommended that the models have been created in
the individual application software and have been successfully computed. Calibrated and
validated models are even better. Also, it is recommended that all of the models being imported
into a study have the same projection coordinate system, so that everything displays correctly on
the schematic. The first step is to create a basic HEC-WAT study, in Chapter 7, Section 7.1,
follow those steps to create a new HEC-WAT study

8.1.1 Import an HEC-ResSim Model

If the HEC-WAT study contains an HEC-ResSim model, it is recommended that the user import
the HEC-ResSim model first. The HEC-ResSim model usually contains the basic building block
elements for an HEC-WAT study - a stream alignment, common computation points (CCPs), and
the reservoirs necessary to model the study area. HEC-ResSim models are very much tied to the
stream alignment, any slight changes to the stream alignment can cause an HEC-ResSim model
to become very unhappy.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the File menu, point to Import (Figure 8.1),
and click ResSim, an Import Type window (Figure 8.2) will open.

Figure 8.1 HEC-WAT Main Window- File Menu - Import Menu Options
8-1
Chapter 8 – Importing Models HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 8.2 Import Type Window

2. There are two import options for the HEC-ResSim import. If the HEC-WAT study does
not have any of the basic information (i.e., stream alignment, CCPs, etc.), then the choice
should be Watershed (this will import everything from the HEC-ResSim model, which
includes the basic information). On the other hand, if the HEC-WAT study already has
the basic information built (i.e., stream alignment, CCPs, etc.), then the user only wants
to import by Alternative.

3. For this example, the user will be clicking Watershed. The Import Type Window will
close (Figure 8.2), and the Select Watershed File to Import From browser will open
(Figure 8.3). Browse to the folder that contains the HEC-ResSim model to be imported.
Once the correct location has been found, the Files of Type list should display the HEC-
ResSim watershed file (*.wksp). Click on the "wksp" file, click Open, the Select
Watershed File to Import From browser will close.

Figure 8.3 Select Watershed File to Import From Browser

4. A ResSim Import window will open (Figure 8.4) showing the progress of the HEC-
ResSim import.

8-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 8 – Importing Models

Figure 8.4 ResSim Import Window

5. The HEC-WAT Schematic Editor will open (Figure 8.5), from the Measures area of the
Schematic Editor, click Select All. All of the reservoirs listed in the table are now
selected. Click OK, the Schematic Editor will close (Figure 8.5).

Figure 8.5 Schematic Editor

6. The imported stream alignment, common computation points, reservoirs, and any
available map layers from the HEC-ResSim model display in the HEC-WAT Schematic
Map Window (Figure 8.6). For all of the map layers to appear, close the Schematic
Map Window. To re-open the Schematic Map Window, from the Study Tree, from an
Alternative folder (i.e., Without Project Conditions), double-click on a schematic (i.e.,
Schematic:Without Project Conditions), the Schematic Map Window will appear in the
Desktop Area of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 8.6). The importing of an HEC-
ResSim model has completed.

8.1.2 Import an HEC-HMS Model

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the File menu, point to Import (Figure 8.1),
and click HMS. The HEC-HMS application will open with the Select Project File
browser already open (Figure 8.7).

8-3
Chapter 8 – Importing Models HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 8.6 HEC-WAT Schematic Map Window after HEC-ResSim Import

Figure 8.7 HEC-HMS Main Window and Select Project File Browser

2. Browse to the folder that contains the HEC-HMS model to be imported. Once the right
location has been found, select the HEC-HMS project file (*.hms). The HEC-HMS
project filename will appear in the File name box (Figure 8.7), click Select.

3. When the HEC-WAT study is created an hms subfolder is created. In that subfolder are
the default files that are generated when creating an HEC-HMS project. When the HEC-
HMS import process finds that a project already exists, a warning window will appear
(Figure 8.8). From the warning window, click Yes, the warning window will close.

8-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 8 – Importing Models

Figure 8.8 HEC-HMS Warning Window about HEC-HMS Project

4. If the HEC-HMS model was created using a previous version of HEC-HMS, a Convert
HEC-HMS Project window (Figure 8.9) will open. This window is letting the user
know that the HEC-HMS model will be converted to a Version 4.2.1 HEC-HMS model.
Click Convert Project, the Convert HEC-HMS Project window (Figure 8.9) will close,
and the import of the HEC-HMS model will continue.

Figure 8.9 Convert HEC-HMS Project Window

5. The import process begins (the import this could take a few seconds and depends on the
number of files being copied to the HEC-WAT project directory and the size of the files).
The import is finished when the study tree pane in the HEC-HMS main window contains
a study tree. From the HEC-HMS main window (Figure 8.7), from the File menu, click
Exit. The HEC-HMS model import is completed.

8.1.3 Import an HEC-RAS Model

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the File menu, point to Import (Figure 8.1),
and click RAS. The Select RAS project to import from browser will open (Figure
8.10).

Figure 8.10 Select RAS project to import from Browser

8-5
Chapter 8 – Importing Models HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. Browse to the folder that contains the HEC-RAS model to be imported. Once the correct
location has been found, select the HEC-RAS project file (*.prj). The HEC-RAS project
filename will appear in the File name box (Figure 8.10), click Open.

3. The Select RAS project to import from browser will close (Figure 8.10). An Importing
window (Figure 8.11) will open; when the HEC-RAS model import is complete this
window will close. The HEC-RAS model import is completed.

Figure 8.11 HEC-RAS Importing Window

The HEC-RAS import does not include copying external files, like terrain files and HEC-DSS files
containing boundary conditions, to the "ras" folder within the HEC-WAT study directory. The user will
need to determine how to manage these files, including whether to make them local to the HEC-WAT
study directory in order to easily copy the study from one computer to another.

8.1.4 Import an HEC-FIA Model

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the File menu, point to Import (Figure 8.1),
and click FIA. The Import Alternatives dialog box will open (Figure 8.12).

Figure 8.12 Import Alternatives Dialog Box

2. Click Select/Add Project, an Open browser will open (Figure 8.13). Browse to the
folder that contains the HEC-FIA model to be imported. Once the correct location has
been found, select the HEC-FIA project file (*.prj). The HEC-FIA project filename will
appear in the File name box (Figure 8.13), click Open, the Open browser will close.

3. From the Import Alternatives dialog box (Figure 8.14), the table will now contain the
name of the Project (i.e., RussianRiver). From the Alternative column (Figure 8.14),
from the list select the HEC-FIA alternative that will be imported (i.e.,
GridsAndXSecsAlternative).
8-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 8 – Importing Models

Figure 8.13 Open Browser

Figure 8.14 HEC-FIA Import Alternative Table

4. From the Import Alternatives dialog box (Figure 8.12), click Edit Alternative
Specifications, the Alternative Specification dialog box will open (Figure 8.15). Copy
Projection from project should by default be clicked, click OK.

Figure 8.15 Alternative Specification Dialog Box

5. From the Import Alternatives dialog box (Figure 8.12), click Import Alternatives, in
the Progress column of the table (Figure 8.14) the cell will display the progress of the
import with a green bar. When the import is complete an Information window will
open, click OK.

6. From the Import Alternatives dialog box (Figure 8.15) click Close. The HEC-FIA
model alternative has been imported.

8-7
Chapter 8 – Importing Models HEC-WAT User's Manual

8.2 Importing a CWMS/HEC-RTS Watershed

A CWMS (Corps Water Management System) or an HEC-RTS watershed has been built for
forecasting in the same watershed area that a PDT wants to build an HEC-WAT study. The
HEC-WAT software has the capability to import a CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed. Once the
import is finished, the study team will need to review the models and make adjustments as
needed. The first step is to create a basic HEC-WAT study, in Chapter 7, Section 7.1, follow
those steps to create a new HEC-WAT study

To import a CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 8.1), from the File menu, point to Import,
click CWMS Watershed. The Import CWMS Watershed dialog box will open
(Figure 8.16).

Figure 8.16 Import CWMS Watershed Dialog Box

2. Now select the CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed, from the CWMS Watershed File box,
click , and the Select Workspace File browser (Figure 8.17) will open. Browse to the
directory where the CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed is located and select the CWMS/HEC-
RTS watershed file (*.wtrshd). The watershed filename will appear in the File name
box (Figure 8.17), click Import, the Select Workspace File browser will close (Figure
8.17).

3. A Continue Import? window will open (Figure 8.18). This window is warning the user
that the import process will overwrite any existing data in the HEC-WAT study. Click
Yes, the Continue Import? window will close (Figure 8.18)

8-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 8 – Importing Models

Figure 8.17 Select Workspace File Browser

Figure 8.18 Continue Import? Window

4. The Import CWMS Watershed dialog box (Figure 8.19) will now display the name of
the CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed file in the CWMS Watershed File box (Figure 8.19).
As the import proceeds, the Import Progress box on the Import CWMS Watershed
dialog box (Figure 8.10) will display what is happening during the import. The table on
the Import CWMS Watershed dialog box (Figure 8.19) will display which
CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed components have finished, whether the import was
successful or not, and the number of model alternatives that were imported.

5. When the HEC-WAT study is created an hms subfolder is created. In that subfolder are
the default files that are generated when creating an HEC-HMS project. When the HEC-
HMS import process finds that a project already exists, a warning window will appear
(Figure 8.8; this warning window can open behind the HEC-WAT main window). Click
Yes, the warning window will close.

6. If the HEC-HMS model was created using a previous version of HEC-HMS, a Convert
HEC-HMS Project window (Figure 8.9) will open. This window is letting the user
know that the HEC-HMS model will be converted to a Version 4.2.1 HEC-HMS model.
Click Convert Project, the Convert HEC-HMS Project window (Figure 8.9) will close,
and the import of the watershed will continue.
8-9
Chapter 8 – Importing Models HEC-WAT User's Manual

7. Once the import process is finished from the Import CWMS Watershed dialog box
(Figure 8.19) click Close. The Import CWMS Watershed dialog box (Figure 8.19) will
close, and the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 8.20) will display the map layers and the
stream alignment of the imported CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed.

Figure 8.19 Importing CWMS Watershed Dialog Box

8. The CWMS/HEC-RTS watershed has been imported into an HEC-WAT study. From the
HEC-WAT main window (Figure 8.20), from the File menu, click Save.

8-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 8 – Importing Models

Figure 8.20 HEC-WAT Main Window after a CWMS/HEC-RTS Import

8-11
Chapter 8 – Importing Models HEC-WAT User's Manual

8-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

CHAPTER 9

Time Window – Analysis Period

An analysis period defines the simulation time window that is used by all the model alternatives
in an HEC-WAT simulation. An analysis period can span single or multiple historical events or
can be used to define the lifecycle length within a Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) simulation. For
example, an analysis period for a historic event, such as the 1986 flood, should be defined so that
the start and end time spanned the 1986 event, i.e., the start time captures the precipitation that
drove the flood event and the end time captures the flood wave and resulting damage. An
analysis period for multiple events, or a continuous simulation, would be defined by creating one
analysis period (start and end times) that captures all the flood events within the continuous
record.

An analysis period for an FRA simulation is different than when modeling historic events. The
analysis period for an FRA simulation is used to set the length of each lifecycle within the FRA
compute. Typically, lifecycles are fifty-years in length. If the FRA compute does not analyze
damages and lifecycles are not required, then the analysis period can be an arbitrary length;
however, 100 or 500 year lifecycles are optimal for results management.

Options that modify the analysis period (time window) are available and are described in Section
9.2. Once the user has defined an alternative (such as the Without Project Conditions
alternative), the next step is to create analysis periods. Analysis periods are required to create
simulations runs, and an analysis period can only be used once per HEC-WAT alternative.

9.1 Analysis Periods – Study Tree

Analysis periods can be managed from different areas in the HEC-WAT framework (Figure 9.1).
This sections covers the Study Tree, which is in the Study Pane (Figure 9.1) of the HEC-WAT
main window. Analysis periods can also be managed from the Alternative and Simulation
Manager, which is covered in Section 9.3.

9.1.1 Create an Analysis Period

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, right-click on the
Analysis Periods folder. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.2) click New.

2. The Create New Analysis Periods dialog box will open (Figure 9.3).

3. In the Name box, enter a name (required) for the analysis period. Optionally (but
recommended), the user can enter a description in the Description box.

9-1
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 9.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

Figure 9.2 Study Tree- Analysis Periods Folder – Shortcut Menu

Figure 9.3 Create New Analysis Period Dialog Box

4. In the Time Window box (Figure 9.3), the user will enter a start date in the Start Date
box, and a start time in the Start Time box. For the end date of the time window the user
will enter that in the End Date box, and the end time in the End Time box. The Years
in Time Window box will automatically update based on the start date/time and end
date/time specified by the user. This feedback was added to help users enter standard
lifecycle lengths for the FRA simulation. An analysis period of 50.05 years can lead to
51 flood events within an FRA lifecycle, which may be unwanted. A Years in Time
Window of exactly 50 years will result in fifty events within a lifecycle.
9-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

5. Click OK. The Create New Analysis Period dialog box (Figure 9.3) will close. On the
Study Tree, under the Analysis Period folder (Figure 9.1), the name of the analysis
period that was just created is displayed.

9.1.2 Delete Analysis Period(s)

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, right-click on the
Analysis Periods folder. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.2) click Delete from Study.

2. The Delete Analysis Period(s) dialog box will open (Figure 9.4). This dialog box allows
the user to delete single or multiple analysis period(s) at one time. From the Existing
box select the analysis periods to be deleted. The name(s) selected will display in the
Name field of the Delete Object box. Click Delete, a warning message box will appear,
checking to see if the user really wants to delete the selected analysis period(s), click Yes.

Figure 9.4 Delete Analysis Period(s) Dialog Box

3. The Delete Analysis Period(s) dialog box will close (Figure 9.4) and the name(s) of the
selected analysis period(s) are no longer displayed under the Analysis Period folder in
the Study Tree.

9.1.3 Individual Analysis Periods

When an analysis period has been created, from the Study Tree, under the Analysis Periods
folder, the analysis periods defined for the HEC-WAT study are displayed. By right-clicking on
an analysis period, a shortcut menu (Figure 9.5) becomes available. From the shortcut menu the
user can perform various functions on individual analysis periods. These options include editing
the existing analysis period; save as (which is used to copy an existing analysis period); and,
deleting the existing analysis period.

9-3
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 9.5 Study Tree - Individual Analysis Period Shortcut Menu

Edit
To edit an analysis period:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the Analysis
Periods folder, right-click on an analysis period. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.5),
click Edit. The Analysis Period Editor will open (Figure 9.6).

Figure 9.6 Analysis Period Editor

2. The user can edit any of the analysis period data from the editor. Once the edits are
complete, click OK. The Analysis Period Editor will close (Figure 9.6).

Save
When an analysis period has been changed and the Analysis Period Editor has been closed, the
user can save the analysis period information from the Study Tree. From the Analysis Periods
folder, right-click on an analysis period. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.5) click Save.

Save As
To make a copy of an analysis period:

1. The user can make a copy of an individual analysis period by using the Save As option.
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the Analysis
Periods folder, right-click on an analysis period. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.5),
click Save As.

9-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

2. The Save Analysis Period As dialog box will open (Figure 9.7). In the Name box, enter
a name for the new analysis period. Click OK, the Save Analysis Period As dialog box
will close (Figure 9.7). The new analysis period will appear on the Study Tree, under
the Analysis Periods folder.

Figure 9.7 Save Analysis Period As Dialog Box

Delete from Study

To delete an analysis period study:

1. The user can delete an individual analysis period by using the Delete from Study option.
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the Analysis
Periods folder, right-click on an analysis period. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.5),
click Delete from Study.

2. A Confirm Manager Delete message window will appear, checking to see if the user
really wants to delete the selected analysis period. Click Yes to delete the analysis
period. The message window will close and the name of the selected analysis period is
no longer displayed under the Analysis Period folder in the Study Tree.

Analysis Period Properties

The properties of an analysis period include the name, description, when the analysis period was
modified, who created the analysis period, when the analysis period was created, and the file that
contains the analysis period data. To view the properties of an analysis period, from the
individual analysis period shortcut menu (Figure 9.5), click Properties. The Properties for
AnalysisPeriodName dialog box will open (Figure 9.8).

Figure 9.8 Properties for AnalysisPeriodName Dialog Box

9-5
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

9.2 Analysis Period - Modifiers

Now that the user has created an analysis period for an HEC-WAT simulation, HEC-WAT
provides several methods for modifying the analysis period time window within a simulation.
Modifying the simulation time window is a way to make a simulation run faster or help make
simulations more stable by adjusting the time window for each model that is part of an HEC-
WAT simulation. For example, a reservoir model may need to run for the entire time window,
but a hydraulic model may only need to run for a shorter time around the peak flow in order to
capture maximum flow and inundation.

There are three options available for modifying the simulation time window: Time Window
Adjustment (Section 9.2.1), Time Window Modifier (Section 9.2.2), and Time Window
Interval Generator (Section 9.2.3). The Time Window Adjustment and Time Window
Modifier options are available in both a deterministic and FRA compute, while the Time
Window Interval Generator option is only available in a deterministic compute.

9.2.1 Time Window Adjustment

The Time Window Adjustment option (Figure 9.9) provides the user with simple methods to
adjust the simulation time window for a specific model. The user can independently adjust the
start and end dates and times of a simulation time window using one of two options: No Change
and Relative. The time window adjustment modifies the simulation time window based on date
shifts. The time window adjustment feature is available for both deterministic and FRA compute
types, and can be used in conjunction with the Time Window Modifier (Section 9.2.2). The
Time Window Modifier allows users to also alter the simulation time window, but based on
model alternative results (e.g., adding or subtracting days relative to the date and time of a peak
flow or stage) instead of date shifts. From the Simulation Editor (Figure 9.9), the user can apply
time window adjustment options as follows:

Figure 9.9 Simulation Editor – Time Window Adjustment

9-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the
Alternatives node, from the Simulation folder, right-click on a simulation. From the
shortcut menu click Edit Simulation.

2. The Simulation Editor will open (Figure 9.9). From the Models table, from the Time
Window Adjustment column, click Edit. The Time Window Adjustment Editor
(Figure 9.10) will open.

Figure 9.10 Time Window Adjustment Editor

3. For the Start and End of the time window, there are two options – No Change and
Relative. These options can be selected independently for the Start and End times. For
example, the user could select Relative for Start and No Change for End.

● No Change (Default) – The start or end of the simulation time window will not be
adjusted (Figure 9.11).

Figure 9.11 Time Window Adjustment Editor – No Change

● Relative – The start or end of the simulation time window can be adjusted by
adding or subtracting days and hours (Figure 9.12).

Figure 9.12 Time Window Adjustment Editor – Relative

9-7
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

The start and end times of the Simulation Time Window can be adjusted
independently (Figure 9.13). Negative values for the number of days and hours
will move a date backward in time. For example, a value of minus one day will
shift the date from May 15 to May 14. Positive values for the number of days and
hours will move a date forward in time. For example, a value of plus one day will
shift the date from May 15 to May 16.

Figure 9.13 Time Window Modifier Editor - Relative -Example

Important: The time window can be shortened or lengthened using the Relative
option. If the time window is lengthened, however, there is a risk that subsequent
model alternatives in the compute sequence will not have data for the entire time
window and may fail to compute. The user should also be aware that it is possible
to generate overlapping start and end times, through either an incorrect selection of
dates for the relative Time Window Adjustment option or through a combination
of a Time Window Modifier alternative (Section 9.2.2) and a Time Window
Adjustment. A simulation will fail if the start and end times overlap.

4. An example application of a time window adjustment follows. From the Time Window
Adjustment Editor the user has selected the Relative option to adjust the time window
(Figure 9.13). In the Start box, the user selected Relative from the list, entered the
number of hours to add to the simulation time window in the Hours box. In the End
box, the user selected Relative from the list, entered the number of days and hours to
adjust the simulation time window in the Days and Hours boxes. Click OK, the Time
Window Adjustment Editor (Figure 9.13) closes, and now on the Simulation Editor,
from the Models box, the Time Window Adjustment cell for the RAS model alternative
displays the new simulation time window for the RAS model alternative (Figure 9.14).
When the simulation computes, only HEC-RAS will have a modified simulation time
window.

5. Click OK, the Simulation Editor (Figure 9.14) will close.

9.2.2 Time Window Modifier

The Time Window Modifier has greater flexibility than the time window adjustment and can be
used to modify the simulation time window based on flow, stage, or elevation. The modification
can be relative to a threshold, a peak value, or through a script. If a time window modifier

9-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

Figure 9.14 Simulation Editor – Example Time Window Adjustment – Relative

alternative is used for the study, make sure the time window modifier plug-in has been enabled
for the study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.5). The user creates a Time Window Modifier
Alternative (Figure 9.15) and sets up the options. To use a time window modifier alternative in
an HEC-WAT simulation, the program order (Chapter 11, Section 11.1) for the simulation must
include a time window modifier in the compute sequence.

Figure 9.15 Create New Time Window Modifier Alternative Dialog Box

One or more time window modifier alternatives can be used in a simulation, and each time
window modifier alternative must be linked to an output time-series from a model alternative
that is part of a simulation. For example, a time window modifier alternative could be inserted
between an HMS model alternative and an RAS model alternative in a simulation to shorten the
RAS model alternative's runtime. The time window modifier would be linked to a flow time-
series from the HMS model alternative, which runs for the entire analysis period and comes
before the time window modifier in the simulation. Based on user-specified criteria and HMS
flow results, the time window modifier would then determine and pass a shortened run time
window to the RAS model alternative. The time window modifier feature is available for both
deterministic and FRA compute types, and can be used in conjunction with the time window
adjustment feature.

9-9
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

Create a time window modifier alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the Models
node, right-click on TimeWindowModifier (if TimeWindowModifier does not display,
the time window modifier plug-in (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.5) has not been enabled for the
study). From the shortcut menu click New.

2. The Create New Time Window Modifier Alternative dialog box will open (Figure
9.15). In the Name box, enter a name (required) for the time window modifier
alternative. Optionally (but recommended), the user can enter a description in the
Description box.

3. Click OK, the Create New Time Window Modifier Alternative dialog box will close
(Figure 9.15) and the Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor will open (Figure
9.16).

Figure 9.16 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor

4. By default, the Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor opens with the Model tab
selected. From the Model tab, the user is given choices to adjust the simulation time
window by either a flow threshold or a time window relative to the peak of a time-series.

9-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

The Input Data Parameter box (Figure 9.16) contains three options: Flow, Stage, and
Elevation. Flow is selected by default when a new time window modifier alternative is
created, but the user can also select either Stage or Elevation. The parameter type is used
to filter the list of model results in the Model Linking Editor (Chapter 12) to only those
specified here in the Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor.

There are four options for modifying the time window: Threshold Crossing, Minimum
Time Window, Maximum Time Window and Script. Input information for the first
three options is organized in separate boxes on the Model tab, and the Script option is a
tab. The time window modifier checks for input and applies each option in the order that
the options are displayed, meaning the threshold crossing is checked first, then minimum
time window, maximum time window and finally script. As each option is applied, the
time window is modified further. If input data has not been provided for one of the
options, the time window modifier carries the existing time window forward to the next
option without modification. The next option in the sequence is then checked for input
data, and if data is available, the time window is modified accordingly. This process
continues until all four options have been checked for input data and a final modified
time window is produced.

● The Threshold Crossing option (Figure 9.17) shortens the analysis period time
window based on user-defined thresholds relative to the peak value of a time-series.
The user can define both a pre- and post-peak threshold using either absolute values
or a percentage of the peak value. The user can also choose to define only one
threshold, either pre- or post-peak. If percentage-based thresholds are desired, the
user must select Threshold is percentage of value at peak (Figure 9.17). A Search
Method (Figure 9.17) is also specified, with a default of Out from Peak, which
searches backwards in time from the peak when a pre-peak threshold is set, and

Figure 9.17 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Threshold Crossing

searches forward in time from the peak when a post-peak threshold is set. The In
from Edges search method (Figure 9.17) searches forward in time from the start of a
time-series when a pre-peak threshold is set, and searches backwards in time from
the end of a time-series when a post-peak threshold is set. In all cases, the time
window is modified to match the time at which the designated threshold(s) are first
crossed. If the user-specified threshold(s) are never crossed, the original time
window is passed forward without modification.

● The Minimum Time Window option (Figure 9.18) is applied next, and can be used
to set a minimum time window based on the peak value from the linked time-series.
The user can enter Minimum Time Window values in a combination of Days and
Hours. This option expands the current time window, based on user inputs. For

9-11
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 9.18 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Minimum Time Window

example (Figure 9.18), a user may specify a start relative to peak of six days and an
end relative to peak of four days. If the time window passed to the Minimum Time
Window option includes six or more days before the peak and four or more days
after the peak, no adjustment will be made. However, if the initial time window
includes only three days before the peak and one day after the peak, the time window
would be expanded to include six days before the peak and four days after the peak
to match the requirements specified in the Minimum Time Window option.

Important: Because the Minimum Time Window option can expand a previously
defined time window, there is a risk that subsequent model alternatives in the
simulation that come after a time window modifier alternative in an HEC-WAT
compute sequence will be passed a time window that is larger than the input data of
those model alternative and the simulation will not complete. The user must
carefully check the logic defined for this option to ensure that it does not result in a
modified time window that extends beyond the data limits of the following model
alternatives in a compute sequence.

● The Maximum Time Window option (Figure 9.19) is applied next and works in the
opposite way of the Minimum Time Window option. It shortens the time window
based on user-defined values for start and end times relative to the peak. The user
can enter Maximum Time Window values in a combination of Days and Hours.
For example, a user may specify a start relative to peak of four days and an end
relative to peak of two days. If the time window passed to the Maximum Time
Window option includes four or less days before the peak and two or less days after
the peak, no adjustment will be made. However, if the initial time window includes
ten days before the peak and five days after the peak, the time window would be
shortened to include four days before the peak and two days after the peak to match
the requirements specified in the Maximum Time Window option.

Figure 9.19 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Maximum Time Window

5. The script option (available from the Script tab) runs last and is described in the
following section. If the user is not applying the script option and the time window
modifier setup is complete, click OK, and the Time Window Modifier Alternative
Editor closes (Figure 9.16).

9-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

Script Tab
HEC-WAT provides a built-in scripting interface for defining a more complex time window
modifier. The user can create a Python script that will adjust the simulation time window based
on parameters and conditions the user selects. An example script is available for download from
the HEC-WAT webpage.

1. From the Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor, click the Scripts tab (Figure
9.20).

Figure 9.20 Time Window Modifier Alternative Editor – Script Tab

2. The name of the script (displays in the Name box, Figure 9.20) is the same as the time
window modifier alternative. Optionally, the user can enter a description in the
Description box (Figure 9. 20). To create a script, click Use Script, the Script File box
(Figure 9. 20) displays the location of where the file is stored.
9-13
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. From the API (Application Programming Interface) Pane (Figure 9. 20), is a list of the
available APIs that a user can insert into a script. The user will decide which API needs
to be included in the script, expand the folder for that API (click the plus sign). From the
expanded list, the user will select the appropriate item that needs to be included in the
script. Once an item is selected, click Insert in Script, and the format for the selected
item will appear in the Text Editor Pane (Figure 9. 20).

4. The Text Editor Pane (Figure 9. 20) is a basic editor where the user can create and edit a
script. The editor supports the standard Windows® keys for Select All (Ctrl-A), Cut
(Ctrl-X), Copy (Ctrl-C) and Paste (Ctrl-V) operations. By right-clicking in the Text
Editor Pane, a shortcut menu is available, that also supports the previously listed
operations, plus Undo and Redo. Below the Text Editor Pane, by clicking Compile
Script, the user can check the script for Python code syntax errors.

5. When editing a script, from the Text Editor Pane (Figure 9. 20), the user will need to
select the appropriate text in the script where revisions might be made. Then, using the
API Pane (Figure 9. 20), the user can add items to the script in several ways. One way is
described in Step 3 by clicking Insert in Script. The user can also double-click on an
item in the API Pane, the format for the selected item will be inserted at the current
cursor position in the text editor. Another way is by dragging an API item to a position
in the Text Editor Pane, this also causes the format for the selected item to be inserted
into the current cursor position in the text editor.

6. Arguments are placeholders for variables that the user must supply in the script. The user
needs to replace the placeholders (red parentheses) with an argument of appropriate
variables/objects that the user has created within the script. General information about an
API item can be viewed by hovering over an item in the API Pane, a yellow callout box
will display (Figure 9.21). More detailed information can be viewed by selecting an API
item and then pressing the F1 key, which displays a JavaDoc window (Figure 9.22).

Figure 9.21 API Pane – Displaying Information about an API Item

9-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

Figure 9.22 JavaDoc Window – Displaying More Detailed Information about an API Item

5. When the script has been completed, click OK, the Time Window Modifier Alternative
Editor will close (Figure 9.20).

Simulation Editor
Now that a time window modifier alternative has been created, the user will decide on which
model alternatives to apply the time window modification. Note that multiple time window
modifier alternatives can be defined within one simulation, and conversely, multiple model
alternatives can reference the same time window modifier alternative.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the
Alternatives node, from the Simulation folder, right-click on a simulation. From the
shortcut menu click Edit Simulation.

2. The Simulation Editor will open (Figure 9.23), in the table, the Program column
(Figure 9.23) will contain the names of the software applications. The software
applications that display are determined by the selected program order (e.g., FRA_Full
sequence) from the Program Order list (Figure 9.23). If TimeWindowModifier is not
listed in the Program column, the selected program order does not include
TimeWindowModifier (Chapter 11, Section 11.1). The Alternative column will contain
the time window modifier alternative name (i.e., Minimum Length_FRA) used in the
compute sequence for the selected simulation.

9-15
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 9.23 Simulation Editor – Simulation with Time Window Modifier Alternative

3. For a model alternative to use a time window modifier alternative, from the Simulation
Time Window column (Figure 9.23), from a cell associated with a software application
(e.g., RAS) that is located below the TimeWindowModifier in the table (Figure 9.23), click
the cell, a list of available time window modifier alternatives will display, select the name
for the appropriate time window modifier alternative (i.e., Minimum Length_FRA).

Important: Connecting a model alternative to a time window modifier alternative in the

Simulation Editor modifies the simulation time window for that model alternative,
either by shortening or expanding it. As a best practice, subsequent model alternatives in
the simulation should generally be connected to the same time window modifier
alternative to ensure that those model alternatives simulation time windows match that of
prior model alternatives. If the simulation time windows of the subsequent model
alternatives are not modified, there is a risk that those model alternatives time windows
will be larger than the previous model alternative. This could mean that adequate input
data might be unavailable for those model alternatives and the simulation will not
complete.

4. When this example simulation computes, the simulation time window will be modified
for the model alternatives connected to the time window modifier alternative (i.e.,
Minimum Length_FRA) in the Simulation Editor (Figure 9.23).

5. Click OK, the Simulation Editor (Figure 9.23) will close.

9.2.3 Time Window Interval Generator

Models can run on a continuous basis in a deterministic simulation. An analysis period can be
one year or one hundred or more years, based on the boundary condition data available for model
simulations and the type of analysis. HEC-FIA is an event based software application, and when

9-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

HEC-FIA is used within a multi-year deterministic simulation, damage and life loss are only
computed for the maximum flood event within the analysis period. If the user is interested in
average annual damage (damage computed for each year and then averaged) within a
deterministic compute that spans multiple years, the time window interval generator must be
used to create annual time windows within an analysis period. The time window interval
generator feature is only available for the deterministic compute type. The user creates a Time
Window Interval Generator Alternative (Figure 9.24) and adds the alternative to the user
created program order for an HEC-WAT simulation. To use a time window interval generator
alternative in an HEC-WAT simulation, the program order (Chapter 11, Section 11.1) for the
simulation must include a time window interval generator in the compute sequence.

Figure 9.24 Create New Time Window Interval Generator Alternative Dialog Box

The time window interval generator alternative sets the simulation start time equal to the analysis
period start time included in the simulation. During the simulation compute, any model
alternatives listed above the time window interval generator alternative in the compute sequence
for the simulation will run continuously for the entire analysis period. However, any model
alternatives listed after the time window interval generator alternative in the compute sequence
will run independent simulations that are broken up by years. Results are stored for each
individual year within the analysis period in the results DSS file. The time window modifier
model alternative (Section 9.3.2) can be used following a time window interval generator
alternative in a program order to further shorten the time window parameters (e.g., shorten the
time window to ten days before the peak flow and three days after the peak flow) within each
year.

For example, the time window interval generator alternative can be used so that the user could
compute average annual damage within a deterministic simulation that spans fifty-years. The
program order would consist of the time window interval generator alternative (if Time-Window
Interval Generator does not display, the time-window interval generator plug-in (Chapter 4,
Section 4.1.5) has not been enabled for the study), followed by the HEC-RAS and HEC-FIA
software applications. If a fifty-year analysis period was selected, from 01 Jan 1950 to 31 Dec
1999, then the time window interval generator alternative would create fifty separate time
windows within the overall analysis period. The RAS and FIA model alternatives would run
independently for each of the fifty years, with results reported in separate event folders for each
year. Time window adjustment(s) or time window modifier alternative(s) could be used within
each year to further shorten the model simulation time windows.

To create a new time window interval generator alternative:

9-17
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Pane, expand the
Models folder. Right-click on Time-Window Interval Generator (if Time-Window
Interval Generator does not display, the time-window interval generator plug-in (Chapter
4, Section 4.1.5) has not been enabled for the study), and from the shortcut menu, click
New. The Create New Time Window Interval Generator Alternative dialog box will
open (Figure 9.24).

2. In the Name box (Figure 9.24), enter a name for the time window interval generator
alternative. Enter a description (optional, but recommended) in the Description box.

3. Click OK. The Create New Time Window Interval Generator Alternative dialog box
will close (Figure 9.24), and the Time-Window Interval Generator Editor will open
(Figure 9.25). The newly created time window interval generator alternative will be listed
in the Content Pane of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1).

Figure 9.25 Time-Window Interval Generator Editor

4. In the Time-Window Interval Generator Editor (Figure 9.25) there is currently only
one option available for the Start Date, Use Simulation Start Time, which is
automatically selected. If the analysis period begins on October 1, then the event time
windows would line up with the standard water year. If the analysis period begins on
January 1, then the event windows would line up with the calendar year. When a time
window interval generator alternative is included in a simulation, the simulation time
window passed to subsequent model alternatives in the compute sequence is discretized
into a series of annual events, with the start date of the first event set equal to the Start
Date of the analysis period associated with the simulation. If using a time window
modifier alternative to further shorten the annual time windows is being considered, place
the time window modifier alternative after the time window interval generator alternative
in the compute sequence.

5. Click OK, the Time-Window Interval Generator Editor (Figure 9.25) will close. A
time window interval generator alternative has now been created.

Simulation Editor
Now that a time window interval generator alternative has been created, the user will decide on
which model alternatives to apply the time window interval generator alternative. Note that
multiple time window interval generator alternatives can be defined within one simulation, and

9-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

conversely, multiple model alternatives can reference the same time window interval generator
alternative.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the Study Tree, from the
Alternatives node, from the Simulation folder, right-click on a simulation. From the
shortcut menu click Edit Simulation.

2. The Simulation Editor will open (Figure 9.26). In the table, the Program column
(Figure 9.26) will contain the names of the software applications. The software
applications that display are determined by the selected program order (e.g., POR_Full
sequence) from the Program Order list (Figure 9.26). If Time-Window Interval
Generator is not listed in the Program column, the selected program order does not
include Time-Window Interval Generator (Chapter 11, Section 11.1). The Alternative
column will contain the time-window interval generator alternative name (i.e., Annual)
used in the compute sequence for the selected simulation.

Figure 9.26 Simulation Editor – Simulation with Time Window Interval Generator Alternative

3. When this example (Figure 9.26) simulation computes, once the HMS and ResSim model
alternatives have run using the defined simulation time window, the time window interval
generator alternative (i.e., Annual) will create annual time windows (events) within the
simulation time window. The time window modifier alternative (i.e., AnnualPeaks
_POR) will modify the simulation time window for the model alternatives below the time
window modifier alternative in the Simulation Editor (Figure 9.26).

Note: When using a time window interval generator alternative and a time window
modifier alternative, the sequence should be the time window interval generator
alternative first and the time window modifier alternative second (Figure 9.26).

5. Click OK, the Simulation Editor (Figure 9.26) will close.

9-19
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

9.3 Analysis Periods – Alternative and Simulation

Manager
Analysis periods can also be managed from the Alternative and Simulation Manager, which is
covered in in the following sections.

9.3.1 Create an Analysis Period

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 9.1), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click .
The Alternative and Simulation Manager will open (Figure 9.27).

Figure 9.27 Alternative and Simulation Manager

2. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager toolbar, click ; or from the File
menu, point to Analysis Periods, click New; or, from the table (Figure 9.27), right-click
on the Analysis Periods header, from the shortcut menu (Figure 9.2), click New. The
Create New Analysis Period dialog box will open (Figure 9.3).

3. In the Name box (Figure 9.3), enter a name (required) for the analysis period. Optionally
(but recommended), the user can enter a description in the Description box (Figure 9.3).

4. In the Time Window box (Figure 9.3), enter a start date in the Start Date box and a start
time in the Start Time box. Enter the end date of the time window in the End Date box,
and enter the end time in the End Time box.

5. Click OK. The Create New Analysis Period dialog box (Figure 9.3) will close. The
new analysis period is now displayed on the Study Tree, under the Analysis Period
folder (Figure 9.1).

9.3.2 Delete Analysis Period(s)

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 9.27), from the File menu, point
to Analysis Periods, click Delete from Study.

9-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Period

2. The Delete Analysis Period(s) dialog box will open (Figure 9.4). This dialog box allows
the user to delete one or more analysis periods at one time. From the Existing box select
the analysis periods to be deleted. To select more than one, hold down the Shift key
before selecting the analysis periods. The names selected will display in the Name field
of the Delete Object box. Click Delete, a warning message box will appear, checking to
see if the user really wants to delete the selected analysis periods, click Yes.

3. The Delete Analysis Period(s) dialog box will close (Figure 9.4) and the selected
analysis periods are no longer displayed under the Analysis Period folder in the Study
Tree.

9.3.3 Individual Analysis Periods

When an analysis period has been created, from the Alternative Simulation Manager (Figure
9.27), from the table, right-click on the header that contains the name of the individual analysis
period(s). By right-clicking on an analysis period, a shortcut menu (Figure 9.5) becomes
available. From the shortcut menu the user can perform various functions on individual analysis
periods.

Edit
To edit an analysis period:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 9.27), from the table, right-click
on the header that contains the name of the individual analysis period. From the shortcut
menu (Figure 9.5), click Edit. Alternatively, from the Alternative and Simulation
Manager (Figure 9.27), from the Edit menu, click Analysis Periods. Either way, the
Analysis Period Editor will open (Figure 9.6).

2. The user can edit any of the analysis period data from the editor. Once the edits are done,
click OK. The Analysis Period Editor will close (Figure 9.5).

Save
When an analysis period has been changed and the Analysis Period Editor has been closed, the
user can save the analysis period information. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager
(Figure 9.27), from the table, right-click on the header that contains the name of the individual
analysis period. From the shortcut menu (Figure 9.5) click Save.

Save As
To make a copy of an analysis period:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 9.27), from the table, right-click
on the header that contains the name of the individual analysis period. From the shortcut
menu (Figure 9.5) click Save As.

9-21
Chapter 9 – Time Window - Analysis Periods HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The Save Analysis Period As dialog box will open (Figure 9.7). In the Name box, enter
a name for new analysis period. Click OK, the Save Analysis Period As dialog box will
close (Figure 9.8). The new analysis period will appear on the Study Tree, under the
Analysis Periods folder.

Delete From Study

To delete an individual analysis period:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 9.27), from the table, right-click
on the header that contains the name of the individual analysis period. From the shortcut
menu (Figure 9.5) click Delete from Study.

2. A Confirm Manager Delete message window will appear, checking to see if the user
really wants to delete the selected analysis period, click Yes. The message window will
close and the name of the selected analysis period is no longer displayed under the
Analysis Period folder in the Study Tree.

Analysis Period Properties

The properties of an analysis period include the name, description, when the analysis period was
modified, who created the analysis period, when it was created, and the file that contains the
analysis period data. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 9.27), from the
table, right-click on the header that contains the name of the individual analysis period, from the
shortcut menu (Figure 9.5), click Properties. The Properties for AnalysisPeriodName dialog
box will open (Figure 9.8).

9-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives

CHAPTER 10
Create and Manage Alternatives
10.1 Overview
The start of most studies involves defining the problem, establishing the scope, and formulating
alternative solutions to be evaluated. HEC-WAT will help define alternatives through schematic
representations, model alternative identification, and compute sequencing. An alternative in
HEC-WAT is a representation of the physical and operational system, and groups a schematic
with different measures, operations, and model alternatives. For example, one alternative could
be a "current conditions" alternative that represents the current condition in the study area,
including the current reservoir operational scheme. Additional alternatives could be some future
condition, which represents changes to land use, and alternatives representing differing reservoir
operational schemes or flood damage reduction measures. The alternative framework within
HEC-WAT facilitates creation of simulations across all defined alternatives (using the same
analysis period for each), and comparison of model alternative results.

10.2 Default Alternative – Without Project Conditions

When an HEC-WAT study is created (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), a default alternative is generated
(Figure 10.1). By default, this alternative is given the name Without Project Conditions, the user
can select several other name choices, or, a user can provide a name for the default alternative.

Figure 10.1 Default Alternative Name

Once the study is created, a schematic map window opens in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3).
The first action following the creation of the default alternative should be to define the default
schematic (Chapter 6). After defining the default schematic, analysis periods and simulations
can then be created for the default alternative.

10.3 Alternatives - Alternative and Simulation Manager

After the default alternative has been created, the remaining alternatives that have been identified
by the study team need to be developed. The Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure
10.2) can be used for organizing and developing alternatives. The Alternative and Simulation

10-1
Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 10.2 Alternative and Simulation Manager

Manager (Figure 10.2) provides a convenient way to organize and develop the main components
for an HEC-WAT study – alternatives, analysis period (time window), and simulations. The
Alternative and Simulation Manager has three areas where the user can access commands that
will allow the user to create, delete, and rename alternatives. These areas are the Table,
Toolbar, and Menu Bar. The Table allows organization of a study's alternatives; a way to track
the state of datasets needed for each model, create analysis periods, and create simulations.

To access the Alternative and Simulation Manager, from the HEC-WAT main window
(Figure 10.3), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click . Alternatively, from the Edit menu, click
Alternative and Simulation Manager. From either method the Alternative and Simulation
Manager will open (Figure 10.2).

10.3.1 Create an Alternative

To create an alternative:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 10.2), right-click on the
Alternatives header in the table, from the shortcut menu (Figure 10.4); or from the
toolbar click ; or from the File menu, point to Alternatives, click New.

2. The Create New Alternative dialog box will open (Figure 10.5). In the Name box enter
the name (required), and in the Description box, enter a description (optional, but
recommended).

10-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives

Figure 10.3 HEC-WAT Main Window

Figure 10.4 Alternatives Shortcut Menu

Figure 10.5 Create New Alternative Dialog Box

10-3
Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. Each alternative requires a schematic to provide the layout of the study area measures and
components (Chapter 6). From the Schematic list, select a previously defined schematic
(proceed to Step 4), or create a schematic for the alternative (see Step 6).

4. Click OK, if there is no map window open in the Desktop Pane, the Create New
Alternative dialog box (Figure 10.5) will close and an alternative map window will open
in the Desktop Pane.

5. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane, the Select Map dialog box will open
(Figure 10.6). The user can choose whether to open the alternative map window in the
current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select Map dialog box
(Figure 10.6) and the Create New Alternative dialog box (Figure 10.5) will both close,
and the map window for the new alternative will appear in the Desktop Pane.

Figure 10.6 Select Map Dialog Box

6. If a schematic needs to be created for the alternative, from the Schematic list (Figure
10.5), click <Create New Schematic>. Click OK, a warning message appears letting the
user know that a schematic was not selected, and asks the user to create a new schematic,
click Yes. The Create New Schematics dialog box will open (Figure 10.7). The name
of the alternative will appear in the Name box for the new schematic. The user can
accept this name or enter a name for the schematic in the Name box. The user can also
enter a description in the Description box (optional, but recommended).

Figure 10.7 Create New Schematics Dialog Box

10-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives

7. Click OK, if there is no map window open in the Desktop Pane, the Create New
Schematics dialog box (Figure 10.7) will close and an alternative map window will open
in the Desktop Pane (Figure 10.8). The user will need to add measures for the new
schematic (Chapter 6).

Figure 10.8 Alternative Map Window

8. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane, the Select Map dialog box will open
(Figure 10.6). The user can choose whether to open the alternative map window in the
current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select Map dialog box
(Figure 10.6) and the Create New Schematics dialog box (Figure 10.7) will both close,
and the map window for the new alternative will appear in the Desktop Pane.

9. The alternative name will now appear in the table on the Alternative and Simulation
Manager, under the Alternatives column header (Figure 10.9).

Figure 10.9 Alternative and Simulation Manager – Additional Alternatives

10-5
Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives HEC-WAT User's Manual

10.3.2 Delete Alternatives

To delete alternatives from a study:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9), right-click on the
Alternatives header in the table, from the shortcut menu (Figure 10.4); or from the File
menu, point to Alternatives, click Delete from Study, the Delete Alternative(s) dialog
box will open (Figure 10.10).

Figure 10.10 Delete Alternative(s) Dialog Box

2. From the Existing list select alternative(s), in the Delete Object box (Figure 10.10) the
name(s) and descriptions of the selected alternative(s) will appear.

3. Click Delete, a warning message will appear asking the user if the user really wants to
delete the selected alternative(s). Click Yes, the warning message will close, the Delete
Alternative(s) dialog box will close (Figure 10.10), and the selected alternative(s) will no
longer appear under the Alternatives column of the Alternative and Simulation
Manager (Figure 10.9).

10.3.3 Individual Alternatives

The individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.11) is available from the Alternative and
Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9), by right-clicking on an alternative name in the table. This
shortcut menu allows the user to view the selected alternative in a map window, save, make a
copy, delete from the study, and view the properties of the alternative. The following sections
provide further details.
10-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives

Figure 10.11 Alternative and Simulation Manager – Individual Alternative Shortcut Menu

View
To view an alternative in a map window:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9), right-click on an

alternative in the table. From the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.11),
click Display in Map Window.

2. If there is not a map window open in the Desktop Pane, the alternative map window for
the alternative will open in the Desktop Pane. From the alternative map window the user
can edit the stream alignment, measures, impact areas, and adjust background maps
associated with the alternative.

3. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane, the Select Map dialog box (Figure 10.6)
will open. The user can choose whether to open the alternative map window in the
current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select Map dialog box
(Figure 10.6) will close, and the alternative map window for the selected alternative will
appear in the Desktop Pane.

Save
To save an alternative, from the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.11), click Save.
Any changes that have occurred to the selected alternative will be saved by HEC-WAT.

Save As
To make a copy from an existing alternative:

1. From the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.11), click Save As. The Save
Alternative As dialog box will open (Figure 10.12). The information displayed in the
dialog box represents the alternative has been selected for copying.

2. In the Name box, enter the name (required) of the new alternative, and in the
Description box, enter a description (optional, but recommended).

10-7
Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 10.12 Save Alternative As Dialog Box

3. The user can also choose to create a copy of the associated schematic (will create a new
schematic with the new alternative name) or use the associated schematic of the existing
alternative the user has selected to make a copy of.

4. The alternative name will now appear in the table on the Alternative and Simulation
Manager, under the Alternatives column header (Figure 10.9).

Delete from Study

To delete an alternative, right-click on an alternative in the table on the Alternative and
Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9), from the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure
10.11), click Delete From Study. A Confirm Manager Delete warning message will appear
asking the user if you really want to delete the selected alternative. Click Yes, the warning
message will close. The alternative will no longer appear on the table in the Alternative and
Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9).

Alternative Properties
The properties of an alternative include the name, description, when the alternative was
modified, who created the alternative, when the alternative was created, and the file that contains
the alternative data. To view the properties of an alternative:

1. From the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.11), click Properties. The
Properties for AlternativeName dialog box will open (Figure 10.13).

2. For HEC-WAT Version 1.0, the properties for viewing are the name and description of
the selected alternative; the date and time the alternative was last modified (not the date
and time that individual models making up the simulation were last modified); the
location of the alternative file; and, the name of the file which contains information about
the alternative.
10-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives

Figure 10.13 Properties for AlternativeName Dialog Box

10.3.4 Toolbar
From the toolbar of the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9), the user can create
an alternative. Click , the Create New Alternative dialog box will open (Figure 10.5). The
steps for creating an alternative are the same as in Creating an Alternative Section 10.3.1.

10.3.5 Menu Bar

From the Menu Bar of the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 10.9), the user can
create and delete alternatives (Sections 10.3.1 and 10.3.2).

10.3.6 ToolTips
From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 10.14) the user can review information
regarding the status of certain elements of the study. For example, in Figure 10.14, hover the
mouse over the alternative Without Project Conditions, a small box will appear, this is a tooltip.
This tooltip provides the name and description of the alternative. Chapter 4, Section 4.1.5
provide details on how information is entered that a tooltip displays. By default tooltips in HEC-
WAT are displayed, if the user does not want tooltips displayed, Appendix B, Section B.2.1 will
provide further information.

10.4 Alternatives – Study Tree

The user can also create, view, save, save as, delete, and view properties of alternatives from the
Study Pane (Study Tree). This section of the chapter describes how to perform these operations
directly from the Study Tree.

10-9
Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 10.14 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Tooltip

10.4.1 Create an Alternative

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 10.3), from the Study Tree, right-click on
the Alternatives folder. From the shortcut menu click New, the Create New
Alternative dialog box will open (Figure 10.4).

2. The steps for creating an alternative are the same as in the Creating an Alternative,
Section 10.3.1.

10.4.2 Individual Alternatives

When an alternative has been created, from the Study Tree, under the Alternatives folder, the
alternatives defined for the HEC-WAT study are displayed. By right-clicking on an alternative, a
shortcut menu (Figure 10.15) becomes available. From the shortcut menu the user can perform
various functions on individual alternatives.

Figure 10.15 Study Tree – Individual Alternative Shortcut Menu

View
To view an alternative in a map window:
10-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 10.3), from the Study Tree, under the
Alternatives node, right-click an individual alternative. From the individual alternative
shortcut menu (Figure 10.15), click Display in Map Window.

2. If there is not a map window open in the Desktop Pane, the alternative map window for
the alternative will open in the Desktop Pane. From the alternative map window the user
can edit the stream alignment, measures, impact areas, and adjust background maps
associated with the alternative.

3. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane, the Select Map dialog box (Figure 10.6)
will open. The user can choose whether to open the alternative map window in the
current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select Map dialog box
(Figure 10.6) will close, and the alternative map window for the selected alternative will
appear in the Desktop Pane.

Save
To save an alternative, from the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.15), click Save.
Any changes that have occurred to the selected alternative will be saved by HEC-WAT.

Save As
To make a copy from an existing alternative:

1. From the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.15), click Save As. The Save
Alternative As dialog box will open (Figure 10.12). The information displayed in the
dialog box represents the alternative has been selected for copying.

2. In the Name box, enter the name (required) of the new alternative, and in the
Description box, enter a description (optional, but recommended).

3. The user can also choose to create a copy of the associated schematic (will create a new
schematic with the new alternative name) or use the associated schematic of the
alternative the user has selected to make a copy of.

4. The alternative name will now appear on the Study Tree, under the Alternatives folder
(Figure 10.3).

Delete from Study

To delete an alternative, from the individual alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.15), click
Delete From Study. A Confirm Manager Delete warning message will appear asking the user
does the user really want to delete the selected alternative. Click Yes, the warning message will
close. The alternative will no longer appear on the Study Tree under the Alternatives folder
(Figure 10.3).

10-11
Chapter 10 – Create and Manage Alternatives HEC-WAT User's Manual

Alternative Properties
The properties of an alternative include the name, description, when the alternative was
modified, who created the alternative, when the alternative was created, and the file that contains
the alternative data. To view the properties of an individual alternative, from the individual
alternative shortcut menu (Figure 10.15), click Properties. The Properties for
AlternativeName dialog box will open (Figure 10.13). See Section 10.3.3 for further details
about alternative properties.

10-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

CHAPTER 11
Create and Manage Simulations
Once model alternatives have been imported, and HEC-WAT alternatives and analysis periods
have been defined, the user can create an HEC-WAT simulation. A simulation in HEC-WAT is
a combination of an analysis period and an alternative. A program order (sequence of software
applications) will also need to be established. This chapter covers creating a program order (if
necessary), and how to create, edit, and manage simulations.

11.1 Program Order

HEC-WAT provides a flexible set of software applications, computation sequence, and data flow
for individual simulations. The user can establish several different program orders for one HEC-
WAT study. HEC-WAT has a default program order named Default, which consists of HEC-
HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS and HEC-FIA.

11.1.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 11.1), the user can manipulate program orders either
from the Toolbar, click , or from the Edit menu, click Program Order. From either method,
the Program Order dialog box will open (Figure 11.2).

Figure 11.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

11-1
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 11.2 Program Order Dialog Box

11.1.2 Alternative and Simulation Manager

From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.3), the user can define or edit a
program order either from the Toolbar, by clicking , or from the Edit menu, by clicking
Program Order. From either method, the Program Order dialog box will open (Figure 11.2).

Figure 11.3 Alternative and Simulation Manager

11.1.3 Create a Program Order

To create a program order:

1. By default, the Default program order is displayed in the Program Order dialog box
(Figure 11.2). To create a new program order, from the Program Order dialog box, from
the Program menu, click New. The New Program Order dialog box will open (Figure
11.4).
11-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

Figure 11.4 New Program Order Dialog Box

2. In the Name box (Figure 11.4) enter a name for the program order. Optionally (but
recommended), the user can provide a description in the Description box, and if the
software application has an icon that represents the software, the user can enter the
location of the icon file in the Icon box (Figure 11.4). The user can also browse to the
location of the icon file by clicking , an Open browser will open. Navigate to the
directory where the icon file is be stored, click Open. The Open browser will close and
the location of the icon file will display in the Icon box (Figure 11.4).

3. To select the software applications that are wanted in the program order, click Select
Programs, the Selection Editor will open (Figure 11.5). From the Available list, select
the software applications that are required for the program order. Click Add, the name of
the selected software applications will move to the Selected list (Figure 11.5). Make sure
to add the software applications in the order that the software applications will appear
within the compute sequence. HEC-WAT will direct the applications to compute in the
defined order.

Figure 11.5 Selection Editor

11-3
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

4. Once all the software applications have been selected, click OK, the Selection Editor will
close (Figure 11.5). On the New Program Order dialog box (Figure 11.4) the names of
the selected software applications will appear. Click OK, the New Program Order
dialog box (Figure 11.4) will close.

5. On the Program Order dialog box (Figure 11.2) the name of the new program order will
appear in the Name list, and the table will display the software applications selected.

11.1.4 Delete a Program Order

Deleting or editing a program order that is part of a simulation is not recommended. A new
program order should be created and then the simulation should be edited to use the new program
order. If a program order is deleted or edited that is part of a simulation, the simulation associated
with that program order should be deleted and then re-created.

1. From the Program Order dialog box (Figure 11.2), from the Name list, select the
program order that is to be deleted.

2. From the Program menu, click Delete. A Confirm Deletion window will open asking
the user if the user really wants to delete this program order. Click Yes, the Confirm
Deletion window will close and the selected program order is deleted.

11.1.5 Edit a Program Order

Editing or deleting a program order that is part of a simulation is not recommended. A new
program order should be created and then the simulation should be edited to use the new program
order. If a program order is edited or deleted that is part of a simulation, the simulation associated
with that program order should be deleted and then re-created.

1. From the Program Order dialog box (Figure 11.2), from the Edit menu, the user can
insert a new software application into a program order or remove a software application
from a program order.

2. To add a software application to the selected program order, select a row in the table on
the Program Order dialog box (Figure 11.6). From the Edit menu, click either Insert
Before or Insert After, the Select Program dialog box will open (Figure 11.7).

3. From the Name list select the software application that is to be added to the program
order, click OK. The Select Program dialog box will close (Figure 11.7) and the selected
software application will be added to the program order displayed on the Program Order
dialog box (Figure 11.6). Click Apply to save the change.

4. To remove a software application from the program order, select a row in the table on the
Program Order dialog box (11.6). From the Edit menu, click Remove. A Confirm
Removal window will open, checking with the user to be sure that the selected software
application is to be removed, click Yes. The Confirm Removal window will close, the

11-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

Figure 11.6 Program Order Dialog Box – Software Application Selected

Figure 11.7 Select Program Dialog Box

selected software application no longer is displayed in the table. Click Apply (Figure
11.6) to save the change.

5. A Confirm Save window will open, letting the user know that making a change to a
program order that is already being used in an existing simulation will affect that
simulation, click Yes. The Confirm Save window closes, and the change is saved to the
selected program order.

11.2 Simulations – Alternative and Simulation Manager

In HEC-WAT, the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11. 3) provides a convenient
way to organize and develop the main components for an HEC-WAT study – alternatives,
analysis period (time window), and simulations. From the table on the Alternative and
Simulation Manager (Figure 11.3) the user can organize a study's alternatives; a way to track the
state of datasets needed for each model alternative; create analysis periods (time windows;
Chapter 9); and, create simulations. Since the focus of this chapter is simulations, the focus of
this section will only be on the available commands from the table to develop and organize
simulations.

11-5
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

To access the Alternative and Simulation Manager, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure
11.1), from the WAT Tools toolbar (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1), click ; or, from the Edit menu,
click Alternative and Simulation Manager. From either method the Alternative and
Simulation Manager will open (Figure 11.3).

11.2.1 Create a Simulation - Table

In the table, when an intersection is blank, the user can create a simulation:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8), from the table, right-click
on the intersection of an alternative and analysis period (blank). From the shortcut menu
click Create Simulation. The Create New Simulation dialog box will open (Figure
11.9).

Figure 11.8 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Table

2. HEC-WAT has defined a default name for the simulation (e.g., Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb1986) in the Name box (Figure 11.9). The name is a combination of
the HEC-WAT alternative name and analysis period name, where the intersection was in
the table (name can be changed). Also, in the Alternative and Analysis Period lists
(Figure11.9) the selections have already been made based on the intersection in the table.
The selected Alternative cannot be changed, but the selected Analysis Period can be
changed.

3. The program order is Default.

4. In the F Part box (Figure 11.9), a DSS F-Part is displayed that was generated by HEC-
WAT based on the alternative and analysis period names.

5. In the Programs table (Figure 11.9), the software applications that were defined in the
program order appear in the order the software applications were selected. Now the user
must select the appropriate alternative (i.e., plan, run) for each software application. From
the Alternative column, for example, from the list for HMS (Figure 11.10), select the
appropriate HEC-HMS run ((RUN)Feb_1986). Repeat the process for the other software
applications.
11-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

Figure 11.9 Create New Simulation Dialog Box

Figure 11.10 Selection of Model Alternatives - Create New Simulation Dialog Box

6. Now that all of the alternatives have been selected, click OK. The Create New
Simulation dialog box will close (Figure 11.9). On the Alternative and Simulation
Manager (Figure 11.11), the intersection of the alternative and analysis period now
provides information about the simulation.

Figure 11.11 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Completed Simulation

11-7
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

7. Click OK; the Alternative and Simulation Manager will close (Figure 11.11). From the
HEC-WAT main window (Figure 11.1), the created simulation appears on the Study
Tree, under the Simulations folder (Figure 11.12).

Figure 11.12 Study Tree with Created Simulation

8. The Content Pane (Figure 11.13) displays information about the selected simulation.

Figure 11.13 Content Pane

9. Double click on the simulation name (e.g., Without Project Conditions-RR_Feb1986), a

Select Map dialog box will open. Click New Map Window, click OK. The Select Map
dialog box will close. The new map window will contain the schematic elements that
represent the simulation (Figure 11.1).

11.2.2 Create a Simulation - From another Simulation - Table

In the table, when an intersection is blank, the user can create a simulation from another
simulation:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8), from the table, right-click
on the intersection of an alternative and analysis period (blank). From the shortcut menu
click Create Simulation From.

2. The Select Simulation selector will open (Figure 11.14). From the Existing box, select a
simulation, the name of the simulation will appear in the Name box. Click Open, the

11-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

Figure 11.14 Select Simulation Selector

Select Simulation selector will close (Figure 11.14) and the Create New Simulation
dialog box will open (Figure 11.9).

3. HEC-WAT has defined a default name for the simulation (e.g., Without Project
Conditions-RR_Jan1986) in the Name box (Figure 11.9). The name is a combination of
the HEC-WAT alternative name and analysis period name, where the intersection was in
the table (name can be changed). Also, in the Alternative and Analysis Period lists
(Figure 11.9) the selections have already been made based on the intersection in the table.
The selected Alternative cannot be changed, but the selected Analysis Period can be
changed.

4. The program order is Default.

5. In the F Part box (Figure 11.9), a DSS F-Part is displayed that was generated by HEC-
WAT based on the alternative and analysis period names.

6. In the Programs table (Figure 11.9), the software applications that were defined in the
program order appear in the order the software applications were selected. The model
alternative (i.e., plan, run) for each software application that was created for the simulation
that was being copied from is displayed. The user can make adjustments if warranted for
this new simulation.

7. Now that all of the model alternatives have been selected, click OK. The Create New
Simulation dialog box will close (Figure 11.9). On the Alternative and Simulation
Manager (Figure 11.11), the intersection of the alternative and analysis period now
provides information about the simulation.

11-9
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

11.2.3 Create a Simulation - Toolbar

From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.11), from the Toolbar, click , the
Create New Simulation dialog box will open (Figure 11.15).

Figure 11.15 Create New Simulation Dialog Box - Blank

1. The Create New Simulation dialog box (Figure 11.15) is blank (when created from the
table most of the information about a simulation is known). The user must enter a name in
the Name box. The user can enter an optional description in the Description box.

2. From the Alternative list (Figure 11.15) select the HEC-WAT alternative that the user
wants to analyze.

3. From the Analysis Period list select the analysis period that represents the time window
for the analysis.

4. From the Program Order list, Default has already been selected. If there is another
program order that the user wants to use, then from the Program Order list, select the
appropriate program order. The user can also create a new program order by clicking New
(Figure 11.15). The New Program Order dialog box will open (Figure 11.4); follow the
instructions in Section 11.1.3 for creating a program order.

5. Once an analysis period is selected, HEC-WAT builds a default DSS F-Part based on the
alternative and analysis period selected.

6. In the Programs table (Figure 11.15), the software applications that were defined in the
program order appear in the order the software applications were selected. Now the user
must select the appropriate model alternative (i.e., plan, run) for each program. From the
Alternative column, for example, from the list for HMS (Figure 11.10), select the
11-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

appropriate HEC-HMS run ((RUN)Feb_1986). Repeat the process for the other software
applications.

7. Now that all of the model alternatives have been selected, click OK. The Create New
Simulation dialog box will close (Figure 11.15). On the Alternative and Simulation
Manager (Figure 11.11), the intersection of the alternative and analysis period now
provides information about the simulation.

8. Click OK; the Alternative and Simulation Manager will close (Figure 11.11). From the
HEC-WAT main window (Figure 11.1), the created simulation appears on the Study
Tree, under the Simulations folder (Figure 11.12).

9. The Content Pane (Figure 11.13) displays information about the selected simulation.

10. Double click on the simulation name (Without Project Conditions-RR_Feb1986), a Select
Map dialog box will open. Click New Map Window, click OK. The Select Map dialog
box will close. The new map window will contain the schematic elements that represent
the simulation (Figure 11.1).

11.2.4 Create a Simulation – File Menu

From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.3), from the File menu, point to
Simulation, click New, the Create New Simulation dialog box will open (Figure 11.15). The
instructions for creating a simulation are the same as described in Section 11.2.2.

11.2.5 Delete Simulation(s)

To delete simulation(s) from a study:

1. From the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.3), from the File menu, point
to Simulation, click Delete from Study, the Delete Simulation(s) dialog box will open
(Figure 11.16).

2. From the Existing list select simulation(s), in the Delete box the name(s) and descriptions
of the selected simulation(s) will appear.

3. Click Delete, a warning message will appear asking the user if the user really wants to
delete the selected simulation(s). Click Yes, the warning message will close and the
Delete Simulations(s) dialog box will close (Figure 11.16) and the simulation(s) will no
longer appear under the Simulation column of the table (Figure 11.11).

11.2.6 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu - Table

The individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17) is available from the Alternative and
Simulation Manager (Figure 11.11) by right-clicking on a simulation in the table. This shortcut
menu will allow the user to view the selected simulation in a map window; edit the model
alternatives associated with the selected simulation; remove the simulation map window; edit the
11-11
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 11.16 Delete Simulation(s) Dialog Box

Figure 11.17 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu

active simulation; open the Model Linking Editor (Chapter 12); compute; view the log of the
compute; view results; save changes to the simulation; delete the simulation from the study; view
the properties of the simulation; and, browse the run folder associated with the active simulation.
The following sections provide further details on these capabilities from the individual simulation
shortcut menu (Figure 11.17).

View a Simulation
To view a simulation in a map window:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Display in Map
Window.

11-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

2. If there is not a map window open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2), the
simulation map window for the simulation will open in the Desktop Pane. From the
simulation map window the user can edit the stream alignment, view model alternative
results, and edit model alternatives that are associated with a simulation.

3. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2), the Select Map
dialog box (Figure 11.18) will open. The user can choose whether to open the simulation
map window in the current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select
Map dialog box (Figure 11.18) will close, and the simulation map window for the selected
simulation will appear in the Desktop Pane.

Figure 11.18 Select Map Dialog Box

Edit the Model Alternatives of a Simulation

To edit the model alternatives associated with a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), point to Edit Model, from
the sub-menu (Figure 11.19) click on the model alternative that needs to be edited.

Figure 11.19 Editing a Model Alternative

11-13
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The user must expand the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8) so that the
length of the individual simulation shortcut menu fits within the manager.

3. The program associated with the model alternative that was selected will open. For
example, in Figure 11.19, if the model alternative calibrate is selected, the HEC-ResSim
software will open with the calibrate alternative selected.

4. The user can now make changes to the selected model alternative, save, and close the
program associated with the model alternative. For further details on the individual
program editors, see Appendix L.

Remove a Simulation from the Active Map Window

To remove a simulation from the active map window:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Remove from Map
Window.

2. The Remove from Map? message box will open asking the user if the user really wants
to remove the simulation from the active map window, click Yes. The message box will
close, and the map window will no longer display the simulation.

Edit a Simulation
To edit a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Edit Simulation. The
Simulation Editor will open (Figure 11.20).

Figure 11.20 Simulation Editor

11-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

2. The user can edit the name and the description of the simulation. The editor also provides
the user with information on what HEC-WAT alternative and analysis period are
associated with the simulation. The editor also provides information on what model
alternatives are currently being computed for the simulation. The user can change the
model alternatives and setup time window adjustments (Chapter 9) for each model
alternative.

3. Click OK, the Simulation Editor will close (Figure 11.20) and the information changed
will be saved.

Model Linking Editor

Opening the Model Linking Editor (Chapter 12):

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Model Linking
Editor. The Model Linking Editor will open (Figure 11.21).

Figure 11.21 Model Linking Editor

2. The Model Linking Editor provides the user with the capability of setting up or changing
the linking between the model alternatives of the selected simulation. Further details on
the Model Linking Editor are provided in Chapter 12.

3. From the File menu (Figure 11.21), click Close. The Model Linking Editor will close
(Figure 11.21) and the information changed will be saved.

Compute a Simulation
To compute a simulation (deterministic):

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), point to Compute, from the
sub-menu (Figure 11.22) the user can compute the entire simulation or compute individual
models.
11-15
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 11.22 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu - Compute

2. The user must expand the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8) so that the
length of the individual simulation shortcut menu fits within the manager.

3. To compute the simulation, hold down the CTRL key, click Simulation (Figure 11.22)

4. The Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 11.23) and the compute will begin.
From this dialog box the user can view which model alternative is computing for the
simulation and information from each model is displayed in the Compute Progress dialog
box.

Figure 11.23 Compute Progress Dialog Box

5. When the compute is finished click Close, the Compute Progress dialog box (Figure
11.23) will close.

11-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

View the Compute Log of a Simulation

To view the compute log of a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click View Compute Log.
The SimulationName.log Editor will open (Figure 11.24).

Figure 11.24 SimulationName.log Editor

2. This editor contains information regarding the compute for the selected simulation. This
information is provided by each individual software application that was part of the
compute.

3. When the compute is finished click Close, the SimulationName.log Editor (Figure 11.24)
will close.

Simulation Results
To view results for a simulation (deterministic):

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), point to Results, from the
sub-menu (Figure 11.25) the user can view results from the individual models and review
the DSS file associated with the simulation.

11-17
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 11.25 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu – Results

2. The user must expand the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8) so that the
length of the individual simulation shortcut menu fits within the manager.

3. Point to the individual software application that the user wants to display results. For
example, in Figure 11.25, if the software application HMS is selected, a list of available
outputs from the HEC-HMS software are listed. Click Global Summary Table, the
Global Summary Results dialog box will open (Figure 11.26).

Figure 11.26 HEC-HMS Results – Global Summary Results

Save a Simulation
To save a simulation, from the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11. 17), click Save.
Any changes that have occurred to the selected simulation will be saved by HEC-WAT.

11-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

Delete a Simulation
To delete a simulation, right-click on a simulation in the table, from the individual simulation
shortcut menu (Figure 11. 17), click Delete From Study. A warning message will appear asking
the user if the user really wants to delete the selected simulation. Click Yes, the intersection of
the alternative and analysis period/event that the simulation was associated with will now be
blank in table in the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.11).

Simulation Information
To view information about a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11. 17), click Properties. The
Properties for SimulationName dialog box will open (Figure 11.27).

Figure 11.27 Properties for SimulationName Dialog Box

2. From this dialog box the user can view information about the selected simulation – name
of simulation; description; date simulation was last modified; who created the simulation;
date simulation was created; and the location of the simulation file.

3. Click Close, the Properties for SimulationName dialog box (Figure 11.27) will close.

Browse Run Folder

This command takes the user to the location of the results that are generated by HEC-WAT when
a simulation is computed. The user can view the simulation.dss file using HEC-DSSVue from
this location; and, if the model folders have been saved the user can view results for the individual
models from HEC-RAS, HEC-ResSim, or HEC-FIA if necessary from this location.

11.3 Simulations – Study Tree

The user can also create simulations; delete individual and multiple simulations; save, view, edit,
and compute simulations. This section of the chapter describes how to perform these operations
directly from the Study Tree.

11-19
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

11.3.1 Create a Simulation

If there are no simulations in the study, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 11.1), from the
Study Tree, right-click on the Simulations folder. From the shortcut menu click New, the Create
New Simulation dialog box will open (Figure 11.15). The instructions for creating a simulation
are the same as described in Section 11.2.2.

11.3.2 Delete Simulation(s)

To delete simulation(s) from a study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 11.1), from the Study Tree, right-click on the
Simulations folder. From the shortcut menu click Delete from Study, the Delete
Simulation(s) dialog box will open (Figure 11.16).

2. From the Existing list select simulation(s), in the Delete box the name(s) and descriptions
of the selected simulation(s) will appear.

3. Click Delete, a warning message will appear asking the user if the user really wants to
delete the selected simulation(s). Click Yes, the warning message will close and the
Delete Simulations(s) dialog box will close (Figure 11.16) and the simulation(s) will no
longer appear under the Simulation folder of the Study Tree.

11.3.3 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu

The individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.14) is available from the Study Tree (Figure
11.11), by right-clicking on a simulation under the Simulations folder. This shortcut menu will
allow the user to view the selected simulation in a map window; edit the model alternatives
associated with the selected simulation; remove the simulation map window; edit the active
simulation; open the Model Linking Editor (Chapter 12); compute; view the log of the compute;
view results; save changes to the simulation; delete the simulation from the study; view the
properties of the simulation; and, browse the run folder associated with the active simulation. The
following sections provide further details on these capabilities from the individual simulation
shortcut menu (Figure 11.17).

View a Simulation
To view a simulation in a map window:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Display in Map
Window.

2. If there is not a map window open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2), the
simulation map window for the simulation will open in the Desktop Pane. From the

11-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

simulation map window the user can edit the stream alignment, view model alternative
results, and edit model alternatives that are associated with a simulation.

3. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2), the Select Map
dialog box (Figure 11.18) will open. The user can choose whether to open the simulation
map window in the current map window or in a new map window, click OK. The Select
Map dialog box (Figure 11.18) will close, and the simulation map window for the selected
simulation will appear in the Desktop Pane.

Edit the Model Alternatives of a Simulation

To edit the model alternatives associated with a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), point to Edit Model, from
the sub-menu (Figure 11.20) click on the model alternative that needs to be edited.

2. The user must expand the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8) so that the
length of the individual simulation shortcut menu fits within the manager.

3. The program associated with the model alternative that was selected will open. For
example, in Figure 11.19, if the model alternative calibrate is selected, the HEC-ResSim
software will open with the calibrate alternative selected.

4. The user can now make changes to the selected model alternative, save, and close the
program associated with the model alternative. For further details on the individual
program editors, see Appendix L.

Remove a Simulation from the Active Map Window

To remove a simulation from the active map window:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Remove from Map
Window.

2. The Remove from Map? message box will open asking the user if the user really wants
to remove the simulation from the active map window, click Yes. The message box will
close, and the map window will no longer display the simulation.

Edit a Simulation
To edit a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Edit Simulation. The
Simulation Editor will open (Figure 11.20).

2. The user can edit the name and the description of the simulation. The editor also provides
the user with information on what HEC-WAT alternative and analysis period are
11-21
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

associated with the simulation. The editor also provides information on what model
alternatives are currently being computed for the simulation. The user can change the
model alternatives and setup time window adjustments (Chapter 9) for each model
alternative.

3. Click OK, the Simulation Editor will close (Figure 11.20) and the information changed
will be saved.

Model Linking Editor

Opening the Model Linking Editor (Chapter 12):

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click Model Linking
Editor. The Model Linking Editor will open (Figure 11.21).

2. The Model Linking Editor provides the user with the capability of setting up or changing
the linking between the model alternatives of the selected simulation. Further details on
the Model Linking Editor are provided in Chapter 12.

3. From the File menu (Figure 11.21), click Close. The Model Linking Editor will close
(Figure 11.21) and the information changed will be saved.

Compute a Simulation
To compute a simulation (deterministic):

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), point to Compute, from the
sub-menu (Figure 11.22) the user can compute the entire simulation or compute individual
models.

2. The user must expand the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8) so that the
length of the individual simulation shortcut menu fits within the manager.

3. To compute the simulation, hold down the CTRL key, click Simulation (Figure 11.17)

4. The Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 11.23) and the compute will begin.
From this dialog box the user can view which model alternative is computing for the
simulation and information from each model is displayed in the Compute Progress dialog
box.

5. When the compute is finished click Close, the Compute Progress dialog box (Figure
11.23) will close.

View the Compute Log of a Simulation

To view the compute log of a simulation:
11-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), click View Compute Log.
The SimulationName.log Editor will open (Figure 11.24).

2. This editor contains information regarding the compute for the selected simulation. This
information is provided by each individual software application that was part of the
compute.

3. When the compute is finished click Close, the SimulationName.log Editor (Figure 11.24)
will close.

Simulation Results
To view results for a simulation (deterministic):

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11.17), point to Results, from the
sub-menu (Figure 11.25) the user can view results from the individual models and review
the DSS file associated with the simulation.

2. The user must expand the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.8) so that the
length of the individual simulation shortcut menu fits within the manager.

3. Point to the individual software application that the user wants to display results, for
example, in Figure 11.25, if the software application HMS is selected, a list of available
outputs from the HEC-HMS software are listed. Click Global Summary Table, the
Global Summary Results dialog box will open (Figure 11.26).

Save a Simulation
To save a simulation, from the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11. 17), click Save.
Any changes that have occurred to the selected simulation will be saved by HEC-WAT.

Delete a Simulation
To delete a simulation, right-click on a simulation in the table, from the individual simulation
shortcut menu (Figure 11. 17), click Delete From Study. A warning message will appear asking
the user if the user really wants to delete the selected simulation. Click Yes, the intersection of
the alternative and analysis period/event that the simulation was associated with will now be
blank in table in the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 11.11).

Simulation Information
To view information about a simulation:

1. From the individual simulation shortcut menu (Figure 11. 17), click Properties. The
Properties for SimulationName dialog box will open (Figure 11.27).

11-23
Chapter 11 – Create and Manage Simulations HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. From this dialog box the user can view information about the selected simulation – name
of simulation; description; date simulation was last modified; who created the simulation;
date simulation was created; and the location of the simulation file.

3. Click Close, the Properties for SimulationName dialog box (Figure 11.27) will close.

Browse Run Folder

This command takes the user to the location of the data that is generated by HEC-WAT when a
simulation is computed. The user can view the simulation.dss file using HEC-DSSVue from this
location; and, if the model folders have been saved the user can view results for the individual
models from HEC-RAS, HEC-ResSim, or HEC-FIA if necessary from this location.

11-24
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

CHAPTER 12

Model Linking
The next step is to have the model alternatives within a simulation communicate with each other,
by sharing data. This is accomplished by linking (DSS mapping, grid files) the model
alternatives through DSS and using a simulation name. From HEC-WAT, the Model Linking
Editor (Figure 12.1) provides an easy way to link model alternatives including observed data,
and provides a mechanism where the linking will have to be done once per model alternative.

Figure 12.1 Model Linking Editor

Model linking is the mechanism that allows the model alternatives involved in an HEC-WAT
simulation to share data. The available software applications are defined through a program order
(Chapter 11) that is defined by the user. This program order defines the software applications
that will be used and the order in which the software applications will be run in a simulation.

From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1), a model alternative is selected as the Model To
Link, the current linkage of the selected model alternative displays in the table of the Model
Linking Editor (Figure 12.1). From the Input From Model column, the model alternative that
contains the correct data that needs to be linked is selected. HEC-WAT facilitates this linking
from one model alternative to the next in an HEC-WAT simulation, with the linking information
being saved by the software application (e.g., linkage for an FIA model alternative is saved to an
HEC-FIA *.fits file) of the selected Model to Link alternative.

12-1
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

12.1 Model Linking Editor

To access the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1), from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure
12.2), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click . Alternatively, from the HEC-WAT main
window, from the Edit menu, click Model Linking Editor. From either method the Model
Linking Editor will open (Figure 12.1).

Figure 12.2 HEC-WAT Main Window

An example basic model linking scenario is described in the following steps.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 12.2), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click ,
the Model Linking Editor will open (Figure 12.1).

2. A program order (Chapter 11) of HEC-HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA

has been selected for the study. For these software applications, model alternatives (i.e.,
HEC-HMS (simulations/runs), HEC-ResSim (alternatives), HEC-FIA (alternatives),
HEC-RAS (plans)) have been imported into the HEC-WAT study.

3. From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1), the user selects an HEC-WAT simulation
from the Simulation list (Figure 12.3).

Figure 12.3 Model Linking Editor – Simulation List

12-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

4. For example, in Figure 12.3, a simulation has already been selected – Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb1986. Since the HEC-WAT study has an active simulation
(simulation is bold in the Study Tree; a Simulation Map Window is open in the
Desktop Pane) the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) has already selected that
simulation.

5. Once a simulation has been selected, the user now must select a model alternative for
linking. From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) from the Model To Link list
(Figure 12.4).

Figure 12.4 Model Linking Editor – Model To Link List

6. For example, in Figure 12.4, from the Model to Link list, the user is selecting a RAS
model alternative – RAS-Base for Real Time forecasting.

7. The Model Linking Editor table (Figure 12.5) now displays all of the locations from the
RAS model alternative that will require information (e.g., time-series or levee failure
elevations) from other model alternatives in the HEC-WAT simulation. The initial
linking (Figure 12.5) displayed in the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.5) will be what
is defined in the base HEC-RAS model. For example, Figure 12.5 shows the RAS model
alternative is linked to DSS files.

Figure 12.5 Model Linking Editor - RAS Model Alternative Unlinked

12-3
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

8. For this example (Figure 12.5), the user knows that the RAS model alternative linking
will be results from the HMS and ResSim model alternatives. Most of the locations will
be linked with an HMS model alternative, and a couple of the locations will be linked to a
ResSim model alternative.

9. From the table the user can link each location individually (which will be described in
Step 12); but since most of the locations in the table will be linked to an HMS model
alternative, for this example the user will link all locations to an HMS model alternative.
From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.5), click Default Model to Link, the Select
Default Model to Link dialog box will open (Figure 12.6).

Figure 12.6 Select Default Model To Link Dialog Box

10. From the Default Model to Link list (Figure 12.7), there are three choices. This list is
based on the program order that was selected for this simulation. In that program order,
the HEC-HMS and HEC-ResSim software application were selected to compute before
the HEC-RAS software application. The DSS File option allows the user to link
locations to a DSS file. For this example, the user will select the HMS model alternative
HMS-(RUN)Feb_1986. Click OK, the Select Default Model to Link dialog box will
close (Figure 12.6).

Figure 12.7 Default Model To Link List

11. A Confirm Input from From Model changing to window (Figure 12.8) will appear
prompting the user about whether or not to proceed, click Yes. The Confirm Input from
From Model changing to window closes, and the Model Linking Editor now displays
the linking for the RAS model alternative (Figure 12.9).

Figure 12.8 Confirm Input from Model changing to Window

12-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

Figure 12.9 Model Linking Editor - RAS Model Alternative to HMS Model Alternative

12. For this example, there are locations in the RAS model alternative linking that need to be
linked to a ResSim model alternative. From the Model Linking Editor table (Figure
12.10) the user will locate one of the locations (DryCreek DryCreek RS 74716.8 (Sonoma
Outflow J)). From the row, from the Input Model column (Figure 12.10), the user will
select the ResSim model alternative - ResSim-calibrate.

Figure 12.10 Model Linking Editor – Individual Locations

13. Once the linking is finished for the RAS model alternative, from the Model Linking
Editor (Figure 12.11) click to save the linking.

This example completes the linking for the RAS model alternative. From the above steps the
user should be able to perform the linking for the other model alternatives associated with the
selected simulation. HEC-WAT attempts to choose the correct linking based on information
from the individual model alternatives and locations that have been identified (i.e., element
names, common computation points). The user should carefully review all linkages to make sure
the right choices have been made.

12.2 Dynamic Linking

The example in Section 12.1 addressed modeling linking for one simulation, what happens when
the HEC-WAT study contains many HEC-WAT simulations? If the same model alternatives are
used in other simulations, there could be an issue when a model alternative in one simulation

12-5
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 12.11 Model Linking Editor - Completed RAS Model Alternative Linking

needs to be linked to a different model alternative in another simulation. One example is where
RAS model alternative Plan A needs to be linked to HMS model alternative Simulation A in one
HEC-WAT simulation and then HMS model alternative Simulation B in another HEC-WAT
simulation. Dynamic linking can be used in this case to eliminate the need to create a new model
alternative for each HEC-WAT simulation (in the example above, RAS model alternative Plan A
would have to be duplicated) where the linking changes, dynamic linking can be used. Dynamic
linking is not required, but can save the user time in instances like the above example.

Dynamic linking modifies the DSS pathname F-part such that a single model alternative can be
applied to several HEC-WAT simulations. For example, in Figure 12.12, the same RAS model
alternative Base for Real Time forecasting, is used in both the Without Project
Conditions_Feb1986 and Without Project Conditions_Jan1995 simulations. The original linking
for the Base for Real Time forecasting model alternative was done in the Without Project
Conditions_Feb1986 simulation. This simulation is linked to the HMS model alternative,
(RUN)Feb 1986. The HEC-WAT simulation Without Project Conditions-RR_Jan1995 uses the
(RUN)Jan_1995 HMS model alternative.

Figure 12.12 Multiple Simulations using the same RAS Model Alternative - Base for Real Time
forecasting

If dynamic linking was not used for the Without Project Conditions-RR_Jan1995 simulation, the
RAS model alternative would look for results from the (RUN)Feb_1986 HMS model alternative
12-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

during the Without Project Conditions-RR_Jan1995 compute. Dynamic linking allows the Base
for Real Time forecasting RAS model alternative to be linked to additional HMS model
alternatives with little additional effort. Without dynamic linking, a copy of Base for Real Time
forecasting would have to be created in HEC-RAS for each simulation in the HEC-WAT study
that used different HMS or ResSim model alternatives.

An example dynamic linking scenario is described in the following steps.

1. In Section 12.1, the user has set the linking for the RAS model alternative Base for Real
Time forecasting for the simulation Without Project Conditions_Feb1986. Now the user
needs to do the linking for the RAS model alternative in the second HEC-WAT
simulation Without Project Conditions_Jan1995

2. From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1), the user selects Without Project
Conditions_Jan1995 from the Simulation list (Figure 12.3).

3. From the Model to Link list (Figure 12.3), the user selects Base for Real Time
forecasting.

4. The Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.13) now displays all of the locations for the RAS
model alternative that need to be linked. As displayed in Figure 12.13, all of the
locations are displayed in green (except for the two locations that are linked to the
ResSim model alternative) indicating the model alternative has already been linked in a
different HEC-WAT simulation.

Figure 12.13 Model Linking Editor - RAS Model Alternative Already Linked

5. To dynamically link, from the toolbar on the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.13), click
, or from the Edit menu, click Dynamic Linkage. From either method, the Dynamic
Linkage Editor will open (Figure 12.14).

6. Since the RAS model alternative Base for Real Time forecasting requires model results
from multiple HMS model alternatives across multiple HEC-WAT simulations, dynamic
linking needs to be applied for the RAS model alternative. The second simulation

12-7
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 12.14 Dynamic Linkage Editor

Without Project Conditions_Jan1995 requires a different HMS model alternative to be

used, but not a different ResSim model alternative. Therefore, dynamic linking is only
required for the HMS model alternative.

7. To set dynamic linking for the HMS model alternative, from the table on the Dynamic
Linkage Editor (Figure 12.14), in the Existing Model column, in the first cell, from the
list, select HMS. In the Existing Alternative column, in the first cell, from the list, select
(RUN)Feb_1986. In the New Alternative column, in the first cell, from the list select
HMS-(RUN)Jan_1995 (Figure 12.14).

8. Click OK, the Dynamic Linkage Editor closes (Figure 12.14) and on the Model
Linking Editor (Figure 12.15), all of the locations linked to the HMS model alternative
display in blue. This means all of those locations are dynamically linked, or linked to
different model inputs in different HEC-WAT simulations. The Dynamically Linked
column (Figure 12.15) will show a check mark for each row that is dynamically linked.

Figure 12.15 Dynamic Linkage Editor – Dynamically Linked Locations

12-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

9. Once the linking is finished for the RAS model alternative, from the Model Linking
Editor (Figure 12.15) click , this will save the linking.

This example illustrates the dynamic linking option for the RAS model alternative in two
different HEC-WAT simulations. What did dynamic linking do? By using dynamic linking for
the second simulation, during a compute of that simulation the dynamically linked DSS
pathname F-parts will substitute the existing alternative name with the new alternative name
when creating pathnames for the models to pass results. How? When a model alternative is
linked within an HEC-WAT study, the software application specific files associated with that
model alternative are changed. The model specific files are saved in the HEC-WAT study
directory within the corresponding software application folders. For example, when the RAS
model alternative (a plan in HEC-RAS) Base for Real Time forecasting was linked to other
model alternatives in the HEC-WAT compute sequence, the selected information for that
specific HEC-RAS model was saved to an HEC-RAS file with the extension *.p##.wcfLinks in
the ras folder of the HEC-WAT study directory. The other software applications, in the compute
sequence use different file extensions to save information for each simulation, analysis, or
alternative within those pieces of software. The main point is that files in the model specific
folders are modified anytime an individual model is linked within an HEC-WAT simulation.

Dynamic linking also removes the user from having to create an additional HEC-RAS plan for
the second HEC-WAT simulation. Could the user choose to perform the linking this way and
choose not to use dynamic linking – yes. But if the study the user is analyzing will require a
large amount of simulations for analysis, serious thought should be given on which approach to
use.

Currently, HEC-HMS does not support dynamic linking in HEC-WAT Version 1.0. HEC-HMS
is usually the first model in the compute sequence, where dynamic linking is used less often. For
HEC-HMS, dynamic linking would be beneficial for linking hydrologic sampling alternatives
with different precipitation information between hydrologic sampling alternatives. To work
around this limitation the user must create duplicate copies of the HEC-HMS simulation (or
Monte Carlo analysis), and link each one to the appropriate HEC-WAT alternative.

12.3 Select Source Data

Data listed in the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) displays the type of results the location
needs. In some cases the data type might not be recognized or the type of data is not what the
user is expecting. For this reason, the user can specify a data type for a certain location.

1. Select a row in the Model Linking Editor table (e.g., SantaRosa Cr), click Select
Source Data (Figure 12.1). If the Input From Model column (Figure 12.1) refers to a
model alternative, the Select Source Data Location dialog box will open (Figure 12.16).
If the Input From Model column (Figure 12.1) refers to a DSS file, then HEC-DSSVue
opens to allow the user to select a DSS file.

2. To review a list of locations in the Select Source Data Location dialog box, from the
Location (Figure 12.16) list, the user will select which model alternative's locations to
review. The list is the known locations that were part of the original model alternative's

12-9
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 12.16 Select Source Data Location Dialog Box

standalone model. To show all locations available, the user should select Show All
Source Locations.

3. From the Location column (Figure 12.16), select the row that contains the correct
information (e.g., Santa Rosa Ck Loc). Click Set Location. The row selected in Step 1
will now contain the new location information selected from the Select Source Data
Location dialog box. The Select Source Data dialog box (Figure 12.16) will remain
open allowing the user to continue selecting source data for different rows in the Model
Linking Editor (Figure 12.1).

4. Click Close, the Select Source Data Location dialog box will close (Figure 12.16).

12.4 Data Locations

Data locations allow the user to view all available data at a particular location for each model
alternative. This includes input data and results from model alternatives.

1. From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1), from the View menu, click Locations.
The Data Locations dialog box will open (Figure 12.17).

2. From the Simulation list (Figure 12.17) the user can select a simulation, and then select a
model alternative from the Model to Link list (Figure 12.17). Next the user can select
whether to view input or output locations that are available from the model selected.

3. If the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) does not have any locations for a particular
model alternative and the Data Locations dialog box (Figure 12.17) does not have any
12-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

Figure 12.17 Data Locations Dialog Box

locations either, then something is not working between HEC-WAT and the selected
model alternative. The output location list will give the user an idea of what results
would be available from the model alternative after a compute.

4. Click Close, the Data Locations dialog box will close (Figure 12.17).

12.5 Model Linking Report

From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) the user can print the linking for a simulation or
model alternative.

1. From the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1), from the File menu, click Print, or from
the Toolbar click , a Select Report Type message window will open (Figure 12.18).

Figure 12.18 Select Report Type Message Window

12-11
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The user is prompted to print the linkage for either the simulation or the model
alternative. After making a selection, the Select Report Type message window will
close, and a print Properties dialog box will open (Figure 12.19). The user can now
format the Model Linking Report. When the user is done formatting, click Print.

Figure 12.19 Print Properties Dialog Box

3. A Print dialog box will open (Figure 12.20). From this dialog the user can choose which
printer to print to and also setup other printer properties. Click OK, the Print dialog box
will close and the Model Linking Report (Figure 12.21) will print.

Figure 12.20 Print Dialog Box

12-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 12 – Model Linking

Figure 12.21 Model Linking Report

12.6 Model Linking Editor – Study Tree

The user can also access the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) from the Study Tree of an
active HEC-WAT study (Figure 12.22). From the Study Tree, under the Simulation folder,
right click on a simulation. From the shortcut menu, click Model Linking Editor, the Model
Linking Editor will open (Figure 12.1).

Figure 12.22 Study Tree – Model Linking Editor

12-13
Chapter 12 – Model Linking HEC-WAT User's Manual

12.7 Modeling Linking Editor – Alternative & Simulation

Manager
The user can also access the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1) from the Alternative and
Simulation Manager (Figure 12.23). From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 12.2), from
the WAT Tools toolbar, click , the Alternative and Simulation Manager will open (Figure
12.23). From the toolbar, click ; from the Edit menu, click Model Linking Editor; or from
the table, right-click on a simulation, from the shortcut menu (Chapter 11, Section 11.2.6), click
Model Linking Editor. Either method will open the Model Linking Editor (Figure 12.1).

Figure 12.23 Alternative and Simulation Manager

12-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 13 – Final Study Setup - Deterministic

CHAPTER 13

Final Study Setup - Deterministic

The user now has an understanding of the HEC-WAT framework, knows how to create a study
and has experience using map layers. The user has also created or imported model alternatives,
created study alternatives and simulations, setup analysis periods, and defined model linking.
There are a few final setup items that need to occur before a deterministic compute can happen:
define plug-ins; adjust map layers; and, enter the correct lookback window for an HEC-ResSim
model (if HEC-ResSim is part of the study).

13.1 Define Plug-Ins for a Study

Plug-ins (Chapter 2) allow HEC-WAT to integrate software applications into its framework
without requiring special code in HEC-WAT to support the individual software applications.
Currently there are nineteen plug-ins available (Appendix B provides further details), eight
specifically for standalone software applications, and eleven specifically for HEC-WAT
functions. While all of these plug-ins are available, the user should inform HEC-WAT which
plug-ins are needed in the Study Details dialog box (Figure 13.1). Plug-ins can be
enabled/disabled from the Options dialog box (Appendix B), but this should only be done to
enable/disable specific plug-ins for specialized studies or when there is an issue with a plug-in.

Figure 13.1 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab – Deterministic

13-1
Chapter 13 - Final Study Setup - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

To set the specific plug-ins for the active study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 13.2), from the File menu, click Study
Details, the Study Details dialog box (Figure 13.1) will open.

Figure 13.2 HEC-WAT Main Window

2. The Study Details dialog box (Figure 13.1) displays the name of the study, the study
description (which the user can edit), location of the study file (*.sty), the selected unit
system, the selected coordinate system, the user name of the team member that created
the study, and the date and time the study was created.

3. Click the Plugins tab (Figure 13.1), by default, all plug-ins are enabled (Figure 13.3).
Alternatively, in Figure 13.1, shows the active study in which the only plug-ins enabled
are FIA, HEC-SSP, HMS, RAS, and ResSim.

Figure 13.3 Study Plug-Ins Defaults

13-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 13 – Final Study Setup - Deterministic

3. To disable a plug-in clear the check mark in the Enabled column of the table (Figure
13.1). When the user has the right plug-in configuration, click OK. The Study Details
dialog box will close (Figure 13.1) and the plug-in configuration for the active study has
been set.

13.2 Adjust Map Layers

Whether models were built from HEC-WAT or imported, there could be map layers that define
the study area. The user may need to adjust the map layers (not required) so that the schematic
displays information to the study team and others.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, click the Maps tab (Figure 13.4). Now the user can
see which Map Window is currently active and what layers make up that Map Window.
The user can now make adjustments (changes to draw properties) to the map layers, from
the Map Layers tree:

Figure 13.4 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab

● Un-check a map layer so that it will no longer display in the active map window.
For example in Figure 13.4, the Raingages_Albers_ft.shp map layer has been un-
checked.

● For map layers, the user can change the display properties of the selected map layer.
For example, in Figure 13.4, the user could right-click on the RR_ImpactAreas.shp
map layer, from the shortcut menu, click Properties. The Edit Polygon Properties

13-3
Chapter 13 - Final Study Setup - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Editor will open (Figure 13.5). From the Fill tab, change the color to "lightgreen",
click OK. The impact areas on the active map window will now display in
"lightgreen".

Figure 13.5 Edit Polygon Properties Editor

● Move layers to better display certain aspects of the schematic. For example, in
Figure 13.4, right-click on Stream Alignment, from the shortcut menu click Move
To Top. The Stream Alignment layer is now the top layer in the schematic.

2. The user can adjust the view of the study area in the active map window. Using the
Magnifier tool, zoom the study area in the active map window to the appropriate area
that the user would like displayed. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 13.4),
from the Maps menu, click Default Map Properties, the Default Map Properties for
dialog box will open (Figure 13.6). Click Set Map Extents to Display, click OK. The
Default Map Properties for dialog box will close.

Figure 13.6 Default Map Properties for Dialog Box

13-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 13 – Final Study Setup - Deterministic

This sets the extents for the Map Window so that when the study is opened the next time
the Map Window will be zoomed in to the tighter area.

13.3 Lookback Window – HEC-ResSim (only)

The time window for an HEC-ResSim run has two parts, a "lookback period" and a "simulation
or forecast period". The lookback period is used by HEC-ResSim to "warm up" a ResSim model
alternative. During this period, routing of flows through the river and reservoir network are
performed but no release decisions are made nor are any mass balance computations evaluated.
The user should think of the lookback period as the time to establish the state of the river
network and the starting conditions of the reservoirs. The simulation period is the portion of the
time window during which HEC-ResSim simulates reservoir operations, and makes release
decisions based on the operation logic defined by the user. Releases are then routed through the
river network, combining with local inflows along the way.

HEC-WAT and most of the models treat the analysis period as a single, continuous time
window. For this reason, a setup step is required for each ResSim model alternative in an HEC-
WAT study. The setup step lets each ResSim model alternative know how much of the analysis
period to use for the lookback period.

To setup the lookback period:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 13.3), from the Edit menu, point to ResSim,
click Lookback Window (Figure 13.7), the Lookback Window dialog box (Figure
13.8) will open.

Figure 13.7 Edit Menu – ResSim – Lookback Window

13-5
Chapter 13 - Final Study Setup - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 13.8 Lookback Window Dialog Box

2. The table on the Lookback Window dialog box (Figure 13.8) displays the ResSim model
alternatives that are available in the HEC-WAT study. Each model alternative that is
being used in an HEC-WAT simulation will need to have a lookback window set. For
example, in Figure 13.8, the ResSim model alternative calibrate has a TimeStep of one
(1) hour and Lookback Steps of 6.

3. For each Alternative listed, a TimeStep (compute interval) and number of Lookback
Steps must be specified. The time step can be selected from the TimeStep column
(Figure 13.8), in each cell there is a list of available time steps for the user to choose
from. The selected time step has to match the time step that was specified for the ResSim
model alternative as part of the alternative's original Run Control data (which is located
in the HEC-ResSim Alternative Editor). The number of lookback steps must be entered in
a cell in the Lookback Steps column (Figure 13.8). At least one lookback time step is
required for a ResSim model alternative to compute, however more lookback steps may
be needed, depending on a variety of factors in the ResSim model alternative's operating
rules. The HEC-ResSim modeler should be consulted to determine the minimum
lookback window needed by each ResSim model alternative. As mentioned, the
lookback period takes place within the analysis period (time window) that HEC-WAT
provides to the ResSim model alternative. No reservoir operations will be simulated
during the lookback period, which could impact model results.

4. Click OK, the Lookback Window dialog box (Figure 13.8) will close.

Now that all of the setup has been completed, the user is ready to compute HEC-WAT
simulations.

13-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 14 – Compute/Results - Deterministic

CHAPTER 14
Compute/Results - Deterministic
Now that simulations have been defined and the linking of model alternatives has been
completed for the simulations, the user is now ready to compute. Once again HEC-WAT
provides the user with several ways to compute simulations. The user can compute a simulation
individually, compute multiple simulations, compute individual model alternatives, or compute a
simulation through a specific model alternative. For example if the user defined a compute
sequence of HEC-HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA and only wanted to compute a
simulation through the HEC-RAS model, HEC-WAT could request that the HEC-HMS, HEC-
ResSim and HEC-RAS software applications compute their individual model alternatives (i.e.,
simulation, alternative, plan) for the HEC-WAT simulation alternative. The following sections
describe in detail how to compute simulations in HEC-WAT.

14.1 Compute – Single Simulation

14.1.1 Study Tree

Computing a simulation from the Study Tree:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 14.1), from the Study Tree, from the
Simulations folder, right-click on a simulation (e.g., Without Project Conditions-
RR_Feb1986). From the shortcut menu (Figure 14.1) point to Compute, hold down the
CTRL key, click Simulation.

Figure 14.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

14-1
Chapter 14 – Computes/Results - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. Holding down the Ctrl key forces all models alternatives in the compute sequence to
compute, and is the recommended way to compute until additional coordination between
HEC-WAT and software application teams has been completed.

3. The Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 14.2). When the compute is
finished, click Close, the Compute Progress dialog box will close (Figure 14.2).

Figure 14.2 Compute Progress Dialog Box

14.1.2 Compute Menu

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 14.1) from the Compute menu (Figure 14.3), the
user can compute a single simulation from different commands. If a simulation is active
(displayed in a Simulation Map Window in the Desktop Pane), then the first item in the
Compute menu will be that simulation's name (e.g., Without Project Conditions-RR_Feb1986),
hold down the CTRL key, click on the simulation, the Compute Progress dialog box will open
(Figure 14.2) and the compute will start.

Alternately, from the Compute menu (Figure 14.3), point to Recent Simulations, a list of
recently computed simulations will display. Hold down the CTRL key, click on the simulation
that is to be computed. The Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 14.2) and the
compute will start.

Figure 14.3 HEC-WAT Main Window – Compute Menu

14-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 14 – Compute/Results - Deterministic

Finally, from the Compute menu (Figure 14.3), point to Compute, hold down the CTRL key,
click Simulation, the Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 14.2), and the Compute
Progress dialog box will open (Figure 14.2) and the compute will start. This will compute the
active simulation (displayed in a Simulation Map Window in the Desktop Pane).

14.2 Compute – Multiple Simulations

To compute multiple simulations (non-FRA simulations):

1. From the Compute menu (Figure 14.3), click Compute Manager, the Compute
Manager dialog box will open (Figure 14.4).

Figure 14.4 Compute Manager Dialog Box

2. From the tree, simulations are organized by HEC-WAT alternatives (i.e., Without Project
Conditions), with sub-nodes being the simulations (i.e., Without Project Conditions-
RRFeb1986) that have been defined for an HEC-WAT alternative.

3. By default, the known simulations are all selected for computing. To un-select
simulations, click the checkbox next to a simulation, the check mark will disappear and
the simulation will not be computed. To easily de-select all simulations, click Deselect
All (Figure 14.4); to select all simulations, click Select All (Figure 14.4).

4. Force Recompute (Figure 14.4) forces all models in the compute sequence to re-
compute, and is the recommended way to re-compute until additional coordination
between HEC-WAT and application teams has been completed.

5. For each simulation that is computed, a Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure
14.2). When computing several simulations at once, many Compute Progress dialog
boxes will be visible. The user can turn off the appearance of the Compute Progress
dialog boxes by clicking Close Progress Windows (Figure 14.4).

14-3
Chapter 14 – Computes/Results - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

6. Once the simulations have been selected in the Computer Manager dialog box (Figure
14.4), click Compute, a Compute Progress dialog box (Figure 14.2) will open for each
simulation as that simulation starts to compute.

7. When done computing simulations, click Close (Figure 14.4), the Compute Manager
dialog box will close (Figure 14.4).

14.3 Compute – Individual Model Alternatives

Individual model alternatives (i.e., simulations, plans, alternatives) can be computed from within
an HEC-WAT compute sequence. For example, within a compute sequence that includes HEC-
HMS, HEC-ResSim, HEC-RAS and then HEC-FIA, the user can choose to run just the HMS
model alternative within the compute sequence, or run only the HMS and ResSim model
alternatives. The user can also choose to run the entire compute sequence.

The user can compute individual model alternatives from the HEC-WAT framework from
several different places. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 14.1), from the Study Tree,
from the Simulations folder, right-click on a simulation (e.g., Without Project Conditions-
RR_Feb1986). From the shortcut menu (Figure 14.1) point to Compute, from the sub-menu the
user can choose which available model alternative to compute. The Compute Progress dialog
box will open (Figure 14.2) and the compute will start.

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 14.1), from the Compute menu (Figure 14.3), point
to Compute, from the sub-menu the user can choose which available model alternative to
compute. The Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 14.2) and the compute will start.

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 14.1), the user needs to select a simulation from the
Study Tree, under the Simulation folder. The Content Pane (Figure 14.5) contains information
about the selected simulation, including what model alternatives are part of the simulation. From
a model alternative, right-click, from the shortcut menu click Compute. The Compute
Progress dialog box will open (Figure 14.2) and the compute will start.

Figure 14.5 Content Pane – Individual Model Alternatives Shortcut Menu

14-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 14 – Compute/Results - Deterministic

14.4 Compute through a Specific Model Alternative

The user can compute a simulation through an individual model alternative from the Study Tree,
from the Simulations folder, right-click on a simulation (e.g., Without Project Conditions-
RR_Feb1986). From the shortcut menu (Figure 14.1) point to Compute, from the sub-menu,
click on the model alternative where the compute will stop. The Compute Progress dialog box
will open (Figure 14.2) and the compute will start. The user can perform the same function from
the Compute menu (Figure 14.3). If previous model alternatives have been computed and not
changed, those model alternatives will be skipped.

14.5 Compute Log

To view a simulation compute log:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 14.1), from the Study Tree, from the
Simulations folder, right-click on a simulation, from the shortcut menu (Figure 14.6),
click View Compute Log. Also, from the Compute Menu (Figure 14.3), click View
Compute Log – this command is only available when there is an active simulation
(displayed in a Simulation Map Window in the Desktop Pane). Both methods open the
View Compute Log Editor (Figure 14.7).

Figure 14.6 Individual Simulation Shortcut Menu – View Compute Log

2. The compute log opens in an editor that allows the user to edit, search, print, and format
the log. The search function lets the user search for specific items to troubleshoot or
review details regarding one of the software applications in the compute sequence.

3. From the File menu, click Close, the Compute Log Editor will close (Figure 14.7).

14-5
Chapter 14 – Computes/Results - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 14.7 Compute Log Editor

14.6 Results Menu

From the HEC-WAT Results menu, the user can access results from the different software
applications in a compute sequence. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 4.1), from the
Results menu (Figure 14.8), the user will point to a software application from which the user
wants to view results.

Figure 14.8 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu - HMS

14-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 14 – Compute/Results - Deterministic

For example, in Figure 14.8, the user points to HMS, clicks Global Summary Table, the
Global Summary Results for that particular HMS model alternative will display (Figure 14.9).
The summary table is a native summary table that is generated by HEC-HMS; however, the
summary table is accessed through HEC-WAT.

Figure 14.9 HMS - Global Summary Report

For HEC-RAS, from the Results menu, point to RAS, the sub-menu (Figure 14.10) provides a
list of available HEC-RAS results from which the user can select. For example, from the RAS
results menu, click Plot XYZ 3-D, the X-Y-Z Perspective Plot dialog box will open (Figure
14.11). The plot is a native result that is generated by HEC-RAS; however, the plot is accessed
through HEC-WAT.

Figure 14.10 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu - RAS

14-7
Chapter 14 – Computes/Results - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 14.11 RAS - X-Y-Z Perspective Plot

14.7 Content Pane

Once a simulation has been computed, the user can review the same reports that are available
from the Results menu from the Content Pane. From the Content Pane, right-click on one of
the available model alternatives, from the shortcut menu (Figure 14.12), point to Results, click
on the results that are available.

Figure 14.12 Content Pane - Shortcut Menu – Results - ResSim

14-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 14 – Compute/Results - Deterministic

For example, in Figure 14.12, from the Content Pane, right-click on the ResSim calibrate model
alternative, point to Results. The sub-menu provides a list of available HEC-ResSim results
from which the user can select. For example, point to Results, click Flow Summary, the Flow
Summary Report dialog box will open (Figure 14.13). The report is a native result that is
generated by HEC-ResSim; however, the report is accessed through HEC-WAT.

Figure 14.13 ResSim - Flow Summary Report

Another example, from the Content Pane, right-click on the FIA GridsAndXSecsAlternative
model alternative, point to Results. The sub-menu (Figure 14.14) provides a list of available
HEC-FIA results from which the user can select. For example, point to Results, click
Individual Structure Damage Report, the Individual Structure Damage Report dialog box
will open (Figure 14.15). The report is a native result that is generated by HEC-FIA; however,
the report is accessed through HEC-WAT.

Figure 14.14 Content Pane - Shortcut Menu – Results - FIA

14-9
Chapter 14 – Computes/Results - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 14.15 FIA - Individual Structure Damage Report

14.8 Schematic
Results from the schematic are available by right-clicking on schematic elements and from the
shortcut menu select result items (zooming in on an area is a good idea). From the map window
click the Pointer Tool , right-click on a schematic element, a shortcut menu will appear
(Figure 14.16). For example, in Figure 14.16, from the shortcut menu, besides providing
information about a junction, HEC-WAT also provides information on schematic elements that
are around the junction, like impact areas, routing reaches, and cross sections.

Figure 14.16 HEC-WAT Schematic Shortcut Menu – Impact Area

In the example (Figure 14.16), the user right-clicks on a junction from the schematic, from the
shortcut menu (Figure 14.16), point to Impact Area, click Aggregated Consequence Report,
the HEC-FIA Aggregated Consequence Report will open (Figure 14.17). Click the Life Loss
tab to get a Life Loss Report by impact areas. The report is a native result that is generated by
HEC-FIA; however, the report is accessed through HEC-WAT.

14-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 14 – Compute/Results - Deterministic

Figure 14.17 FIA - Aggregated Consequence Report - Life Loss Report

From the same location in Figure 14.16, from the shortcut menu point to Reach. The sub-menu
(Figure 14.18) lists all the available results from the models in the compute sequence that include
routing reaches in their analysis (hydrologic, hydraulic). In Figure 14.18, each software
application that has results is represented by the icon for each software application. For example,
if the user wants to view the computed profile for a particular HEC-RAS hydraulic routing reach,
click Profile Plot (Figure 14.18), the HEC-RAS Profile Plot (Figure 14.19) is displayed. The
plot is a native result that is generated by HEC-RAS; however, the plot is accessed through
HEC-WAT.

Another example, from the same location (Figure 14.16), from the shortcut menu (Figure 14.18)
point to Reach. To view the computed hydrograph at that location along an HEC-HMS
hydrologic routing reach, click Graph, and the Graph for Reach (Figure 14.20) is displayed.
The plot is a native result that is generated by HEC-HMS; however, the plot is accessed through
HEC-WAT.

Figure 14.18 HEC-WAT Schematic Shortcut Menu - Reach

14-11
Chapter 14 – Computes/Results - Deterministic HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 14.19 RAS - Profile Plot

Figure 14.20 HMS - Graph of HEC-HMS Routing Reach

14-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 15 – FRA Compute Option

CHAPTER 15
Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute
Option
USACE flood risk management (FRM) policy requires that USACE analytical processes include
methods and tools that employ integrated, comprehensive, systems and life-cycle based
approaches and risk-based concepts in planning, design, construction, operations and major
maintenance. These USACE methods need to incorporate systems response of projects when
considering load distribution and failure possibilities. USACE policy also states that project
performance needs to consider the system reaction to flood loading and how those loadings are
distributed across the watershed.

HEC-WAT includes an option that will analyze complex riverine systems while implementing
the flood risk management and systems requirements. Currently, life-cycle analysis in HEC-
WAT is a period of analysis with no changes to measures (i.e., levees, reservoirs) being
accounted for over that period of analysis. For levees, that period of analysis is fifty years, and
for reservoirs/dams that period is 100 years. Ture life-cycle analysis is the tracking of how things
(i.e., failure, re-build, maintenance) could change during the period of analysis for measures (i.e.,
levees, reservoirs), which HEC-WAT will address in a later version. The compute option, Flood
Risk Analysis (FRA), allows a user to perform plan formulation or system performance analyses
while incorporating risk analysis. FRA includes several plug-ins that provide sampling
methodologies for hydrology and fragility curves (Figure 15.1). Also, a majority of the initial set
of HEC software applications will include parameter sampling.

Figure 15.1 HEC-WAT Framework - Flood Risk Analysis (FRA) Compute Option

15-1
Chapter 15 – FRA Compute Option HEC-WAT User's Manual

15.1 Overview
The FRA compute option in HEC-WAT allows users to perform risk analysis using a Monte
Carlo simulation approach. The Monte Carlo simulation provides a method for incorporating a
probabilistic description of inputs (i.e., boundary conditions, initial conditions, model
parameters) into an analysis while making use of detailed deterministic models. During a Monte
Carlo simulation, the single-valued inputs (deterministic models) are replaced with randomly
sampled values as defined by probability distributions. In turn, the sampled model information is
repeated over and over to span the possible range of model inputs to quantify uncertainty in
model results. During an FRA simulation input values are sampled, algorithmic decisions are
performed, results are summarized, and convergence is reached (for Version 1.0, automatic
convergence is not a feature, the user must define the total number of events).

The FRA compute option allows the model alternatives to evaluate a full range of flood
scenarios based on reasonable probabilistic assumptions. The randomly sampled input values,
the models involved in the simulation sequence, and the hydrologic loading are all executed
iteratively according to the Monte Carlo analysis. At the beginning of each iteration, HEC-WAT
generates random numbers which are used by each model alternative in the simulation, with the
software application independently deciding if and how to use those random numbers.

An FRA compute requires a large amount of computation resources and a large amount of
storage for results. HEC-WAT provides model skip flags (Chapter 18) that are developed based
on user criteria that aid in the budgeting of simulation times. This is a very high-level overview
of the FRA compute option, for further details on the Monte Carlo simulation, the HEC-WAT
Technical Reference Guide will provide details (will not be available with Version 1.0 release).

This chapter provides an overview of the items that the user will need to create for an FRA
simulation for a study area. This includes plug-ins; sampling of hydrologic data; possible
sampling of levee fragility curves; analysis periods (time windows); alternatives; simulations;
computations; and results. Chapters following this section will provide more details on certain
items in an FRA study.

15.2 Random Numbers

When an FRA compute starts, HEC-WAT generates pseudo-random numbers. Pseudo random
numbers allow for repeatability of the random sampling when an HEC-WAT alternative is re-
computed or between multiple HEC-WAT alternatives. This means that the random values used
to sample input variables are pseudo-random, which allows the same random value to be
reproduced identically in a subsequent compute. Repeatability is important to support
comparison of study alternatives or in case a simulation is stopped for some reason. Also, when
an event is deemed interesting after the compute is complete, a user can re-run that particular
event, saving detailed information for further analysis.

The pseudo-random numbers are generated by a random number generator, which uniquely
determines the pseudo-random numbers that are created. Random numbers are generated for
each software application (and plug-ins) listed in the program order of a simulation. Three sets
of pseudo-random numbers are created, one set varies by realization (knowledge uncertainty),

15-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 15 – FRA Compute Option

another set varies by life cycle, and the third set varies by event (natural variability). Any
software application (and plug-in) must be able to accept these pseudo-random numbers, but not
necessarily do anything with the pseudo-random numbers. In Version 1.0, most of the current
software applications and plug-ins will receive all of the pseudo-random numbers, but only use
one of the pseudo-random numbers. Some of the software applications not doing anything with
the pseudo-random number information. The fragility curve sampler and HEC-ResSim use two
of the pseudo-random numbers.

Further details on the pseudo-random numbers and how this information is being used in the
FRA compute and by the other software applications and plug-ins, are provided in the HEC-
WAT Technical Reference Guide.

15.3 Realizations, Life Cycles, and Events

The Monte Carlo simulation in the FRA compute is implemented as a two-level nested process
so that the uncertainty about the probability distributions can be captured, along with the nature
of the uncertainty. Two kinds of uncertainty are distinguished in an FRA compute:

● Knowledge uncertainty (epistemic uncertainty) random variables are not known exactly
and exist when it is not possible to make an accurate estimate of an input value. A few
examples are flood likelihood, hydraulic coefficients, and channel capacities.

● Natural variability (aleatoric uncertainty) random variables vary spatially or event-to-

event and exist when the outcome of a natural process is random, or the natural process is
so complex it seems random when viewed in isolation. A few examples are flood
magnitude and forecasts.

The FRA compute incorporates the two kinds of uncertainty separately, and all software
applications (plug-ins) must distinguish between knowledge and natural variability random
numbers. Iterations in the inner loop, events, randomly sample from natural variability
uncertainties. When enough events (50, 100, 500, etc.) have been sampled to create frequency
curves and compute probabilistic metrics, a realization is created. The outer loop randomly
samples the knowledge uncertainty to define uncertainty parameters that are held for all the
events in a realization.

Life-cycle analysis has been included at a very basic level, further changes to the life-cycle
analysis procedures (including cost analysis) will be included in a later version of HEC-WAT.
Further details on knowledge and natural variability uncertainty, realizations, life cycles, and
events, are provided in the HEC-WAT Technical Reference Guide (not available for Version 1.0
release).

15.4 FRA Plug-Ins

The following sections provide information on the plug-ins in HEC-WAT that might be needed
for an FRA compute. This covers plug-ins that provide hydrologic data sampling, fragility curve
sampling, and performance metric results.

15-3
Chapter 15 – FRA Compute Option HEC-WAT User's Manual

15.4.1 Hydrologic Sampling

The first step of the FRA compute is the sampling of the hydrology to create perhaps thousands
of events in a hydrologic sequence. The hydrologic sampling will generate hydrologic
information such as flow or precipitation frequency curves, cross correlations between curves,
and hydrograph or hyetograph shapes, or instead, historical and synthetic event hydrographs.
This hydrologic data will be sampled to generate as many realizations of the life-cycle
hydrologic sequence as necessary, with each generated sequence provided to the other software
applications available in the program sequence. For further details on the hydrologic sampling
available in HEC-WAT, refer to the Hydrologic Sampler User's Manual.

15.4.2 Fragility Curve Sampler

The sampling of levee failure elevations from fragility curves is accomplished through the
Fragility Curve Sampler. This plug-in defines the probability and elevation of failure at each
levee that is part of the system. Sampling is conducted and the result is an evaluation of the full
range of levee failure possibilities for each pre-defined location in the entire system. The
fragility curve sampler is only needed for studies that model levee failures. For further details on
the fragility curve sampling available in HEC-WAT, refer to Chapter 17 of this User's Manual.

15.4.3 Performance Metrics

USACE guidance and policy requires that risk and uncertainty analyses be performed for
USACE planning studies. Risk for USACE is the measure of the probability and severity of
undesirable consequences (ER 1105-2-101). From these analyses, the performance of a system's
reaction to a flood must be commented. These metrics (Chapter 19) describe the capability of the
system to accommodate a single event (Assurance) and the full range of events (Annual
Exceedance Probability and Long-Term Exceedance Probability). These metrics assist in
communicating risk and are defined in the following sections. Not all FRA studies require the
metrics from the Performance Metrics plug-in. Therefore, this plug-in should only be included in
the compute sequence when necessary.

Expected Annual Damage (EAD)

Expected Annual Damage (EAD) is the average or mean of all possible values of damage
determined on an annual basis by a Monte Carlo (a numerical integration approach) analysis of
various variables that contribute to EAD along with those variable's associated uncertainties. An
HEC-FIA model is required in the FRA compute for EAD to be computed.

Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP)

Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP) is the probability that a specific capacity or target stage at
a location of interest will be exceeded in a given year, based on the full range of possible flows.
For levees (if applicable), AEP is the chance of failure or exceedance in any given year. AEP is
calculated at every grid cell and structure, and reflects the probability of ground stage being
equaled or exceeded.

15-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 15 – FRA Compute Option

Assurance
Assurance (also known as Conditional Non-Exceedance Probability, CNP) is the probability that
a specific target (e.g., the top of a levee) will not be exceeded, given the occurrence of a specific
flood event.

Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP)

Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP) is the probability that one or more flood events will
occur within a specified time period or the likelihood that the target stage will be exceeded in a
specified time period. The calculations are made directly by using the binomial distribution (EM
1110-2-1415).

15.4.4 Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)

The FRA compute capability within the HEC-WAT framework is a computational option that a
user can choose to perform plan formulation, system performance analyses or asset management
studies using a life-cycle approach. Expected annual damage is computed based on a 50-year
life-cycle in part to capture changes to the system through the project life. Net benefits (damage
reduced less costs), will be an output from the FRA compute. Therefore, the FRA compute will
include the initial and life-cycle costs through that 50 year project life. Life cycle costs include
the initial project investment, costs for operation, maintenance, repair, rehabilitation, and
replacement. Estimates for future rehabilitation or replacement will include the costs of all
related work. For example, it may be necessary to construct temporary facilities to ensure
continued project function during replacement. For comparison purposes, evaluation of life cycle
costs should include a calculation of the present worth, based on constant dollar analysis, and
using appropriate discount rates for future costs. This life-cycle capability will allow for
investment decisions on risk management system components and for scenario testing of
management options. Life cycle analysis including cost is not available in HEC-WAT Version
1.0.

15.4.5 Benefit Calculation Tool

This tool will calculate the benefit (damage reduced) and net benefit (damage reduced minus
cost) if cost information is available. HEC-WAT computes the benefits (damage reduced) for
each alternative. Damage reduced is the damage prevented because a project or projects
(measures), or structural and/or non-structural, are part of an alternative analyses. Frist, HEC-
WAT computes EAD for the Without Project Alternative and uses that EAD as a baseline to
compare against all with-project alternatives. The Benefit Calculation Tool subtracts the with-
project alternative's EAD from the Without Project Alternative EAD to obtain the damage
reduced for that particular with-project alternative. The tool then computes Net Benefit for each
with-project alternative by subtracting the EAC (Expected Annual Cost) for that particular with-
project alternative from the damage reduced for that particular with-project alternative. If the Net
Benefit is greater than zero that means the damage reduced from that with-project alternative
exceed costs and therefore is an economically viable project; i.e., net benefits of the with-project
alternative exceed the costs of that with-project alternative. To generate the Benefit to Cost ratio,

15-5
Chapter 15 – FRA Compute Option HEC-WAT User's Manual

the Benefit Calculation Tool simply takes the benefits for the with-project alternative and divides
by the costs. This tool will not be available in HEC-WAT Version 1.0.

15.5 An FRA Study

Now that the user has created a study (Chapter 7); has imported (Chapter 8) or created the
appropriate model alternatives (including a hydrologic sampling alternative); created a program
order (Chapter 11); created HEC-WAT alternative(s) (Chapter 10); created analysis period(s)
(Chapter 9); and, if HEC-ResSim is included in the compute sequence, created an HEC-ResSim
lookback window (Chapter 13, Section 13.3) – the user needs to decide if the study needs to
include flood risk analysis. Chapters 16 through 21 provide details on selecting results for an
FRA compute to view; setup fragility curve sampling if necessary; how to skip models in an
FRA compute; setup the calculation of performance metrics if needed; and, outline the necessary
steps for a user to create FRA simulations that will a1low the user to perform a plan formulation
of system performance analyses that incorporates risk and uncertainty.

15-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor

CHAPTER 16

Output Variable Editor

The Output Variable Editor (Figure 16.1) provides an interface for selecting results from an
HEC-WAT flood risk analysis (FRA) compute. Currently, only the maximum values from
selected model alternative results and sampled parameters from some of the model alternatives
are saved through output variables. There are multiple options for saving files and model
alternative results from an FRA compute. All time-series information is saved in DSS files
organized by life cycles. In many cases, saving and maintaining many thousands of time-series
data records is not possible due to storage limitations. However, the maximum value from each
time series is useful. For example, the peak flow or stage value from a hydrograph time-series
can be used to compute a flow/stage frequency curve or these values can be plotted to quickly
show if a flow or stage threshold was exceeded. Saving the sampled parameters or initial
conditions is useful when evaluating the conditions that led to certain results (i.e., when a high
reservoir stage is a result of sampling a high starting pool condition).

Figure 16.1 Output Variable Editor

The Output Variable Editor has options for selecting an HEC-WAT simulation (only FRA
simulations). First, select a model that is part of the selected HEC-WAT simulation program
order and then select an available model alternative (a compute sequence can contain multiple
instances of the same model) from the selected HEC-WAT simulation. Once those selections
have been made, the user can select various variables (maximum values only), and, if wanted,
create frequency curves.
16-1
Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

The user must choose at least one output variable from the model alternatives in the compute
sequence, or notify the FRA simulation to compute without an output variable. For a
"production" simulation where results are required, the user should choose all appropriate output
variables before running the simulation. Recommended and it is considered good practices for
the user to choose at least one output variable. In most cases, the desired type of results from an
FRA simulation will include the maximum (or minimum) value from a time-series record. For
example, the maximum stage from a reservoir time-series could be extracted to build a reservoir
stage frequency curve. Saving time-series information from many thousands of events, at many
locations, for many model alternatives could overwhelm the available storage on a computer.
However, maximum values (scalars) do not require much disk space. From the Output
Variable Editor (Figure 16.1), a user can select any available output variables from the model
alternatives that are part of a selected FRA simulation and get summary information (e.g.,
maximum flows, maximum stage, etc.) for each event in the FRA compute.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 16.2), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click
.

Figure 16.2 HEC-WAT Main Window

2. The Output Variable Editor will open (Figure 16.1). From the editor, the user can
select variables from the model alternatives that are part of a selected FRA simulation.
Currently, the maximum value for each of the output variables selected will be saved to
the simulation.dss file and if the user wants to generate a frequency curve for a selected
output variable, the user must select Frequency from the Output Variable Editor
(Figure 16.1).

16-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor

3. From the Simulation list, select an FRA simulation (only FRA simulations will be
available). Next, from the Model list select the appropriate software application; and,
then from the Alternative list select the appropriate model alternative.

4. Next, click Select Variables to Save, the Select model name and model alternative name
Variables selector will open (Figure 16.3).

Figure 16.3 Select model name and model alternative name Variables Selector

5. A list of the selected model alternative's available output variables is listed in the
Available Variables list (e.g., Hydrologic Sampling, RR_Precipitation). To select an
output variable, highlight the variable, and then click Add. The selected variable is
moved to the Selected Variables list. Click OK, the Select model name and model
alternative name Variables selector (Figure 16.3) closes and the selected output variables
appear on the Output Variable Editor (Figure 16.1).

6. From the File menu, click Save. Close the Output Variable Editor (Figure 16.1)

16.1 Scalar Values

The selected maximum value from each selected time-series is saved to the simulation.dss file.
The selected output variables can be referred to as scalar values (Figure 16.4) since only the
maximum magnitude is saved from the selected time-series records. The output variables are
organized by realization in the simulation.dss file. Each realization is a collection member, and
within a realization record, the individual life cycle results are saved in separate columns of a
multi-column paired data record. The x-parameter is the event number, and the y-parameter is

16-3
Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 16.4 Maximum Scalars Saved to simulation.dss File

the maximum value. As shown in Figure 16.5, the results for Realization 1 are broken into two
life cycles, Lifecycle 1 and 2, and each life cycle is a separate column in the paired data record.
For the example HEC-WAT study being used (Figure 16.5), only two life cycles in a realization
were specified which was due to the configuration of the analysis period and the FRA
simulation. Other HEC-WAT studies may have a different number of life cycles per realization.
Also, notice in Figure 16.5, that there are not scalars for every single event as some events were
skipped because model skip flags was being applied (Chapter 18).

Figure 16.5 Tabulated View of Maximum Scalars Saved to simulation.dss File

16-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor

16.2 Frequency Curves

For each scalar value selected, a frequency curve can be created. From the Output Variable
Editor (Figure 16.1), in the Frequency column (Figure 16.1), the user can select, for each scalar
value, that a frequency curve be computed from results in each realization, and the combined
frequency curve (computed by combining results from all realizations) will be computed
(generated) along with the 5 and 95 percent confidence limits for the combined curve by HEC-
WAT. The checkbox in the Frequency column (Figure 16.1) must be checked, so that when the
selected FRA simulation computes, results will be added to the simulation DSS file. Figure 16.6
provides an example of DSS pathnames with frequency curve results for each realization in
addition to the combined curve and confidence limits. The frequency curves are computed based
on the total number of events that were simulated including events that were skipped using
model skip flags. The scalars (maximum values) are ranked from largest to smallest and the
exceedance probability is computed based on the rank divided by the total number of events
(plus one) in the realization.

Figure 16.6 Frequency Curves in the simulation.dss File

If frequency curves were not created for certain output variables after an FRA simulation has
computed, the user can compute frequency curves. After selecting output variables to create
frequency curves, from the File menu (Figure 16.1), click Save and Compute Selected
Frequencies. HEC-WAT will then compute frequency curves for the selected output variables.
This option will only work when an FRA simulation has been previously computed.

16.3 Results
Results from the output variables can be accessed from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure
16.2). From the Results menu (Figure 16.7), point to Output Variables. Three options are
available to visualize output variables - Histogram Viewer, Scalar Viewer, and Frequency
Viewer.
16-5
Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 16.7 HEC-WAT Main Window – Results Menu – Output Variables

16.3.1 Histogram Viewer

The Histogram Viewer (Figure 16.8) provides histogram plots of the user selected output
variable from the Variable list (Figure 16.8) and then the realization (Realization list) and life
cycle number (Lifecycle list). The Lifecycle list does include an option to view all life cycles
within a realization. The Histogram Viewer (Figure 16.8) provides the user with a quick way to
visualize the range of values (x-axis) for the selected model results and the relative probability
(y-axis). For example, in Figure 16.8, the user has chosen the output variable to plot a histogram
for Realization 6 and all of its life cycles.

Figure 16.8 Histogram Viewer

16-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor

16.3.2 Variable Viewer

The Variable Viewer (Figure 16.9) provides scalar plots of the user selected output variable
from the Variable list (Figure 16.9) and the realization (Realization list) and life cycle number
(Lifecycle list). The Lifecycle list does include an option to view all life cycles within a
realization. The Output Variable Viewer (Figure 16.9) displays the output value (y-axis) for
each event (x-axis) in the selected life cycle or from all life cycles in the selected realization.
The Output Variable Viewer can be used to quickly identify outliers in the model results that
might require additional investigation. For example, in Figure 16.9, the user has chosen the
output variable to plot a histogram for Realization 6, and all its life cycles.

Figure 16.9 Output Variable Viewer

16.3.3 Frequency Viewer

The Frequency Viewer (Figure 16.10) provides frequency plots of the user selected output
variable from the Variable list (Figure 16.10) and the realization (Realization list). The
Realization list does include an option to view all realizations. For example, Figure 16.10,
displays a frequency curve for All Realizations. A separate frequency curve is plotted with
results from each realization plus the combined frequency curve and the 5 and 95 percent
confidence limits for the combined curve. Only those output variables with Frequency selected
in the Output Variable Editor (Figure 16.1) will have frequency curve results to visualize.

16-7
Chapter 16 – Output Variable Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 16.10 Frequency Viewer

16-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

CHAPTER 17

Fragility Curve Sampling

A fragility curve defines a structure's (i.e., levee) probability of failure over a range of elevation
values at a specific location along the structure (i.e., levee). To capture the likelihood of
structural (i.e., levee) failure at specified locations, the fragility curve sampling in HEC-WAT
occurs in a systems context with failure elevations at multiple locations being sampled either by
realization or by event. The elevation of failure that is sampled is then used by the hydraulics
software (i.e., HEC-RAS) to evaluate breaching. When sampling by realization, the failure
elevation is sampled once per realization and held constant for every event in the realization. For
sampling by event, a different failure elevation is generated for each event in a realization. In
Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT, the fragility curves should be representative of all potential failure
modes (i.e., under seepage, through seepage, erosion), and there is no uncertainty around the
fragility curve.

The User's Manual describes the use of fragility curves in levee evaluations, but fragility curves
can also be defined and used within HEC-WAT for structures situated perpendicular to a water
course (i.e. dam). In this case, the Inline Structure Breach Data Editor in HEC-RAS is used in
place of the Levee (Lateral Structure) Breach Data Editor (Section 17.1) to define the
fragility curve characteristics for inline structures.

17.1 Overview
To capture the likelihood of levee failure at specified levee locations, levee failure elevations
will be sampled from the input fragility curves at each project location for each event or
realization. HEC-WAT randomly selects a value between zero and one for either each event or
each realization (user's choice), from the user-defined fragility curve(s) in the Fragility Curve
Editor (Figure 17.1). The corresponding levee breach elevation is then passed to the RAS
model alternative. HEC-RAS uses that elevation as the trigger failure elevation, which is defined
in the HEC-RAS Levee (Lateral Structure) Breach Data Editor (Figure 17.2; for further
details refer to the HEC-RAS User's Manual). If the HEC-RAS computed water surface
elevation meets or exceeds the elevation sampled from the fragility curve, the levee is assumed
to breach and the breach progresses according to the defined values within the HEC-RAS model.

Fragility is also an element of the project life cycle process. Commonly, without maintenance,
structures (i.e., levees) deteriorate over time. This can be reflected within a fragility curve by
increasing the likelihood of failure at a given water surface elevation (or a lower elevation for a
given probability). Scheduled maintenance can be reflected within a fragility curve by
decreasing the likelihood of failure at a given elevation or raising the elevation for a given
probability. A levee failure and subsequent repair would also have an effect on the fragility
curves. Figure 17.3 displays an example 50-year life cycle, and the hypothetical change in levee
fragility with time as well as failure and repair. Also, the randomly sampled failure elevation

17-1
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 17.1 Fragility Curve Editor

Figure 17.2 HEC-RAS – Levee (Lateral Structure) Breach Data Editor

at that location (from random value 0.29) used for one realization of the Monte Carlo simulations
is displayed in Figure 17.3. This sampled failure elevation would decrease as the fragility curve
showed weakening over time and would further decrease after a failure, but would increase after
subsequent repair. To capture these changing conditions, the user must enter a different fragility
curve and perform a separate analysis for each condition within HEC-WAT.

17-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

Figure 17.3 Levee Fragility Curves at Different Points during a Fifty-Year Life Cycle

17.2 HEC-WAT Fragility Curve Sampling Prerequisites

There are several prerequisites to creating fragility curves within HEC-WAT:

1. To perform fragility curve sampling in an HEC-WAT study, the fragility curve plug-in
should be enabled. By default, the fragility curve plug-in should be enabled in HEC-
WAT. To verify that the plug-in is enabled, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure
17.4), from the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box will open (Figure
17.5), click the Plug-ins tab. A display of the enabled/disabled plug-ins available in
HEC-WAT is displayed, check FragilityCurvePlugin and make sure it is enabled.

Figure 17.4 HEC-WAT Main Window

17-3
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 17.5 Options Dialog Box – Plug-Ins Tab

2. To enable fragility curve sampling for an HEC-WAT study, from the HEC-WAT main
window (Figure 17.4), from the File menu, click Study Details, the Study Details dialog
box (Figure 17.6) will open (for further information on the Study Details dialog box, see
Chapter 4, Section 4.1.5).

Figure 17.6 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab

3. Click the Plugins tab (Figure 17.6), by default, all plug-ins are enabled (Figure 17.6).
For example, in Figure 17.6, the plug-ins enabled include FIA, Fragility Curve,

17-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

Hydrologic Sampling, Performance Metrics, RAS, Simulation Compute Engine Manager,

and TimeWindowModifier. To ensure that the fragility curve sampler is available, a
check mark should be displayed in the Enabled column of the table (Figure 17.6). When
the appropriate plug-in configuration is selected, click OK. The Study Details dialog
box will close (Figure 17.6) and the plug-in configuration for the active study will be set.

4. The HEC-WAT study must include a RAS model alternative (plan) with at least one
lateral or inline structure and defined breach information.

5. Fragility curves are associated with alternatives within HEC-WAT, and each fragility
curve requires a fragility curve common computation point (CCP) defined within an
HEC-WAT alternative.

In Version 1.0, the user can import levee breach locations from HEC-RAS (Section 17.4), or the
user can define each levee and/or breach location (CCPs) in the HEC-WAT schematic. The
CCPs must correspond to breach location(s) defined in the HEC-RAS model. For further details
on adding levees and CCPs to an HEC-WAT study, see Chapter 6.

17.3 HEC-RAS Breach Configuration Considerations

For fragility curve sampling to work in HEC-WAT, the RAS model alternative (plan) must be
setup for levee breaching.

1. To ensure the RAS model alternative (plan) for the current HEC-WAT simulation is
setup correctly, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Toolbar, click
. The HEC-RAS main window will open (Figure 17.7).

Figure 17.7 HEC-RAS Main Window

2. From the HEC-RAS Toolbar click , or from the Run menu, click Unsteady Flow
Analysis. The HEC-RAS Unsteady Flow Analysis dialog box will open (Figure 17.8).

3. From the HEC-RAS Unsteady Flow Analysis dialog box (Figure 17.8), from the
Options menu, click Levee (Lateral Structure) Breach, the Levee (Lateral Structure)
Breach Data Editor will open (Figure 17.2). Note: Fragility curves may also be
associated with inline structures (i.e., dams). This data can be entered on the Dam
(Inline Structure) Breach Data Editor. The following example will only provide
descriptions for the definition of levee breach information. However, the data
requirements are similar for inline structures.

17-5
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 17.8 HEC-RAS – Unsteady Flow Analysis Dialog Box

5. From the HEC-RAS Levee (Lateral Structure) Breach Data Editor (Figure 17.2), the
user will need to select breach options (Figure 17.9) for the defined lateral structure at a
location. The user will need to select Breach This Structure, select a breach method
from the Breach Method list (default – User Entered Data), select a failure mode from
the Failure Mode list, and select WS Elev from the Trigger Failure at list as the trigger
failure option.

Figure 17.9 HEC-RAS – Levee Breach Options

17-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

6. From the Failure Mode list (Figure 17.9), HEC-RAS currently has two different
breaching methods - piping and overtopping. The user must specify only one of these
modes, even if the fragility curve combines the probability of failure due to both modes.
If the levee is going to overtop and fail then select the Overtopping failure mode. If the
breach is expected to initiate from a piping failure mode and progress upwards and
downwards until a complete breach has occurred, the Piping failure mode should be
selected.

7. The user must define a trigger failure, from the Trigger Failure at list (Figure 17.9). For
HEC-WAT 1.0, the user should select WS Elev. The WS Elev+Duration and Set Time
options should not be selected for an FRA compute. However, if the user does select the
WS Elev+Duration or the Set Time option and an FRA compute has been selected, then
the trigger failure at option is automatically switched to the WS Elev. The trigger failure
elevation is used by HEC-RAS to begin initiation of the lateral structure breach. The
breach is initiated when the computed water surface elevation exceeds the trigger
elevation and is not dependent on the selected failure mode.

8. When the user is finished configuring breach information for the study area in the RAS
model alternative. From the Unsteady Flow Analysis dialog box (Figure 17.8), from the
File menu, click Save Plan to save changes. From the File menu, click Exit, the
Unsteady Flow Analysis dialog box will close (Figure 17.8). From the HEC-RAS main
window (Figure 17.7), from the File menu, click Exit, the HEC-RAS main window will
close (Figure 17.7).

9. If the RAS model alternative in the HEC-WAT FRA simulation has all of the above set,
then the user can go on to defining fragility curve alternatives and input data in HEC-
WAT.

17.4 Import HEC-RAS Breach Locations

When an HEC-WAT simulation contains a RAS model alternative (plan) that includes structure
breach data, the user can import HEC-RAS breach locations as fragility CCPs. From the HEC-
WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Edit menu, point to RAS, click Import Breach
Locations. The Import Levee Breach Locations dialog box will open (Figure 17.10).

Figure 17.10 Import Breach Locations Dialog Box

17-7
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

1. From the RAS Plan list (Figure 17.10) select the RAS plan (model alternative) that
contains the breach locations which should be imported.

2. The table (Figure 17.10) lists all of the defined breach locations (all lateral structures with
breaching turned on) in the selected RAS plan (model alternative). From the table, the
user can select individual breach locations from the Import column (Figure 17.10) by
clicking the check box. The user can also change the stream station of the breach
location from the Stream Station (Figure 17.10) column and change the name of the
CCP from the CCP Name column (Figure 17.10).

3. The user can select all known breach locations (Select All) or clear the selections in the
table (Select None). If fragility curve CCPs already exist, the user can replace by
selecting Replace Existing CCPs (Figure 17.10).

4. Click OK, the Import Levee Breach Locations dialog box will close (Figure 17.10).
The HEC-RAS breach locations will be imported as fragility CCPs in the HEC-WAT
study. Please note that the import process only adds a geographic data layer based on the
geographic coordinates of the breach locations. There is no data linking (i.e., fragility
curve input) when importing fragility curve CCPs.

5. Optionally, the user can associate the fragility CCPS with levees or other structures that
may have been created for the HEC-WAT study. However, this is not a requirement.

17.5 Creating Fragility Curves Alternatives

Now that the user has verified that the fragility curve plug-in is enabled and that the RAS model
alternative (plan) associated with the FRA simulation is setup for levee breaching, a fragility
curve alternative needs to be created. For each fragility curve alternative, the user will need to
define fragility curves at each breach location.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Study Tree, from the Models
node, right click on Fragility Curve, from the shortcut menu click New. The Create
New Fragility Curve Alternative dialog box will open (Figure 17.11). Another way to
create a fragility curve alternative is from the Edit menu, point to Fragility Curve, click
New.

Figure 17.11 Create New Fragility Curve Alternative Dialog Box

17-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

2. In the Name box (Figure 17.11), the user must enter a unique name for the fragility curve
alternative. The user can also add a description in the Description box. Click OK, the
Create New Fragility Curve Alternative dialog box will close (Figure 17.11) and the
Fragility Curve Editor will open (Figure 17.1).

3. The Fragility Curve Editor will display the name of the fragility curve alternative and a
description, if entered. Click OK, the Fragility Curve Editor will close (Figure 17.1).
The name of the fragility curve alternative will appear in the Content Pane of the HEC-
WAT main window (Figure 17.12).

Figure 17.12 Content Pane – Fragility Curve Alternative Shortcut Menu

17.6 Fragility Curve Editor

Now that fragility curve alternatives have been created, the user needs to define the fragility
curves and to associate each curve with a failure location on a levee (structure). From the
Fragility Curve Editor (Figure 17.1):

1. The user can select from the Randomize every list (Figure 17.13) to have the failure
elevations sampled by every event in a realization or sampled once in a realization. The
default is to randomize the failure elevations by event.

Figure 17.13 Fragility Curve – Initial Setup

2. From the Levee list (Figure 17.13), the user can filter the list of fragility CCPs. The list
will either contain the names of levees that have been included in the HEC-WAT
schematic (created in HEC-WAT for visual purposes only and not provided by the RAS

17-9
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

model alternative) or the <Not Selected> option. If the user selects the <Not Selected>
option, then all of the fragility curve CCPs will be available from the Failure Location
list (Figure 17.13).

3. Elevation-probability information, which is used to define a fragility curve (Figure

17.14), can then be entered. The elevations should correspond to the levee structure
elevations in the RAS model alternative (plan).

Figure 17.14 Defining a Fragility Curve

4. A fragility curve (within HEC-WAT) is defined as a cumulative

distribution function (CDF) where the probability of failure must
start at zero (0.0) and span to a probability of one (1.0). Both
elevation and probability of failure must be monotonically
increasing.

5. By right-clicking on the table that defines fragility curves, a

shortcut menu will display (which is shown in the figure to the
right). From this shortcut menu, the user can cut/copy/paste
items; clear selected cells; select all cells; delete rows; print the
table; and export the table.

6. The user can fill cells that have been selected, from the shortcut
menu click Fill, the Table Fill Options dialog box (Figure
17.15). The user has several options to choose from:

● Linear Fill - when selecting the cells, for Linear Fill

(Figure 17.18), the first and last rows must have data. Click
OK, the Table Fill Options dialog box will close and the
table will be filled with linearly interpolated data.

● Repeat Fill - when selecting the cells, for Repeat Fill (Figure 17.15), the user must
select a row that contains the data that will be repeated in the other selected rows.
Click OK, the Table Fill Options dialog box will close and the table will be filled
with repeated data.

● Add Constant - when selecting the cells, for Add Constant (Figure 17.15), the user
must select rows that contain data that the user wishes to increase by a constant value.
The user will enter a value in the box next to Add Constant. Click OK, the Table
Fill Options dialog box will close and the rows selected in table will be filled with
data that has been increased by the constant value entered by the user.

17-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

Figure 17.15 Table Fill Options Dialog Box

● Multiple Factor - when selecting the cells, for Multiple Factor (Figure 17.15), the
user must select rows that contain data that the user wishes to increase by a multiplier.
The user will enter the multiplier in the box next to Multiple Factor. Click OK, the
Table Fill Options dialog box will close and the rows selected in table will be filled
with data that has been increased by the multiplier entered by the user.

7. When the user chooses to Sum Selected Cells or Sum Entire Column from the shortcut
menu, a Sum window will open (Figure 17.16) providing the user with the desired
information.

Figure 17.16 Sum Window

8. Once the user has entered all of the information for the fragility curve, click OK, the
Fragility Curve Editor (Figure 17.1) will close.

17.7 Individual Fragility Curve Alternatives

The individual fragility curve alternative shortcut menu (Figure 17.12) will allows the user to
edit, save, create a copy of an existing fragility curve alternative, rename, and delete.

17.7.1 Edit
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Content Pane (Figure 17.12),
right-click on a fragility curve alternative, from the shortcut menu click Edit. The
Fragility Curve Editor will open (Figure 17.1).

2. From the Fragility Curve Editor, the user can edit an existing fragility curve alternative.
When editing is finished, click OK, the Fragility Curve Editor will close (Figure 17.1).
17-11
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

17.7.2 Save
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Content Pane (Figure 17.12), right-
click on a fragility curve alternative, from the shortcut menu click Save. The fragility curve data
is saved.

17.7.3 Save As
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Content Pane (Figure 17.12),
right-click on a fragility curve alternative, from the shortcut menu click Save As. The
Save Fragility Curve As dialog box will open (Figure 17.17).

Figure 17.17 Save Fragility Curve As Dialog Box

2. The name of the fragility curve alternative which is being copied is displayed in the Old
Name box (Figure 17.17). The user must enter a new unique name in the Name box, and
can provide a description in the Description box (Figure 17.17).

3. Click OK, the Save Fragility Curve As dialog box will close (Figure 17.17). The name
of the new fragility curve alternative will appear in the Content Pane (Figure 17.14) of
the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4).

17.7.4 Rename
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Content Pane (Figure 17.12),
right-click on a fragility curve alternative, from the shortcut menu click Rename. The
Rename Fragility Curve dialog box will open (Figure 17.18).

Figure 17.18 Rename Fragility Curve Dialog Box

2. The name of the fragility curve alternative that the user is renaming is displayed in the
Name box. The user must enter a new unique name in the Name box (Figure 17.18), and
can provide a description in the Description box (Figure 17.18).

17-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling

3. Click OK, the Rename Fragility Curve dialog box will close (Figure 17.18). The re-
named fragility curve alternative will appear in the Content Pane (Figure 17.12) of the
HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4).

17.7.5 Delete
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4), from the Content Pane (Figure 17.12),
right-click on a fragility curve alternative, from the shortcut menu click Delete. A
Confirm Delete window box will open (Figure 17.19).

Figure 17.19 Confirm Delete Window

2. Click Yes, the selected fragility curve alternative will no longer be displayed in the
Content Pane (Figure 17.12) of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 17.4).

17.8 Multiple Fragility Curve Alternatives

Multiple fragility curve alternatives can be created that evaluate different scenarios of levee
fragility, like weak or strong levee alternatives. The user defined elevation-probability
information is saved per fragility curve alternative. The same fragility curve CCPs can be used
in multiple fragility curve alternatives with different elevation-probability information. The user
can edit and view the multiple fragility curve alternatives in the Fragility Curve Model Editor
(Figure 17.1) using the Navigator Tool (Figure 17.20) or manipulate the fragility curve
alternatives from the Content Pane (Figure 17.12) using the shortcut menu (Figure 17.12).

Figure 17.20 Navigator Tool

1. From the Fragility Curve Editor (Figure 17.1), using the Navigator Tool (Figure
17.20), the user can move through the defined fragility curve alternatives.

2. The symbol places the user at the top (first) of the fragility curve alternative list, while
the symbol places the user at the bottom (last) of the fragility curve alternative list.
The (previous) symbol and the (next) symbol moves the user back one and forward
one in the fragility curve alternative list, respectively. The center of the navigation button
indicates the number of fragility curve alternatives in the list and which fragility curve
alternative the user is presently accessing.

17-13
Chapter 17 – Fragility Curve Sampling HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. For example, the user could edit the first fragility curve alternative, click Apply (which
saves any edits), click . Now the user can view or edit the next fragility curve
alternative in the list.

17-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

CHAPTER 18
Model Skip Rules Editor
The Model Skip Rules Editor is available as part of the flood risk analysis (FRA) compute of
HEC-WAT. The purpose of the Model Skip Rules Editor is to allow the user to define logical
expressions (i.e., if-then statements) of conditions when model computations will be skipped, or
not performed, within an FRA compute. This allows the user to eliminate unnecessary
computations and reduce run-times for an FRA compute. Note the user needs to understand
what it might mean to skip a model alternative within an FRA compute. Some model alternatives
should never be skipped within the compute sequence. For a performance metrics alternative
(Chapter 19) it should not be skipped, because some of the computations being performed by the
performance metrics alternative cannot be skipped.

To access the Model Skip Rules Editor, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 18.1), from
the toolbar click , or from the Edit menu, point to FRA, click Model Skip Rules Editor.
Either way the Model Skip Rules Editor (Figure 18.2) will open.

Figure 18.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

18-1
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 18.2 Model Skip Rules Editor

18.1 Create a Skip Rule

To create a skip rule for a simulation and a model alternative that is part of that simulation's
program order:

1. From the Model Skip Rules Editor (Figure 18.2), from the Simulation list (Figure 18.2)
select a simulation. From the Description box, the user can enter an optional description.

2. From the Model Alternative list (Figure 18.2), select a model alternative that is part of
the selected simulation. The skip rule that is being created will be applied prior to the
selected model alternative. This is important, the skip rule is not automatically applied to
the selected model alternative. The selected model alternative is required to place the
skip rule within the compute sequence.

3. Only models at and below the selected model alternative are available to be skipped, and
standard practice is to select the model alternative that corresponds to the model that will
be skipped first.

4. The Build Logical Expression table (Figure 18.2) is where a logical expression is
defined that provides information to the simulation about when and which model
computation will be skipped during an FRA compute. A logical expression is tied to the
selected model alternative, which means that only one logical expression can be defined
per model alternative. The default values presented in the table are the IF and END
conditions, and the user defines desired conditions and rules. Further information about
building a logical expression is detailed in Section 18.2.
18-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

5. From the Edit Logical Expression box (Figure 18.2), the user can select which type of
logical expression needs to be built from the Logical Expression list (Figure 18.2). The
Logical Expression list has two options - Comparison and Model was Skipped. The
Comparison option allows the user to compare one expression to another to determine
whether a computation should be skipped. When the first model alternative in the list is
selected, only the Comparison option is available. The Model was Skipped option
allows the user to include the following condition within the logical expression: a model
alternative located earlier in the compute sequence has been skipped. Further
information about editing a logical expression is detailed in Section 18.3.

18.2 Building Logical Expressions

The basic format of a logical expression follows: IF [Expression A] compared to [Expression B]
is true, SKIP [Selected Models]. The user can add more complex logic using ELSEIF, ELSE,
AND and OR logic actions, and can add parentheses around a selection or a COMMENT to the
logical expression to support understanding of the decision logic. Each expression must be
defined to return a scalar value, and two expressions are evaluated to determine whether the
specified comparison of scalar values results in a true or false condition. If the comparison
results in a false condition, no action is taken. If the comparison results in a true condition, the
model alternatives selected by the user are skipped in the compute sequence.

To build the first part of each skip rule (IF [Expression A] compared to [Expression B]), the user
starts by selecting the IF row in the Build Logical Expression table (Figure 18.2). This enables
the Edit Logical Expression box (Figure 18.2) of the Model Skip Rules Editor.

1. From the Logical Expression list (Figure 18.2), select Comparison or Model was
Skipped. The Comparison function is used to compare the scalar values created by the
two expressions to determine whether the comparison results in a true or false condition.
The Model was Skipped function is used to evaluate whether a previous model
alternative was skipped due to a skip rule. This option is most beneficial when the user
wants to base skipping of a model alternative on another model alternative that does not
immediately precede the model alternative of interest (i.e., is several levels higher in the
Program Order).

2. If the logical expression choice is Model was Skipped (Figure 18.3), the user only has to
select the model alternative that will be skipped from the Model list (Figure 18.3). Only
model alternatives in the compute sequence before the selected model alternative are
available in the list. Click Save, in the Build Logical Expression table, row one, Rule
column (Figure 18.2), the model alternative selected will display.

Figure 18.3 Model Skip Rules Editor – Edit Logical Expression – Model was Skipped

3. If the logical expression choice is Comparison, in the Expression A box (Figure 18.2),
start creating the Expression A part of the logical expression. To the right of the
18-3
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Expression A box, click Edit, the Edit Logical Expression dialog box will open (Figure
18.4). From this editor the user will build the Expression A part of the logical expression.
Further information about editing a logical expression is detailed in Section 18.3. When
finished click Save (Figure 18.4), click OK, the Edit Logical Expression dialog box will
close (Figure 18.4). In the Expression A box of the Model Skip Rules Editor (Figure
18.2), the created expression will display. Expression A in the Build Logical Expression
table can be updated by selecting Apply in the Model Skip Rules Editor.

Figure 18.4 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box

4. If the logical expression choice was Comparison, in the Expression B box (Figure 18.2),
start creating the Expression B part of the logical expression. To the right of the
Expression B box, click Edit, the Edit Logical Expression dialog box will open (Figure
18.4). From this editor the user will build the Expression B part of the logical expression.
Further information about editing a logical expression is detailed in Section 18.3. When
finished click Save (Figure 18.4), click OK, the Edit Logical Expression dialog box will
close (Figure 18.4). In the Expression B box of the Model Skip Rules Editor (Figure
18.2), the created expression will display. Expression B in the Build Logical Expression
table can be updated by selecting Apply in the Model Skip Rules Editor.

18.3 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box

From the Edit Logical Expression dialog box (Figure 18.4) the user will build Expression A and
Expression B for the logical expression that is being created for a model alternative. Initially
there are three commands available to the user to start creating an expression for Comparison -
Operator, Table Lookup, and Scalar (Figure 18.5). As an expression is built, the other
commands become available – Time Series, Time Window, and Delete. When building a
logical expression, note that the contents of a selected row affect where a command is placed.

18-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

Figure 18.5 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Initial Commands

Specifically, if a selected row contains **Not Set**, the command will be placed on that row,
and if a selected row contains anything other than **Not Set**, the command will be placed one
row above the selected row. The following sections provide details on each of the individual
commands.

18.3.1 Operator
The Operator command is used to select the maximum (MAX), average (AVG) or minimum
(MIN) value of a designated dataset for the logical expression comparison. When the user selects
Operator, a row is added to the logical expression table with the default value of MAX(). The
user can change this default operator from the Operator list (Figure 18.6). Be sure the row with
MAX is highlighted so the Operator list will display on the Edit Logical Expression dialog
box (Figure 18.4).

Figure 18.6 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Operator List

Once the desired operator is specified, the user then selects the row inside the operator
parentheses labeled *Not Set* to define the source of information used for comparison. Three
commands for source data are available: Time Series (Section 18.3.4), Time Window (Section
18.3.5), and Table Lookup (Section 18.3.2).

18.3.2 Table Lookup

Table Lookup allows the user to define a set of related data (e.g., a hydraulic rating curve), and
is used to look up a dependent variable based on an independent variable. Two actions are
needed to configure the Table Lookup option: define the contents of the lookup table and define
a logical expression that specifies the independent variable.

The first Table Lookup action is to define the contents of the lookup table. When Table
Lookup is selected (Figure 18.7), a row is added to the logical expression table with the
LOOKUP@ expression and the interface is updated to present the user with two options for
entering tabulated data from the Table Type list (Figure 18.7) - User Table and DSS Table. For
either option, the user can optionally enter a name in the Table Name box (Figure 18.7).

● The User Table option (Figure 18.7) allows for the manual entry of X and Y values, with
X as the independent variable and Y as the dependent variable. The number of rows in
the table can be expanded by right-clicking inside the table for a shortcut menu of table
editing options.

18-5
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 18.7 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Table Lookup – User Table

● The DSS Table option (Figure 18.8) allows the user to select a DSS file (click Select, the
Select Time Series dialog box will open) for the reference table in the same manner as
described in the Time Series section (Section 18.3.4).

Figure 18.8 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Table Lookup – DSS Table

The second Table Lookup action is to define a logical expression that specifies the independent
variable (Figure 18.9), click Operator. The MAX operator is added to the expression building
table (Figure 18.9). For example, in Figure 18.9, the Table Lookup command is using the
maximum value from the time series (click Time Series) referenced in the MAX command as the
independent variable. From the Time Series Expression list (Figure 18.9), select Time Series
from Model. From the Select Time Series box (Figure 18.9), select the model alternative that
contains the time series that the user is looking for. In the Time Series list box (Figure 18.9), is
a list of available time series data for the selected model alternative. Click Apply, the row in the
expression building table (Figure 18.9) that contains the independent variable will now display
the time series information for the independent variable.

18.3.3 Scalar
The Scalar command allows the user to specify a constant value (default). From the Scalar
Expression list (Figure 18.10) select Constant, in the Constant box (Figure 18.10), enter the
value (default is zero).

18-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

Figure 18.9 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Table Lookup – Time Series

Figure 18.10 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Scalar

18.3.4 Time Series

The Time Series option allows the user to reference a time series of data in a logical expression.
Note that a Time Series can only be added to the expression inside an Operator (Section
18.3.1). From the table on the Edit Logical Expression dialog box (Figure 18.4), make sure the
row with *Not Set*has been selected, click Time Series (Figure 18.11), the interface will
change. From the Time Series Expression list (Figure 18.11), there are two options - DSS from
File (Figure 18.11) or Time Series from Model.

For the DSS from File option (Figure 18.11), the user can select a DSS file and pathname, click
Select (Figure 18.11). The Select Time Series dialog box will open (Figure 18.12), navigate to
the DSS file location, from the table select the appropriate pathname, click Select (Figure 18.11).

18-7
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 18.11 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Series – DSS from File

Figure 18.12 Select Time Series Dialog Box

The Select Time Series dialog box will close (Figure 18.12), and the selected information will
display on the Edit Logical Expression dialog box (Figure 18.11) in the File box and the Path
box. The logical expression can be updated to display the Time Series by clicking Save or
Apply on the Edit Logical Expression Editor (Figure 18.9).

The Time Series from Model option (Figure 18.13) allows the user to select time series data
from model alternatives that are part of the FRA simulation. From the Select Time Series box
(Figure 18.12), from the Model list (Figure 18.13), select the appropriate model alternative. The
Time Series list (Figure 18.13) displays the time series data available from the selected model
alternative. Select a single time series to include in the logical expression, click Apply, the
selected time series will be added to the expression.

18.3.5 Time Window

The Time Window can only be added to the expression inside an Operator (Section 18.3.1) and
allows the user to apply an Operator to a portion or subset of a time-series. For example, the
user can find the maximum flow between two dates of interest, as specified by the time

18-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

Figure 18.13 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Series – Time Series from Model

window. From the table on the Edit Logical Expression dialog box (Figure 18.4), make sure the
row with *Not Set*has been selected, click Time Window (Figure 18.14), the interface will
change. A row is added to the logical expression table on the Edit Logical Expression dialog
box (Figure 18.14), with the TIMEWINDOW expression.

Figure 18.14 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Window

For the Start and End of the time window (Figure 18.14) there are three options - DSS Record,
Model's Compute Window, and Specified. These options can be selected independently for the
start and end dates and times. For example, the user could select DSS Record for Start and
Specified for End (Figure 18.14).
18-9
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

In addition to specifying a source for both the start and end of a time window, the user must also
specify a time series for application of the Operator. For example, a MAX Operator could be
applied to a stage time series from HEC-RAS or a flow time series from the Hydrologic Sampler
to find the maximum stage or flow, respectively, within a given time window. The time series is
specified by selecting the row immediately below the TIMEWINDOW row in the logical
expression, which activates the Time Series command (Figure 18.5). Refer to Section 18.3.4 for
details on how to select a time series from a DSS file.

The DSS Record option (Figure 18.13) bases the start or end date and time on a user-specified
DSS record. In this case, the DSS record selected to provide the time series data for the
Operator is also used to set the time window start or end time.

The Model's Compute Window bases the start or end date and time on the compute window of
the selected model alternative. The selected model alternative is identified on the Edit Logical
Expression dialog box (Figure 18.3), along with the name of the FRA simulation. If a Time
Window Modifier (Chapter 9) has been applied to the selected model alternative, the Model's
Compute Window option will reference the modified time window associated with that model
alternative.

The Specified option (Figure 18.15) allows the user to enter a specific date and time for either
the Start or End time. For both the Start and End boxes (Figure 18.15) there are Date and
Time boxes (Figure 18.14). The date should be entered in DDMMM format (e.g., 10Jan) or
selected from a calendar, from the right of the Date box (Figure 18.15) click , a calendar
window will open from which the user can select a date (although year is displayed in the
calendar, it is not used in the Date box or computations). The time should be entered in 24-hour
format (e.g., 1630).

Figure 18.15 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Time Window - Specified

18.3.6 Delete
The Delete option can be used to delete one or more highlighted rows from the expression.

18.4 Model Skip Rules Editor - Comparison Operator

The Comparison Operator defines how Expression A will be compared to Expression B. From
the Model Skip Rules Editor (Figure 18.2), from the Edit Logical Expression box, the
Comparison Operator list (Figure 18.16) contains the following operators:

18-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

== (equal to)
!= (not equal to)
<= (less than or equal to)
>= (greater than or equal to)
< (less than)
> (greater than)

Figure 18.16 Edit Logical Expression Dialog Box – Comparison Operator List

18.5 Model Skip Rules Editor - Available Actions

The user has the option to add other conditions to the skip rule beyond the simple IF statement.
If the user selects a row in the middle of the skip rule (i.e., not the first or the last row), all four
commands in the Available Actions box (Figure 18.17) are enabled - Else If, Else, And, and
Or. When the user selects one of these options, a new row with the selected command is added
to the Build Logical Expression table (Figure 8.2) above the highlighted row. If the user selects
the END row, only the Else If and Else commands are enabled. In this case, a new row with the
selected command is added to the Build Logical Expression table (Figure 8.2) above the END
row. The commands function is detailed in the following sections.

Figure 18.17 Model Skip Rules Editor – Available Actions - End

18.5.1 Default - If
This condition specifies the first rule that is tested for true or false. This is included in the Build
Logical Expression table by default. If this rule is true, the evaluation moves to the Skip rule. If
the If rule is false, the evaluation moves to the first Else If rule (Section 18.5.2). If all rules are
false, the evaluation moves to the Else rule if the user has chosen to specify a default action.
Otherwise the evaluation stops and no models are skipped.

18-11
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

18.5.2 Else If
This condition allows the user to evaluate additional rules for true or false beyond the initial If
rule. If the evaluation is false for the initial If rule (Section 18.5.1), the evaluation moves to the
first Else If rule (Figure 18.17) to test for true or false. If an Else If rule is true, the evaluation
moves to the Skip rule. If an Else If rule is false, the evaluation moves to the next Else If rule. If
all rules are false, the evaluation moves to the Else rule if the user has chosen to specify a default
action. Otherwise the evaluation stops and no models are skipped. The user can include as many
Else Ifs, or alternate rules, as desired.

18.5.3 Else
This condition specifies the default action when none of the If or Else If rules are evaluated as
true. The Else rule (Figure 18.17) is optional, and only one Else rule is allowed in a logical
expression.

18.5.4 And
The And condition (Figure 18.17) can be used to ensure that multiple rules are evaluated as true
before models are skipped. If any part of an And rule set is evaluated as false, the logical
expression evaluation stops and no models are skipped.

18.5.5 Or
The Or condition (Figure 18.17) allows evaluation of additional expressions if previous
expressions are evaluated as false. If any part of an Or rule is evaluated as true, the logical
expression evaluation moves to directly to the Skip rule.

18.5.6 Selection
This option lets the user specify the order of operation using parentheses, where operations
inside parentheses are completed first.

18.5.7 Select List of Models to Skip

The user should specify which models to skip in the FRA compute if the skip rule is met. This is
done by selecting the row in the Build Logical Expression table that contains END. In the
Available Actions box (Figure 8.17), several options become available.

To skip models in the selected FRA simulation, click Select List of Models to Skip (Figure
18.17), the Select Models to Skip box (Figure 18.18) contains a list of model alternatives that
could be skipped. The list is based on the selected model alternative and the listed models
follow the selected model alternative in the program order. The user should select the model of
interest to skip, as well as all other models that follow in the compute sequence because they will
not have input data to run.

18-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 18 – Model Skip Rules Editor

Figure 18.18 Model Skip Rules Editor – Select Models to Skip Box

18.5.8 Comment
This command allows the user to enter documentation within a logical expression. Comments
(Figure 18-17) do not affect the evaluation of the logical expression.

18.5.9 Delete
Multiple conditions can be added to the Model Skip Rules Editor, and one or more rows can be
deleted by highlighting them and selecting the Delete button.

18.6 Default - End Condition

The END condition signifies the end of the defined logical expression or skip rule.

18-13
Chapter 18 – Model Skips Rules Editor HEC-WAT User's Manual

18-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

CHAPTER 19

Performance and Economic Metrics

USACE requires that for USACE planning studies, risk and uncertainty analyses be performed in
a systems context. From these analyses, the performance of the system's reaction to an event
needs to be stated. The performance and economic metrics that can be computed in Version 1.0
of HEC-WAT meet these USACE requirements. The user will need to determine if the study
being conducted needs to report performance and economic metrics. If the study requires the
reporting of performance and economic metrics, then the user will need to build a Performance
Metrics Alternative for the FRA compute. The HEC-WAT Technical Reference Guide (not
available for Version 1.0 release) will provide the user with further details on the computation of
performance and economic metrics in HEC-WAT.

19.1 Available Performance and Economic Metrics

The performance and economic metrics available in Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT are described in
the following sections.

19.1.1 Expected Annual Damage (EAD)

Expected Annual Damage (EAD) is an economic metric that is the average or mean of all annual
damage determined from a Monte Carlo (a numerical integration approach) analysis of variables
that contribute to EAD, along with those variables' associated uncertainties. HEC-WAT can
compute both EAD and the uncertainty about EAD, as shown in Figure 19.1. An HEC-FIA
model is required in the FRA compute for EAD to be computed.

HEC-WAT results for EAD provide the user with a general idea of how the EAD estimates are
probabilistically distributed and easily characterize some global aspects of the distribution (skew,
data gaps, etc.). During an FRA simulation, the consequence model alternative (FIA) can
produce damage for each simulated flood event. HEC-WAT can then collect these damage
results and calculate an average value per life cycle for each simulation which is analogous to an
EAD estimate. All of these EAD estimates can then be assigned an equal probability. Finally,
HEC-WAT can create a probability density function of EAD with uncertainty.

19.1.2 Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP)

Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP) is the probability that a specific target stage at a location
of interest will be exceeded in a given year, based on the full range of possible flows. Within the
HEC-WAT Performance Metrics tool the user can select a common computation point (CCP)
location and, for each location the user can specify a target stage. This means that the target stage
is per location, and the locations must be CCPs. For each selected CCP, the user will be able to

19-1
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 19.1 EAD with Uncertainty Plot – PDF (probability distribution function)

select an input DSS time series record from any model alternative. An example, is an AEP of
stage at a CCP, is generated by an RAS model alternative. It should be noted that stage
information from HEC-RAS storage areas is not currently available for AEP evaluation. AEP is
used in the calculation of Assurance and Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP).

19.1.3 Assurance
The performance metric Assurance (also known as Conditional Non-Exceedance Probability,
CNP), is the probability that a specific target (e.g., the top of a levee) will not be exceeded, given
the occurrence of a specific flood event. This is illustrated in Figure 19.2, which shows that a
stage of 53 feet is not exceeded for 90 percent of the stages modeled for the 1 percent ACE
(Annual Chance Exceedance). To compute Assurance, create a performance metrics alternative
and define an AEP location (Section 19.1.4). When AEP is calculated, assurance will also be
automatically calculated for six exceedance probabilities: 10%, 4%, 2%, 1%, 0.5% and 0.2%.

19.1.4 Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP)

Long Term Exceedance Probability (LTEP) is a performance metric that is the probability that
one or more flood events will occur within a specified time period or the likelihood that the
target stage will be exceeded in a specified time period. LTEP results are currently available for
three time periods in HEC-WAT: 10-, 30- and 50-years. The calculations use the binomial
distribution and the computed AEP (EM 1110-2-1415).

19-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

Figure 19.2 Assurance

19.2 Performance Metrics Alternative

For HEC-WAT to compute performance and economic metrics the user will need to create and
setup certain parameters in a performance metrics alternative. This section provides information
on creating, editing, saving, creating copies, renaming, and deleting performance metrics
alternatives.

19.2.1 Create
To create a performance metrics alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Study Tree, from the Models
folder, right-click on Performance Metrics. From the shortcut menu (Figure 19.4), click
New, or from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Edit menu, point to
Performance Metrics, click New. Using either approach, the Create New
Performance Metrics Alternative dialog box will open (Figure 19.5).

Figure 19.3 HEC-WAT Main Window

19-3
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 19.4 Study Tree – Performance Metrics – Shortcut Menu

Figure 19.5 Create New Performance Metrics Alternative Dialog Box

2. In the Name box (Figure 19.5), enter a name for the performance metrics alternative. A
description for the alternative can be entered in the Description box (Figure 19.5).

3. Click OK, the Create New Performance Metrics Alternative dialog box (Figure 19.5)
will close. The Performance Metrics Editor will open (Figure 19.6) and the name of
the performance metrics alternative will display in the Content Pane (Figure 19.4) of the
HEC-WAT main window.

Figure 19.6 Performance Metrics Editor

19-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

4. By default the Performance Metrics Editor (Figure 19.6) defaults to computing EAD
with uncertainty. If the user wishes not to compute EAD with uncertainty, click
Compute EAD with Uncertainty (check-mark will disappear).

5. To create a name for linking the models to the active performance metrics alternative
(i.e., PM_St. Paul), click Add (Figure 19.6). A default name will display (EAD 1, EAD
2, etc.) in the Linkage Name Table (Figure 19.6). The user can change this default
name by selecting a row in the table and changing the name. A name can be deleted by
selecting a row, clicking Remove (Figure 19.6) and the selected name is deleted.

6. From the Annual Exceedance Probability tab (Figure 19.7) of the Performance
Metrics Editor, the user can setup the computation of AEP. By default, the computation
of AEP is set. If the user does not wish to calculate AEP, click Compute AEP (check-
mark will disappear). It should be noted that AEP is used in the calculation of the other
performance metrics (e.g., Assurance, LTEP). Therefore, ensure that AEP is being
computed when also computing Assurance and/or LTEP.

Figure 19.7 Performance Metrics Editor – Annual Exceedance Probability Tab

7. To display AEP and LTEP in a histogram, the number of bars (bins) is required. By
default the number of bars (bins) in the histograms is set to twenty (20). The user can
change the number of bars (bins) in the Number of AEP Histogram Bars and the
Number of LTEP Histogram Bars boxes (Figure 19.7).

8. Next the user needs to select the location(s) where AEP is to be computed in the study.
These locations can only be CCPs that have already been defined for the study area.
From the Performance Metric Editor (Figure 19.7), click Select Locations, the
Selection Editor (Figure 19.8) will open. From the Available Locations box, select the

19-5
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

location(s) where AEP is to be computed. Click Add, the selected location(s) will now
appear in the Selected Locations box (Figure 19.8). Click OK, the Selection Editor will
close (Figure 19.8) and the names of the selected location(s) will appear on the
Performance Metrics Editor (Figure 19.7) in the table.

Figure 19.8 Selection Editor

9. For the specified location(s), the user will need to enter a target stage, from the table
(Figure 19.7), under the Target Stage column.

10. Now that information has be defined for the performance metric alternative, click OK,
the Performance Metrics Editor (Figure 19.7) will close.

19.2.2 Edit
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Content Pane (Figure 19.9),
right-click on a performance metrics alternative, from the shortcut menu click Edit. The
Performance Metrics Editor will open (Figure 19.6).

2. From the Performance Metrics Editor, the user can edit an existing performance
metrics alternative. When editing is finished, click OK, the Performance Metrics
Editor will close (Figure 19.6).

19.2.3 Save
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Content Pane (Figure 19.9), right-
click on a performance metrics alternative, from the shortcut menu click Save. The performance
metrics alternative data is saved.
19-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

Figure 19.9 Individual Performance Metrics Alternative - Content Pane- Shortcut Menu

19.2.4 Save As
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Content Pane (Figure 19.9),
right-click on a performance metrics alternative, from the shortcut menu, click Save As.
The Save Performance Metrics As dialog box will open (Figure 19.10).

Figure 19.10 Save Performance Metrics As Dialog Box

2. The name of the performance metrics alternative which is being copied is displayed in the
Old Name box (Figure 19.10). The user will enter a new unique name in the Name box.
An optional can be provided description in the Description box (Figure 19.10).

3. Click OK, the Save Performance Metrics As dialog box will close (Figure 19.10), and
the name of the new performance metrics alternative will appear in the Content Pane
(Figure 19.9) of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3).

19.2.5 Rename
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Content Pane (Figure 19.9),
right-click on a performance metrics alternative, from the shortcut menu click Rename.
The Rename Performance Metrics dialog box will open (Figure 19.11).

2. The name of the performance metrics alternative which is being renamed is displayed in
the Name box. The user must enter a new unique name in the Name box (Figure 19.11).
An optional description can be provided in the Description box (Figure 19.11).

19-7
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 19.11 Rename Performance Metrics Dialog Box

3. Click OK, the Rename Performance Metrics dialog box will close (Figure 19.11), and
the re-named performance metrics alternative will appear in the Content Pane (Figure
19.9) of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3).

19.2.6 Delete
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Content Pane (Figure 19.9),
right-click on a performance metrics alternative, from the shortcut menu click Delete. A
Confirm Delete window box will open (Figure 19.12).

Figure 19.12 Confirm Delete Window

2. Click Yes, the selected performance metrics alternative will no longer be displayed in the
Content Pane (Figure 19.9) of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3).

19.3 Model Skip Rules Editor

The Model Skip Rules Editor (Chapter 18) is available as part of the flood risk analysis (FRA)
compute of HEC-WAT. The purpose of the Model Skip Rules Editor is to allow the user to
define logical expressions (i.e.., if-then statements) of conditions when model computations will
be skipped, or not performed, within an FRA compute. A performance metrics alternative should
never be skipped, because some of the computed results may not be correct if the performance
metrics alternative is skipped.

19.4 Model Linking

Model linking (Chapter 12) is the process within the HEC-WAT framework that allows the
individual models to communicate with each other and how data is handed-off from model
alternative to model alternative. For a performance metrics alternative, the EAD metric should
be linked to an FIA model alternative and the AEP metric should be linked to stage at an HEC-
RAS cross-section.

19-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

19.5 Results
Performance metrics results are available from a series of plots and reports that will be discussed
in the following sections. Chapter 21 will provide further details on where in the HEC-WAT
interface these results can be obtained. The simulation.dss file (e.g., Without_Project_
Conditions-TimeWindow.dss) contains performance metrics results (EAD, AEP) that the user can
access with HEC-DSSVue (Figure 19.13) and create specific plots and reports.

Figure 19.13 HEC-DSSVue – simulation.dss File

HEC-WAT results for a performance metrics alternative are available for the active HEC-WAT
FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3). From the Results menu
(Figure 19.14), point to Performance Metrics, from the sub-menu are the available performance
metrics results from HEC-WAT.

Figure 19.14 Results Menu – Performance Metrics

19.5.1 Select Event Results

To provide meaningful results, the user can setup how to organize those results. From the HEC-
WAT main window (Figure 19.3), from the Results menu (Figure 19.14), click Select Results.

19-9
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

The Select Event Results dialog box will open (Figure 19.15). The user can select a realization,
lifecycle, and/or event, for which performance metrics results will be displayed.

Figure 19.15 Select Event Results Dialog Box

19.5.2 Plot EAD

For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3),
from the Results menu (Figure 19.14), point to Performance Metrics, from the sub-menu click
Plot EAD. The EAD with Uncertainty Plot dialog box will open (19.16), displaying (by
default) the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of the EAD with Uncertainty Plot. For
EAD, this plot is for all realizations. For example, in Figure 19.16, ten realizations of 500 events
each (total of 5,000 events). An example of the probability density function (PDF) is provided in
Figure 19.1. The CDF displayed in Figure 19.16 records the EAD from each realization, ranked
from smallest to largest, plotted by the position of the record in the ranked list as an exceedance
probability. Within any realization, the damage from all events are accumulated and divided by
the total number of events simulated within a realization. This produces an estimate of EAD at
the realization level. Each realization estimate of EAD will differ slightly from other realization
estimates, based on the sampled frequency curve and sampled uncertainty in each model in the
compute sequence. The average of all realization estimates of EAD is presented in the Total
Mean EAD box (Figure 19.16), and the variance in the realization level EAD values represents
the uncertainty around the average. Equivalently, the PDF plot presented in Figure 19.1 also
describes the distribution of the realization estimates of EAD.

19.5.3 EAD Output Report

For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3),
from the Results menu (Figure 19.14), point to Performance Metrics, from the sub-menu click
EAD Output Report. A text editor will open (Figure 19.17), which contains the EAD Output
Report. This report provides information about the years in a realization (i.e., 500); the number
of realizations (i.e., 10); the mean EAD (i.e., $48,618,722.38); a table summarizing confidence
about the mean EAD; numbers of bins (bars) (i.e., 20) for the EAD histogram; and, a table that
represents the EAD histogram. This report is generated in after the completion of an FRA
compute.

19-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

Figure 19.16 EAD with Uncertainty Plot Dialog Box – Plot CDF

Figure 19.17 EAD Output Report

19-11
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

19.5.4 AEP Histogram

For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3),
from the Results menu (Figure 19.14), point to Performance Metrics, from the sub-menu click
AEP Histogram. An AEP Histograms dialog box will open (Figure 19.18), providing a plot of
the calculated AEP in a histogram. The histogram provides a graphical representation of
numerical data and allows the user to discover and display the underlying frequency distribution
(shape) of the numerical data. This plot is representative of all realizations (e.g., 5,000 events),
and for the first watershed location (i.e., PFMW3) in the Location list (Figure 19.18).

Figure 19.18 AEP Histogram

19.5.5 LTEP Histogram

For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3),
from the Results menu (Figure 19.14), point to Performance Metrics, from the sub-menu click
LTEP Histogram. An LTEP Histograms dialog box will open (Figure 19.19), providing a plot
of the calculated LTEP values in a histogram. The histogram provides a graphical representation
of numerical data and allows the user to discover and display the underlying frequency
distribution (shape) of numerical data. This plot is representative of all realizations (e.g., 5,000
events), and for the first watershed location (i.e., PFMW3) in the Location list (Figure 19.19).

19-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics

Figure 19.19 LTEP Histogram

19.5.6 Performance Metrics Output Report

For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 19.3),
from the Results menu (Figure 19.14), point to Performance Metrics, from the sub-menu click
Performance Metrics Output Report. A text editor will open (Figure 19.20), which contains
the Performance Metrics Report. This report provides information about the years in a
realization (i.e., 500); the number of realizations (i.e., 10); the mean AEP (i.e., 34.57) for a
specific watershed location (i.e., PFMW3); a table that is the summary of Assurance; a table of
the AEP histogram; a table of the mean LTEP; and, a table that represents the LTEP histogram.
This report is generated in after the completion of an FRA compute.

19-13
Chapter 19 – Performance & Economic Metrics HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 19.20 Performance Metrics Output Report

19-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

CHAPTER 20
Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis
Now the user has an understanding about the HEC-WAT framework with an FRA study in mind
- how to create a study; an introduction to map layers; model alternatives have either been
created or imported into the study; analysis periods (time windows); alternative and simulations
have been created; and, model linking has been defined. There are a few more setup items for an
FRA compute that need to occur: which plug-ins are associated with an FRA study;
manipulating map layers associated with the study; entering the correct lookback window for an
HEC-ResSim model (if part of the study); creating specific FRA model alternatives; time
window modifiers; model linking the FRA model alternatives; creating an FRA simulation; and
selecting specific output for an FRA simulation.

20.1 Define Plug-Ins for an FRA Study

Plug-ins (Chapter 2) allow HEC-WAT to integrate software applications into its framework
without requiring special code in HEC-WAT to support the individual software applications.
Currently there are nineteen plug-ins that have been created (Appendix B provides further
details), eight of those specifically for standalone software applications, and eleven plug-ins
specifically created for HEC-WAT functions. While all of these plug-ins are available, the user
must inform HEC-WAT which plug-ins are needed for a given study from the Study Details
dialog box (Figure 20.1). Plug-ins can be enabled/disabled from the Options dialog box
(Appendix B), but this should only be done to enable/disable specific plug-ins for specialized
studies or when there is an issue with a plug-in.

Figure 20.1 Study Details Dialog Box – Plugins Tab – FRA

20-1
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

To set the specific plug-ins for an FRA study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 20.2), from the File menu, click Study
Details, the Study Details dialog box (Figure 20.1) will open.

Figure 20.2 HEC-WAT Main Window

2. The Study Details dialog box (Figure 20.1) displays the name of the study, the study
description (which the user can edit), location of the study file (*.sty), the selected unit
system, the selected coordinate system, the user name of the team member that created
the study, and the date and time the study was created.

3. Click the Plugins tab (Figure 20.1), by default, all plug-ins are enabled; for an FRA study
the user should choose the software applications that will be used in an FRA study. For
example, in Figure 20.1, for the active FRA study the plug-ins enabled are FIA, Fragility
Curve, Hydrologic Sampling, Performance Metrics, RAS, Simulation Compute Engine
Manager, and TimeWindowModifier.

4. For an FRA study, the only required plug-in is the Hydrologic Sampling plug-in, for all
other plug-ins and software applications the user can select based on the analyses
required of the FRA study area.

5. To disable a plug-in clear the check mark in the Enabled column of the table (Figure
20.1). When the user has the right plug-in configuration, click OK. The Study Details
dialog box will close (Figure 20.1) and the plug-in configuration for the FRA study has
been set.

20-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

20.2 Adjust Map Layers

Whether models were built from within the HEC-WAT study or imported, there could be map
layers that define the study area. The user may need to adjust the map layers so that the
schematic displays information to the study team and others.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, click the Maps tab (Figure 20.3). Now the user can
see which Map Window is currently active and what layers make up that Map Window.
The user can now make adjustments (changes to draw properties) to the map layers, from
the Map Layers tree:

Figure 20.3 HEC-WAT Main Window – Maps Tab

● Un-check a map layer so that it will no longer display in the active map window.
For example in Figure 20.3, the stpaul_10ft.smrmp map layer has been un-checked.

● For map layers, the user can change the display properties of the selected map layer
For example, in Figure 20.3, the user could right-click on the Fail_Middle_Design_
HA.shp map layer, from the shortcut menu, click Properties. The Edit Polygon
Properties Editor will open (Figure 20.4). From the Fill tab, change the color to
"lightblue", click OK. The impact areas on the active map window will now display
in "lightblue".

● Move layers to better display certain aspects of the schematic. For example, in
Figure 20.3, right-click on Stream Alignment, from the shortcut menu click Move
To Top. The Stream Alignment layer is now the top layer in the schematic.
20-3
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 20.4 Edit Polygon Properties Editor

2. The user can adjust the view of the study area in the active map window. Using the
Magnifier tool, zoom the study area in the active map window to the appropriate area
that the user would like displayed. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 20.3),
from the Maps menu, click Default Map Properties, the Default Map Properties for
dialog box will open (Figure 20.5). Click Set Map Extents to Display, click OK. The
Default Map Properties for dialog box will close.

Figure 20.5 Default Map Properties for Dialog Box

This sets the extents for the Map Window so that when the study is opened the next time
the Map Window will be zoomed in to the tighter area.
20-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

20.3 Lookback Window – HEC-ResSim (only)

The time window for an HEC-ResSim run has two parts, a "lookback period" and a "simulation
or forecast period". The lookback period is used by HEC-ResSim to "warm up" a ResSim model
alternative. During this period, routing of flows through the river and reservoir network are
performed but no release decisions are made nor are any mass balance computations evaluated.
The user should think of the lookback period as the time to establish the state of the river
network and the starting conditions of the reservoirs. The simulation period is the portion of the
time window during which HEC-ResSim simulates reservoir operations, and makes release
decisions based on the operation logic defined by the user. Releases are then routed through the
river network, combining with local inflows along the way.

HEC-WAT and most of the models treat the analysis period as a single, continuous time
window. Because HEC-ResSim splits the analysis period into two parts, an additional setup step
is required for each active HEC-ResSim alternative in an HEC-WAT study. The setup step lets
each ResSim model alternative know how much of the analysis period to use for the lookback
period.

To set-up the lookback period:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 20.2), from the Edit menu, point to ResSim,
click Lookback Window (Figure 20.6), the Lookback Window dialog box (Figure
20.7) will open.

Figure 20.6 Edit Menu – ResSim – Lookback Window

2. The table on the Lookback Window dialog box (Figure 20.7) displays the ResSim model
alternatives that are available in the HEC-WAT study. Each model alternative that is
being used in an HEC-WAT simulation will need to have a lookback window set. For
example, in Figure 20.7, the ResSim model alternative calibrate has a TimeStep of 1
hour and Lookback Steps of 6.
20-5
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 20.7 Lookback Window Dialog Box

3. For each Alternative listed, a TimeStep (compute interval) and number of Lookback
Steps must be specified. The time step can be selected from the TimeStep column
(Figure 20.7), in each cell there is a list of available time steps for the user to choose
from. The selected time step has to match the time step that was specified for the ResSim
model alternative as part of the alternative's original Run Control data (which is located
in the HEC-ResSim Alternative Editor). The number of lookback steps must be entered in
a cell in the Lookback Steps column (Figure 20.7). At least one lookback time step is
required for a ResSim model alternative to compute, however more lookback steps may
be needed, depending on a variety of factors in the ResSim model alternative's operating
rules. The HEC-ResSim modeler should be consulted to determine the minimum
lookback window needed by each alternative. As mentioned, the lookback period takes
place within the analysis period (time window) that HEC-WAT provides to the ResSim
model alternative. No reservoir operations will be simulated during the lookback period,
which could impact model results.

4. Click OK, the Lookback Window dialog box (Figure 20.7) will close.

20.4 FRA Specific Model Alternatives

The HEC-WAT framework has several FRA specific model alternatives – hydrologic sampling,
fragility curve sampling, performance and economic metrics, model skip flags, time window
modifiers, and selecting specific output for an FRA simulation. This section will provide an
overview of these model alternatives (Chapters 16 through 19).

20.4.1 Hydrologic Sampling

The first step in an FRA compute is the sampling of the meteorology or hydrology of the study
area to create perhaps thousands of events in meteorologic/hydrologic sequences. The
hydrologic information is needed as time series of flow or precipitation to be routed through the
system being studied. Both precipitation and flow sampling are supported within HEC-WAT,
20-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

although not within the same alternative. Precipitation would be sampled if an HEC-HMS model
alternative is included in the compute sequence and is used to transform precipitation to runoff,
which is then passed to other model alternatives in the compute sequence. Flow would be
sampled when the decision was made to bypass a precipitation-runoff model and go directly to
reservoir or river hydraulics modeling.

Hydrologic sampling (Figure 20.8) generates the hydrologic sequences, precipitation

hyetographs or flow hydrographs, required for the simulation of the hydrology, reservoir
operation, and hydraulics. The hydrologic information, such as flow or precipitation frequency
curves, cross correlations between curves, and hydrograph or hyetograph shapes is defined
within the Hydrologic Sampling Editor. For details on further details on hydrologic sampling
in HEC-WAT, review the Hydrologic Sampler User's Manual.

Figure 20.8 Hydrologic Sampling Editor

20.4.2 Fragility Curve Sampling

A fragility curve defines a structure's (i.e., levee) probability of failure over a range of elevation
values at a specific location along the structure (i.e., levee). To capture the likelihood of
structural (i.e., levee) failure at specified locations, the fragility curve sampling in HEC-WAT

20-7
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

occurs in a systems context with failure elevations at multiple locations being sampled either by
realization or by event. The elevation of failure that is sampled is then used by the hydraulics
software (i.e., HEC-RAS) to evaluate breaching. When sampling by realization, the failure
elevation is sampled once per realization and held constant for every event in the realization. For
sampling by event, a different failure elevation is generated for each event in a realization. For
further details on how to enter data for fragility curve sampling, see Chapter 17 of this User's
Manual. The HEC-WAT Technical Reference Guide (which will not be available with the initial
release of Version 1.0) will provide the user with further details on fragility curve sampling in
HEC-WAT. Fragility curve sampling is not required for an FRA compute, the user needs to
determine if fragility curve sampling is needed for a flood risk management study.

20.4.3 Performance Metrics Alternative

As described in Chapter 19, there are several economic and performance metrics that can be
computed that measure the performance of a system's reaction to an event. Currently, in Version
1.0 of HEC-WAT the user can (not required) request the computation of economic and
performance metrics through a Performance Metrics Alternative. The creation and entering of
data for a Performance Metrics Alternative is described in Chapter 19. The HEC-WAT
Technical Reference Guide will provide the user with further details on the computation of
economic and performance metrics in HEC-WAT (which will not be available with the initial
release of Version 1.0). Economic and performance metrics are not required for an FRA
compute, the user needs to determine if reporting of economic and performance metrics are
needed for a flood risk management study.

20.5 Model Skip Flags

An FRA compute requires a large amount of computation resources and a large amount of
storage for results. HEC-WAT provides a way to aid in the budgeting of computation resources
and simulation times based on user entered criteria. The Model Skip Rules Editor (Chapter 18)
allows the user to define logical expressions (i.e.., if-then statements) of conditions when model
alternative computations will be skipped, or not performed, within an FRA compute sequence.
This allows the user to eliminate unnecessary computations and reduce run-times for an FRA
compute. Detailed information on the Model Skip Rules Editor and its available options is in
Chapter 18.

20.6 Time Window Modifiers

An analysis period (time window) for an FRA simulation is different than when modeling
historic events. The analysis period for an FRA simulation is used to set the length of each life
cycle within the FRA compute. Typically, life cycles are fifty-years in length. If the FRA
simulation does not requires damage being analyzed and life cycles are not required, then the
analysis period can be an arbitrary length; however, 100 or 500 year life cycles are optimal for
results management. The HEC-WAT framework provides several methods for modifying the
analysis period time window within a simulation. Modifying (time window modifiers are not
required for an FRA simulation) the simulation time window is a way to make a simulation run
faster or help make simulations more stable by adjusting the time window for each model that is
part of an HEC-WAT simulation.
20-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

The Time Window Adjustment option (Chapter 9, Section 9.2.1) provides the user with simple
methods to adjust the simulation time window for a specific model. The user can independently
adjust the start and end dates and times of a simulation time window. The Time Window
Modifier (Chapter 9, Section 9.2.2) allows users to also alter the simulation time window, but
based on model alternative results (e.g., adding or subtracting days relative to the date and time
of a peak flow or stage) instead of date shifts.

20.7 Create an HEC-WAT FRA Simulation

Now that all of the building blocks have been configured, the user can create an HEC-WAT FRA
simulation. To create an HEC-WAT FRA simulation:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 20.3), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click
.

2. The Alternative and Simulation Manager will open (Figure 20.9). From this manager
the user can create/modify alternatives, analysis periods, simulations, program order, link
model alternatives, and compute FRA simulations.

Figure 20.9 Alternative and Simulation Manager

3. To create a simulation, from the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Figure 20.9)
table, right-click on the intersection of an alternative and analysis period. An Analysis
Period must be available in order for a simulation to be created. An analysis period can
only be used once per HEC-WAT alternative. From the shortcut menu click Create
Simulation. The Create New Simulation dialog box will open (Figure 15.6).

4. HEC-WAT has defined a default name for the simulation (e.g., Without Project
Conditions-TimeWindow) in the Name box (Figure 20.10). The name is a combination
of the HEC-WAT alternative name and analysis period name. The simulation name can
be changed. Also, in the Alternative and Analysis Period lists (Figure 20.10) the
selections have already been made based on the intersection in the table. The selected
Alternative (Figure 20.10) cannot be changed, but the selected Analysis Period can be
changed if there is an available analysis period to select.
20-9
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 20.10 Create New Simulation Dialog Box

5. In the F Part box (Figure 20.10), a default DSS F-Part is displayed that was generated by
HEC-WAT based on the alternative and analysis period (this is informational and cannot
be changed).

6. To create an FRA simulation, select Run FRA (Figure 20.11). The options for setting up
an FRA simulation are now available.

Figure 20.11 Create New Simulation Dialog Box – FRA Setup

● Number of realizations to perform the flood risk management analysis - enter

the maximum number of realizations (e.g., 100) that are needed to perform the
FRA analysis.

● Years per realization - default is 500; number can be increased.

Note: The number of events and the analysis period length are used to define the number
of life cycles within a realization. For example, an analysis period that is 50 years long
will result in 10 life cycles if the years per realization is set to 500. The years per

20-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

realization should be set to an even multiplier of the analysis period length. The user can
enter 1,000 years per realization and then 100 realizations. In this example, 100 separate
realizations of 1,000 years will be simulated, providing 100 flow and stage frequency
curves that extend to 1/1,000 ACE (by sorting and ranking the flows/stages then dividing
the rank by the total number of years in a realization, 1,000). In general, the number of
events per realization should be two to three times the frequency storm event desired. For
example, if the 1/100 pool elevation is desired, the number of sampled events for each
realization should be a minimum of 250.

7. From the Hydrologic Event Alternative list (Figure 20.11) select the appropriate
Hydrologic Sampling Alternative (e.g., HS – St. Paul Levee 30years).

8. A program order needs to be selected. From the Program Order list (Figure 20.10)
select the appropriate (i.e., FRM) program order for the simulation.

9. In the Programs table (Figure 20.12), the software applications that were defined in the
program order appear in the order that was set in the program order. Now the user must
select the appropriate model alternative (i.e., plan, simulation run, alternative) for each
software application. From the Alternative column (Figure 20.12), from the list for
Fragility Curve (Figure 20.12), select the appropriate fragility curve alternative (e.g., FC
– St. Paul Levee). Repeat the process for the other software applications.

Figure 20.12 Create New Simulation Dialog Box - Selection of Model Alternatives

10. Now that all of the model alternatives have been selected, click OK. The Create New
Simulation dialog box will close (Figure 20.11). On the Alternative and Simulation
Manager (Figure 20.13) dialog box, the intersection of the alternative and analysis
period now provides information about the simulation.

11. Click OK; the Alternative and Simulation Manager dialog box will close (Figure
20.13). From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 20.3), the created simulation appears
on the Study Tree, under the Simulations folder (Figure 20.14).

12. Click on the simulation in the Study Tree (Figure 20.14), the Content Pane (Figure
20.15) displays information about the selected simulation.

13. Double-click on the simulation name (e.g., Without Project Conditions-TimeWindow), a

Select Map dialog box will open. Click New Map Window, click OK. The Select Map
dialog box will close. The new map window will contain the schematic elements that
represent the simulation (Figure 20.16).
20-11
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 20.13 Alternative and Simulation Manager - Completed Simulation

Figure 20.14 Study Tree with Created Simulation

Figure 20.15 Content Pane

20-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

Figure 20.16 Map Window - Schematic of Current HEC-WAT Simulation - FRA

20.8 Manipulating FRA Simulations

FRA simulations can be manipulated from shortcut menus that are available from the Study
Tree (Chapter 11, Section 11.3.3), and the Alternative and Simulation Manager (Chapter 11,
Section 11.2.6). These shortcut menus will allow the user to view the selected simulation in a
map window; edit the model alternatives associated with the selected simulation; remove the
simulation map window; edit the active simulation; open the Model Linking Editor (Chapter
12); compute; view the log of the compute; view results; save changes to the simulation; delete
the simulation from the study; view the properties of the simulation; and, browse the run folder
associated with the active simulation. Chapter 11 provides further details on these capabilities
from the individual simulation shortcut menu.

20.9 Model Linking

Now that FRA simulation(s) are setup, "linking" between the models will need to be defined.
Linking is the process within the HEC-WAT framework that allows the individual models to
communicate with each other and how data is handed-off from model alternative to model
alternative. The majority of linking in HEC-WAT is accomplished through DSS mapping and the
use of simulation names. Additional linking capabilities include inundation boundary maps,
water depth maps, and other DSS files. For example, the ResSim model alternative might
require information from an HMS model alternative. Chapter 12 provides information on using
the Model Linking Editor and details other available linking options.

20-13
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

The hydrologic sampling and fragility curve sampling alternatives do not require linking to other
model alternatives. An example of modeling linking for the Time Window Modifier alternative
is displayed in Figure 20.17. This Time Window Modifier alternative (TimeWindowModifier-
ForRAS) shortens the time window for the RAS model alternative based on sampled upstream
boundary conditions that are provided by the hydrologic sampling alternative (Hydrologic
Sampling-HS – St. Paul Levee 30years).

Figure 20.17 Model Linking Editor – Time Window Modifier Alternative

For the Performance Metrics alternative, in the example displayed in Figure 20.18, there are
two locations that are being linked, one location is being linked to an FIA model alternative
(FIA_ALT_Grids) for the computation of EAD. The second location (fragility curve location) is
linked to a RAS model alternative (RAS-Fail Middle) for the computation of AEP and/or LTEP.

Figure 20.18 Model Linking Editor – Performance Metrics Alternative

20.10 Output Variables

The Output Variable Editor (Figure 20.19) provides an interface for selecting output from an
HEC-WAT FRA simulation. Currently, only the maximum values from selected model outputs
20-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 20 – Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis

Figure 20.19 Output Variable Editor

and the sampled model parameters from some of the model applications are saved through output
variables. As previously mentioned, there are multiple options for saving files and model results
for an FRA simulation. All time-series information is saved in what is referred to as the lifecycle
DSS files. In many cases, saving and maintaining many thousands of time-series data records is
not possible due to storage limitations. However, the maximum value from each time-series is
useful, and not storage-intensive to save. For example, the peak flow or stage value from a
hydrograph time-series can be used to compute a flow/stage frequency curve or these values can
be plotted to quickly show if a flow or stage threshold was exceeded. Saving the sampled
parameters or initial conditions is useful when evaluating the conditions that led to certain results
(i.e., a high reservoir stage is a result of sampling a high starting pool condition). Results from
many, but not all, variables from the individual applications can be saved through the Output
Variable Editor (Chapter 16), and are written to a DSS file at the simulation level.

The Output Variable Editor (Figure 20.19), has options for selecting an HEC-WAT FRA
simulation, for selecting the model that is part of the selected FRA simulations, and then the
model alternative (a compute sequence can contain multiple instances of the same model). Once
a simulation, model, and model alternative are selected, click Select Variables to Save, from the
selector that opens (Chapter 18), the user will select variables that will be saved. The user must
select at least one output variable from the models in the compute sequence or tell the FRA
simulation to compute without an output variable being chosen before computing an FRA
simulation. For a "production" simulation where output is required, the user should choose all
appropriate output variables before running the simulation.

Now that all of the setup has been completed, the user is ready to compute HEC-WAT flood risk
analysis simulations.

20-15
Chapter 20 - Final Study Setup – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

20-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

CHAPTER 21
Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis
Now that an FRA simulation has been defined – which means model alternatives have been
imported for an HEC-WAT study (Chapter 8); analysis periods (time window) have been defined
(Chapter 9); a hydrologic sampling alternative has been defined (Hydrologic Sampler User's
Manual); creation of fragility curve sampling (Chapter 17) and performance metrics alternatives
(Chapter 19) are optional; time window modifiers (Chapter 9) have been defined if necessary;
linking of model alternatives has been completed (Chapter 12); model skip flags (Chapter 18)
have been defined if necessary; and, output variables have been selected (Chapter 16), the user is
ready to compute an FRA simulation.

21.1 Compute – FRA Simulation

21.1.1 Study Tree

Computing an FRA simulation from the Study Tree:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from the Study Tree, from the
Simulations folder, right-click on a simulation (e.g., Without Project Conditions-
TimeWindow). From the shortcut menu (Figure 21.1) point to Compute, click
Simulation.

Figure 21.1 HEC-WAT Main Window – FRA Compute

21-1
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The Run FRA Simulation dialog box will open (Figure 21.2). In the Name box is the
name of the simulation that will be computed (e.g., Without Project Conditions-
TimeWindow). The number of realizations (10) that will be computed is provided in the
Max. Number of Realizations box. Other options are:

Figure 21.2 Run FRA Simulation Dialog Box

● Start at Lifecycle 1 - default starting point of an FRA compute (Figure 21.2).

● Run specified - by selecting this option (Figure 21.2) the user can choose whether
to run a specific life cycle or realization, or a range of life cycles or realizations.
For example, the user can enter 2-5, 22 to run Lifecycles 2 through 5 and then
Lifecycle 22.

● Save Lifecycle DSS Files - when the user selects this option (Figure 21.2) all
FRA results written to the life cycle DSS files are saved. All HEC software
applications - HEC-HMS, HEC-RAS, HEC-ResSim, and HEC-FIA write time-
series results to the life cycle DSS files during an FRA compute. The output
variables selected by the user are used by HEC-WAT to extract maximum values
from the user selected time-series records. If the user does not want the time-
series results to be saved, the user should not select Save Lifecycle DSS Files.

Note: It is a good practice to turn on the Save Lifecycle DSS Files (Figure 21.2)
option when initially setting up an FRA simulation and evaluating results. Once
the user is comfortable that results are reasonable, then the life cycle DSS option
can be turned off. Also, the individual software applications have options for
limiting the amount of data written to the life cycle DSS files. The user could
ensure that only necessary information was saved to the life cycle DSS files and
then choose to keep these files.
21-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

● Save Model Folders – model alternative files by event are not saved by default; if
the user wishes to save all information for each event, Save Model Folders
(Figure 21.2) must be selected. This information aids in the debugging of any
issues that might occur when attempting to run an FRA compute. As mentioned
for the Save Lifecycle DSS Files option, this option can be turned off after the
user verifies model alternative results are reasonable.

● Stop Simulation Compute on Error - selecting this option (Figure 21.2) will
cause the FRA compute to stop when any kind of error is detected during the
simulation (compute). This is a good option to turn on when initially making sure
the FRA simulation can run. However, when performing final production
simulations, it might be preferred to let the simulation run even though issues
might have stopped an individual event from completing. For example, when a
RAS model alternative goes unstable due to initial conditions, the error is
detected, and the simulation continues to the next model alternative in the
compute sequence. It is likely that the next model alternative will fail as well
since adequate boundary conditions were not computed by the previous model
alternative. Eventually, the simulations will get through all the model alternatives
within the compute sequence and then start the next event. The output log will
document any errors that prevented the successful completion of all model
alternatives within the compute sequence for an event.

● Output Variables Optional – by default an FRA compute requires that at least

one output variable be selected; if Output Variables Optional (Figure 21.2) is
selected then output variables are not required for the FRA compute. Care should
be taken when considering the selection of this option. If no output variables are
selected, then there will be no maximum values in the simulation DSS file.

● Restart WAT After Model Errors – if Stop Simulation Compute on Error has
not been selected, the Restart WAT After Model Errors option (Figure 21.2)
becomes available. If this option is selected, the user can set the consecutive
number of errors that will make HEC-WAT restart and the maximum number of
restarts. This option is a way to restart HEC-WAT and all software applications
computing within an FRA simulation. When HEC-WAT is restarted, the FRA
simulation will restart after the last successful life cycle.

● Restart Plugins - this option allows the user to decide which software
applications to restart during an FRA compute. Restart Plugins (Figure 21.2)
should be enacted if the user notices the compute runtimes slowing down for each
model alternative in the compute sequence as the simulation progresses. The
software applications are restarted at the end of each life cycle, which frees up
any virtual memory the software applications might be hanging onto while
compute the events within a life cycle.

3. Click Next, the Run FRA Simulation Information dialog box (Figure 21.3) will open.
This dialog box provides summary information about the FRA simulation that is about to
be computed. Information includes the time window, when the simulation will be

21-3
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

stopped, whether results will be saved, life cycles that will be run, model sequence
information, time window modifiers; and output variable time windows.

Figure 21.3 Run FRA Simulation Information Dialog Box

4. Click Compute, the Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 21.4). When the
compute is finished, click Close, the Compute Progress dialog box will close.

Figure 21.4 Compute Progress Dialog Box - FRA Compute

21-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

21.1.2 Compute Menu

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1) from the Compute menu (Figure 21.5), the
user can compute an FRA simulation from different commands. If an FRA simulation is active
(displayed in a Simulation Map Window in the Desktop Pane), then the first item in the
Compute menu will be that FRA simulation's name (e.g., Without Project Conditions-
TimeWindow), hold down the CTRL key, click the FRA simulation, the Compute Progress
dialog box will open (Figure 21.4) and the compute will start.

Figure 21.5 HEC-WAT Main Window – Compute Menu

From the Compute menu (Figure 21.5), point to Recent Simulations, a list of recently
computed simulations will display, hold down the CTRL key, click on an FRA simulation that is
to be computed. The Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 21.4) and the compute
will start.

From the Compute menu (Figure 21.5), point to Compute, hold down the CTRL key, click
Simulation, the Compute Progress dialog box will open (Figure 21.4) and the compute will
start. This will compute the active simulation (displayed in a Simulation Map Window in the
Desktop Pane).

21.2 Compute Manager

The Compute Manager (Figure 21.6) is not available for FRA simulations, the main purpose of
the Compute Manager is to setup running multiple simulations in deterministic mode. FRA
simulations are compute intensive; one simulation could run for several hours/days; and, a great
deal of results are generated (consuming disk space). For example, in Figure 21.6, since
simulations are organized by HEC-WAT alternatives (i.e., Without Project Conditions), the only
simulation displaying in the Compute Manager is the alternative that is not an FRA compute.

21.3 Compute Log

To view an FRA simulation compute log:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from the Compute Menu (Figure
21.5), click View Compute Log – this command is only available when there is an active
simulation (displayed in a Simulation Map Window in the Desktop Pane), the View
Compute Log Editor (Figure 21.7).
21-5
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 21.6 Compute Manager Dialog Box

Figure 21.7 Compute Log Editor

2. The compute log opens in an editor that allows the user to edit, search, print, and format
the log. The search function lets the user search for specific items to troubleshoot what is
going on with the compute or review a detail about one of the software applications.

3. From the File menu, click Close, the Compute Log Editor will close (Figure 21.7).

21-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

21.4 Distributed Compute

The FRA compute option relies on a Monte Carlo computational algorithm that requires
potentially many thousands of simulations (realizations) of the individual model alternatives
included in the program sequence defined for an FRA simulation. To accommodate this need,
the HEC-WAT framework includes a distributed compute option. This distributed compute
option allows the HEC-WAT software to distribute FRA computes across several compute
nodes. The compute node is the basic component of the distributed compute. This option is
available in Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT, if there is interest in using please contact the Hydrologic
Engineering Center.

21.5 Results Menu

From the HEC-WAT Results menu, the user can access results from the different software
applications and results from the FRA specific plug-ins that have been defined in an FRA
simulation. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from the Results menu (Figure
21.8), the user will point to a software application or a specific FRA plug-in from which the user
wants to view results.

Figure 21.8 HEC-WAT Main Window - Results Menu - FRA

21.5.1 Select Event Results

If the Save Model Folders option (Section 21.1.1) has been selected then results are available,
and in an FRA compute that means all time series results from model alternatives that ran during
the simulation. To provide meaningful results, the user can choose which individual event results
to view. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1.), from the Results menu (Figure
21.8), click Select Results, the Select Event Results dialog box will open (Figure 21.9). The
user can select by realization, life cycle, and event; with that selection define any of the FRA
specific results will default to the selection.

21.5.2 Simulation DSS File

In an FRA compute, results from the model alternatives are stored in the DSS file that is stored
in each life cycle folder (lifecycle.dss) of a realization. Scalar results (maximum values from the
time-series records), generated by the FRA specific model alternatives are stored in the

21-7
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 21.9 Select Event Results Dialog Box

simulation.dss file (e.g., random numbers; output variables, frequency curves, etc.). For Version
1.0 not all of the FRA generated results are available from the HEC-WAT framework. From the
HEC-WAT main window (Figure 2.1), from the Results menu (Figure 21.8), click Simulation
DSS File, a HEC-DSSVue window will open (Figure 21.10), with the DSS file of the active
simulation displayed. Using the HEC-DSSVue interface, the user can view and create results,
Appendix K provides further details on using the HEC-DSSVue software. Before opening the
simulation DSS file, from the Results menu (Figure 21.8), a user should access model results
stored in the simulation DSS file from the Output Variables menu item (Section 21.5.3).

Figure 21.10 simulation.dss File

21-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

21.5.3 Output Variables

Output variables in Version 1.0 are only the maximum values from user selected model
alternative results and sampled parameters from some of the model alternatives. The maximum
value from each-time series is useful, for example, the peak flow or stage value from a
hydrograph time-series can be used to compute a flow/stage frequency curve or these values can
be plotted to quickly show if a flow or stage threshold was exceeded. Saving the sampled
parameters or initial conditions is useful when evaluating the conditions that led to certain results
(a high reservoir stage is a result of sampling a high starting pool condition). Chapter 16
provides further details on output variables.

There are three options for visualizing scalar results (output variables) – Histogram Viewer,
Variable Viewer, and Frequency Viewer. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1),
from the Results menu (Figure 21.8), point to Output Variables, click Frequency Viewer, the
Frequency Viewer will open (Figure 21.11).

Figure 21.11 Frequency Viewer - Default

The Frequency Viewer by default displays the first defined output variable in the Variable list
(Figure 21.12), and the first realization in the Realization list (Figure 21.11). For example, to
view the three-day average maximum flow frequency curves for all realizations for a particular
location, from the Variable list (Figure 21.12), click Upstream Boundary Conditions – AVG 3
DAY Max Flow (results generated by the hydrologic sampling). From the Realization list
(Figure 21.11), click All Realizations. The Frequency Viewer (Figure 21.13) will now display
the frequency curves at the selected location for all realizations in the simulation.

21-9
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 21.12 Frequency Viewer – Variable List

Figure 21.13 Frequency Viewer – Selected Location and All Realizations

From the Edit and View menus of all the output variable viewers, the user can adjust items in the
plot. Also, by right-clicking in the viewer in various locations, the user can change the legend,
change both axes, change the title, and more. From the File menu, the user can Print, save the
display plot as a graphics file (Save As), Tabulate, create/apply a template, and save the
specifications of the plot. For further information on manipulating the viewers, refer to
Appendix M of this User's Manual, and HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

By using the Navigator Tool (Figure 21.14) the user can click through the output variables that
have been defined, instead of making a selection from the Variable list (Figure 21.12).

21-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

Figure 21.14 Navigator Tool

1. From the Frequency Viewer (Figure 17.1), using the Navigator Tool (Figure 21.14), the
user can move through the defined output variables.

2. The symbol places the user at the top (first) of the output variable list, while the
symbol places the user at the bottom (last) of the output variable list. The (previous)
symbol and the (next) symbol moves the user back one and forward one in the output
variable list, respectively. The center of the navigation button indicates the number of
output variables in the list and which output variable the user is presently accessing.

21.5.4 Hydrologic Sampling Results

The sampling of hydrology can possibly generate thousands of events in a hydrologic sequence.
Results will be hydrologic information such as flow or precipitation frequency curves, cross
correlations between curves, and hydrograph or hyetograph shapes. From the Results menu
(Figure 21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu there are various plots and
reports that provide a view of some of the hydrology information. For further details on the
hydrologic sampling options available in HEC-WAT, refer to the Hydrologic Sampling User's
Manual. Note: the hydrologic sampling results are only available if the user chooses to save all
model files during the FRA compute. For many simulations, it is not practical so save all model
files as disk storage is not adequate. Output variables (Chapter 16) can be defined for most of
the hydrologic sampling results.

Figure 21.15 FRA Results Menu – Hydrologic Sampling

All six results options described below are available for the Flow Sampling – Correlated
Frequency Curves method, while only two of the items are available for the Flow Sampling –
Bootstrapping Historical/Synthetic Basin-wide Events method (Plot Hydrograph and Output
Report). No results are currently available through the interface for the Precipitation Sampling
method, but these can be viewed through the DSS results file. For further details on the
hydrologic sampling options available in HEC-WAT, refer to the Hydrologic Sampler User's
Manual.

Plot Hydrograph
For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1),
from the Results menu (Figure 21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu click
21-11
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Plot Hydrograph, the Hydrographs dialog box will open (Figure 21.16). The initial
hydrograph displayed is based on the selections (realization, life cycle, and event) made in the
Select Event Results dialog box (Figure 21.9). The user can view other hydrographs by
selecting items in the lists (Figure 21.15) – Realization, Lifecycle, Event, and Location.

Figure 21.16 Hydrographs Dialog Box

Using the Zoom Tool, (Figure 21.16) the user can zoom in on areas of interest in the plot.
The user can modify the plot by right-clicking on areas in the plot, from the shortcut menus
various items could be modified - the axes title, the title of the plot, the viewport, axis tics, the
curve, and many other things. For further information on manipulating the plots, refer to
Appendix M of this User's Manual, and HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

Plot Event Distribution

The Plot Event Distribution option plots a histogram of the event dates of all sampled floods
generated by the hydrologic sampling within an FRA compute. Each sampled date is used to
place the peak of the flood event hydrograph in time, on a month and day. For the active FRA
simulation, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from the Results menu (Figure
21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu click Plot Event Distrib., the Flood
Season dialog box will open (Figure 21.17). This plot is for all life cycles (i.e., 100) and the
number events (i.e., 5,000 events). The plot contains both the user defined and sampled dates.

21-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

Figure 21.17 Flood Season Dialog Box

Using the Zoom Tool, (Figure 21.17) the user can zoom in on areas of interest in the plot.
The user can modify the plot by right-clicking on areas in the plot, from the shortcut menus
various items could be modified - the axes title, the title of the plot, the viewport, axis tics, the
curve, and many other things. For further information on manipulating the plots, refer to
Appendix M of this User's Manual, and HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

Plot Maximum Flows

The Plot Maximum Flow option creates a frequency plot of the sampled maximum flow of all
flood events at each primary location generated by the hydrologic sampling within an FRA
compute. A peak flow magnitude is generated for every event at each primary location based on
correlated sampling from all locations' user-defined frequency curves. The results of this
sampling are compared to the user-defined curve on a frequency plot. For the active FRA
simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from the Results menu (Figure
21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu click Plot Maximum Flows, the
Primary Maximum Flow Frequency dialog box will open (Figure 21.18). This plot is for all
life cycles (i.e., 100), number of events (5,000 events), and a flow location. From the Flow
Location list (Figure 21.18), the user can select different locations that have been defined.

Using the Zoom Tool, (Figure 21.18) the user can zoom in on areas of interest in the plot.
The user can modify the plot by right-clicking on areas in the plot, from the shortcut menus
various items could be modified - the axes title, the title of the plot, the viewport, axis tics, the
curve, and many other things. For further information on manipulating the plots, refer to
Appendix M of this User's Manual, and HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

21-13
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 21.18 Primary Maximum Flow Frequency Dialog Box

Correlation Table
The Correlation Table contains the computed correlation coefficient for every pair of primary
location maximum flows. Maximum flows for each event are generated by correlated random
sampling from the frequency curves at every location, maintaining cross-correlations entered by
the user. For the active FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from
the Results menu (Figure 21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu click
Correlation Table, the Cross Correlations dialog box will open (Figure 21.19). This plot is for
all lifecycles (i.e., 100) and number of events (5,000 events).

Figure 21.19 Cross Correlations Dialog Box

21-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

Plot Shape Set Frequency

The Plot Shape Set Frequency option plots a histogram of the event dates of all sampled floods
generated by the hydrologic sampling within an FRA compute. Each sampled date is used to
place the peak of the flood event hydrograph in time, on a month and day. For the active FRA
simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1), from the Results menu (Figure
21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu click Plot Shape Set Freq., the
Shape Set Frequency dialog box will open (Figure 21.20). This plot is for all life cycles (i.e.,
100) and number of events (5,000 events).

Figure 21.20 Shape Set Frequency Dialog Box

Using the Zoom Tool, (Figure 21.20) the user can zoom in on areas of interest in the plot.
The user can modify the plot by right-clicking on areas in the plot, from the shortcut menus
various items could be modified - the axes title, the title of the plot, the viewport, axis tics, the
curve, and many other things. For further information on manipulating the plots, refer to
Appendix M of this User's Manual, and HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

Output Report
For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1),
from the Results menu (Figure 21.15), point to Hydrologic Sampling, from the sub-menu click
Output Report, a text editor will open (Figure 21.21). This editor contains the hydrologic
sampling results file (i.e., Without_Project_Conditions-TimeWindow.hsr), which provides the
user with information about the hydrologic sampling compute.
21-15
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 21.21 Output Report Editor – Hydrologic Sampling

The editor allows the user to edit, search, print, and format the log. The search function lets the
user search for specific items to troubleshoot what is going on with the hydrologic sampling
compute. Refer to the Hydrologic Sampling User's Manual for further details.

21.5.5 Fragility Curve Results

The sampling of levee failure trigger elevations from fragility curves is accomplished through
the Fragility Curve Sampler with the results being an evaluation of the full range of levee
failure possibilities for each pre-defined location in the entire system. For further details on the
fragility curve sampling available in HEC-WAT, refer to Chapter 17 of this User's Manual.
Note: results from the Fragility Curve menu item (Figure 21.8) will only be available if the user
chooses to save all model files. Output variables (Chapter 16) can also be used to save the
sampled failure elevation.
21-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

Plot – FC (Fragility Curve)

For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1),
from the Results menu (Figure 21.15), point to Fragility Curve, from the sub-menu click Plot -
FC, the Fragility Curve Plot dialog box will open (Figure 21.22). This plot displays the
samples (i.e., 50) for a defined failure location (i.e., PFMW3) in addition to the original user
defined curve. From the Failure Location list (Figure 21.22), the user can select different
failure locations that have been defined.

Figure 21.22 Fragility Curve Plot Dialog Box

Using the Zoom Tool, (Figure 21.22) the user can zoom in on areas of interest in the plot.
The user can modify the plot by right-clicking on areas in the plot, from the shortcut menus
various items could be modified - the axes title, the title of the plot, the viewport, axis tics, the
curve, and many other things. For further information on manipulating the plots, refer to
Appendix M of this User's Manual, and HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

Output Report
For the active HEC-WAT FRA simulation from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure 21.1),
from the Results menu (Figure 21.15), point to Fragility Curve, from the sub-menu click
Output Report, a text editor will open (Figure 21.23). This editor contains the fragility curve
sampling results file (i.e., FC_-_St._Paul_levee.fcr), which includes the sampled failure trigger
elevations for each location.
21-17
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure 21.23 Output Report Editor – Fragility Curve Sampling

The editor allows the user to edit, search, print, and format the log. The search function lets the
user search for specific items to troubleshoot what is going on with the fragility curve sampling
compute. Refer to the HEC-WAT Technical Reference Manual for further details (will not be
available when HEC-WAT Version 1.0 is released).

21.5.6 Performance Metrics Results

USACE guidance and policy requires that risk and uncertainty analyses be performed for
USACE planning studies. Risk for USACE is the measure of the probability and severity of
undesirable consequences (ER 1105-2-101). The performance metrics provided by HEC-WAT
measure a system's reaction to a flood which must be included in a USACE planning study.
Performance metrics is discussed in Chapter 19, and performance metrics results are presented in
Section 19.5.

21.6 Content Pane

Once a simulation has been computed, the user can review the same FRA results that are
available from the Results menu from the Content Pane. From the Content Pane, right-click on
one of the available model alternatives, from the shortcut menu (Figure 21.24), point to Results,
click on the results that are available.

Figure 21.24 Content Pane - Shortcut Menu – Results – Hydrologic Sampling

21-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Chapter 21 – Compute/Results – Flood Risk Analysis

For example, in Figure 21.24, from the Content Pane, right-click on the hydrologic sampling
St. Paul Levee 30years alternative, point to Results. The submenu provides a list of available
hydrologic sampling results from which the user can select. For example, point to Results, click
Plot Hydrograph, the Hydrographs dialog box will open (Figure 21.16). Section 21.5.4
provides details on the available hydrological sampling results.

21.7 Schematic
FRA results from the schematic are available by right-clicking on schematic elements (i.e.,
failure locations, common computation points) and from the shortcut menu select result items
(zooming in on an area is a good idea). Results are available for both the model alternatives and
the FRA results. From the map window click the Pointer Tool , right-click on a schematic
element, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure 21.25). For example, right-click on a failure
location, the shortcut menu (Figure 21.25), besides providing information about the failure
location, also provides information on schematic elements that are around the junction, like
impact areas, routing reaches, and cross sections.

Figure 21.25 Schematic Shortcut Menu – Failure Location

In the example (Figure 21.25), the user right-clicks on a failure location from the schematic,
from the shortcut menu (Figure 21.25), point to Failure Location, click Plot - FC, the Fragility
Curve Plot will open (Figure 21.22). Section 21.5.5 provides details on the available fragility
curve sampling results.

21-19
Chapter 21 – Computes/Results – Flood Risk Analysis HEC-WAT User's Manual

21-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix A - References

Appendix A
References
Hydrologic Engineering Center, July 2009. HEC-DSSVue, HEC Data Storage System Visual
Utility Engine, User's Manual, CPD-79, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-dssvue/documentation/User'sManual_2.0/HEC-DSSVue_20_Users_Manual.pdf

Hydrologic Engineering Center, September 2015. HEC-FIA, Flood Impact Analysis, User's
Manual, CPD-81, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-fia/documentation/HEC-FIA_30_Users_Manual.pdf

Hydrologic Engineering Center, February 2016. HEC-RAS, River Analysis System, User's
Manual, CPD-68, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-ras/documentation/HEC-RAS%205.0%20Users%20Manual.pdf

Hydrologic Engineering Center, August 2016. HEC-HMS, Hydrologic Modeling System, User's
Manual, CPD-74A, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-hms/documentation/HEC-HMS_Users_Manual_4.2.pdf

Hydrologic Engineering Center, July 2016. HEC-SSP, Statistical Software Package, User's
Manual, CPD-86, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-ssp/documentation/HEC-SSP_21_Users_Manual.pdf

Hydrologic Engineering Center, December 2013. HEC-ResSim, Reservoir System Simulation,

User's Manual, CPD-82, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
http://www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-ressim/documentation/HEC-ResSim_31_UsersManual.pdf

Hydrologic Engineering Center, Mar 2004, HEC-WAT, Watershed Analysis Tool (WAT), Design
Document, Draft, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.

USACE, Apr 2000 (rev Jan 2006). ER 1105-2-100, Planning – Planning Guidance Notebook,
Department of the Army, Washington, DC 20314-1000.
http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications/EngineerRegulations/ER_1105-2-100.pdf

USACE, July 2017. ER 1105-2-101, Planning – Risk analysis for Flood Damage Reduction
Studies, Department of the Army, Washington, DC 20314-1000.
http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications/EngineerRegulations/ER_1105-2-101.pdf

USACE, August 1996. EM 1110-2-1619, Engineering & Design – Risk-Based analysis for
Flood Damage Reduction Studies, Department of the Army, Washington, DC 20314-1000.
http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications/EngineerManuals/EM_1110-2-1619.pdf

Dunn, Christopher N., P.E., Brunner, Gary W., P.E., Harris, Jeff, May 2005. Software
Integration for Watershed Studies: Hydrologic Engineering Center's Watershed Analysis Tool
(HEC-WAT), EWRI 2005: Impacts of Global Climate Change 2005, American Society of Civil
Engineers, Environmental and Water Resources Institute (EWRI), Reston, VA 20191-4400
http://ascelibrary.org/doi/pdf/10.1061/40792%28173%29490

A-1
Appendix A - References HEC-WAT User's Manual

Dunn, Christopher N., P.E., Apr 2006. The Development of a Software Integration Tool for
Watershed Studies – The Hydrologic Engineering Center's Watershed Analysis Tool (HEC-
WAT), Interdisciplinary Solutions for Watershed Sustainability, Joint Eighth Federal Interagency
Sedimentation Conference and Third Federal Interagency Hydrologic Modeling Conference,
Federal Interagency Hydraulic Conference Proceedings, USGS, Office of Water Quality, Reston,
VA 20192-5603. Proceedings of the Joint Federal Interagency Conference 2006, page 41.
https://acwi.gov/hydrology/mtsconfwkshops/conf_proceedings/3rdFIHMC/6E_Dunn.pdf

Charley, William J., and Dunn, Christopher N., December 2006. "Integration and Analysis Tool
for Watershed Studies the Hydrologic Engineering Center's Watershed Analysis Tool (HEC-
WAT)", American Geophysical Union Fall Meeting 2006.

Dunn, Christopher N., P.E., May 2007. Integrated Water Resources Analysis Using the
Watershed Analysis Tool (HEC-WAT), World Environmental and Water Resources Congress
2007, American Society of Civil Engineers, Environmental and Water Resources Institute
(EWRI), Reston, VA 20191-4400
http://ascelibrary.org/doi/abs/10.1061/40927%28243%29129?src=recsys

Dunn, Christopher, N. and Baker, Penni, R., August 2010. "A Watershed Modeling Tool, HEC-
WAT", ASCE Conference Proceedings, Watershed Management 2010: Innovations in Watershed
Management Under Land Use and Climate Change, pp. 1101-1112, Madison, WI.
http://ascelibrary.org/doi/abs/10.1061/41143(394)99

Dunn, Christopher N., Baker Penni R., and Fleming, Matthew, June 2014. "Columbia River
Treaty 2014/2024 - HEC-WAT and the FRA Compute Option", ASCE 2014 World
Environmental & Water Resources Congress, 1-5 June 2014, Portland, OR
http://ascelibrary.org/doi/abs/10.1061/9780784413548.168

Dunn, Christopher N., Baker, Penni R., and Fleming, Matthew J., October 2016. "Flood Risk
Management with HEC-WAT and the FRA Compute Option", FLOODrisk 2016, 3rd European
Conference on Flood Risk Management, Innovation, Implementation, Integration; 18 – 20
October 2016, Lyon, France.
https://www.e3s-conferences.org/articles/e3sconf/pdf/2016/02/e3sconf_flood2016_11006.pdf

A-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

Appendix B

Tools
The HEC-WAT has several types of tools available for the user: a software application to
manipulate DSS data (Appendix J); a software tool to perform statistical analysis on data; setting
options for HEC-WAT; viewing the HEC-WAT log; viewing the logs of the software
applications defined for an HEC-WAT study; check on HEC-WAT memory usage; the available
graphic elements from each model alternative defined for an HEC-WAT study; model alternative
usage within an HEC-WAT study; checking the setup for distributed computing; and, debugging
compute times of an HEC-WAT simulation.

B.1 HEC-SSP
The Statistical Software Package, HEC-SSP, is used to perform statistical analyses of hydrologic
data (Figure B.1). The current version of HEC-SSP can perform flood flow frequency analysis
based on Bulletin 17B (Interagency Advisory Committee on Water Data, 1982) and Bulletin 17C
(England, et al., 2015). The software can also perform a generalized frequency analysis on flow
data and other hydrologic data as well; perform a volume frequency analysis on high and low
flows; duration analysis; coincident frequency analysis; and, a balanced hydrograph analysis.
From HEC-WAT a frequency analysis would be performed at stream gages to create frequency
curves that could be used by other software in the HEC-WAT study's program order. See the
HEC-SSP User's Manual (CPD-86) for further details.

To perform a frequency analysis:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the WAT Tools toolbar, click ,
or from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click HEC-
SSP. Either way, the HEC-SSP main window will open (Figure B.1).

2. To create a new HEC-SSP study, from the HEC-SSP main window (Figure B.1), from
the Study Tree, right-click on Bulletin 17, or from the Analysis menu, point on New,
click Bulletin 17 Flow Frequency. The Bulletin Editor will open (Figure B.1).

3. Enter a name for the frequency analysis, select a flow dataset; select a name for the
output DSS file; and, enter a name for the report file.

4. The General tab (Figure B.1) is where the user will set the general settings for a
frequency analysis. This includes: generalized skew, expected probability curve
(frequency curve), plotting positions, and confidence limits.

5. The Options tab (Figure B.1) is for optional data like low outlier threshold, historic
period data, and user-specified frequency outliers.

B-1
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure B.1 HEC-SSP Main Window

Figure B.2 HEC-WAT Main Window

B-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

6 The last tab is the Tabular Results tab (Figure B.1), which is populated after the user
clicks Compute. This tab contains the computed flow frequency curve, the expected
probability adjusted curve, general statistics about the data, and information on the
events. Also, the user can view data graphically and in a report form from this tab.

7. The EMA Data tab (Figure B.1) is for a Bulletin 17C analysis only.

8. HEC-SSP data is stored to a DSS file and can be retrieved by software applications in an
HEC-WAT study.

B.2 HEC-WAT Options Dialog Box

HEC-WAT allows a user to configure several options for the HEC-WAT framework:
create/modify HEC-WAT system properties; view threads being used by HEC-WAT; available
software application plug-ins; set the color scheme for the HEC-WAT compute messages; set
DSS debug levels and information on the library being used by DSS; define directories where
HEC-WAT studies can be stored; use plug-ins for the active HEC-WAT study; enable tracking
of the compute timings for DSS files; and, debug information for both HEC-HMS and HEC-
RAS.

B.2.1 General Tab

From this worksheet, the user can set the last study to be loaded during the startup of HEC-
WAT; display a dialog box that allows the user to open or create a study; save the study
automatically when exiting HEC-WAT; restore the default layout; synchronize the Study Tree
to the active Map Window; set an interval (minutes) for automatically saving a study; display
tooltips; set default scheme for cascading windows; and, specify the number of HEC-WAT
studies to display in the Recent Studies item under the File menu.

Load Last Study at Startup

To set the automatic reload of the last study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. If the user wants to have the last study automatically loaded the next time HEC-WAT is
started, click Load Last Study at startup. Click OK, the Options dialog box (Figure
B.3) will close.

Show Startup Screen

Ability to open or create a study when HEC-WAT loads:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

B-3
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure B.3 Options Dialog Box

2. If the user wants to open or create a study when the HEC-WAT software loads, select
Show Startup Screen (Figure B.3). When HEC-WAT loads the next time, the Getting
Started dialog box (B.4) will open. This allows the user a convenient way to open or
create a study. Note: for this option to work properly, the Load Last Study at startup
option cannot be selected (Figure B.3).

Figure B.4 Getting Started Dialog Box

3. Click OK, the Options dialog box will close (Figure B.3). The next time HEC-WAT is
loaded, the Getting Started dialog box will display (Figure B.4). This allows the user a
convenient way to open or create a study.

Automatically Save Study on Exit

To automatically save an HEC-WAT study on exit:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

B-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

2. By default, an HEC-WAT study is saved automatically when exiting HEC-WAT. If the

user does not want to save a study automatically, click Automatically Save Study on
Exit (Figure B.3), the checkmark will no longer display.

3. When exiting HEC-WAT, the Save File dialog box will open (Figure B.5), a list of items
that need to be saved will be displayed. Ensure that all selected items are to be saved,
click OK, the Save File dialog box will close (Figure B.5) and the HEC-WAT main
window (Figure B.2) will close.

Figure B.5 Save File Dialog Box

Restore Layout
Displaying the layout of a study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. By default, as an HEC-WAT study is saved, information about the current "layout"

(display in the Desktop Pane) is automatically saved when exiting HEC-WAT. When
the study is opened the next time, the layout will be the same.

Sync Study Tree to Map Window

Synchronize the study tree with the active Map Window in the Desktop Pane:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. By default, the study tree of the current study is synchronized with the active Map
Window currently displayed in the Desktop Pane of the HEC-WAT main window
(Figure B.2). If the user does not want the study tree to be synchronized with the active
Map Window, de-select Sync Study Tree to Map Window (Figure B.3).

B-5
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Study Save Interval

Setting how often the current study will be saved:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. By default, the study that is currently opened in HEC-WAT is not automatically saved. If
the user wishes to set the interval (in minutes) for automatically saving a study, from the
General Tab (Figure B.3), enter a time in minutes for the automatic saving in the Study
Save Interval box.

Show Tooltips
Controlling tooltips in HEC-WAT:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. By default, all tooltips are displayed. If the user no longer wants to have tooltips display,
click Show Tooltips (Figure B.3), this clears the setting. Tooltips will no longer display
in the HEC-WAT interface.

Cascade Internal Windows

Controlling map windows:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. By default, the capability to cascade map windows in the Desktop Pane of the HEC-
WAT main window (Figure B.2) is set. If the user does not want map windows to
cascade, click Cascade Internal Windows (Figure B.3), this clears the setting. Map
windows will no longer cascade.

Recent Studies Menu Count

Setting the number of studies available from the Recent Studies menu item:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open, click the General tab (Figure B.3).

2. By default, the number of recent HEC-WAT studies for display is set to five. The user
can change this number by entering a new number in the Recent Studies Menu Count
(Figure B.3). Once this number had been changed, the number of recent HEC-WAT

B-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

studies that display from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the File menu,
point to Recent Studies, will be different.

B.2.2 System Properties Tab

The System Properties tab (Figure B.6) allows the user to view system properties. If the user
has the correct user access, the user can edit some or all of the system properties. It is
recommended that the user only use this information for debugging purposes and viewing.
Editing must be done with extreme caution as any changes made can directly affect the WAT
functionality.

Figure B.6 Options Dialog Box – System Properties Tab

To view system properties:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the System Properties tab (Figure
B.6).

2. The Server Properties Worksheet provides the user with information regarding HEC-
WAT system properties that have been set.

Add a System Property

If a user has the correct user access level, then that user can add a system property, click New, a
warning window will open (Figure B.7). This warning window lets the user know that any
changes made will not be retained once HEC-WAT is exited. Click OK, the warning window
will close (Figure B.7) and the New Property dialog box (Figure B.8) will open.

Figure B.7 Changes Not Saved Window

B-7
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure B.8 New Property Dialog Box

In the Property box (Figure B.8), enter the name of the new system property. For the
parameters of the new system property, enter the parameters in the Property Value box. Click
OK, the New Property dialog box (Figure B.8) closes, and the new system property will appear
on the System Properties worksheet (Figure B.6).

Edit a System Property

If a user has the correct user access level, then that user can edit a system property. Select a
system property from the available list, click Edit, a warning window will open (Figure B.7).
This warning window lets the user know that any changes made will not be retained once HEC-
WAT is exited. Click OK, the warning window wills close (Figure B.7) and the Edit Property
Value dialog box (Figure B.9) will open.

Figure B.9 Edit Property Value Dialog Box

In the Property and Property Value boxes (Figure B.9), from the selection made, the user can
edit the items. Click OK, the Edit Property Value dialog box will close (Figure B.9), and the
changed system property will appear on the System Properties worksheet (Figure B.6).

Delete a System Property

If a user has the correct user access level, then that user can delete a system property. Select a
system property from the available list, click Delete, a Confirm Property Delete message
window (Figure B.10) will open. If user wishes to delete the selected system property, click Yes.
The Confirm Property Delete message window will close and the selected system property will
be removed from the System Properties worksheet (Figure B.6).

Figure B.10 Confirm Property Delete Message Window

B-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

B.2.3 Threads Tab

A thread is a single sequential flow of control within software. Within Java the user has the
ability to have multiple threads in a piece of software all running at the same time and
performing different tasks. HEC-WAT is a multi-threaded software application, to view HEC-
WAT threads:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the Threads tab (Figure B.11).

Figure B.11 Options Dialog Box – Threads Tab

2. The Threads Worksheet displays information regarding the threads that are actively
being used by HEC-WAT. To provide an up-to-date list of the active threads, click
Refresh.

B.2.4 Plug-ins Tab

From the Plug-ins tab (Figure B.12), is a table of the plug-ins that are enabled by default for
HEC-WAT Version 1.0. Disabling plug-ins using this tab will disable those plug-ins for all
studies. Disabling plug-ins for specific studies should be done from the Study Details dialog
box (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.5), which is the recommended place to disable plugins.

Figure B.12 Options Dialog Box – Plug-ins Tab

B-9
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

B.2.5 Compute Colors Tab

Setup color scheme for the Compute Progress dialog box:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the Compute Colors tab (Figure
B.13).

Figure B.13 Options Dialog Box – Compute Colors Tab

2. By default, during an HEC-WAT simulation the Compute Progress dialog box displays
information about the compute. In Figure B.13, is the default color scheme for Normal
Messages, Warning Messages, and Error Messages.

3. For example, in Figure B.13, if the user wishes to change the color of the warning
messages in the Compute Progress dialog box, from the Warning Messages list (Figure
B.13), the user can choose from several default colors that are available (i.e., dark blue).

4. Click Apply, when an HEC-WAT simulation is computing the warning messages in the
Compute Progress dialog box will now display in the user selected color.

B.2.6 Debug Tab

To set the debug level for DSS:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the Debug tab (Figure B.14).

Figure B.14 Options Dialog Box – Debug Tab

2. The default DSS Debug Level (Figure B.14) is three (3); the user can enter a value from
1 to 15. If a user is contemplating changing this number please contact the Hydrologic
Engineering Center, increasing this number can generate very large log files. This
determines how much DSS debug information is written to the HEC-WAT log file, the
debug information will assists users in debugging DSS and HEC-DSSVue issues. Click
Apply, to set the new debug level.

B-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

B.2.7 WAT Plug-ins Tab

This worksheet (Figure B.15) provides information on the plug-ins that are currently being used
in the HEC-WAT for the four basic software applications in the default program order, plus the
plug-in for the HEC-SSP software application (Section B.1, page B.1). The information includes
the plug-in name; the version of the software application the plug-in represents; the name of the
HEC-WAT study; whether the plug-in is written is in client/server mode or not; status of the
server side of a plug-in; and, a log file associated with the plug-in. The log file is very important
when debugging issues related to the individual software applications in HEC-WAT. The only
software application that does not have a log file for Version 1.0 is HEC-HMS. The following
steps use HEC-RAS as an example, but can be followed for any of the software application plug-
ins.

Figure B.15 Options Dialog Box – WAT Plug-ins Tab

To access the RAS log file:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the WAT Plug-ins tab (Figure
B.15).

2. To view the log file for RAS, on the table, in the RAS row, click View (Figure B.15).
The rasserver5901.log will open (Figure B.16).

3. Review the rasserver5901.log for any information that can help debug any issues with
the HEC-RAS software application. From the File menu, click Close, the
rasserver5901.log will close (Figure B.12).

B.2.8 DSS Timing Log Tab

Another debugging tool is to track the compute timings in DSS files. To enable this capability:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the DSS Timing Log tab (Figure
B.17).

B-11
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure B.16 rasserver5901.log

2. Click Enable Compute Timings to DSS File (Figure B.17), this will enable the tracking
of compute timings in DSS files. The tracking information will be written to the DSS log
file (Section B.4). Click Apply, to set the tracking of compute timings in DSS files.

Figure B.17 Options Dialog Box – DSS Timing Log Tab

B.2.9 ECC Tab

The ECC (Energy Content Curve) software is used specifically for the Columbia River Treaty
study that the Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC) assisted the USACE Northwest Division
and Districts with.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the ECC tab (Figure B.18).

B-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

2. For the ECC software to run in HEC-WAT, the user must provide the location of the
ECC executable (ECC Exe box, Figure B.18); the location of the ECC pre-processor
(Preprocessor Exe box); and, the location of the ECC post-processor (Postprocessor
Exe box).

Figure B.18 Options Dialog Box – ECC Tab

3. Click Apply, now the ECC software will execute in the HEC-WAT framework.

B.2.10 HMS Tab

Another debugging tool is available by turning on debugging for the HMS software application.
To enable this capability:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the HMS tab (Figure B.19).

2. Click Debug (Figure B.19), this will debug XML (eXtensible Markup Language) calls in
the HMS software application. Click Apply, to set the HMS debug option.

Figure B.19 Options Dialog Box – HMS Tab

B.2.11 RAS Plugin Tab

Another debugging option is to turn on debugging of XML calls and display the HEC-RAS
Computations dialog box (Figure B.20) for the RAS software application. To enable this
capability:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options dialog box will open (Figure B.3), click the RAS Plugin tab (Figure B.21).

B-13
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure B.20 HEC-RAS Computations Dialog Box

Figure B.21 Options Dialog Box – RAS Plugin Tab

2. Click Debug XML calls to RAS (Figure B.21), this will debug XML calls in the HEC-
RAS software application, plus the HEC-RAS Computations dialog box (Figure B.20)
will display during the selected simulation's compute. The tracking information will be
written to the RAS log file (Section B.2.7). Click Apply, to set the RAS debug option.

B.3 Console Output

To review the progress of HEC-WAT, on the Tools menu, click Console Output, the Console
Window will open (Figure B.22).

B-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

Figure B.22 Console Window

From this editor (Figure B.22) a user can view the progress of HEC-WAT; the editor helps in
debugging issues with HEC-WAT; search for certain items; format the text displayed in the
editor; and, print the contents of the editor (Figure B.22). From the File menu, click Close, the
Console Window will close (Figure B.22).

B.4 Logs
Log files for three of the HEC basic software applications and the log file for DSS are available
from the HEC-WAT framework.

B.4.1 HEC-DSS Log

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, point to Logs,
click HEC-DSS Log, the HEC-WAT_DSS.log Editor will open (Figure B.23).

2. The editor allows the user to edit, search, print, and format the log. The search function
lets the user search for specific items to troubleshoot issues with DSS files.

B-15
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure B.23 HEC-WAT_DSS.log Editor

B.4.2 ResSim
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, point to Logs,
click ResSim, the ressimserver.log Editor will open (Figure B.24).

Figure B.24 ressimserver.log Editor

2. The editor allows the user to edit, search, print, and format the log. The search function
lets the user search for specific items to troubleshoot issues with the ResSim compute.

B-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

B.4.3 RAS
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, point to Logs,
click RAS, the rasserver5901.log Editor will open (Figure B.25).

Figure B.25 rasserver5901.log Editor

2. The editor allows the user to edit, search, print, and format the log. The search function
lets the user search for specific items to troubleshoot issues with the RAS compute.

B.4.4 FIA
1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, point to Logs,
click FIA, the HEC-FIA.log Editor will open (Figure B.26).

Figure B.26 HEC-FIA.log Editor

B-17
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The editor allows the user to edit, search, print, and format the log. The search function
lets the user search for specific items to troubleshoot issues with the FIA compute.

B.5 HEC-WAT Memory Usage

To review the memory being used by HEC-WAT, on the Tools menu, click Memory Monitor,
the Memory Monitor dialog box will open (Figure B.27). From this dialog box the user can
view the memory usage of HEC-WAT. Click to close the Memory Monitor dialog box.

Figure B.27 Memory Monitor Dialog Box

B.6 Graphic Elements

On an HEC-WAT schematic the graphic elements that represent the individual model
alternatives of a study are displayed. To view a list of these graphics elements:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Graphic
Elements, the Graphic Element Report dialog box will open (Figure B.28).

Figure B.28 Graphic Element Report Dialog Box

B-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

2. From the Simulation list (Figure B.28) select a simulation (i.e., Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb1986). From the Model list (Figure B.28), select a model alternative
(i.e., ResSim-calibrate). The table will display the known graphic elements for the
selected model alternative. This report can be used when debugging issues on the
schematic of the selected simulation.

3. If the report is lengthy, the user can search the listed graphic elements by using a filter.
Click , a Filter dialog box will open (Figure B.29). By defining filters, the user can
scan the list of graphic elements. Click OK, the Filter dialog box will close, and the
table on the Graphic Element Report dialog box (Figure B.28) will reflect the results of
the defined filter. To clear the filter, click .

Figure B.29 Filter Dialog Box

B.7 Model Alternative Usage

For a very large HEC-WAT study, there could possibly be a large number of model alternatives
that are being used by HEC-WAT simulations. Being able to view where these models
alternative are being used from the HEC-WAT study tree can be overwhelming to process. The
HEC-WAT framework provides a way to view this usage by model alternative.

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Model
Alternative Usage, the Model Alternative Usage dialog box will open (Figure B.30).

Figure B.30 Model Alternative Usage Dialog Box

B-19
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. From the Plugin list (Figure B.31) select the associated software application with a
model alternative (i.e., RAS). From the Model Alternative list (Figure B.30), select a
model alternative (i.e., Base for Real Time forecasting). The table will display a list of all
the simulations in an HEC-WAT study that contain the selected model alternative.

Figure B.31 Model Alternative Usage Dialog Box – Model Alternative List

B.8 Simulation Compute Engine Manager

The FRA compute option relies on a Monte Carlo computational algorithm that requires
potentially many thousands of simulations (realizations) of the individual model alternatives that
are included in the program sequence defined for an FRA simulation. To accommodate this
need, the HEC-WAT framework includes a distributed compute option. This distributed
compute option allows the HEC-WAT software to distribute FRA computes across several
compute nodes. The distributed compute option is available in Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT, if
there is interest in using distributed FRA computes, please contact the Hydrologic Engineering
Center.

There is a certain amount of setup required for distributed computing, one step is the creation of
compute nodes where simulations will be performed. The "master" node needs to be able to find
the defined compute nodes on a network. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from
the Tools menu, click Simulation Compute Engine Manager, the Simulation Compute
Engine Manager will open (Figure B.30). HEC-WAT will automatically search the network to
find the computed nodes, when done searching a number will appear in the Nodes Present box
(Figure B.32)

Figure B.32 Simulation Compute Engine Manager

B-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix B - Tools

B.9 Compute Timings

This debugging tool allows the user to review the compute time of HEC-WAT simulations by
the models alternatives that are being computed. The DSS Timing Log option (Section B.2.8)
must be enabled, and a simulation needs to be computed with the timings option turned on.

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure B.2), from the Tools menu, click Compute
Timings, the Simulation Compute Engine Manager will open (Figure B.33). From the
Simulation list (Figure B.33), select a simulation that has been computed. If the simulation has
not been computed, a No Timings window (Figure B.34) will display letting the user know that
there are no compute timings saved for the selected simulation.

Figure B.33 Compute Timings Dialog Box

Figure B.34 No Timings Window

B-21
Appendix B - Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

The Record list (Figure B.33) is used when the simulation is an FRA compute, the user can
review timings by Lifecycle. From the Location list (Figure B.35), the user can select what
compute timings to review. For example, in Figure B.32, the default is Event Compute Time,
this provides the timings for the entries simulation. Those timings are displayed in the table in
the upper right of the Compute Timings dialog box (Figure B.32).

Figure B.35 Compute Timings Dialog Box – Location List

The example simulation (i.e., Without Project Condition-RR_Feb1986) selected in Figure B.32 is
a deterministic simulation. The only compute timings of interest would be the overall compute
time of the simulation (Event Compute Time) and the times for the model alternatives that are
part of the simulation. Therefore, if the user wishes to see the compute timing for the HMS
model alternative, from the Location list (Figure B.35), the user would select
HMS:(RUN)Feb_1986. The table (Figure B.36), will change for the Minimum, Maximum,
and Average timings.

Figure B.36 Compute Timings Dialog Box – Table

B-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System

Appendix C
Setting Up the Coordinate System
Map projections have been developed because the true image of places on earth would have to be
a three-dimensional solid (spherical globes). Sets of mathematical models transform spherical
coordinates (latitude, longitude) to planar coordinates in a map projection (X- and Y-
coordinates). Data is then projected onto a flat plane (surface), where that data can be converted
without stretching, and features will be referenced by a planar coordinate system. The x-
coordinate is referred to as "easting" and the y-coordinate is referred to as "northing". The user
can select the extent of this grid, the dimensions of the cells of the grid, the units of measurement
of the grid, and even the location of the origin of the grid. Because of this flexibility, a user can
specify and use virtually any grid coordinates convenient for water resources studies.

When creating a study, users are encouraged to set the coordinate system by selecting a map
layer that is in the correct projection. Once that is done, the coordinate system cannot be
changed. If the study does not have any available map layers in the correct coordinate system,
the user at the time of creating a study can select a coordinate system and provide the
information of that coordinate system. This appendix focuses on how to setup and edit different
coordinate systems.

C.1 Geographic Referencing

To maintain a geographic reference in a study and when a projection is established, a coordinate
system is created for each HEC-WAT study which establishes the grid size:

1. From the Maps menu, click Default Map Properties, the Map Default Properties for
StudyName dialog box will open (Figure C.1). By default, the Map Extents tab is
selected.

Figure C.1 Map Default Properties for StudyName Dialog Box

C-1
Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The information in the Map Extents tab includes:

● Coordinate System. This box identifies the established coordinate system for a
study. To view the coordinate system, click View, and the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.2) will open.

Figure C.2 Map Coordinate Information Dialog Box

● Extents – Easting Minimum, Maximum, Northing Minimum, and Maximum.

These values (Figure C.1) indicate the location of the left, right, bottom and top
borders (respectively) of the grid in the map window.

● Grow to Map Extents. When selected, HEC-WAT automatically sets the

geographic extents to define the smallest rectangle that encompasses all the objects in
the study.

● Set Map Extents to Display. This will set the limits of the map window. If the user
zooms in on an area, and clicks Set Map Extents to Display (Figure C.1), the Map
Default Properties for StudyName dialog box (Figure C.1) extents will change to the
zoomed area.

Note that the geographic extents of map layers must be selected carefully to ensure that the entire
study is included. Further, the extents specified and the coordinate system used must be
consistent with the projection of the study.

C-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System

C.2 Coordinate System Types

A coordinate system is a method of representing points in a space of given dimensions by
coordinates. There are several different types of coordinate systems; including geographic
coordinate systems, which are based on latitude and longitude coordinates, and projected
coordinate systems, which represent the projection of a geographic coordinate system on a plane
and use linear measures (like feet or meters) for coordinates. The following list of coordinate
systems is available in HEC-WAT.

● Google/Bing Web Mercator

● Geographic
● Universal Transverse Mercator
● State Plane Coordinates
● Albers Equal-Area Conic
● Lambert Conformal Conic
● Transverse Mercator
● Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG)
● Polar Stereographic (HRAP)

C.2.1 Google/Bing Web Mercator

Google/Bing Web Mercator (i.e., Web Mercator, Google Web Mercator, WGS 84 Web
Mercator, etc.) is a variation of the Mercator projection and is the standard for web mapping
applications. This system uses the same formulas as the standard Mercator systems, but uses the
spherical formulas at all scales. Geographical coordinates are required to be in the WGS 84
ellipsoidal datum. Google/Bing Web Mercator does not quite conform due to the use of the
ellipsoidal datum against a spherical projection. United States Department of the Defense does
not encourage the use of this map projection in official capacity.

C.2.2 Geographic Coordinate System

For the geographic coordinate system, the user can specify units and a spheroid type. To set
parameters for the Geographic Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

2. From the System list, select Geographic, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box
(Figure C.4) will now display the data needed to setup a Geographic coordinate system
for the study.

3. From the Units list (Figure C.4), select the units for the Geographic coordinate system.
Available units are Radians, Seconds of Arc, and Degrees of Arc.

C-3
Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure C.3 Create New Study Dialog Box

Figure C.4 Geographic Coordinate System

4. From the Spheroid list, select a spheroid type for the Geographic coordinate system.

5. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.4) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Geographic will be displayed.

C.2.3 Universal Transverse Mercator Coordinate System

The Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinate system is a projection coordinate system.
UTM is used to define horizontal positions throughout the world by dividing the surface of the
Earth into six-degree zones, with a central meridian in the center of each zone.

To set parameters for the Universal Transverse Mercator Coordinate System:

C-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

2. From the System list, select Universal Transverse Mercator, the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.5) will now display the data needed to setup a
Universal Transverse Mercator coordinate system for the study.

Figure C.5 Universal Transverse Mercator Coordinate System

3. From the Units list (Figure C.5), select the units for the Universal Transverse Mercator
coordinate system.

4. From the Spheroid list (Figure C.5), select a spheroid type for the Universal Transverse
Mercator coordinate system.

5. In the UTM Zone box (Figure C.5), enter the UTM zone number.

6. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.5) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Universal Transverse Mercator will be displayed.

C.2.4 State Plane Coordinate System

The State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) was established in the 1930's and now covers all fifty
states. Zones were established for each state using either the Lambert Conformal or Traverse
Mercator projections. Units are generally in feet (NAD27) or meters (NAD83).

To set parameters for the State Plane Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

C-5
Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. From the System list, select State Plane Coordinates, the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.6) will now display the data needed to setup a State
Plane coordinate system for the study.

Figure C.6 State Plane Coordinate System

3. In the Zone box (Figure C.6), enter the zone for the state (FIPS codes).

4. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.6) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, State Plane Coordinates will be displayed.

C.2.5 Albers Equal-Area Conic Coordinate System

The Albers Equal-Area Conic projection was established for mapping large countries like the
United States. The projection is an equivalent projection, where areas are proportional and
directions are true in limited areas.

To set parameters for the Albers Equal-Area Conic Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

2. From the System list, select Albers Equal-Area Conic, the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.7) will now display the data needed to setup an Albers
Equal-Area Conic coordinate system for the study.

3. From the Units list (Figure C.7), select the units for the Albers Equal-Area Conic
coordinate system.

4. From the Spheroid list (Figure C.7), select a spheroid type for the Albers Equal-Area
Conic coordinate system.

5. The remaining items (Figure C.7) to be entered are the angular parameters that are
required to fine-tune the projection. When specifying latitudes the user will enter N or S,
and for longitudes, enter E or W. Use the SPACEBAR to toggle between the entries.

C-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System

Figure C.7 Albers Equal-Area Conic Coordinate System

6. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.7) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Albers Equal-Area Conic will be displayed.

C.2.6 Lambert Conformal Conic Coordinate System

The Lambert Conformal Conic projection is used extensively for mapping areas of the world
with predominantly east-west orientation. Similar to the Albers Equal-Conic projection,
however the projection is not done in an equal-area.

To set parameters for the Lambert Conformal Conic Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

2. From the System list, select Lambert Conformal Conic, the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.8) will now display the data needed to setup a
Lambert Conformal Conic coordinate system for the study.

3. From the Units list, select the units for the Lambert Conformal Conic coordinate system.

4. From the Spheroid list (Figure C.8), select a spheroid type for the Lambert Conformal
Conic coordinate system.

C-7
Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure C.8 Lambert Conformal Conic Coordinate System

5. When specifying latitudes the user will enter N or S, and for longitudes, enter E or W.
Use the SPACEBAR to toggle between the entries.

6. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.7) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Lambert Conformal Conic will be displayed.

C.2.7 Transverse Mercator Coordinate System

The Transverse Mercator projection is when a sphere is projected onto a cylinder tangent to a
central meridian. This projection is similar to the Lambert Conformal Conic projection, but used
to portray large areas in a north-south orientation. Many national grid systems are based on the
Transverse Mercator projection.

To set parameters for the Transverse Mercator Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

2. From the System list, select Transverse Mercator, the Map Coordinate Information
dialog box (Figure C.9) will now display the data needed to setup a Transverse Mercator
coordinate system for the study.

3. From the Units list (Figure C.9), select the units for the Transverse Mercator coordinate
system.

4. From the Spheroid list (Figure C.9), select a spheroid type for the Transverse Mercator
coordinate system.

C-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System

Figure C.9 Transverse Mercator Coordinate System

5. Enter a scaling factor for central meridian, in the Scale factor at central meridian box
(Figure C.9).

6. When specifying latitudes the user will enter N or S, and for longitudes, enter E or W.
Use the SPACEBAR to toggle between the entries.

7. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.9) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Transverse Mercator will be displayed.

C.2.8 Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) Coordinate System

The Standard Hydrologic Grid, or SHG version of the Albers Equal-Area Conic coordinate
system. The parameters are set to match USACE map coordinates for SHG, so do not change
any parameter settings.

To view the parameters for the Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).

2. From the System list, select Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.10) will now display the data needed to setup an
Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) coordinate system for the study.

C-9
Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. From the Units list (Figure C.10), select the units for the Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG)
coordinate system.

Figure C.10 Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) Coordinate System

4. From the Spheroid list (Figure C.10), select a spheroid type for the Albers Equal-Area
Conic (SHG) coordinate system.

5. The remaining parameters are informational and are not editable.

6. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.9) will close, and the
user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Albers Equal-Area Conic (SHG) will be displayed.

C.2.9 Polar Stereographic (HRAP) Coordinate System

The Hydrologic Rainfall Analysis Project (HRAP) grid was designed by the National Weather
Service (NWS) for use with NEXRAD radar precipitation data. The Polar Stereographic
(HRAP) is used for navigation in polar regions. The parameters are set to match NWS map
coordinates used for radar grids, so do not change any parameter settings.

To view the parameters for the Polar Stereographic (HRAP) Coordinate System:

1. Create a new study (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), from the Create New Study dialog box
(Figure C.3), click Edit (by the Coordinate System box), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box will open (Figure C.2).
C-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System

2. From the System list, select Polar Stereographic (HRAP), the Map Coordinate
Information dialog box (Figure C.11) will now display the data needed to setup a Polar
Stereographic (HRAP) coordinate system for the study.

Figure C.11 Polar Stereographic (HRAP) Coordinate System

4. From the Units list, select the units for the Polar Stereographic (HRAP) coordinate
system.

5. From the Spheroid list (Figure C.11), select a spheroid type for the Polar Stereographic
(HRAP) coordinate system.

6. From the Axis box the user can edit the axes information for either the Semi-major or
the Semi-minor axes.

7. The remaining parameters are informational and are not editable.

8. Click OK, the Map Coordinate Information dialog box (Figure C.11) will close, and
the user will be returned to the Create New Study dialog box (Figure C.3). In the
Coordinate System box, Polar Stereographic (HRAP) will be displayed.

C.3 Well Known Text

Well Known Text (WKT) is an Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) standard that provides a
textual description of a geographic coordinate reference system. Allows the user the flexibility
to copy a coordinate reference description that is not included in HEC-WAT. Descriptions of
WKT can be found on the Internet.
C-11
Appendix C – Setting Up the Coordinate System HEC-WAT User's Manual

C-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix D – Using Map Editors

Appendix D

Using Map Editors

There are seven map layers supported by HEC-WAT. The different map layers are described in
Chapter 5, Section 5.2.1 of this user's manual. In HEC-WAT the user can configure several
options for each type of map layer, except for AutoCAD® DXF files; additional customization is
under development for future versions of the software.

The user can access the map layer editors, from the Maps Tab (Chapter 3, Section 3.2), which
provides a view of the active map window in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1). From
the Content Pane (Figure D.1), either double-click on a map layer name, or right-click, and
from the shortcut menu click Properties. An editor specific to the type of map layer selected
will open.

Figure D.1 Maps Tab – Content Pane

D.1 Shapefiles (.shp)

Shapefiles store non-topological geometry and attribute information for the spatial features of a
data set. There are three kinds of shapefiles: line, polygon, and point. The following sections
discuss examples of line and polygon shapefiles.

D-1
Appendix D – Using Map Editors HEC-WAT User's Manual

D.1.1 Line
To edit a line shapefile:

1. With an active map window displayed in the Desktop Pane, from the Maps Tab, from
the Content Pane (Figure D.1), right-click on a shapefile that the user knows is a line
shapefile. From the shortcut menu click Properties or double-click on the shapefile
filename. For example, in Figure D.1, from the Map Layers tree, the user right-clicked
on RR_StreamAlignment.shp which is a line shapefile.

2. The Edit Line Properties dialog box (Figure D.2) will open.

Figure D.2 Edit Line Properties Dialog Box

3. By default the Style Tab is selected. Also, by default, all the shapes (lines) in a line Arc
Shapefile are set to one color, style, and weight. From the Draw Features using list
(Figure D.2), this default is One Style. The user can change the color of the shapes from
the Color list; change the style of shapes from the Style list; and, change the weight of
the shapes from the Weight list (Figure D.2).

4. A shapefile has three files associated with it, which contain shape information, attributes,
and an index that links a shape to its attributes. If the user wishes to change the
individual shapes (lines) contained in a shapefile by attribute, from the Draw Features
using list, select Attribute Values. The Edit Lines Properties dialog box now displays
(Figure D.3) the items the user can edit for individual shapes by attribute.

5. To select the attribute the user wishes to change, the user must have some knowledge of
the Arc Shapefile and its attributes. For example, in Figure D.3, for the
RR_StreamAlignment.shp file, from the Field for values list (Figure D.3), the attribute
Name has been selected. This provides the user with the shapes by stream name, which
are displayed in the table below the Color box (Figure D.3).

D-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix D – Using Map Editors

Figure D.3 Edit Line Properties Dialog Box – Attribute Values

6. For the selected attribute the user can change the style of the shapes from the Style list
(Figure D.3), and change the weight of the shapes from the Weight list.

7. From the Color box (Figure D.3), the user can set a range of colors for all the shapes
displayed in the table below the Color box (Figure D.3).

8. To change the colors of the individual shapes, from the table, in the Color column,
double-click on a color square. The Select Color dialog box (Figure D.4) will open.

9. The properties of the Select Color dialog box are similar to the Color Chooser
(Appendix E). From the color palette, select a color, click OK. The Select Color dialog
box (Figure D.4) will close.

10. From the Edit Line Properties dialog box (Figure D.3), click Apply, the shape
associated with the color square that was selected, will now display the new color in the
active Map Window on the Desktop Pane.

D-3
Appendix D – Using Map Editors HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure D.4 Select Color Dialog Box

11. Associated with each shape (line) is a label, to edit the label properties, from the Edit
Line Properties dialog box (Figure D.3) select the Labels tab (Figure D.5).

12. By default, the label for the shapes is turned off (<None>), if the user wishes to display
the label, from the Label features using list (Figure D.5) select the attribute that contains
the information that is to be displayed.

Figure D.5 Edit Line Properties Dialog Box – Labels Tab

D-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix D – Using Map Editors

13. For labels, the user can select what font to use; styles like bold or italics; select the size
and position; and, rotate the labels.

14. From the Edit Line Properties dialog box (Figure D.5), click Apply, the labels for the
shapes (lines) will now display in the active Map Window on the Desktop Pane.

15. Once the user is finished with making changes, click OK, the Edit Line Properties
dialog box (Figure D.5) will close.

16. If the user wishes to save any changes made to the selected shapefile, from the File menu,
click Save Study. Changes are saved to a file with the extension .gdr. For this example,
the selected shapefile name was RR_StreamAlignment.shp, if changes were made and
saved, a file RR_StreamAlignment.gdr will be created.

D.1.2 Polygon
To edit a polygon shapefile:

1. With an active map window displayed in the Desktop Pane, from the Maps Tab, from
the Content Pane (Figure D.1), right-click on ac shapefile that the user knows is a
polygon shapefile. From the shortcut menu click Properties or double-click on the
shapefile filename. For example, in Figure D.1, the user would right-click on
RussianSubbasins.shp which is a polygon shapefile.

2. The Edit Polygon Properties dialog box (Figure D.6) will open.

Figure D.6 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box

3. By default the Fill Tab is selected. Also, by default, all the shapes (polygons) in a
polygon shapefile are set to one color, style, and weight. From the Draw Features using

D-5
Appendix D – Using Map Editors HEC-WAT User's Manual

list, this default is One Fill, with Display Fill (Figure D.6) set. The user can turn on and
off the filling of the shapes (polygons) by selecting and un-selecting Display Fill; change
the color of the shapes from the Color list (Figure D.6); change the style of shapes from
the Style list; and, change the transparency of the shapes from the Transparency slider
(Figure D.6).

4. A shapefile has three files associated with it, which contain shape information, attributes,
and an index that links a shape to its attributes. If the user wishes to change the
individual shapes (polygons) contained in an Arc Shapefile by attribute, from the Draw
Features using list, select Attribute Values. The Edit Polygon Properties dialog box
now displays (Figure D.7) the items user can edit for individual shapes by attribute.

Figure D.7 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box – Attribute Values

5. To select the attribute you wish to change, the user must have some knowledge of the
shapefile and its attributes. For example, in Figure D.7, for the RussianSubbasins.shp
file, the attribute Name has been selected from the Field for values list. This provides
the user with the shapes by subbasin name, which are displayed in the table below the
Color box (Figure D.7).

6. For the selected attribute the user can change the style of the shapes from the Style list
(Figure D.7), and change the weight of the shapes from the Weight list (Figure D.7).

D-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix D – Using Map Editors

7. From the Color box, the user can set a range of colors for all the shapes displayed in the
table (Figure D.7) below the Color box.

8. To change the colors of the individual shapes, from the table, in the Color column,
double-click on the color square. The Select Color dialog box (Figure D.4) will open.

9. The properties of the Select Color dialog box are similar to the Color Chooser
(Appendix E). From the color palette, select a color, click OK. The Select Color dialog
box will close (Figure D.4).

10. From the Edit Line Properties dialog box (Figure D.7), click Apply, the shape
associated with the color square selected, will now display the new color in the active
Map Window on the Desktop Pane.

11. Associated with each shape (polygon) is a border, to edit border properties, from the Edit
Polygon Properties dialog box (Figure D.7) select the Border Tab (Figure D.8).

Figure D.8 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box – Border Tab

12. By default, the border for the shapes is turned on. If the user does not want the border to
display, click Display Border (Figure D.8). The user can change the color of the shapes
from the Color list; change the style of shapes from the Style list (Figure D.8); and,
change the weight of the shapes from the Weight list (Figure D.8).

13. Associated with each shape (polygon) is a label. To edit the label properties, from the
Edit Polygon Properties dialog box (Figure D.7) select the Labels Tab (Figure D.9).

14. By default, the labels for the shapes is turned off (<None>), if the user wishes to display
the labels from the Label features using list (Figure D.9) select the attribute that
contains the information that will be displayed.

15. For labels, the user can select what font to use; styles like bold or italics; select the size
and position; and, rotate the labels.

16. From the Edit Polygon Properties dialog box (Figure D.9), click Apply, the labels for
the shapes (lines) will now display in the active Map Window on the Desktop Pane.

D-7
Appendix D – Using Map Editors HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure D.9 Edit Polygon Properties Dialog Box – Labels Tab

17. Once the user is finished with making changes, click OK, the Edit Polygon Properties
dialog box (Figure D.9) will close.

18. If the user wishes to save any changes made to the selected shapefile, from the File menu,
click Save Study. Changes are saved to a file with the extension .gdr. For example, in
Figure D.1, the shapefile name is RussianSubbasins.shp, if changes have been made and
saved, a file RussianSubbasins.gdr will be created.

D.2 USGS Digital Line Graph (.dlg)

This layer type is a vector representation of the data. When HEC-WAT interacts with a dlg file
it automatically creates a dlgbin file for use.

To edit a USGS Digital Line Graph file:

1. From the Maps tab, from the Content Pane, right-click on a USGS Digital Line Graph
file. From the shortcut menu, click Properties, or double-click on the USGS Digital
Line Graph filename.

2. The USGS Digital Line Graph Editor (Figure D.10) will open.

3. Across the top of the dialog box, is displayed the location and name of the USGS Digital
Line Graph file.

D-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix D – Using Map Editors

Figure D.10 USGS Digital Line Graph Editor

4. To change the color of the lines of the dlg file, click the color box. The Color Chooser
dialog box will open (Figure D.11).

Figure D.11 Color Chooser

5. The properties of the Color Chooser are discussed in detail in Appendix E. From the
color palette, select a color, click OK. The Color Chooser will close (Figure D.11) and
the selected color will now appear in the color box.

6. Click Apply, the color change will appear on the Map Window in the Desktop Pane.

7. The user can control the appearance of nodes, lines, and areas by selecting and clearing
Draw Nodes, Draw Lines, and Draw Areas, respectively.

8. The user can also control the saturation and brightness level of the selected color by
entering values in the Saturation or Brightness boxes. Values entered for saturation or
brightness must be between zero (0) and one (1).

D-9
Appendix D – Using Map Editors HEC-WAT User's Manual

9. Once the user is finished with changes, click OK, the USGS Digital Line Graph Editor
(Figure D.10) will close.

10. If the user wishes to save any changes made to the selected USGS digital line graph, from
the File menu, click Save Study, changes are saved to the study file (*.sty).

D.3 Elevation Options Dialog Box

For the other map layer formats – USGS DEM, ASCII NetTin, SMRMP, and ArcInfo® DEM;
they all have the same editor, the Elevation Options dialog box.

To edit a SMRMP file:

1. From the Maps tab, from the Content Pane, right-click on a SMRMP file. From the
shortcut menu, click Properties, or double-click on the SMRMP name.

2. The Elevation Options dialog box (Figure D.12) will open with the Properties Tab
selected by default.

Figure D.12 Elevation Options Dialog Box

D-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix D – Using Map Editors

3. Across the top of the Elevation Options dialog box (Figure D.12), is displayed the name
of the SMRMP file. For example, in Figure D.12, the name is stpaul_10ft.smrmp.

4. From the list box, there are available color contour schemes – Aspect Shading,
Grayscale, Linear, Precipitation, Red-Green-Blue, Terrain (default), and Water
Depth.

5. The Draw Edges check box (Figure D.12) is specifically for ASCII NetTin files. If
Draw Edges is selected, the edges of the triangles that make up an ASCII NetTin file
will be drawn.

6. The user can set the contour tic interval, by entering a value in the Tic Interval box
(Figure D.12). HEC-WAT sets the maximum and minimum limits of the contours
automatically. The user can set maximum and minimum limits, from the Contour
Limits box (Figure D.12), clear System Specified Min/Max Values. The Maximum and
Minimum boxes are now available for the user to enter values.

7. The user can control the brightness (amount of white), saturation (amount of black), and
transparency (level of opacity or alpha) for the colors. Also, the user can adjust the
values by using the Brightness, Saturation, and Transparency slider bars or boxes
(Figure D.12).

8. By default the Aspect Shading option (Figure D.12) is on, aspect shading is where the
user can make the map layer appear in relief by placing an imaginary light source above
the map and shading the contours. The user can adjust the angle of the light source by
using the Angle slider bar or the box (Figure D.12). If the user does not want aspect
shading, clear Aspect Shading.

9. Clipping provides a way to highlight an area based on color choices and values. For
maximum clipping, the user would fill the contour with the clip color from the maximum
value of the map to the value entered for Maximum Clipping (Figure D.12). An
example of where the user might use maximum clipping would be smog levels, cloud
cover, or snow level at a particular elevation. By default, maximum clipping is turned
off, to turn this option on, click Maximum Clipping (Figure D.12). The user can either
enter a maximum clipping value by using the slider bar or entering a value in the box
(Figure D.12). The user can change the color by clicking the Color box (Figure D.12), a
Color Chooser will open (Figure D.11).

10. Minimum clipping will fill the contour with the clip color from the minimum value of the
map to the value entered for Minimum Clipping. An example of where the user might
use minimum clipping would be to see where a water level would be if it flooded to a
particular elevation. By default, minimum clipping is turned off. To turn this option on,
click Minimum Clipping (Figure D.12). The user can either enter a minimum clipping
value by using the slider bar or entering a value in the box (Figure D.12). The user can
change the color by clicking the Color box (Figure D.12), a Color Chooser will open
(Figure D.11).

D-11
Appendix D – Using Map Editors HEC-WAT User's Manual

11. Scaling for the SMRMP file can be set from the Scale Tab on the Elevation Options
dialog box (Figure D.13).

Figure D.13 Elevation Options Dialog Box – Scale Tab

12. If the user wishes to save any changes made to the selected SMRMP, from the File menu,
click Save Study, changes are saved to the study file (*.sty).

D-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix E – Using the Color Chooser

Appendix E

Using the Color Chooser

The Color Chooser (Figure E.1) affords great flexibility when the user needs to select default
colors for map layers, labels, and background colors for the watershed display. The Color
Chooser has three tabs: Swatches, HSB, and RGB, offering three methods for choosing a color.
For each method, the preview area allows the user to see the choices made before applying
changes.

Figure E.1 Color Chooser

E.1 Swatches Worksheet

The Swatches worksheet provides a palette of pre-defined colors. From the palette, select a
color. Once a color has been selected, the Recent box displays that color, as also does the
Preview box. Click OK, the Color Chooser will close. Depending on where the Color
Chooser was accessed, the user will need to click either Apply or OK for the color change to
appear in the map window.

For example, for a USGS Digital Line Graph, the user would have accessed the Color Chooser
from the USGS Digital Line Graph Editor (Appendix D, Section D.2). Once a color has been
selected from the Color Chooser (Figure E.1) and closed, then the user needs to click OK or
Apply from the USGS Digital Line Graph Editor for the color change to appear in the map
window.

E-1
Appendix E – Using the Color Chooser HEC-WAT User's Manual

E.2 HSB Worksheet

HSB is the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness color model, which allows the user to set the hue,
saturation, and brightness of the colors. From the Color Chooser, select the HSB tab; the HSB
Worksheet (Figure E.2) becomes available.

Figure E.2 Color Chooser – HSB Worksheet

There are several ways to adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the colors. The slider bar
in conjunction with the H, S, and B options will change the color, if red is selected with the Hue
option selected, then when the user switches to the Saturation and Brightness options, the slider
bar will be changing the saturation and brightness of the selected color (i.e., red). Another way
to affect the colors is in the Hues, Saturation, and Brightness boxes the user can directly enter a
value for hue, saturation, and brightness. The following rules apply when entering values for
each option:

Hue Box: Hue is measured in a circle from zero (0) to 359 degrees.
0 = red, 60 = yellow, 120 = green, 180 = cyan
240 = blue, 300 = magenta

Saturation Box: Saturation is the amount of black, measured from zero (0) to one hundred
(100) percent.

Brightness Box: Brightness is the amount of white, measured from zero (0) to one hundred
(100) percent.

E-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix E – Using the Color Chooser

A finally a way to set a color on the HSB worksheet is from the color palette by clicking and
draging the little white circle (Figure E.2). This will automatically change the hue, saturation,
and brightness values, along with the red, green and blue color values. The red, green, and blue
values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes (Figure E.2) are not editable and are informational
only.

Click OK, the Color Chooser will close. Depending on where the Color Chooser was
accessed, the user will need to click either Apply or OK for the color change to appear in the
map window.

E.3 RGBA Worksheet

RGBA is the Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha color model, which allows the user to set the red,
green, blue, and alpha values. Alpha is normally used as an opacity channel, with zero percent
being fully transparent (invisible) and 100 percent being fully opaque. From the Color Chooser,
select the RGBA tab; the RGBA Worksheet (Figure E.3) becomes available.

Figure E.3 Color Chooser – RGBA Worksheet

There are two ways to adjust the red, green, blue, and alpha values. The slider bar available for
each item changes the value, the color being produced is displayed in the Preview box (Figure
E.3). Another way to affect colors is in the Red, Green, Blue, Alpha boxes the user can directly
enter a value. Click OK, the Color Chooser will close. Depending on where the Color
Chooser was accessed, the user will need to click either Apply or OK for the color change to
appear in the map window.

E-3
Appendix E – Using the Color Chooser HEC-WAT User's Manual

E-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

Appendix F

Stream Alignment
Stream alignments represent the stream system in the study. The alignment indicates where
confluences and bifurcations occur and provides a sense of distance and scale. Stream
alignments are composed of a series of streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions (Figure F.1).
A stream typically begins or ends at a confluence, bifurcation, or at the boundary of the river
system. A stream is composed of vertex points, with the beginning and ending vertex points
being stream nodes.

Stream Alignment Streams

Stream Nodes Stream Junctions

Figure F.1 Stream Alignment Parts

F-1
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

Streams are drawn as multi-segmented lines. Each stream must have at least two stream nodes,
defining the beginning and end of the stream. Streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions, are
illustrated in Figure F.2.

Figure F.2 Relationships of Streams in a Stream Alignment

HEC-WAT creates and labels stream stations (or river stations) along each stream. The station at
the downstream end of a stream is Station 0 (zero), and the stationing increases upstream along
the stream according to the linear distance between vertices on the stream in the study coordinate
system. The user can override the default stationing by editing the station values of the stream
nodes at the upstream and downstream ends of the stream, as well as by adding additional nodes
along the stream. Stream stationing is based on the geographic extents that are defined when a
stream is drawn. If the geo-extents are based on a map layer, the units for the stream stationing
are the same as the map layer (i.e., feet, meters). In Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT, where there is no
unit indicator, there will be a way for the user to view the units in future versions.

F.1 Creating the Default Stream Alignment

If the stream alignment is going to be based on a map layer, the map layer should already have
been included in the study. The details on how to include a map layer are given in Chapter 5.
The map layer should contain water features, such as stream channels and reservoirs. Use this
map layer as a guide while creating the stream alignment. By doing this, the units of the labels
on the stream alignment will be the same as the units of the water feature layer (i.e., if the water
feature layer is projected in state plane coordinates (feet), then the labels on the stream alignment
will be in feet).

F-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

The user can either import a stream alignment from a shapefile or digitize a stream alignment by
hand. The following are the steps for importing a stream alignment, details on digitizing a
stream alignment are provided later in this appendix.

To import a stream alignment:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure F.3), from the Maps Tab, from the Map
Layers tree, right-click on Stream Alignment (Figure F.4). From the shortcut menu, click
Import.

Figure F.3 HEC-WAT Main Menu – Maps Tab

Figure F.4 Map Layers Tree - Shortcut Menu

F-3
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. The Import Stream Alignment dialog box will open (Figure F.5). The Shapefile Name
list defaults to the first line shapefile it can find in the maps directory; which in this
example happens to be the shapefile that represents the stream alignment for the
RussianRiver study - RR_StreamAlignment.shp.

Figure F.5 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box

3. If the map layer that represents the stream alignment is not stored in the maps directory of
the HEC-WAT study, click , a Choose Shapefile Browser will open (Figure F.6).
Browse to the location where the shapefile that represents the stream alignment is stored
on the computer. Click on the filename (e.g., RR_StreamAlignment.shp), the filename
will appear in the File name box of the browser (Figure F.6). Click Open, the Choose
Shapefile Browser will close (Figure F.6).

Figure F.6 Choose Shapefile Dialog Box

4. The name of the selected shapefile will appear in the Shapefile Name box on the Import
Stream Alignment dialog box (Figure F.7).

F-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

Figure F.7 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box – Shapefile Name

5. From the Database Field Name list (Figure F.8), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the streams - Name. Once a field name is
selected, the table below will populate with the streams contained in the shapefile. If
there is an issue with any of the stream segments the checkbox in the Import column
(Figure F.8) will not be selected. This means the stream segment is not continuous and
will not be imported.

Figure F.8 Import Stream Alignment Dialog Box – Example Shapefile

F-5
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

6. Gap Tolerance (Figure F.8) is used when stream segments are not continuous and the
user wants HEC-WAT to connect the segments via the gap tolerance. The gap tolerance
units are based on the selected shapefile units (i.e., shapefile units is feet, the gap
tolerance will be in feet). To set the gap tolerance, select Gap Tolerance and enter a
value in the box. Recommended that users enter one (1) for the unit of tolerance to
connect. The value entered can also be fractional so for units that are in large units of
distance. For example, a gap toleration of .001 might be used for a shapefile file that has
units in miles.

7. Click Reverse Direction (Figure F.8). The flow direction in the RR_StreamAlignment.
shp shapefile is not correct. So instead of fixing the issues with ArcMap® (ESRI GIS
software), the user can perform the Reserve Direction procedure on the system of
streams to correct flow direction.

8. Click Import, the Import Stream Alignment dialog box will close (Figure F.8). Once
the import of the stream alignment is completed, a message window will appear letting
the user know that the stream alignment imported successfully. In the active Map
Window the stream alignment appears (orange stream segments; green stream nodes and
stream junctions).

F.2 Existing Stream Alignments

After creating a stream alignment, the user can view the stream alignment; remove the stream
alignment from an active map window; save the stream alignment; create a copy of an existing
stream alignment; rename an existing stream alignment; delete an existing stream alignment;
view an existing stream alignment's properties; reverse direction of all streams that make up a
stream alignment; import a stream alignment from an existing HEC-WAT stream alignment
(stream.align); import a stream alignment from a shapefile (Figure F.8); export an HEC-WAT
stream alignment to a shapefile; and, view a list of all streams contained in a stream alignment.
All of these tasks are accomplished through the stream alignment shortcut menu (Figure F.9).
The stream alignment shortcut menu is available from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure
F.3), click Schematic Tab, on the Study Pane, under the Components folder, under the Stream
Alignments folder, and then right-click on an existing stream alignment.

Figure F.9 Stream Alignment Shortcut Menu

F-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

F.2.1 View a Stream Alignment

To view a stream alignment in a map window:

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Display in Map Window.

2. If there is not a map window open in the Desktop Pane, the map window for the selected
stream alignment will open in the Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1). From the map
window the user can edit the streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions that make-up
the stream alignment.

3. If a map window is open in the Desktop Pane, the Select Location message box will
open letting the user know that the stream alignment is already displayed in the active
map window. If the user wishes to open a separate map window for the stream
alignment, click Yes. The message box will close, and a map window will open with the
selected stream alignment displayed.

F.2.2 Remove a Stream Alignment from the Active Map

Window
To remove a stream alignment in a map window:

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Remove from Map Window.

2. The Remove from Map? message box will open letting asking the user do you wish to
remove the stream alignment from the active map window, click Yes. The message box
will close, and the map window will no longer display the stream alignment.

F.2.3 Save a Stream Alignment

To save the active stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu (Figure F.9), click
Save. Any changes that have occurred to the selected stream alignment will be saved by HEC-
WAT.

F.2.4 Make a Copy of a Stream Alignment

To create a copy of a stream alignment:

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Save As.

2. The Save Stream Alignment As dialog box will open (Figure F.10). The name of the
stream alignment that is being copied is displayed in the Old Name box (Figure F.10).

F-7
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure F.10 Save Stream Alignment As Dialog Box

3. The user should enter a new name in the Name box (required) and provide a new
description in the Description box (optional).

4. Click OK, the Save Stream Alignment As dialog box will close (Figure F.10). The new
stream alignment is displayed on the Schematic Tab (Figure F.9), in the Study Pane,
under the Stream Alignments folder.

F.2.5 Rename a Stream Alignment

To rename a stream alignment:

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Rename.

2. The Rename Stream Alignment dialog box will open (Figure F.11). The name of the
existing stream alignment is displayed in the Name box (Figure F.11).

Figure F.11 Rename Stream Alignment Dialog Box

3. The user should enter a new name in the Name box (required) and provide a new
description in the Description box (optional).

4. Click OK, a Confirm Rename message window will open asking the user are sure that
you really want to rename the stream alignment (renaming a stream alignment in a study
that already has alternatives created could cause issues). Click Yes, the Rename Stream
Alignment dialog box will close (Figure F.11). The new stream alignment is displayed
on the Schematic Tab (Figure F.9), in the Study Pane, under the Stream Alignments
folder.

F-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

F.2.6 Delete a Stream Alignment from the Study

To delete a stream alignment from the study:

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Delete from Study.

2. A Confirm Manager Delete message window will open asking the user for confirmation
to delete the stream alignment (deleting a stream alignment in a study that already has
alternatives created could cause issues). Click Yes, the Confirm Manager Delete
message window will close. The selected stream alignment is no longer displayed on the
Schematic Tab (Figure F.9), in the Study Pane, under the Stream Alignments folder.

F.2.7 Stream Alignment Properties

The properties of a stream alignment include the name, description, when the stream alignment
was last modified, who created the stream alignment, when the stream alignment was created,
the file that contains the stream alignment data; and the spatial layout of the stream alignment.
To view the properties of a stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu (Figure
F.9), click Properties. The Properties for Stream Alignment dialog box will open (Figure
F.12).

Figure F.12 Properties for Stream Alignment Dialog Box

F.2.8 Reverse Direction of All Streams in a Stream

Alignment
When importing a stream alignment from ArcView® as shapefiles or when digitizing a stream
alignment, individual streams segments can be in the wrong direction (downstream to upstream).
The user can reverse the direction of all the streams if the streams are in the wrong direction.

F-9
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

From the stream alignment shortcut menu (Figure F.9), click Reverse Direction All. The
Confirm Reverse Direction warning message box will appear. The user will be warned that
reversing the streams direction will reverse the default stationing for all the streams in the stream
alignment. Click Yes, the warning message box will close, and all streams associated with the
stream alignment will have reversed direction.

F.2.9 Import from an HEC-WAT Stream Alignment

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Import from Existing.

2. A Confirm Import message window will open letting the user know that this command
will replace the contents of the HEC-WAT stream.align file. Click yes, an Open
Browser will appear (Figure F.13). Browse to an HEC-WAT study, click on the
stream.align file (which appears in the File name box).

Figure F.13 Open Browser

3. Click Open, the Open Browser will close (Figure F.13) and the stream alignment from
the selected HEC-WAT study is displayed.

F.2.10 Export an Existing Stream Alignment

If adjustment have been made to the stream alignment or the stream alignment was digitized, the
stream alignment can be saved as a shapefile. To export a stream alignment the user must have a
stream alignment in the map window.

To export a stream alignment:

F-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

1. Right click on an existing stream alignment, from the stream alignment shortcut menu
(Figure F.9) click Export.

2. A Save browser will open (Figure F.14). Enter a name in the File name box. Click OK,
the Save browser will close, and a shapefile of the displayed stream alignment will be
saved in the selected location.

Figure F.14 Save Browser

F.3 Edit a Stream Alignment

From a map window (Figure F.15) a user can edit the individual components of a stream
alignment – streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions. The following sections describes the
editing capabilities provided for each stream component.

Figure F.15 Map Window – Stream Alignment

F-11
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

F.3.1 Streams
After establishing a stream alignment, the user can rename and edit the description of individual
streams, delete individual streams, reverse the direction of a stream, disconnect a stream at both
the upstream or downstream end, and view the stream stationing and coordinates of the stream
nodes on a stream. All of these tasks are accomplished through the stream shortcut menu (Figure
F.16). To access the stream shortcut menu, the Stream Alignment Tool must be selected,
and from the map window (Figure F.15), right-click on a stream.

Figure F.16 Stream Shortcut Menu

Edit a Stream
The user can edit a stream's description and view the stream's stationing and coordinates of the
upstream and downstream stream nodes, plus any stream nodes in between the two.

To edit the description of a stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15),
right-click on the stream element to edit, click Edit Stream Element from the stream
shortcut menu (Figure F.16), the Stream Editor will open (Figure F.17).

Figure F.17 Stream Editor

F-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

2. The user can either enter a new description (recommended) or edit the description of the
stream in the Description box.

3. The table provides the user with the stream stationing and coordinates of the stream
nodes that are on the selected stream and is informational only.

4. Click OK, the Stream Editor will close (Figure F.17).

Rename a Stream
To rename a stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15),
right-click on the stream to rename, and click Rename Stream Element from the stream
shortcut menu (Figure F.16).

2. The Rename Stream dialog box opens (Figure F.18). Enter the new name in the Name
box (required) and description in the Description box (optional, but recommended).

Figure F.18 Rename Stream Dialog Box

3. Click OK and the Rename Stream dialog box will close (Figure F.18). The new name
of the stream will be shown on the map window.

Delete a Stream
To delete a stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15),
right-click on the stream to delete and click Delete Stream Element from the stream
shortcut menu (Figure F.16).

2. A Confirm Delete warning message will open asking the user whether you really want to
delete the selected stream. Click Yes, the warning message will close and the stream will
be deleted from the map window.

Disconnect a Stream
If the user wants to disconnect a stream from another stream, HEC-WAT will allow the user to
do so at either the upstream or downstream end of the stream.

F-13
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

To disconnect a stream from another stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15),
right-click on the stream to disconnect and either click Disconnect Upstream or
Disconnect Downstream from the stream shortcut menu (Figure F.16).

2. The stream will now be disconnected from the stream at the location chosen. On the map
window, the upstream or downstream point will physically move away from the
connecting stream and a stream node will remain on the connecting stream.

Reverse Direction of a Stream

If a stream in the drawn in the wrong direction (downstream to upstream), HEC-WAT provides a
way to reverse the direction of a stream, instead of having to delete and redraw the stream.

To reverse direction of a stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15),
right-click on the stream you want to reverse and click Reverse Direction from the
stream shortcut menu (Figure F.16).

2. A Confirm Reverse Direction warning message will appear asking if the user really
wants to reverse the direction of the stream. Click Yes, the warning message will close
and the stream's direction will be reversed.

Graphically Edit a Stream

After establishing a stream alignment, the user can graphically edit the individual streams of the
stream alignment. By using the Stream Alignment Tool , the CTRL key, and the SHIFT
key, the user can edit individual streams by adding, moving, and deleting vertex points. The edit
is performed graphically on the schematic in the active map window.

Add Vertices to a Stream

To add vertex points to an existing stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15),
double-click on a stream that needs additional vertices, and the stream will turn red, with
blue points that represent vertices.

2. Place the pointer on the selected stream where a new vertex point needs to be added. Hold
down the CTRL key and click. A blue point will now appear on the selected stream,
which represents a new vertex point.

F-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

Move the Vertices of a Stream

To move vertex points on an existing stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15);
double-click on the stream where a vertex point needs to be moved. The selected stream
will turn red, and the individual vertex points will be blue points.

2. Click on the vertex point that needs to be moved move and then drag the vertex point to a
new location; the vertex point has been moved.

Delete Vertices from a Stream

To delete vertex points from an existing stream:

1. Press the Stream Alignment Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15);
double-click on the stream where a vertex point needs to be deleted. The selected stream
will turn red, and the individual vertex points will be blue points.

2. Hold down the SHIFT+CTRL keys and click on the vertex point to be deleted. The blue
vertex point will disappear from the stream.

F.3.2 Stream Nodes

After establishing the stream alignment, the user can edit and delete the individual stream nodes
of a stream alignment. Both of these tasks are accomplished through the stream node shortcut
menu (Figure F.19). To access the stream node shortcut menu, the Stream Node tool must
be selected, and from the map window right-click on a stream node.

Figure F.19 Stream Node Shortcut Menu

Establish Stream Stationing

HEC-WAT creates a beginning and ending stream node for each stream. Stream nodes are also
created where streams meet (stream junctions). Stream nodes are used to establish stationing for
a stream. To establish stream stationing for a stream, the user can edit the stream nodes.

To edit a stream node:

F-15
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

1. Press the Stream Node Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15), right-
click on the stream node to edit. From the stream node shortcut menu (Figure F.19),
click Edit Node; the Stream Node Editor will open (Figure F.20).

Figure F.20 Stream Node Editor

2. The default stream station has the downstream node at zero (0) and the upstream node is
based on the coordinate system from the imported stream alignment. To change the
stream stationing, clear Use Default Stationing. The Station box can now be edited.

3. Click OK, the Stream Node Editor will close (Figure F.20). Based on what is entered,
HEC-WAT will automatically adjust the stream stationing for the stream associated with
the stream node. This includes the upstream and downstream nodes.

Delete a Stream Node

To delete a stream node, press the Stream Node Tool from the toolbar, right-click on the stream
node that needs to be deleted. From the stream node shortcut menu (Figure F.19) click Delete
Node. A Confirm Delete warning message will open to request for user confirmation prior to
node deletion. Click Yes, the warning message will close and the stream node will be deleted
from the stream alignment. The beginning and ending stream nodes of a stream element cannot
be deleted.

Graphically Edit a Stream Node

After establishing a stream alignment, the user can graphically edit the individual stream nodes
of the stream alignment. By using the Stream Node Tool, and the CTRL key, the user can add
and move stream nodes. This edit is performed graphically on the schematic in the active map
window.

F-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

Add a Stream Node

Two stream nodes are created automatically at the beginning and ending stream nodes of a
stream. The user can add stream nodes to a stream by pressing the Stream Node Tool from the
toolbar. Using the Stream Node Tool , place the pointer on the stream where a stream node
needs to be added. Hold down the CTRL key and click. A circle will now appear on the stream
that indicates the new stream node.

Move a Stream Node

To move a stream node, press the Stream Node Tool from the toolbar; double-click on the
stream node that needs to be moved. The stream node becomes a yellow circle with a black
outline and four small black dots (Figure F.21). Click and drag the stream node along the stream
to its new position. The beginning and ending stream nodes of a stream cannot be moved.

Figure F.21 Move a Stream Node

F.3.3 Stream Junctions

When two streams intersect, a stream junction is created. A stream junction is multiple stream
nodes at one location and is represented by a dark green circle with a light green halo around the
circle. The user can establish stream stationing at a stream junction. This task is accomplished
through the stream junction shortcut menu (Figure F.22). To access the stream junction shortcut
menu, the Stream Node tool must be selected, and from the map window right-click on a
stream junction.

Figure F.22 Stream Junction Shortcut Menu

Edit a Stream Junction

To edit a stream junction:

1. Press the Stream Node Tool from the toolbar on the map window (Figure F.15), right-
click on the stream junction that you want to edit. From the stream junction shortcut
menu (Figure F.22), click Edit Stream Junction. The Stream Junction Editor will
open (Figure F.23).

F-17
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure F.23 Stream Junction Editor

2. The editor displays information about the stream nodes associated with the stream
junction. To change the stream stationing for a stream node, clear the checkbox for a
stream node from the Use Default Stationing column of the table. The cell in the
Station column becomes active. Based on the station is entered, HEC-WAT will
automatically adjust the stream stationing for the stream associated with the stream node.

3. Click OK, the Stream Junction Editor will close (Figure F.23).

Graphically Edit a Stream Junction

After establishing a stream alignment, the user can graphically edit the individual stream
junctions of the stream alignment. By using the Stream Node Tool, the user can move a stream
junction. This edit is performed graphically on the schematic in the active map window.

Move a Stream Junction

To move a stream junction press the Stream Node Tool from the toolbar; double-click on the
stream junction that needs to be moved. The stream node becomes a green circle with a black
outline and four small black dots (Figure F.24). Click and drag the stream junction along the
stream element to its new position.

Figure F.24 Move a Stream Junction

F.4 Change Stream Alignment Properties

Stream alignment properties that can be changed include: color of streams, stream nodes, and
stream junctions; the width of streams, stream nodes, and stream junctions; font for the stream
name; tic mark properties; and visualization scaling for the stream alignment.

F-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

To change stream alignment properties:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure F.15), from the Maps Tab, right-click on
Stream Alignment in the tree. From the shortcut menu, click Properties.

2. The Stream Alignment Properties dialog box will open (Figure F.25).

Figure F.25 Stream Alignment Properties Dialog Box

3. To change the color of the stream alignment, select a color from the Stream Color list.
The example to the right of the Edit Properties box (Figure F.25) will preview the
selected color.

4. Click OK, the Stream Alignment Properties dialog box (Figure F.25) will close and the
color change will appear in the map window.

F-19
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

F.5 Digitize a Stream Alignment

To digitize the default stream alignment for a new study:

1. When a new study is created (Chapter 4, Section 4.1.1), the default stream alignment is
created (Stream Alignment) and a schematic map window is automatically opened in the
Desktop Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.1).

2. The default stream alignment is blank, to begin building the default stream alignment;
find a location on the map window where a stream should start. Streams should be
created from upstream to downstream. Hold down the CTRL key, while clicking the
mouse button. Each click creates a vertex point (Figure F.26), on the stream. The first
vertex point is the upstream or beginning stream node of a stream.

Figure F.26 Creating a Stream

3. For the most downstream or last vertex point, release the CTRL key, and then click the
mouse button. This creates the ending stream node of the stream. A single stream has
been created.

4. The Create New Stream dialog box will open (Figure F.27). The user can either accept
the default name or enter a new name (required) in the Name box. If needed, the user
can enter an optional description (recommended) in the Description box. Click OK, the
Create New Stream dialog box will close.

F-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix F – Stream Alignment

Figure F.27 Create New Stream Dialog Box

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add more streams to the stream alignment.

6. To connect a stream to an existing stream, place the first or last click of the new stream
on the existing stream where the two streams to join. After naming the new stream, a
Connect Stream Reaches message box will appear asking the user do you want to
connect the new stream to the existing stream. Click Yes if the two streams need to be
connected. Otherwise, click No and the new stream will not be connected to the existing
stream.

7. Once the user has completed the stream alignment, save your work.

The Zoom Tool (Section 6.3) can be used to help define the stream alignment. Use it to magnify
the stream network, which makes defining the vertices along a stream easier.

F.6 Save Stream Alignment Data

To save stream alignment input, from the Stream Alignment shortcut menu (Figure F.9), click
Save, the stream alignment has been saved. Another way to save data is from the File menu,
click Save Study. Both commands will save all of the stream alignment input to the appropriate
files created and used by HEC-WAT for the stream alignment.

F-21
Appendix F – Stream Alignment HEC-WAT User's Manual

F-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

Appendix G

Measures
Measures for HEC-WAT include structural/non-structural measures (flood damage reduction),
and/or ecosystem measures. Structural measures are physical modifications designed to reduce
the frequency of damaging levels of flood inundation, and include dams with reservoirs, levees,
channelization measures, walls, diversion channels, pumps, bridge modifications, and ice-control
structures. Non-structural measures are activities that reduce flood damage without
significantly altering the nature or extent of flooding (e.g., flood proofing, relocation of
structures, raising structures). Ecosystem restoration measures are physical modifications or
other actions that improve the value and function of an ecosystem (e.g., channel restoration,
removal of drainage structures or levees). There are various measures that can be defined for
HEC-WAT, but this User's Manual will only focus on reservoirs and levees. Other measures
available in HEC-WAT are diversions, channel improvements, off-channel storage, and other
projects.

Measures are components of an existing or proposed physical system and provide a starting point
for implementation in a particular model. All models should incorporate the presence of
measures in the system, although the measures maybe represented very differently from model to
model.

G.1 Reservoirs
A reservoir is the impoundment created behind dams, or behind navigation locks and dams. For
HEC-WAT a reservoir also includes the dam built on a stream to store water for uses such as
flood damage reduction, hydroelectric power generation, recreation use, and water supply, etc.

G.1.1 Create a Reservoir

To create reservoirs, the study must have a valid stream alignment (Appendix F), once the stream
alignment has been created, the following steps are how a user would add reservoirs to the study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure G.1), from the Study Pane, from the Study
Tree, under the Simulations folder, double click on the schematic that requires the
addition of reservoirs (e.g., Schematic:WithoutProjectCondtions). A Schematic Map
Window will open in the Desktop Pane that displays a stream alignment.

2. To assist the user in the location of the reservoir(s), a map layer that displays reservoir
locations for the study area should be added to the study (Chapter 5).

3. From the map window toolbar, press the Zoom Tool , zoom into an area on the map
window where a reservoir is located. On the map window toolbar, press the Reservoir
Tool .

G-1
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure G.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

4. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the upstream end of
the reservoir. Release the CTRL key; drag the mouse to the downstream end of the
reservoir and click.

5. The Name New Reservoir dialog box will open (Figure G.2). Enter the new Name
(required) and Description (optional, but recommended). Click OK, the Name New
Reservoir dialog box will close.

Figure G.2 Name New Reservoir Dialog Box

G-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

6. The reservoir will now appear on the schematic as a cyan triangle (reservoir pool), a blue
line (storage reach), a gray rectangle (dam), and two common computation points that
represent the upstream and downstream ends of the reservoir, as shown in Figure G.3.

Figure G.3 A Reservoir Added to the Map Window

7. The default representation of the reservoir pool is a triangle; the user can edit this triangle
if a more detailed representation of the pool is desired. With the Reservoir Tool pressed,
double-click on the reservoir. The triangle (Figure G.4) will now be green with a blue
outline color. Also, there are three vertex points (blue), and at the apex of the triangle is
the reservoir label, which is represented by a yellow circle.

Figure G.4 Reservoir Pool

8. By clicking and dragging the yellow circle the user can move the reservoir label to an
appropriate location. Similar to the stream alignment, the user can add, move, and delete
vertex points to the reservoir pool. Figure G.5 illustrates how the reservoir pool shown in
Figure G.6 has been edited to give a more detailed representation of the reservoir pool.
G-3
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure G.5 Detailed Representation of a Reservoir Pool

9. When a reservoir is created there are two common computation points that are created
with default names. It is recommended that the names of the two common computation
points be changed. These two common computation points represent the inflow and
outflow junctions of the reservoir and should be renamed accordingly.

10. To change the name of a common computation point, press the Computation Point Tool
, right-click on one of the common computation points. From the shortcut menu, click
Rename Computation Point; the Rename Computation Point dialog box will open
(Figure G.6). In the Name box, enter the new name, and in the Description box enter a
description (optional, but recommended). For example, in Figure G.6, the inflow
junction for Lake Mendocino has been labeled Lake Mendocino Inflow Jct.

Figure G.6 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box

G.1.2 Existing Reservoirs

After adding a reservoir to the schematic, the user can edit the reservoir; rename an individual
reservoir; remove a reservoir from the active schematic, delete individual reservoirs from the

G-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

study; and, create configuration notes for individual reservoirs. All of these tasks are
accomplished through the reservoir shortcut menu (Figure G.7). To access the reservoir shortcut
menu, from a schematic, and with the Reservoir Tool (on the map toolbar, press the Reservoir
Tool ) selected, right-click on a reservoir.

Figure G.7 Reservoir Shortcut Menu

Edit a Reservoir
The user can edit the properties of a reservoir. Properties that can be changed are the
description, whether the reservoir is an existing project, whether the reservoir is a Corps project,
and the year the reservoir came on-line.

To edit reservoir properties:

1. Right-click on the reservoir whose properties need to be changed, and click Edit
Reservoir from the reservoir shortcut menu (Figure G.7).

2. The Reservoir Properties Editor will open (Figure G.8). From the Description box
you can edit or add a description.

Figure G.8 Reservoir Properties Editor

3. If the selected reservoir is an existing project, select the Existing Project check box
(Figure G.8).

4. If the reservoir is a Corps project, select the Corps Project check box.
G-5
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

5. Enter the year the reservoir came on-line in the Year in Service box (Figure G.8). For
Version 1.0 this is just informational and is not used in any computation.

Rename a Reservoir
To rename a reservoir:

1. Right-click on the reservoir that needs to be renamed, and click Rename Reservoir from
the reservoir shortcut menu (Figure G.7).

2. The Rename Reservoir dialog box will open (Figure G.9). Enter the new Name
(required) and Description (optional, but recommended) for the reservoir.

Figure G.9 Rename Reservoir Dialog Box

3. Click OK, a Confirm Rename warning message will open asking the user for
confirmation. Click Yes, the warning message and the Rename Reservoir dialog box
will close, and the reservoir will display the new name.

Remove a Reservoir from a Schematic

HEC-WAT allows the user to remove reservoirs from existing schematics. The reservoir will be
removed from the schematic, but not from the study.

To remove a reservoir from a schematic:

1. Right-click on the reservoir to be removed from the active schematic, and click Remove
ReservoirName from SchematicName from the reservoir shortcut menu (Figure G.7).

2. A warning message will open asking the user confirmation about removing the selected
reservoir from the current schematic. Click Yes, the warning message will close, and the
reservoir will disappear from the schematic.

Delete a Reservoir
To delete a reservoir:

1. Right-click on the reservoir to be deleted, and click Delete ReservoirName from Study
from the reservoir shortcut menu (Figure G.7).

G-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

2. A Confirm Delete warning message will open asking for user confirmation to delete the
selected reservoir. Click Yes, another warning message will open asking the user if you
wish to delete the computation points associated with the reservoir. Click Yes, the
warning message will close. The reservoir and computation points will no longer appear
in the schematic and will have been removed from the study.

Add Schematic Notes for a Reservoir

Schematic notes allow you to add information about a reservoir specific to a schematic.
Schematic notes are helpful when multiple schematics have been defined.

To add schematic notes for a reservoir:

1. Right-click on the reservoir that you want to add schematic notes to, and click
Configuration Notes from the reservoir shortcut menu (Figure G.7).

2. The Notes: dialog box (Figure G.10) will open. Enter information in the Configuration
Notes box that describes the selected reservoir for the current schematic.

Figure G.10 Notes: Dialog Box - Reservoir

Graphically Edit a Reservoir

After creating a reservoir, the reservoir can be edited graphically. By using the Reservoir Tool
, the CTRL key, and the SHIFT key, the user can edit a reservoir by adding, moving, and
deleting vertex points. This edit is performed graphically on the schematic in the active map
window.

Add Vertices to a Reservoir

To add vertex points to an existing reservoir:

1. Double-click on the reservoir that you want to add a vertex point to, and the polygon will
turn green.

G-7
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. Place the pointer on the selected reservoir where a vertex point needs to be added. Hold
down the CTRL key and click. A blue point will now appear on the selected reservoir,
which represents a new vertex point.

Move the Vertices of a Reservoir

To move vertex points on an existing reservoir:

1. Double-click on the reservoir where the user wants to move a vertex point. The selected
reservoir will turn green, and the individual vertex points will turn blue.

2. Click on the vertex point that needs to be moved, and drag the vertex point to a new
location.

Delete Vertices from a Reservoir

To delete vertex points from an existing reservoir:

1. Double-click on the reservoir where the user wants to delete a vertex point. The selected
reservoir will turn green, and the individual vertex points will turn blue.

2. Hold down the SHIFT+CTRL keys, and click on the vertex point that needs to be
deleted. The vertex point will disappear from the reservoir.

G.2 Levees
A levee/floodwall is a man-made barrier built along a stream to provide protection from
flooding. A levee/floodwall can reduce flood damage by preventing flood stages from reaching
a potential damage area.

G.2.1 Import Levees

The user can either import levees from a shapefile or digitize levees by hand (Section G.2.2).
The following are the steps for importing levees:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure G.1), from the Maps menu, point to Import,
click Levees.

2. The Import Levees dialog box will open (Figure G.11). The Shapefile Name box
defaults to the first line shapefile it can find in the maps directory. For example in Figure
G.11, HEC-WAT selected the rr_Levee.shp shapefile, which is the correct file.

3. If the map layer that represents the levees does not display in the Shapefile Name box
(Figure G.11), from the File men of the Import Levees dialog box (G.11), click Choose
Shapefile. A Choose Shapefile Selector will open (Figure G.12). From the Available

G-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

Figure G.11 Import Levees Dialog Box

Figure G.12 Choose Shapefile Selector

box, select the shapefile that represents the levees of the study area, click Add. The
selected shapefile name will now appear in the Selected box (G.12). Click OK, the
Choose Shapefile Selector will close (Figure G.12), and the name of the selected
shapefile will display in the Shapefile Name box of the Import Levees dialog box
(Figure G.11).

4. From the Database Field Name list (Figure G.11), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the levees – ID_Name. Once a field name
is selected, the table below will populate with the levees contained in the shapefile. If
there is an issue with any of the levee segments the checkbox in the Import column

G-9
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

(Figure G.11) will not be selected. This means the levee is not continuous and will not be
imported.

5. Click Import, the Import Levees dialog box will close (Figure G.11). Once the import
of the levees is completed, a message window will appear letting the user know that the
levees have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window the levees appear
(black lines along the stream alignment).

G.2.2 Create a Levee

To create levees, the study must have a valid stream alignment (Appendix F), once the stream
alignment has been created, the following steps for adding levees to the study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure G.1), from the Study Pane, from the Study
Tree, under the Simulations folder, double click on the schematic that requires the
addition of reservoirs (e.g., Schematic:WithoutProjectCondtions). A Schematic Map
Window will open in the Desktop Pane that displays a stream alignment.

2. To assist the user in the location of a levee(s), a map layer that displays levee locations
for the study area should be added to the study (Chapter 5).

3. From the map window toolbar, press the Zoom Tool , zoom into an area on the map
window where a levee is located. On the map window toolbar, press the Levee Tool .

4. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the upstream end of
the levee. Release the CTRL key, drag the mouse to the downstream end of the levee
and click.

5. The Name New Levee dialog box opens (Figure G.13). Enter the new Name (required)
and Description (optional, but recommended). Click OK, the Name New Levee dialog
box will close.

Figure G.13 Name New Levee Dialog Box

G-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

6. The levee will now appear on the schematic as a black line, as shown in Figure G.14.

Figure G.14 A Levee Added to the Schematic

G.2.3 Existing Levees

After adding a levee to the schematic, the user can edit the levee; the user can rename an
individual levee; remove a levee from the active schematic, delete individual levees from the
study; and, create configuration notes for individual levees. All of these tasks are accomplished
through the levee shortcut menu (Figure G.15). To access the levee shortcut menu, from a
schematic, and with the Levee Tool (on the map toolbar, press the Levee Tool ) selected,
right-click on a levee.

Figure G.15 Levee Shortcut Menu

Edit a Levee
The user can now edit the properties of an existing levee. Properties that can be changed are: the
description of the levee; whether the levee is an existing project; whether the levee is a Corps
project; the year the levee came on-line; what stream the levee is located on; the start and end
stations of the levee; adjust the distance (offset) from the stream the levee is placed; and, what
stream bank the levee is located on.

To edit levee properties:

1. Right-click on a levee, and click Edit Levee from the levee shortcut menu (Figure G.15).

2. The Levee Properties Editor will open (Figure G.16).

3. From the Description box (Figure G.16) the user can edit or add a description.

4. If the selected levee is an existing project, click Existing Project.

G-11
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure G.16 Levee Properties Editor

5. If the levee is a Corps project, select Corps Project (Figure G.16).

6. The table (Figure G.16) displays what stream the levee is on and the stream stationing for
the starting and ending stations of the levee. If the user wants to change the starting and
ending stations of the levee, edit the cells under the Start Station and End Station
columns in the table.

7. HEC-WAT automatically determines the stream bank location of the levee. If the user
wants to change the stream bank location, from the Bank list (Figure G.16) select the
appropriate stream bank.

8. If the user knows what year the levee came on-line, enter a year in the Year in Service
box. For HEC-WAT Version 1.0 this is just informational and is not used in any
computation.

9. When a levee is created, a default-offset distance from the stream alignment is set. The
default offset is shown in the Average Offset box (Figure G.16) and is 50. To change
the offset, in the Average Offset box change the value, click Apply. The levee on the
schematic will move according to the new offset value.

10. Click OK, the Levee Properties Editor (Figure G.16) will close.

G-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix G - Measures

Rename a Levee
To rename a levee:

1. Right-click on the levee that needs to be renamed, and click Rename Levee from the
levee shortcut menu (Figure G.15).

2. The Rename Levee dialog box will open (Figure G.17). Enter the new Name (required)
and Description (optional, but recommended) for the levee.

Figure G.17 Rename Levee Dialog Box

3. Click OK, a Confirm Rename warning message will open asking the user if you really
want to rename the selected levee. Click Yes, the warning message and the Rename
dialog boxes will close, and the levee will display the new name.

Remove a Levee from a Schematic

HEC-WAT allows the user to remove levees from existing schematics. The levee will be
removed from the schematic, but not from the study. To remove a levee from a schematic, right-
click on the levee that is to be removed from the active schematic, and click Remove
LeveeName from SchematicName from the levee shortcut menu (Figure G.15). The levee no
longer appears on the schematic.

Delete a Levee
To delete a levee:

1. Right-click on the levee that is to be deleted, and click Delete LeveeName from Study
from the levee shortcut menu (Figure G.15).

2. A Confirm Delete warning message will open asking the user for confirmation to delete
the selected levee. Click Yes, the warning message will close, the levee will no longer
appear in the schematic and has been removed from the study.

Add Schematic Notes for a Levee

Schematic notes allow the user to add information about a levee specific to a schematic.
Schematic notes are helpful when multiple schematics have been defined.

G-13
Appendix G - Measures HEC-WAT User's Manual

To add schematic notes for a levee:

1. Right-click on the levee that the user wants to add schematic notes to, and click
Configuration Notes from the levee shortcut menu (Figure G.15).

2. The Notes: dialog box will open (Figure G.18). Enter information in the Configuration
Notes box that describes the selected levee for the current schematic.

Figure G.18 Notes: Dialog Box - Levee

G.2.4 Save Measure Data

To save data for measures, on the File menu, click Save Study. This will save all of the data for
measures to the appropriate files created and used by HEC-WAT for measures.

G-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP)

Appendix H
Common Computation Points (CCPs)
Common computation points (CCPs) are locations where one model transfers data to another
model, where results are needed for model development or alternative analysis, and, where input
boundary conditions are to be defined. The CCPs need to be consistent for all models and should
be placed on the stream alignment based on knowledge of possible study alternatives. The entire
study team should be involved in the definition of the CCPs.

H.1 Import Common Computation Points

To import CCPs, an active map layer (Chapter 5) that is a shapefile that represents the CCPs for
the study area must be present. This shapefile must have an attribute that is the name of each
CCP, and each CCP must be a point.

To import CCPs from a shapefile:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure H.1), from the Maps menu, point to Import,
click Computation Points. The Import Computation Points dialog box will open
(Figure H.2). The Shapefile Name box figures looks for available point shapefiles in the
maps directory of the HEC-WAT study; from the box the shapefile that represents the
CCPS for the study is displayed (e.g., RR_CommonComputationPoints.shp).

Figure H.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

H-1
Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP) HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure H.2 Import Computation Points Dialog Box

2. If the shapefile is not in the maps directory of the HEC-WAT study, from the Import
Computation Points dialog box (Figure H.2), from the File menu, click Choose
Shapefile. The Choose Shapefile Browser (Figure H.3) will open and the user can
browse to the location of the shapefile. Double-click on the filename and the name will
appear in the File name box. Click Open, the Choose Shapefile Browser will close and
the name of the shapefile will display on the Import Computation Points dialog box in
the Shapefile Name list (Figure H.3).

Figure H.3 Choose Shapefile Browser

H-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP)

3. From the Database Field Name list (Figure H.2), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file that contains the names of the CCPs - ID_Name. Once a field name is
selected, the table below will populate with the CCPs contained in the shapefile. If there
is an issue with any of the CCPs the checkbox in the Import column will not be selected.

4. Click Import, the Import Computation Points dialog box will close (Figure H.2).
Once the import of the CCPs is completed, a message window will appear letting the user
know that the CCPs have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window the
CCPs appear as black circles.

H.2 Create a Common Computation Point

To add a common computation point:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure H.1), from the Schematic Tab, on the
Schematics folder, right-click on the schematic that requires a CCP be added. From the
shortcut menu, click Display in Map Window; a schematic map window will open.

2. On the map toolbar, press the Computation Point Tool .

3. Hold down the CTRL key and click on the stream alignment to place the CCP.

4. The Name New Computation Point dialog box will open (Figure H.4). Enter the new
Name (required) and Description (optional, but recommended). Click OK, the Name
New Computation Point dialog box will close.

5. The CCP will now appear in the map window as a black circle.

Figure H.4 Name New Computation Point Dialog Box

To add a CCP at a stream junction (Appendix F):

1. From the Schematic Tab, right-click on the schematic that requires a CCP to be added.
From the shortcut menu, click Display in Map Window; a schematic map window will
open.

H-3
Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP) HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. On the map toolbar, press the Computation Point Tool .

3. Hold down the CTRL key, click on the stream junction to place a CCP

4. A slightly different Name New Computation Point dialog box will open (H.5). Enter
the new Name (required) and Description (optional, but recommended).

Figure H.5 Name new Computation Point Dialog Box at a Stream Junction

5. From the Select the Placement of the Computation Point list (Figure H.5), determine
exactly where the CCP will be placed. The user must decide to have the CCP placed on
the stream junction; along one of the streams that form the stream junction; or, none of
the above. For example, in Figure H.5, the CCP will be placed on the stream junction.

6. Click OK, the Name New Computation Point dialog box (Figure H.5) will close. The
CCP will now appear in the display area as a black circle.

H.3 Existing Common Computation Points

After drawing a CCP in the map window, the user can rename, delete, and edit individual CCP
properties. All of these tasks are accomplished through the CCP shortcut menu (Figure H.6). To
access the CCP shortcut menu, from a schematic map window, and with the Computation Point
Tool (on the map toolbar, press the Computation Point Tool ) selected, right-click on a CCP.

Figure H.6 Common Computation Point Shortcut Menu

H-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP)

H.3.1 Edit a Common Computation Point

The general properties of a CCP that the user can edit include: the description; the stream; the
position of the label on the map window; the stream stationing; the easting and northing; whether
the CCP was system generated; what projects generated that CCP; and the location of the CCP
on the stream alignment.

To edit CCP properties:

1. Right-click on the CCP whose properties need to be changed, click Edit Computation
Point from the CCP shortcut menu (Figure H.6).

2. The Computation Point Properties Editor will open (Figure H.7). From the
Description box the user can edit or add a description (recommended).

Figure H.7 Computation Point Properties Editor

3 By default HEC-WAT automatically decides on the stream for the location of the CCP.
The Stream Name box (Figure H.7) provides the user with this information and is not
editable.

4. HEC-WAT automatically generates the stream station for the CCP. If the user wants to
change the stream station, then enter a new value in the Stream Station box (Figure H.7)
enter a new value.

5. The Label Position list allows the user to place the CCP label on the map window.

6. The location of the CCP is displayed by the northing and easting coordinates. These
values are not editable.

H-5
Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP) HEC-WAT User's Manual

7. By default, a CCP is placed on a stream in the stream alignment. If the user wishes to
have a CCP that is not on a stream, clear the Snap to Steam Element check box (Figure
H.7).

8. Once the Snap to Stream Element has been cleared, the user can edit the easting and
northing coordinates of the CCP, and then the CCP can be moved off the stream
alignment.

H.3.2 Rename a Common Computation Point

To rename a CCP:

1. Right-click on a CCP, click Rename Computation Point from the CCP shortcut menu
(Figure H.6).

2. The Rename Computation Point dialog box opens (Figure H.8). The new Name
(required) and Description (optional, but recommended) are entered for the CCP.

Figure H.8 Rename Computation Point Dialog Box

3. Click OK, a Confirm Rename warning message will open asking the user if you really
want to rename the selected CCP. Click Yes, the warning message and the Rename
Computation Point dialog box will close, and the CCP will display the new name.

H.3.3 Delete a Common Computation Point

CCPs created with a project (i.e., reservoirs) or an impact area cannot be deleted. These CCPs
are deleted when the project or impact area is deleted.

To delete a CCP:

1. Right-click a CCP, click Delete ComputationPointName from Study from the CCP
shortcut menu (Figure H.6).

2. A Confirm Delete warning message will open for user confirmation to delete the
selected CCP. Click Yes, the warning message will close and the CCP will no longer
appear in the map window.

H-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP)

H.3.4 Graphically Edit a Common Computation Point

After creating a CCP, the user can graphically edit a CCP. By using the Computation Point
Tool , the user can move CCP. This edit is performed graphically on the schematic in the
active map window.

Move a Common Computation Point

To move a CCP:

1. From the map toolbar, press the Computation Point Tool . Double click on a CCP
(Figure H.9).

Figure H.9 Move a Common Computation Point

2. The CCP now has four little black dots (handles) at each corner. Click and drag the CCP
to where the CCP should be positioned, and release. The CCP will now appear on the
map window in the new position.

3 The user will only be able to move the CCP along a stream. By default, a CCP must be
on a stream. If the user does not want a CCP on the stream alignment, the user must
change a setting in the editor (Section 1.2.2).

H.4 Save Common Computation Point Data

To save data for CCPs, on the File menu, click Save Study. This will save all of the data for
CCPs to the appropriate files created and used by HEC-WAT for CCPs.

H-7
Appendix H – Common Computation Points (CCP) HEC-WAT User's Manual

H-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix I - Impact Areas

Appendix I
Impact Areas
An impact area is any distinct portion of a study that is affected by rising or falling stage in a
stream, river, lake, or reservoir. The boundaries of an impact area are defined by a closed
polygon, and can be characterized by the effects of rising or falling stage that can be described
by the property, project, and/or population at risk in the area bounded by the polygon. Impact
areas are an optional element, and are only required when a user wants to compute impacts at
damage area centers in the study area, and an HEC-FIA model is part of the HEC-WAT
modeling effort.

The user can use underlying map layers to aid in importing impact areas (Section I.1) into the
schematic or placing impact areas at the proper location on the schematic (Section I.2). Besides
location, a map layer can also give the user a concept of the dimensions of an impact area.
However, HEC-WAT Version 1.0 does not have any geo-referencing attached to the impact area
polygon.

I.1 Import Impact Areas

To import impact areas, an active map layer (Chapter 5) that is a shapefile (Chapter 5) that
represents the impact areas should be available. This shapefile must have an attribute that is the
name of each impact area, and each impact area must form a contiguous polygon.

To import impact areas from a shapefile:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure I.1), from the Maps menu, point to Import,
click Impact Areas. The Import Impact Areas dialog box will open (Figure I.2). The
Shapefile Name box figures out whether there are any polygon shapefiles available in
the maps directory; from the box the shapefile that represents the impact areas for the
study display (e.g., RR_ImpactAreas.shp).

2. If the shapefile is not in the maps directory of the HEC-WAT study, from the Import
Impact Areas dialog box (Figure I.2), from the File menu, click Choose Shapefile. The
Choose Shapefile Browser (Figure I.3) will open and the user can browse to the location
of the shapefile. Double-click on the filename and the name will appear in the File name
box. Click Open, the Choose Shapefile Browser will close and the name of the
shapefile will display on the Import Impact Areas dialog box in the Shapefile Name
list (Figure I.2).

3. From the Database Field Name list (Figure I.2), the user needs to select the field name
in the attribute file of the impact areas - ID_Name. Once a field name is selected, the
table below will populate with the impact areas contained in the shapefile. If there is an
issue with any of the impact areas the checkbox in the Import column will not be
selected.

I-1
Appendix I – Impact Areas HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure I.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

Figure I.2 Import Impact Areas Dialog Box

I-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix I - Impact Areas

Figure I.3 Choose Shapefile Browser

4. With the correct database field name selected, the table will list the impact area names. If
each impact area is a contiguous polygon, then the check box in the Import column of
the table (Figure I.2) will be set. If there is something wrong with the polygon that
represents an impact area, the check box will not be set, and HEC-WAT will not import
that impact area.

5. Replace Existing Impact Areas (Figure I.2) allows the user to replace the existing
impact areas with the impact areas the will be imported from the selected ArcView®
shapefile.

6. Click Import, the Import Impact Areas dialog box will close (Figure I.2). Once the
import of the impact areas is completed, a message window will appear letting the user
know that the impact areas have been imported successfully. In the active Map Window
the impact areas appear as green polygons.

I.2 Create an Impact Area

To creating an impact area on the schematic:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure I.1), from the Schematic Tab, from the
Schematics folder, right-click on the schematic on the location where an impact area
needs to be added. From the shortcut menu, click Display in Map Window; a schematic
map window will.

2. On the map toolbar, press the Impact Area Tool .

3. Hold down the CTRL key while clicking the mouse button. Each click creates a vertex
point (Figure I.4), which is the boundary of the polygon. When reaching the end point,
release the CTRL key and click.

I-3
Appendix I – Impact Areas HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure I.4 Add an Impact Area to the Schematic

4. The Name New Impact Area dialog box will open (Figure I.5). The user must enter a
name, and if needed, enter a description. Click OK, the Name New Impact Area dialog
box will close.

Figure I.5 Name New Impact Area Dialog Box

5. The impact area will now appear in the display area as a green polygon with a name.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each impact area in your watershed.

I.3 Existing Impact Areas

After drawing an impact area on the schematic, the user can edit properties, rename, delete, and
create schematic notes for individual impact areas. All of these tasks are accomplished through
the impact area shortcut menu (Figure I.6). To access the impact area shortcut menu, from a
schematic, and with the Impact Area Tool (on the map toolbar, press the Impact Area Tool
) selected, right-click on an impact area.

I-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix I - Impact Areas

Figure I.6 Impact Area Shortcut Menu

I.3.1 Edit an Impact Area

In a schematic, the user can describe the general and aesthetic properties of an impact area. The
impact area properties that the user can edit in a schematic include: the description;

the stream; the bank of the stream the impact area is on; the color of the impact area polygon; the
position of the impact area label on the display area; the geographical location of the index
station; and, the geographical location of the beginning and ending stations of the impact area
polygon.

To edit impact area properties:

1. Right-click an impact area and click Edit Impact Area from the available shortcut menu
(Figure I.6). The Impact Area Properties Editor will open (Figure I.7). From the
Description box (Figure I.7) the user can edit or add a description.

Figure I.7 Impact Area Properties Editor

I-5
Appendix I – Impact Areas HEC-WAT User's Manual

2. If the Auto check box is selected for an item, the value for this data item is automatically
updated as the polygon or index location is moved in the display area. By default, when
a polygon is drawn in the display area, these values are filled in automatically. If the
check box is cleared, data can be entered manually into these fields, and the value will
not be automatically updated if changes are made to the polygon. However, reselecting
the check box allows the values to be automatically determined when edits are made in
the display area.

3. If the default stream name selected by HEC- WAT is incorrect, clear the Auto check box,
and from the Stream Name list select the appropriate stream name.

4. If the default bank selected by HEC-WAT is incorrect, clear the Auto check box (Figure
I.7), and select the appropriate stream bank from the Bank box.

5. By default, the color of an impact area polygon is green. The user can change the color
by selecting a different color from the Color list.

6. The Label Position list (Figure I.7) allows the user to place the impact area label on the
display area.

7. For each impact area, HEC-WAT generates an index station; this index station is a
location. If the user wants to place the index station manually, clear the Auto check box
next to the Index box (Figure I.7), and then enter the new stream stationing in the Index
box.

8. HEC-WAT automatically computes a beginning and ending station for each impact area.
If the user wants to change the stream stationing the program has generated, clear the
Auto check box next to the Upstream and Downstream boxes, and enter the new stream
stationing in the Upstream box and the Downstream box. Click OK, the Impact Area
Properties Editor (Figure I.7) will close.

Rename an Impact Area

To rename an impact area:

1. Right-click an impact area and click Rename Impact Area from the impact area shortcut
menu (Figure I.6).

2. The Rename Impact Area dialog box will open (Figure I.8). Enter the new Name
(required) and Description (optional, but recommended impact areas).

3. Click OK, a Confirm Rename warning message will open asking the user if you really
want to rename the selected impact area. Click Yes, the warning message and the
Rename Impact Area dialog boxes will close, and the impact area will display the new
name.

I-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix I - Impact Areas

Figure I.8 Rename Impact Area Dialog Box

Delete an Impact Area

To delete an impact area:

1. Right-click an impact area and click Delete ImpactAreaName from Study from the
impact area shortcut menu (Figure I.6).

2. A Confirm Delete warning message will open asking the user if you really want to delete
the selected impact area. Click Yes, the warning message will close, and the impact area
will no longer appear in the display area.

Add Schematic Notes for an Impact Area

Schematic notes allow specific information about an impact area to be added to a schematic.
This information is useful for describing impact areas that belong to schematics that include non-
structural measures. If there are non-structural attributes for an impact area, the user can have a
symbol appear in the schematic for the selected impact area. Schematic notes are only added
when other schematics have been defined.

To add schematic notes for an impact area:

1. Right-click an impact area and click Configuration Notes from the impact area shortcut
menu (Figure I.6).

2. The Configuration Notes Editor will open (Figure I.9). The Configuration box
displays the current schematic. Enter information about this impact area for the current
schematic in the Configuration Notes box.

3. If the notes are in regards to non-structural attributes, select Display Non-Structural

Symbol. This will cause a symbol to appear in the selected impact area on the schematic.

I.3.2 Graphically Edit an Impact Area

The user can create and graphically edit the impact area. By using the Impact Area Tool, the
CTRL key, and the SHIFT key, the user can edit an impact area by adding, moving, and
deleting vertex points. This edit is performed graphically on the schematic in the active map
window.

I-7
Appendix I – Impact Areas HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure I.9 Configuration Notes Editor

Add Vertices to an Impact Area

To add vertex points to an existing impact area:

1. Double-click an impact area, the impact area will turn yellow.

2. Place the pointer on the selected impact area where the user wants to add a vertex point.
Hold down the CTRL key and click. A red point will now appear on the selected impact
area, which represents a new vertex point.

Move the Vertices of an Impact Area

To move vertex points on an existing impact area:

1. Double-click an impact area, the impact area will turn yellow, and the individual vertex
points will turn red.

2. Click on the vertex point that needs to be moved, and drag the vertex point to a new
location.

Delete Vertices from an Impact Area

To delete vertex points from an existing impact area:

1. Double-click an impact area, the impact area will turn yellow, and the individual vertex
points will turn red.

2. Hold down the SHIFT+CTRL keys and click on the vertex point that needs to be
deleted. The vertex point will disappear from the impact area.

I-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix I - Impact Areas

I.3.3 Export Impact Areas

If the impact areas have been digitized, the user can save the impact areas as an ArcView®
shapefile. To export impact areas the user must have impact areas in the schematic.

To export impact areas:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure I.1), from the Maps menu, point to Export,
and then click Impact Areas.

2. A Save browser will open (Figure I.10). Enter a name in the File name box. Click OK,
the Save browser will close, and the user will have an ArcView® shapefile of the
displayed impact areas.

Figure I.10 Save Browser

I.3.4 Save Impact Area Data

To save data for impact areas, from the File menu, click Save Study. This will save all of the
data for impact areas to the appropriate files created and used by HEC-WAT for impact areas.

I-9
Appendix I – Impact Areas HEC-WAT User's Manual

I-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue

Appendix J

Using HEC-DSSVue
HEC-DSSVue (Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC), Data Storage System Visual Utility
Engine) is a graphical user interface program for viewing, editing, and manipulating data in
HEC-DSS database files. With DSSVue, data may be plotted, tabulated, edited, and manipulated
with over fifty mathematical functions. Along with these functions, DSSVue provides several
utility functions, such as entering data sets into a database, renaming data set names, copying
data sets to other DSS (HEC's Data Storage System) database files, and deleting data sets.

For HEC-WAT, the user will use HEC-DSSVue mainly as a viewing tool for DSS data. This
appendix will review some of the general functions in HEC-DSSVue. For further detail, see the
HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

J.1 HEC Data Storage System Concepts

HEC-DSS is a database system that was designed to efficiently store and retrieve scientific data
that is typically sequential. Such data types include, but are not limited to, time series data,
curve data, spatial-oriented gridded data, textual data (such as this manual), and others. The
system was designed to make it easy for users and application programs to retrieve and store
data.

The data are arranged into blocks. For example, one year of daily-interval data is stored in a
single record in a DSS file. Each record is given a unique name called a pathname. The
pathname is formulated in a way that makes it easy to group related data together. HEC software
has the ability to read from and write to DSS files. This capability facilitates data exchange
among applications. For example, a user could use HEC-ResSim to generate the time series
input for HEC-FIA.

J.2 Overview of HEC-DSSVue in the WAT

To access HEC-DSSVue, from the HEC-WAT main window, from the Tools toolbar (Chapter 3,
Section 3.4), click . Alternatively, from the HEC-WAT main window, from the Tools menu,
click HEC-DSSVue. Either way, the HEC-DSSVue main window opens. The main window
and its different components are illustrated in Figure J.1.

The Menu Bar contains the menus for the main window of HEC-DSSVue. The following list is
a description of the available menus.

File This menu is used for DSS file management and contains the following
command: New Ver 6, New Ver 7, Open, Close DSS File, Print Catalog
Preview, Print Catalog, and Close.

J-1
Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure J.1 HEC-DSSVue Main Window

Edit This menu provides editing functions and contains the following commands:
Tabular Edit, Graphical Edit, Select All, Rename Records, Delete
Records, Undelete, Duplicate, Copy To, and Merge Copy.

View This menu provides options for viewing DSS pathnames. Available commands
are: Pathname List, Pathname Parts, Condensed Catalog, Condensed –
Group Collections, No Pathnames, Unsorted List, Search pathnames by
string, Search pathnames by parts, Catalog using wild characters, Refresh
Catalog, Unit System, and Time Zone.

Display After a user has selected a pathname, this menu allows the user the ability to
display the data for that pathname. Available commands are: Plot, Plot
Individual Data Sets, Tabulate, Display Data Options, Supplemental
Information, and Time Window.

Groups This menu provides the capability to save selected pathnames as groups, open a
group, plot and/or tabulate a group, and perform math functions on a group.
Available commands are: Save Selected, Get, Get (add to list), Plot, Plot
Individual Sets, Tabulate, Math, and Manage.

Data Entry This menu provides the user with the ability to either manually enter data or
import data from other sources into the selected DSS file. Also, allows the
user to export DSS data into other formats. Available commands are: Manual
Time Series, Manual Paired Data, Manual Text, Import, and Export.

J-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue

Tools This menu provides a user with tools that will manipulate the data stored in
DSS pathnames. Available commands are: Math Functions, Compare,
Search for Value, Check File Integrity, Squeeze, Convert to DSS 7, Script
Editor, and Script Selector.

Advanced This menu provides options for saving the DSS catalog to a file, output, debug
issues, and setting program options. Available commands are: Catalog to
File, Output, Debug, and Program Options.

Help Displays current version information about DSSVue.

The Toolbar (Figure J.1) contains buttons that provide a user with the capability to open a DSS
file, plot the data, and tabulate the data. These buttons provide a shortcut to the respective
commands in the Display menu.

Open File Button – opens an Open File Browser, which allows a user to select a DSS
file.

Plot Button – plots the data of the selected pathname(s).

Tabulate Button – displays the data of the selected pathname(s) in a tabular form.

Graphical Editor Button – opens the Graphical Editor (see HEC-DSSVue User's
Manual, Chapter 4, Section 4.5).

Math Functions Button – opens the Math Functions dialog box (see HEC-DSSVue
User's Manual, Chapter 6) which allows you to perform mathematical functions on the
selected pathname(s).

The DSS File Information (Figure G.1) box displays the filename of the DSS file, and statistics
about the pathnames in the DSS file and the size of the DSS file.

The Filter Lists (Figure J.1) are used to sort DSS pathnames by parts. There is a filter list for
each individual part, A through F. The Pathname Table displays the filtered pathnames
contained in the DSS file. The pathnames are displayed by the individual parts. The Selected
Pathname List displays the pathnames that you have selected from the Pathname Table.

The Select Commands (Figure J.1) are available after you have selected the pathnames you
wish to view or manipulate. Available commands are Select, De-Select, Clear Selections,
Restore Selections, and Set Time Window. These commands will be detailed later in this
appendix.

When a user has entered time window information, the Status Bar (Figure J.1) will display the
time window information. A time window is where a user provides a specific timeframe for
viewing or manipulating DSS data.

J-3
Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue HEC-WAT User's Manual

J.3 Open a DSS File

There are several ways to open a DSS file from HEC-DSSVue. One way is to enter the path and
filename of a DSS file in the File Name box of the HEC-DSSVue main window (Figure J.1).
After the correct information has been entered, press ENTER, the Pathname Table will display
the pathnames from the selected DSS file, and the DSS File Information (Figure J.1) box will
display statistics about the DSS file.

Another way to open a DSS file is from the File menu, click Open; or, click from the
Toolbar. Either method opens an Open HEC-DSS File browser (Figure J.2). The browser
defaults to My Documents if a simulation map window is not displayed. However, if a
simulation map window is open, the browser will default to the HEC-WAT runs directory. A
folder will be created that is based on an HEC-WAT alternative (associated with the simulation),
and an analysis period. Click on the DSS file, the name should appear in the File name box
(Figure J.2), click Open. The Open HEC-DSS File browser (Figure J.2) will close, and the
HEC-DSSVue main window will display the name of the DSS file and all of the pathnames
associated with that DSS file will appear in the Pathname Table (Figure J.1).

Figure J.2 Open HEC-DSS File Browser

J.4 Set Time Window

To view the data for a certain block of time, you can set a time window:

1. From the Display menu, click Time Window, the Set Time Window dialog box (Figure
J.3) will open.

2. To enter a start date and time, click Specific Time Window. In the Start Date box type
a date in the format ddmmmyyyy (e.g., 12Feb1986), and in the Start Time box type a
time in the format hhmm (e.g., 1600).
J-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue

Figure J.3 Set Time Window Dialog Box

3. To enter an ending date and time, in the End Date box type a date in the format
ddmmmyyyy (e.g., 23Feb1986), and in the End Time box type a time in the format
hhmm (e.g., 1600). To clear the time window boxes, click Clear (Figure J.3).

4. If the user wants to use the current date and time, click Set Current Time (Figure J.3).
All time window boxes will be filled, the user will probably need to edit the ending date
and time.

5. Click OK, the Set Time Window dialog box (Figure J.3) will close, the time window
will be set, and the time window will be displayed in the Status Bar of the HEC-
DSSVue main window (Figure J.1).

J.5 DSS Pathnames

Data is stored in blocks, or records, within a file, and each record is identified by a unique name
called a pathname. Each time that data is stored or retrieved from the file, its pathname must be
given. The pathname is the key to the data’s location in the database. A pathname is analyzed by
DSS to determine an index number. This index determines where the dataset is stored within the
database. The design ensures that very few disk accesses are made to retrieve or store datasets.

J-5
Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue HEC-WAT User's Manual

One dataset is not directly related to another, so there is no need to update other areas of the
database when a new dataset is stored.

DSS references records (data sets) by a pathname. The pathname of a DSS record can be three
hundred and ninety-one (391) characters or less, and is, by convention, separated into six parts.
The parts can be sixty-four (64) characters or less and are delimited by slashes in the pathname.
The pathname parts are designated A through F. Table J.1 provides an example naming
convention for regular-interval time series:

Table J.1 DSS Pathname Parts

A project, river, or basin name
B location identifier
C data parameter (e.g., FLOW, PRECIP)
D starting block data; format ddmmyyyy
E time interval
F additional user-defined descriptive information

J.5.1 View DSS Pathnames

The display of pathnames in the Pathname Table shows all of the pathnames by the different
parts (Figure J.1). The user can change this display from the View menu; available commands
are Pathname List, Pathname Parts, Condensed Catalog, and No Pathnames.

The Pathname List command (Figure J.4) displays the pathnames in the Pathname Table,
while No Pathnames displays nothing. The Pathname Parts command is the same as the
Condensed Catalog command, except for the D part. On the Condensed Catalog, the D part
displays the date span for each pathname.

Figure J.4 Pathname List Display

J.5.2 Sort DSS Pathnames by Parts

Another way to affect the display of the pathnames is through sorting by pathname parts.
Sorting the DSS pathnames by parts is the command Search pathnames by parts (default).
However, another way to sort the pathnames is available from the View menu, choose Search
pathnames by string. The details for this method are described in the HEC-DSSVue User's
Manual.

J-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue

To sort by pathname parts, from the Filter Lists (Figure J.5) decide which pathname parts will
be used to sort the pathname list. There is a Filter List for each individual pathname part. An
example is shown in Figure J.5 where filters are used to see all of the FLOW records that are
observed data. In Figure J.5, FLOW has been selected for Filter C and RESSIM-CALIBRATE has
been selected for Filter F. The Pathname Table will now display only the pathnames that fit the
criteria are stated in the Filter Lists.

Figure J.5 Sorting Pathnames

J.5.3 Select Pathnames

Once an appropriate list of pathnames is displayed in the Pathname Table, the user can select
which pathnames to view or manipulate. To select a pathname, double-click on a pathname in
the Pathname Table and the selected pathname will appear in the Selected Pathname List
(Figure J.1). The user can also click on a pathname in the Pathname Table, and then click
Select from the Select Commands (Figure J.1).

To select multiple pathnames, in the Pathname Table, click on a pathname the pathname will be
highlighted. Find the next pathname that needs to be included in a group, hold down the SHIFT
key and click. The block of pathnames will be highlighted, click Select, and all the pathnames
within that block will be added to the Selected Pathname List.

Another way to select multiple pathnames is from the Pathname Table, click and drag across
the pathnames wanted, release the mouse button and the block of pathnames will be highlighted.
Click Select, and all of the pathnames within that block will be added to the Selected Pathname
List.

The user can select individual pathnames to be in a group for selection. From the Pathname
Table, select a pathname which will be highlighted; to select another not in a contiguous group,
hold down the CTRL key and select the next pathname which will be highlighted. Continue to
do this until all desired pathnames have been selected, release the CTRL key and click Select.
All the pathnames you have selected will be added to the Selected Pathname List.

The user can select all of the pathnames displayed in the Pathname Table. From the Edit
menu, choose Select All. All of the pathnames will now appear in the Selected Pathname List.

J-7
Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue HEC-WAT User's Manual

J.5.4 Clear Selected Pathnames

To clear a pathname from the Selected Pathname List (Figure J.1), select a pathname and click
De-Select from the Select Commands (Figure J.1). The pathname will be cleared from the
Selected Pathname List. To clear all pathnames from the Selected Pathname List, click Clear
Selections, and the Selected Pathname Box will be empty.

The user can also clear groups of pathnames by using the same concepts described in selecting
pathnames (Section J.5.3) by using the SHIFT and CTRL keys. Once pathnames have been
cleared from the Selected Pathname Box, the pathnames can be restored to the Selected
Pathname Box by clicking Restore Selections from the Select Commands (Figure J.1).

J.6 Visualize Data

After selecting a pathname or multiple pathnames, the user can visualize the data associated with
the pathname. This can be done graphically with plots, or in a tabular format (table). The
examples described in this section are all for time-series data. Similar features exist for other
types of datasets, such as paired data. Further details on plots and tables are discussed in the
HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

J.6.1 Plots
To view a plot of the pathnames in the Selected Pathname List (Figure J.1), a user can either
click the Toolbar, or from the Display menu, choose Plot. Either way will open the Plot
Window (Figure J.6).

Figure J.6 Plot Window

J-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue

The datasets for the plots are labeled and color-coded, date ranges are specified along one axis (if
plotting time-series data), and the units of measure are specified along the other axis. A user can
resize the Plot Window by grabbing the corner of the window and dragging it to the desired size.

The user can also zoom in on areas of the plot. Click the Zoom Tool, find the area on the
plot, zoom-in, click and drag over the area. The plot will refresh, the area within the zoom
rectangle will fill the plot window. To zoom out, with the Zoom Tool selected, right-click
anywhere on the plot area.

J.6.2 Tables
To view a table of the pathnames in the Selected Pathname List (Figure J.1), a user can either
click from the Toolbar, or from the View menu, click Tabulate. Either way the Tabulate
Window will open (Figure J.7).

Figure J.7 Tabulate Window

The Tabulate Window displays the ordinate (starting from the start date/time), the date and time
stamp, and the values for the selected data sets. From the Tabulate Window, the user has
several options for displaying tabular data (e.g., displaying commas in the number formatting,
setting the precision of decimal places for data).

J.7 DSS Records

HEC-DSS uses a block of sequential data as the basic unit of storage. Each block contains a
series of values of a single variable over a time span appropriate for most applications. The basic
concept underlying DSS is the organization of data into records of continuous, applications-
related elements, as opposed to individually addressable data items. This approach is more

J-9
Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue HEC-WAT User's Manual

efficient for scientific applications than that of a conventional database system because it avoids
the processing and storage overhead required for assembling an equivalent record from a
conventional system. Data is stored in blocks, or records, within a file, and each record is
identified by a pathname.

J.7.1 Rename Records

To change the pathname parts of a pathname:

1. The user must have selected one or more pathnames (Section J.5.3) for this command to
be available.

2. From the Edit menu, click Rename Records. The Rename Records to: dialog box
(Figure J.8) will open.

Figure J.8 Rename Records to: Dialog Box

3. Each of the boxes (A - F) represents the different pathname parts. The D and E parts are
not editable. The user can change the parts A, B, C, and F by entering new information
in the appropriate box.

4. Click OK, the Rename Records to: dialog box will close, a message will appear
informing the user of the number of records renamed. The selected pathname will no
longer be displayed in the Selected Pathname Box (Figure J.1) and the pathname will
display in the Pathname Table (Figure J.1) with the new pathname parts.

J.7.2 Duplicate Records

Duplicating a record allows a user to make a copy of a record, but with a pathname part that has
been changed. To duplicate records:

1. The user must have selected one or more pathnames (Section J.5.3) for this command to
be available.

2. From the Edit menu, click Duplicate. The New pathname parts for duplicate records:
dialog box (similar to Figure J.8) will open.
J-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue

3. Each of the boxes (A - F) represents the different pathname parts. The D and E parts are
not editable. The user can change the parts A, B, C, and F by entering the new
information in the appropriate box.

4. Click OK, the New pathname parts for duplicate records: dialog box will close. A
message will appear informing the user of the number of records that were duplicated. A
new pathname will be displayed in the Pathname Table (Figure J.1).

J.7.3 Delete Records

To delete records:

1. The user must have selected one or more pathnames (Section J.5.3) for this command to
be available.

2. From the Edit menu, click Delete Records, a warning message dialog box appears
asking the user if you really want to delete the listed pathnames. These should be the
same pathnames displayed in the Selected Pathname List (Figure J.1)
.
3. Click Yes, the warning message dialog box will close. A message will appear informing
the user of the number of records deleted.

4. The deleted records no longer appear in the Pathname Table (Figure J.1).

J.7.4 Edit Data Associated with Records

The user can edit the data associated with a pathname, if the user has the appropriate
permissions, on the Edit menu, click Tabular Edit or Graphical Edit. The user can edit data
directly, enter new time-series data or paired data, or use math functions to manipulate the data.
All of these features are detailed in the HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

J-11
Appendix J – Using HEC-DSSVue HEC-WAT User's Manual

J-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

Appendix K
Model Integration Tools
For the HEC-WAT schematics to be truly interactive, all of the graphical elements from all of
the software applications must display correctly and in the correct alignment. The projection of
the HEC-WAT study and the model alternatives must be the same. The HEC-ResSim software
is very close to the HEC-WAT framework, as long as the projections are the same, the user will
not need to make any adjustments to the HEC-ResSim graphical elements. However, for HEC-
HMS, HEC-RAS, and HEC-FIA, there are HEC-WAT tools that will aid integrating graphical
elements from these software applications to display nicely in the HEC-WAT schematic.

K.1 Stream Reach Alias

The stream alignment is based on stream segment names, and those names must be exact among
the model alternatives of an HEC-WAT simulation. When the stream names are not the same,
instead of changing the HEC-WAT stream alignment or changing the stream naming in a model
alternative, HEC-WAT has a tool that resolves naming inconsistencies through the use of aliases.

From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure K.1), with a study open, from the Edit menu, click
Stream Reach Alias Editor. The Stream Reach Alias Editor will open (Figure K.2). The tree
contains all of the stream names in the stream alignment that has been selected. When a stream
name with a folder is selected, an alias for the selected stream name can be entered.

Figure K.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

K-1
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure K.2 Stream Reach Alias Editor

For example, in Figure K.2, Dry Ck is an HEC-WAT stream name, however in HEC-RAS the
stream name (reach name) is DryCreek. For HEC-RAS graphical elements to display correctly
on the HEC-WAT schematic, the user needs to let HEC-WAT know that both names for that
stream are correct. From the tree on the Stream Reach Alias Editor (Figure K.2), select Dry
Ck, click Add Alias, the Enter Alias Name dialog box will open (Figure K.3).

Figure K.3 Enter Alias Dialog Box

In the Enter New Alias Name for Stream Reach Dry Ck (Figure K.3) – DryCreek. Click OK,
the Enter Alias Name dialog box will close (Figure K.3), and a node under the selected stream
name will be added. This needs to be done for all of the streams that do not match.

To remove an alias, from the Stream Reach Alias Editor (Figure K.2), from the tree, select an
alias, click Remove Alias. A Confirm Deletion window will open (Figure K.4), asking the user
are you sure you want to delete the selected alias, click Yes. The Confirm Deletion window
will close (Figure K.4), and the alias will no longer display on the tree.

Figure K.4 Confirm Deletion Window

K-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

K.2 Junction Location Mapping

The HEC-HMS graphical elements that HEC-WAT recognizes do not have coordinates
(geographic location information), and therefore the HEC-HMS graphical elements do not
display on the HEC-WAT schematic correctly. For HEC-HMS reach and junction graphical
elements, HEC-WAT provides tools that the user can use to make the HEC-HMS graphical
elements display correctly on the HEC-WAT schematic. The first of these tools is for HEC-
HMS junctions – Junction to Stream Mapper.

To edit the geographic location of HEC-HMS junction graphical elements:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure K.1), from the Edit menu, point to HMS,
click Junction Location Mapper.

2. The HMS Junction to Stream Mapper dialog box will open (Figure K.5). This dialog
box is not from HEC-HMS, but from HEC-WAT. Since the current version of HEC-
HMS does not recognize the coordinate system that HEC-WAT has for a study, this
dialog box allows the user to enter information that will give the HEC-HMS junction
graphical element the correct geographic location on the schematic.

Figure K.5 HMS Junction to Stream Mapper Dialog Box

3. From the Model Alternative list (Figure K.5), select an HMS model alternative (i.e.,
(RUN)Feb_1986). This should be the HMS model alternative associated with the active
HEC-WAT simulation displayed in the Map Window (Figure K.1).

4. From the Study Tree (Figure K.6), expand the Models node. Select HMS, from the
Content Pane (Figure K.6), double-click on the HMS model alternative (i.e.,
HMS:(RUN)Feb_1986) that has been selected in the HMS Junction to Stream Mapper
dialog box (Figure K.5). A map window will open (Figure K.7) that displays the selected
HMS model alternative.

K-3
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure K.6 Study Tree – Models Node - HMS

Figure K.7 HMS Model Alternative Map Window

5. Turning off some of the map layers in the map window (Figure K.7) will help in locating
the stationing for the HMS junction graphic elements. From the Maps tab (Figure K.8)
of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure K.1), turn off all of the map layers that are not
need for locating the HMS junction graphic elements. When this is done, the Map
Window (Figure K.7) displays the HMS model alternative.

K-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

Figure K.8 Maps Tab – Turning Map Layers Off

6. In Figure K.5, for example, the first junction (i.e., Ukiah Confluence), is it on the correct
stream? After reviewing the map window (Figure K.7), the selected stream (i.e., EF RR)
is not correct. To review the first junction on the map window (Figure K.7), zoom in to
the first junction location (Figure K.9), which is the first red circle located in the
upstream end of the study area. Select (Stream Node Tool), right-click on the red
circle, from the shortcut menu click Edit Junction, the Stream Junction Editor will
open (Figure K.9). The HMS junction happens to be at a confluence of three streams,
and an HEC-WAT stream junction is at that same location

Figure K.9 Stream Junction Editor – Junction Stream Stationing

7. From the Stream Junction Editor (Figure K.9), the user can determine the stream
location and the stationing for the first HMS junction. For example, in Figure K.9, the
first HMS junction (i.e., Ukiah Confluence) should be located on stream RR and the
junction's stationing is 353.537.8.

8. From the HMS Junction to Stream Mapper dialog box (Figure K.5), from the Stream
column, for the first HMS junction (i.e., Ukiah Confluence), from the list select RR.
From the Station column (Figure K.5), for the first HMS junction, enter 353,537.8.

K-5
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

9. For the rest of the HMS junctions, the user may have to repeat Steps 6 through 8, if the
stream or the stationing is not correct for an HMS junction. What happens there is no
stream node or junction for a location? The user will need to add a stream node/junction
at that location (Appendix F, Section F.3.2). Once the stream station has been entered
into the HMS Junction to Stream Mapper dialog box (Figure K.5), the user will need
to remove the stream node/junction from the schematic. This has to be done, because any
changes to the stream stationing will affect an HEC-ResSim model alternative.

10. When the HMS Junction to Stream Mapper dialog box (Figure K.10) is completed,
click Apply. The junction names that display in green, means that the user has entered
the stationing for that junction. Click OK, the HMS Junction to Stream Mapper dialog
box (Figure K.10) will close.

Figure K.10 HMS Junction to Stream Mapper Dialog Box - Completed

K.3 Reach to Stream Mapping

The HEC-HMS reach and junction graphical elements do not have coordinates (geographic
location information), and do not display on the HEC-WAT schematic correctly. For HEC-HMS
reach and junction graphical elements, HEC-WAT provides tools that correct the reach and
junction graphical elements display in the HEC-WAT schematic.
K-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

K.3.1 By Junctions
To correct the display of HMS junctions:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure K.1), from the Edit menu, point to HMS,
click Reach to Stream Mapping.

2. The HMS Reach to Stream Editor will open (Figure K.11). This editor is not from
HEC-HMS, but from HEC-WAT. Since the current version of HEC-HMS does not
recognize the coordinate system that HEC-WAT has for a study, this editor allows the
user to enter information that will give the HEC-HMS reach graphical element the correct
geographic location on the schematic.

Figure K.11 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab

3. An HEC-WAT simulation must be displayed in a map window on the HEC-WAT main

window (Figure K.1). The active simulation name is displayed in the Simulation box
(Figure K.11). For example, in Figure K.11, the HEC-WAT simulation is Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb1986.

4. The HMS model alternative associated with the active HEC-WAT simulation is
displayed in the Run list (Figure K.11). For example, in Figure K.11, the HMS model
alternative is (RUN)Feb_1986.

5. If the user has defined information about the HMS junctions from the HMS Junction to
Stream Mapper dialog box (Figure K.10), click the By Junctions tab and proceed to
Step 6. If the user has not entered HMS junction information, proceed to Section K.3.2.

6. Click Automatically Match (Figure K.11), a Validate Changes window (Figure K.12)
will open. This window is letting the user know that the information that will display in
the table (Figure K.13) should be reviewed for accuracy. Click OK, the Validate
Changes window will close, and the table on HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By
Junctions tab will display with junction information for each HMS reach (Figure K.13).
The reach names display in blue, because items have been modified.

K-7
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure K.12 Validate Changes Window

Figure K.13 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab – Automatically Match

7. From the Study Tree (Figure K.6), expand the Models node. Select HMS, from the
Content Pane (Figure K.6), double-click on the HMS model alternative (i.e.,
HMS:(RUN)Feb_1986) that has been selected in the HMS Junction to Stream Mapper
dialog box (Figure K.5). A map window will open (Figure K.7) that displays the selected
HMS model alternative.

8. Turning off some of the maps layers in the map window (Figure K.7) will help in
locating the stationing for the HMS junction graphic elements. From the Maps tab
(Figure K.8) of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure K.1), turn off all of the map layers
that are not need for locating the HMS junction graphic elements. When this is done, the
Map Window (Figure K.7) displays the HMS model alternative.
9. So, is the automatic match correct (Figure K.13), no, the user will need to make some
changes. Why is HEC-WAT having a hard time getting the correct matches? The HMS
junction names and reach names are not exactly identical. For example, in Figure K.13,
for the first reach – Ukiah-Talmage, the selected upstream junction is not correct, because
the upstream junction name Ukiah is not what that junction is named. From reviewing
the HMS basin model (Figure K.14), the user knows that the upstream junction for the
reach in question should be Ukiah Confluence. In the row associated with the reach,
from the Upstream Junction column (Figure K.15), from the list, select Ukiah-
Confluence. Repeat these steps for all of the rows in the table (Figure K.15).
K-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

Figure K.14 HMS Reach – Upstream and Downstream Junctions

Figure K.15 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab – Modifying

10. What if the user encounters a reach that has a junction that is not defined in the selected
HMS model alternative? For example, in Figure K.15, the AG Resort-Big Sulphur reach,
in the HMS model alternative there is not a defined downstream junction. Do not make
any changes to the reach in the HMS Reach to Stream Editor (Figure K.15) on the By
Junctions tab, the change will need to be made in the By Streams tab (Section K.3.2).

11. Once all of the modifications have been made click Apply (Figure K.15), if there are
issues with the mapping, an Invalid Junction Assignments windows will open. An
issue might be that the user has selected the same junction for the upstream and
downstream junctions for a reach. Click OK, the Invalid Junction Assignments
windows will open, and the user should correct the issues.

K-9
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

12. Now that identifying reaches by upstream and downstream junctions has been completed
(Figure K.16). Any further adjustments that need to be made for HMS reaches will be
done by streams, which is detailed in the following Section K.3.2.

Figure K.16 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Junctions Tab – Completed

K.3.2 By Streams
To edit the geographic location of HEC-HMS reach elements by stream:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure K.1), from the Edit menu, point to HMS,
click Reach To Stream Mapping.

2. The HMS Reach to Stream Editor will open (Figure K.17). This editor is not from
HEC-HMS, but from HEC-WAT. Since the current version of HEC-HMS does not
recognize the coordinate system that HEC-WAT has for a study, this editor allows the
user to enter information that will give the HEC-HMS reach element the correct
geographic location on the schematic.

K-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

Figure K.17 HMS Reach to Stream Editor – By Streams Tab

3. An HEC-WAT simulation must be displayed in a map window on the HEC-WAT main

window (Figure K.18). The active simulation name is displayed in the Simulation box
(Figure K.17). For example, in Figure K.17, the HEC-WAT simulation is Without Project
Conditions-RR_Feb1986. From the Maps tab (similar to Figure K.8), turn off all of the
appropriate map layers for the simulation map window. When this is done, the map
windows displays (Figure K.18) the HMS graphical elements for the HMS model
alternative and the HEC-WAT simulation. The user should review the map windows to
see if any HMS reaches are not displaying or are in the wrong location.

Figure K.18 HEC-WAT Main Window – Simulation Map Window

K-11
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

4. To assist in verifying the upstream and downstream junctions for a reach, from the HEC-
WAT main window (Figure K.18), from the Programs Toolbar, click , the HEC-HMS
main window will open (Figure K.19). From study tree, from the Basin Models folder
(Figure K.19), double click on the correct HMS basin model (i.e., Russian River 86). A
map window will display the HMS graphical elements of the selected HMS basin model
(Figure K.19). The user should take some time and familiarize themselves with the HMS
model alternative and reach and junction locations.

Figure K.19 HEC-HMS Main Window

5. Both the HEC-WAT and HEC-HMS map windows should be zoomed-in to the same
location. For the example given here, Figure K.18, the user has already provided
stationing for the HMS junctions and has mapped upstream and downstream junctions to
most of the HMS reaches. There are five HMS reaches that still need to be modified so
that the HMS reaches will display correctly on the HEC-WAT schematic.

6. After reviewing the map windows (Figures K.18 and K.19), from the HMS Reach to
Stream Editor (Figure K.17), from the table for a Reach (e.g., AG Resort-Big Sulpher),
from the Stream list (Figure K.17), select the correct stream (e.g., Big Sulfur Creek). By
viewing the HEC-WAT Map Window (Figure K.18), the user can determine the stream
name.

7. To determine the upstream station, compare the two map windows, the user should be
able to locate the upstream station. For example, in Figure K.20, the upstream station is
located at the end point of Big Sulfur Creek. From the HEC-WAT map window, select
(Stream Node Tool), right-click on the green circle, from the shortcut menu click Edit
Node, the Stream Node Editor will open (Figure K.21).

K-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

Figure K.20 Stream Junction Editor – Upstream and Downstream Stations

Figure K.21 Stream Node Editor

8. In the Station box (Figure K.21), the stream station for the selected upstream station is
displayed (i.e., 80625.84). From the HMS Reach to Stream Editor (Figure K.17), from
the UpstreamStation cell for the selected HMS reach, enter the stream station.

9. To determine the downstream station, the user should be able to compare the two map
windows. For example, in Figure K.20 (upper left corner), the downstream station is just
above the confluence of two streams. The user will need to create at stream node at that
location (Appendix F, Section F.3.2). Right-click on the green circle (Figure K.20, upper
left corner), from the shortcut menu click Edit Node, the Stream Node Editor will open
(Figure K.21).

10. From the Station box (Figure K.21), the stream station for the selected downstream
station is displayed (i.e., 2794.292). From the HMS Reach to Stream Editor (Figure
K.17), from the DownstreamStation cell for the selected HMS reach, enter the stream
station.

K-13
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

11. Once the stream station has been entered into the HMS Reach to Stream Editor (Figure
K.22), the user will need to remove the stream node/junction from the schematic. This
has to be done, because any changes to the stream station will affect an HEC-ResSim
model alternative.

Figure K.22 HMS Reach to Stream Editor - Completed

12. For this particular example, the user will need to perform Steps 6 through 10 for four
more reaches. Once all reaches have been provided the correct stationing, click Apply
(Figure K.21). When the HMS Reach to Stream Editor (Figure K.10) is complete,
click OK, the HMS Reach to Stream Editor (Figure K.10) will close.

K.4 Coordinate Information

HEC-HMS graphic elements could have problems displaying correctly if the HEC-HMS model
alternative is in a different coordinate system. To correct this issue, from the Edit menu, point to
HMS, click Coordinate Information, the Select HMS Projection dialog box will open (Figure
K. 23).

Figure K.23 Select HMS Projection Dialog Box

K-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix K – Model Integration Tools

1. From the Select HMS Projection Dialog Box (Figure K.23), click Load from file (lower
left corner); an Open browser (Figure K.24) will open. Browse to where the map layer
containing the correct projection is stored. Click Open, the Select HMS Projection
dialog box will open (FigureK.25). The Select HMS Projection dialog box contains
information about the projected coordinate system (Figure K.25). Click OK, the Select
HMS Projection dialog box will close (Figure K.25).

Figure K.24 Open Browser

Figure K.25 Select HMS Projection Dialog Box

2. The projection of the HMS model alternative is now set to the correct coordinate system.
K-15
Appendix K – Model Integration Tools HEC-WAT User's Manual

K-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Appendix L
Editing Model Data
L.1 Overview
HEC-WAT provides a framework that streamlines and integrates a study using software
applications commonly used within USACE. The software applications are directly accessible
from within HEC-WAT, which allows the user to edit individual model alternative data directly
from the individual software applications. This flexibility is accomplished through the use of a
"plug-in" (HEC-WAT Technical Reference Manual; not available for Version 1.0 release) that
has been built for each piece of software. The plug-in allows HEC-WAT and the individual
software applications to communicate with minimal specific code being needed by HEC-WAT
or the individual software application.

From HEC-WAT the user has several options on editing model data. The user can open the user
interface of the individual software applications that edit the model data by clicking the
appropriate software button from the Programs Toolbar (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1) of the HEC-
WAT main window (Figure L.1). Also from the HEC-WAT main window, from the Study
Tree, on the Study Pane (Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2), right-click on a simulation, from the
shortcut menu, point to Edit Model, and then click on the model alternative to edit.

Figure L.1 HEC-WAT Main Window

L-1
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

From the Study Tree, from the Simulations folder, select a simulation, in the Content Pane
(Figure L.1), under Models, the model alternatives for the selected simulation will display.
Right-click on a model alternative, from the shortcut menu, click Edit Model, the user can then
edit the select model alternative. Finally, from the HEC-WAT main window (Figure L.1) from
the Edit menu, from the software application item, the user can access the main window of the
selected software applications or individual editors from the software application. For example,
from the Edit menu, point to RAS, click Open RAS, and the HEC-RAS main window will open.

This appendix will focus on accessing specific editors from the available software applications,
from within HEC-WAT. These editors can be accessed interactively from the schematic
(Section L.2) or from the HEC-WAT main window (Section L.3).

L.2 Schematic
From the active simulation map window you can access software application specific editors
from the model elements that are available on a map window. When hovering over a model
element, a tooltip will appear (Figure L.2) which lists what model information is available for
that particular model element. For example, in Figure L.2 at the junction there is possible
information from ResSim, also, there is a cross section and a reach element in the area that is
recognized by ResSim, HMS, and RAS. Also, there is structures and an impact area near the
junction that are recognized by FIA.

Figure L.2 ToolTip Information from Schematic (Simulation Map Window)

To access model specific editors, right-click on a model element, a shortcut menu (Figure L.3)
will appear which provides access to the available software application editors. HEC-WAT
searches for all available model elements in the area that the user has right-clicked on, so the
shortcut menu will usually display all the model elements that were found in that area. For
example, in Figure L.3, right-clicking at a cross section, HEC-WAT has found four model
elements in the area of that cross section. To access the editor specific for the cross section, from
the shortcut menu, point to Cross Section, click Edit Properties, the Cross Section Data
Editor from RAS will open.

L-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Figure L.3 Model Element Shortcut Menus

The following sections will cover the available models editors for the default HEC-WAT
software applications.

L.2.1 HMS
Whether right-clicking on a subbasin element, junction element, reach element, reservoir
element, or sink element, from the schematic there are various HMS model editors that can be
accessed. The following section describes those editors.

Subbasin Element
To edit HMS model data at a subbasin:

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on an HMS subbasin model element ( )
on the schematic, a shortcut menu will display (Figure L.4). From the shortcut menu,
point to Subbasin, click Edit Properties.

Figure L.4 Subbasin Element Shortcut Menu

2. The HMS editor for subbasins will open (Figure L.5). This editor allows the user to
change parameters that are specific to an HMS subbasin. For further detail on this editor,
reference the HEC-HMS User's Manual.

3. To close the HMS editor for subbasins (Figure L.5) click .

Routing Reach Element

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on an HMS routing reach model element
(blue line) on the schematic, a shortcut menu will display (Figure L.6). From the shortcut
menu, point to Reach, since there is more than reach element available (i.e., HMS,
ResSim, RAS), point to Edit Properties, click on the available HMS model alternative
(e.g., (RUN)Feb_1986-Chalk Hill-Digger Bend).
L-3
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.5 HEC-HMS Editor - Subbasin

Figure L.6 Routing Reach Element Shortcut Menu

2. The HMS editor for a routing reach will open (Figure L.7). This editor allows the user to
change parameters that are specific to an HMS routing reach. For further detail on this
editor, reference the HEC-HMS User's Manual.

3. To close the HMS editor for routing reaches (Figure L.7) click .

Junction Element
1. From the simulation map window, right-click on an HMS junction model element on the
schematic (red circle), a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.8). From the shortcut menu
click Edit Properties.

L-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Figure L.7 HEC-HMS Editor – Routing Reach

Figure L.8 Junction Element Shortcut Menu

2. The HMS editor for a junction will open (Figure L.9). This editor allows the user to
change parameters that are specific to an HMS junction. For further detail on this editor,
reference the HEC-HMS User's Manual.

Figure L.9 HEC-HMS Editor - Junction

4. To close the HMS editor for junctions (Figure L.9) click .

Reservoir Element
1. From the simulation map window, right-click on an HMS reservoir model element on the
schematic ( ), a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.10). From the shortcut menu click
Edit Properties.

L-5
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.10 Reservoir Element Shortcut Menu

2. The HMS editor for a junction will open (Figure L.11). This editor allows the user to
change parameters that are specific to an HMS reservoir. For further detail on this editor,
reference the HEC-HMS User's Manual.

3. To close the HMS editor for reservoirs (Figure L.11) click .

Figure L.11 HEC-HMS Editor - Reservoir

L.2.2 ResSim
Whether right-clicking on a reservoir element, junction element, or reach element, from the
schematic there are various HEC-ResSim model editors that are accessible. The following
section describes those editors.

Reservoir Element
To edit ResSim model data at a reservoir:

L-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on a reservoir model element (cyan
triangle) on the schematic, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.12). From the shortcut
menu, point to Reservoir, click Edit Properties.

Figure L.12 Reservoir Element Shortcut Menu

2. The ResSim Reservoir Editor will open (Figure L.13). This editor allows the user to
change physical data requirements for the reservoir, change the operation sets for a
reservoir, and specify observed data if needed. For further detail on this editor, reference
the ResSim User's Manual.

Figure L.13 HEC-ResSim – Reservoir Editor

3. Click OK, the ResSim Reservoir Editor (Figure L.13) will close.

Junction Element
To edit ResSim model data at a junction:

L-7
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on a junction model element (red circle) on
the schematic, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.14). From the shortcut menu, point
to Junction, click Edit Properties.

Figure L.14 Junction Element Shortcut Menu

2. The ResSim Junction Editor will open (Figure L.15). This editor allows the user to
change information about a ResSim junction, add local flow and a rating curve, and if
needed add information about observed data. For further detail on this editor, reference
the HEC-ResSim User's Manual.

Figure L.15 HEC-ResSim – Junction Editor

3. Click OK, the ResSim Junction Editor (Figure L.15) will close.

Routing Reach Element

To edit ResSim model data at a routing reach:

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on a routing reach model element (blue
line) on the schematic, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.16). From the shortcut
menu, point to Reach, click Edit Properties.

2. The ResSim Reach Editor will open (Figure L.17). This editor allows the user to change
information about a ResSim reach, add/change routing information, edit information
about losses for the reach, and if needed add information about observed data. For
further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-ResSim User's Manual.

L-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Figure L.16 Reach Element Shortcut Menu

Figure L.17 HEC-ResSim – Reach Editor

3. Click OK, the ResSim Reach Editor (Figure L.17) will close.

L.2.3 HEC-RAS – Cross Section

To edit RAS model data at a cross section:

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on a cross section model element (green
line) on the schematic, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.18). From the shortcut
menu, point to Cross Section, click Edit Properties.

Figure L.18 Cross Section Element Shortcut Menu

2. The RAS Cross Section Data Editor will open (Figure L.19). This editor allows the
user to change information about a RAS cross section, add/change Manning's n values,
edit cross section coordinates, and edit other information regarding a cross section. For
further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-RAS User's Manual.

L-9
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

3. From the Exit menu, click Exit Cross Section Editor, the Cross Section Data Editor
(Figure L.19) will close.

Figure L.19 HEC-RAS – Cross Section Editor

L.2.4 FIA
Whether right-clicking on a reservoir element or a structure element, from the schematic there
are various HEC-FIA model editors that are accessible. The following section describes those
editors.

Impact Area
To edit FIA model data at an impact area:

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on an impact area model element (green
polygon) on the schematic, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.20). From the shortcut
menu click Edit Properties.

Figure L.20 Impact Area Element Shortcut Menu

2. The FIA Impact Area Editor will open (Figure L.21). This editor allows the user to
change information about impact area description, life loss parameters, population
adjustment, and the adjusted price index. For further detail on this editor, reference the
HEC-FIA User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Impact Area Editor (Figure L.21) will close.

L-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Structure
To edit FIA model data at a structure:

Figure L.21 HEC-FIA – Impact Area Editor

1. From the simulation map window, right-click on a structure model element (blue square)
on the schematic, a shortcut menu will appear (Figure L.22). From the shortcut menu
click Edit Properties.

Figure L.22 Structure Element Shortcut Menu

2. The FIA Structure Editor will open (Figure L.23). This editor allows the user to change
information about a structure's location, occupancy type data, structure value, content
value, first floor elevation, foundation height, ground elevation, and lethality zone
parameter data. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-FIA User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Structure Editor (Figure L.23) will close.

L-11
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.23 HEC-FIA – Structure Editor

L.3 Edit Menu

From the menu bar of the main HEC-WAT window, click Edit (Figure L.24), from this menu
the user can access various editors or parts of a software application's interface that are specific
to the software applications included in the program order for a study. For example, in Figure
L.24, point to HMS, the available commands allow the user to interact with the HEC-HMS
software application and access parts of the HEC-HMS interface like the Basin Model tab. The
following sections provide an overview of the available editors. For more detail you will need to
visit the user's manuals associated with each piece of software.

Figure L.24 Edit Menu – HMS

L-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

L.3.1 HEC-HMS
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure L.1), from the Edit menu, point to HMS (Figure
L.24), click Open HMS. The HEC-HMS software application will open and the HEC-HMS
main window will display (Figure L.25). The user can modify existing HEC-HMS models or
create new HEC-HMS model components, once the user is finished and the model has been
saved, the HEC-HMS model information is stored in the HEC-WAT study directory, under the
hms folder. The rest of this section provides an overview of the HEC-HMS interface that is
directly available from the HEC-WAT framework.

Figure L.25 HEC-HMS Main Window – Basin Model Tab

Basin Model
To edit HMS model data for a basin:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.24), point to HMS, click
Basin Model.

2. The HEC-HMS main window will open with the Basin Model tab displayed (Figure
L.25). This tab allows the user to change parameters that are specific to an HMS basin.
For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-HMS User's Manual.

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the HEC-HMS main window will close (Figure L.25).

L-13
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Meteorologic Model
To edit the HMS meteorologic model for a study:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.25), point to HMS,
click Meteorologic Model.

2. The HEC-HMS main window will open with the Meteorology Model tab displayed
(Figure L.26). This tab allows the user to edit parameters that have been defined for the
meteorologic model. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-HMS User's
Manual.

Figure L.26 HEC-HMS Main Window – Meteorology Model Tab

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the HEC-HMS main window will close (Figure L.26).

Simulation Run
To edit the defined parameters for an HMS simulation:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.24), point to HMS, click
Simulation Run.

L-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

2. The HEC-HMS main window will open with the Compute tab displayed (Figure L.27).
This tab allows the user to edit parameters that have been defined for an HMS simulation
run. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-HMS User's Manual.

Figure L.27 HEC-HMS Main Window – Basin Model Tab – Simulation Runs

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the HEC-HMS main window will close (Figure L.26).

L.3.2 HEC-ResSim
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure L.1), from the Edit menu, point to ResSim (Figure
L.28), click Open ResSim. The HEC-ResSim software application will execute and the HEC-
ResSim main window will display (Figure L.29). The user can modify existing HEC-ResSim
model components or create new HEC-ResSim model components, once the user is finished and
data has been saved, the HEC-ResSim model information is stored in the HEC-WAT study
directory, under the rss folder. The rest of this section provides an overview of the HEC-ResSim
editors that are directly available from the HEC-WAT framework.

Figure L.28 Edit Menu – ResSim

L-15
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.29 HEC-ResSim Main Window

Edit Reservoirs
To edit HEC-ResSim model data at a reservoir:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim,
click Edit Reservoirs.

2. The HEC-ResSim Reservoir Editor will open (Figure L.13). This editor allows the user
to change physical data requirements for the reservoir, change the operation sets for a
reservoir, and specify observed data if needed. For further detail on this editor, reference
the HEC-ResSim User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the HEC-ResSim Reservoir Editor (Figure L.13) will close.

Edit Reaches
To edit HEC-ResSim model data at a reach:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim,
click Edit Reaches.

2. The HEC-ResSim Reach Editor will open (Figure L.17). This editor allows the user to
change information about a ResSim reach, add/change routing information, edit

L-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

information about losses for the reach, and if needed add information about observed
data. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-ResSim User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the Reach Editor (Figure L.17) will close.

Edit Junctions
To edit HEC-ResSim model data at a junction:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim,
click Edit Junctions.

2. The HEC-ResSim Junction Editor will open (Figure L.15). This editor allows the user
to change information about a ResSim junction, add local flow and a rating curve, and if
needed add information about observed data. For further detail on this editor, reference
the HEC-ResSim User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the Diversion Editor (Figure L.15) will close.

Edit Diversions
To edit HEC-ResSim model data at a diversion:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim,
click Edit Diversions.

2. The HEC-ResSim Diversion Editor will open (Figure L.30). This editor allows the user
to change information about a ResSim diversion, for further details on this editor,
reference the HEC-ResSim User's Manual.

Figure L.30 HEC-ResSim – Diversion Editor

3. Click OK, the Diversion Editor (Figure L.30) will close.

L-17
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Edit State Variables

To edit HEC-ResSim state variables:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim,
click Edit State Variables.

2. The HEC-ResSim State Variable Editor will open (Figure L.31). This editor allows the
user to modify information about a state variable that has been created for the HEC-
ResSim model. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-ResSim User's
Manual.

Figure L.31 HEC-ResSim – State Variable Editor

3. Click OK, the State Variable Editor (Figure L.31) will close.

L-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Edit Alternatives
To edit HEC-ResSim alternatives:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim,
click Edit Alternatives.

2. The ResSim Alternative Editor will open (Figure L.32). This editor allows the user to
modify the run control information for the selected HEC-ResSim model alternative;
adjust data for operations, lookback, time-series, and observed data; and, various other
alternative based options. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-ResSim
User's Manual.

Figure L.32 HEC-ResSim – Alternative Editor

3. From the Alternative menu, click Close, the ResSim Alternative Editor (Figure L.32)
will close.

Edit Run
From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.28), point to ResSim, click
Edit Run. The ResSim Editor will open (Figure L.33). This editor provides the user with a
convenient way to access all HEC-ResSim editors for an HEC-ResSim model alternative. For
further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-ResSim User's Manual. Click OK, the ResSim
Editor (Figure L.33) will close.

L-19
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.33 HEC-ResSim - ResSim Editor

ResSim Editor - Reservoir Systems

From the Reservoir System dialog box (Figure L.34), HEC-ResSim allows the user to define the
reservoirs in a study area as a system of how the reservoirs work and operate together. Further
details of this capability are available in the HEC-ResSim User's manual.

Figure L.34 HEC-ResSim – Reservoir System Dialog Box

ResSim Editor - Overrides

The HEC-ResSim Overrides interface (Figure L.33) is not available in HEC-WAT Version 1.0.
This capability will be available in the next HEC-WAT version. For further details on this
capability, refer to the HEC-ResSim User's manual.

L-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

L.3.3 HEC-RAS
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure L.1), from the Edit menu, point to RAS (Figure
L.35), click Open RAS. The HEC-RAS software application will open and the HEC-RAS main
window will display (Figure L.36). The user can modify existing HEC-RAS model components
or create new HEC-RAS model components, once the user is finished and data has been saved,
the HEC-RAS model information is stored in the HEC-WAT study directory, under the ras
folder. The rest of this section provides an overview of the HEC-RAS editors that are directly
available from the HEC-WAT framework.

Figure L.35 Edit Menu – RAS

Figure L.36 HEC-RAS Main Window

Geometric Data
To edit geometric data associated with a RAS model alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS,
click Geometric Data.

2. The RAS Geometric Data Editor will open (Figure L.37). This editor allows the user to
edit parameters that have been defined for the geometric data for a RAS model
alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-RAS User's Manual.

3. From the File menu, click Exit Geometry Data Editor, the RAS Geometric Data
Editor (Figure L.37) will close.

L-21
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Steady Flow Data

To edit steady flow data associated with a RAS steady flow model alternative:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS, click
Steady Flow Data.

Figure L.37 HEC-RAS – Geometric Data Editor

2. The RAS Steady Flow Data Editor will open (Figure L.38). This editor allows the user
to edit boundary conditions that have been defined for the steady flow data for a RAS
model alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-RAS User's
Manual.

Figure L.38 HEC-RAS –Steady Flow Data Editor

L-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

3. From the File menu, click Exit Flow Data Editor, the RAS Steady Flow Data Editor
(Figure L.38) will close.

Quasi-Unsteady Flow Data

To edit quasi-unsteady flow data associated with a RAS unsteady flow model alternative:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS, click
Quasi-Unsteady Flow Data.

2. The RAS Quasi Unsteady Flow Editor will open (Figure L.39). This editor allows the
user to edit boundary conditions that have been defined for the quasi-unsteady flow data
for a RAS unsteady flow model alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the
HEC-RAS User's Manual.

Figure L.39 HEC-RAS – Quasi Unsteady Flow Editor

3. To close the RAS Quasi Unsteady Flow Editor (Figure L.39) click .

Unsteady Flow Data

To edit unsteady flow data associated with a RAS unsteady flow model alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS,
click Unsteady Flow Data.

2. The RAS Unsteady Flow Editor will open (Figure L.40). This editor allows the user to
edit boundary and initial conditions that have been defined for the unsteady flow data for
a RAS unsteady flow model alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the
HEC-RAS User's Manual.

L-23
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.40 HEC-RAS –Unsteady Flow Data Editor

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the RAS Unsteady Flow Editor (Figure L.40) will close.

Sediment Data
To edit sediment data associated with a RAS model alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS,
click Sediment Data.

2. The HEC-RAS Sediment Data Editor will open (see Figure L.41). This editor allows
you to edit parameters and boundary conditions that have been defined for the sediment
data for a RAS model alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-
RAS User's Manual.

Figure L.41 HEC-RAS –Sediment Data Editor

L-24
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the RAS Sediment Data Editor (Figure L.41) will close.

Water Quality Data

To edit water quality data associated with a RAS model alternative:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS, click
Water Quality Data.

2. The RAS Water Quality Data Editor will open (Figure L.42). This editor allows you to
edit parameters that have been defined for the water quality data for a RAS model
alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-RAS User's Manual.

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the RAS Water Quality Data Editor (Figure L.42) will
close.

Figure L.42 HEC-RAS – Water Quality Data Editor

Plan Data
To edit plan data associated with a RAS model alternative:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS, click
Plan Data.

2. The RAS Unsteady Flow Analysis Editor will open (Figure L.43). This editor allows
the user to edit information that has been defined for the plan data for a RAS model
alternative. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-RAS User's Manual.

L-25
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.43 HEC-RAS – Unsteady Flow Analysis Editor

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the RAS Unsteady Flow Editor (Figure L.43) will close.

RAS Mapper
HEC-RAS has the capability to perform inundation mapping of water surface profile results
directly from HEC-RAS. RAS Mapper is a tool within the HEC-RAS that creates inundation
mapping by using the HEC-RAS geometry data and computed water surface profiles from an
HEC-RAS compute. To access RAS Mapper:

1. From the WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.35), point to RAS, click
RAS Mapper.

2. The RAS Mapper dialog box will open (Figure L.44). From this dialog box the user can
setup the necessary information in RAS Mapper to create inundation maps, velocity
maps, and depth grids. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-RAS User's
Manual.

3. From the File menu, click Exit, the RAS Mapper dialog box will close (Figure L.44).

L-26
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Figure L.44 HEC-RAS – RAS Mapper Dialog Box

L.3.4 FIA
From the HEC-WAT main window (Figure L.1), from the Edit menu, point to FIA (Figure
L.45), click Open FIA. The HEC-FIA software application will execute and the HEC-FIA main
window will display (Figure L.46). The user can modify existing HEC-FIA components model
or create new HEC-FIA model components, once the user is finished and data has been saved,
the HEC-FIA model information is stored in the HEC-WAT study directory, under the fia folder.
The rest of this section provides an overview of the HEC-FIA editors that are directly available
from the HEC-WAT framework.

Figure L.45 Edit Menu – FIA

L-27
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure L.46 HEC-FIA Main Window

Global Data Editor

To edit the global data associated with an HEC-FIA model alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.45), point to FIA,
click Global Data.

2. The HEC-FIA Global Data Editor will open (Figure L.47). This editor allows the user
to edit the global data that has been defined for an FIA model alternative. For further
detail on this editor, reference the HEC-FIA User's Manual.

Figure L.47 HEC-FIA – Global Data Editor

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Global Data Editor (Figure L.46) will close.

L-28
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Impact Area Editor

To edit impact area data associated with an HEC-FIA model alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.45), point to FIA,
click Impact Areas.

2. The HEC-FIA Impact Area Editor will open (Figure L.21). This editor allows the user
to change information about impact area description, life loss parameters, population
adjustment, and the adjusted price index. For further detail on this editor, reference the
HEC-FIA User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Impact Area Editor (Figure L.21) will close.

Structure Editor
To edit data associated with a structure:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.45), point to FIA,
click Structure Form Editor.

2. The HEC-FIA Structure Form Editor will open (Figure L.48). This editor allows the
user to edit individual structures that are part of the FIA model alternative. For further
detail on this editor, reference the HEC-FIA User's Manual.

Figure L.48 HEC-FIA – Structure Form Editor

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Structure Form Editor will close (Figure L.48).

L-29
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Critical Infrastructure
To edit data associated with the HEC-FIA critical infrastructure option:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.45), point to FIA,
click Critical Infrastructure.

2. The HEC-FIA Critical Infrastructure dialog box (Figure L.49). This editor allows the
user to edit information related to the critical infrastructure option of HEC-FIA. For
further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-FIA User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Critical Infrastructure dialog box will close (Figure L.49).

Figure L.49 HEC-FIA – Critical Infrastructure Dialog Box

Warning Issuance Scenarios

To edit data associated with the HEC-FIA warning issuance scenario option:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.45), point to FIA,
click Warning Issuance Scenarios.

2. The HEC-FIA Warning Issuance Scenarios dialog box (Figure L.50). This editor
allows the user to edit information related to the warning issuance scenario option of
HEC-FIA. For further detail on this editor, reference the HEC-FIA User's Manual.

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Warning Issuance Scenarios dialog box will close (Figure
L.50).

L-30
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix L – Editing Model Data

Figure L.50 HEC-FIA – Warning Issuance Scenarios Dialog Box

Alternative Editor
To edit the setup options associated with an HEC-FIA alternative:

1. From the HEC-WAT main window, from the Edit menu (Figure L.45), point to FIA,
click Alternative.

2. The HEC-FIA Alternative Editor (Figure L.51). This editor allows the user to edit the
setup options associated with an HEC-FIA alternative. For further detail on this editor,
reference the HEC-FIA User's Manual.

Figure L.51 HEC-FIA – Alternative Editor

3. Click OK, the HEC-FIA Alternative Editor will close (Figure L.51).

L-31
Appendix L – Editing Model Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

L.4 Study Tree and Content Pane

From either the Study Tree or Content Pane of the HEC-WAT main window (Figure L.1), with
an HEC-WAT simulation selected, the user can also edit model alternatives. From the Study
Tree, from the Simulations folder, right-click on a simulation, from the shortcut menu (Figure
L.52), point to Edit Model, click on a model alternative.

Figure L.52 Study Tree - Simulation Shortcut Menu – Edit Model

When selecting an HEC-HMS or an HEC-RAS model alternative, the user will get the respective
software application's main window (Figures L.25 and L.36). However, when selecting an HEC-
ResSim model alternative, the ResSim Editor will open (Figure L.33), and when selecting an
HEC-FIA model alternative, the Alternative Editor will open (Figure L.51).

From the Content Pane, under the models folder, right click on a model alternative. From the
shortcut menu, click Edit Model. When selecting an HEC-HMS or an HEC-RAS model
alternative, the user will get the respective software application's main window (Figures L.25 and
L.36). However, when selecting an HEC-ResSim model alternative, the ResSim Editor will
open (Figure L.33), and when selecting an HEC-FIA model alternative, the Alternative Editor
will open (Figure L.51).

L-32
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Appendix M

Plots
Plots offer an array of information that will assist a user when reviewing results in HEC-WAT.
Other software applications (i.e., HEC-HMS) have their own plotting capabilities, which were
presented in Appendix L. HEC-WAT does have data displayed graphically, and the plotting
capabilities are based on the plotting capability available in HEC-DSSVue. This appendix
covers some of the capabilities of plots within HEC-WAT. For further details, review the HEC-
DSSVue User's Manual.

M.1 Plot Window

The Plot window provides tools that facilitate the viewing of results. The main window and the
different components for the Plot window are illustrated in Figure M.1. The Title Bar contains
the name of the plot type (i.e., Frequency Viewer, Hydrographs, etc.).

Figure M.1 Plot Window

M.2 Menu Bar

Following is an overview of the Menu Bar (Figure M.1) for the Plot window. The commands
available from the menus will facilitate the viewing and customizing of plots.

M-1
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

File From this menu the user can view the plotted data in a tabular format; save the plot
as a graphics file; save a template; use a template; save user selected specifications;
copy the plot to the clipboard, and print the plot. Available commands are:
Tabulate, Save As, Save Template, Apply Template, Save Specifications, Print,
Page Setup, Print Preview, Print Multiple, and Close.

Edit From this menu the user can customize the plot. Available commands are: Plot
Properties, Configure Plot Layout, Default Line Styles, and Default Plot
Properties.

View From this menu the user can have the plot window always on top of the desktop;
choose to use line styles; zoom out; placement of the legend; and, hide the legend.
Available commands are: Always On Top, Use Line Styles, Zoom to all, Legend
Placement, and Hide Legend.

M.3 Tools
The Tools appear in a toolbar on the left side of the Plot window (Figure M.1). The tools
change the appearance of the mouse, as well as the functionality of the mouse:

Pointer/Selector Tool

With the Pointer/Selector Tool, the user can access shortcut menus that allow customization of
plots using the plot editing tools.

Zoom Tool

The Zoom Tool allows the user to view data closely at a specific time. To zoom in, hold the
mouse button down and outline the area the user wants to enlarge. To zoom out, click the right
mouse button (right-click). The zoom out is done by a factor of two and positions the clicked
location at the center of the display area.

M.4 Customizing Plots – Plot Window

From a Plot window there are several areas (Figure M.1) that allow the user to configure default
properties for all plots as well as customize individual plots. Figure M.1 shows the plot areas
that can be configured. Some configuration items being discussed in this section are available
from the Edit menu, which will be discussed in Section M.5.

Title Area Modify/create the title to individual plots.

Marker Add markers on the X- and Y-axes and customize the appearance of these markers.

Curve Customize the appearance of curves (line or point), add labels, specify symbols to
indicate quality or missing values; hide or remove a curve, and create, hide or
remove callouts.

M-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Spacer Specify the distance between viewports, between a viewport and the legend, and the
width of side margins.

Viewport Customize the border around the viewport, the background color and pattern, and
the appearance of gridlines. The user can also specify the number, size, and
content of viewports.

Axis Specify either a linear or log axis type; specify the axis scale; customize tic marks;
and, customize the axis labels.

Legend Customize the legend by adding a title and specifying whether the legend appears
below or to the right of the plot.

M.4.1 Shortcut Menus

Using the Pointer/Selector tool (Section M.3), right-click on an element or on an area of a plot
window (Figure M.1) where enhancing/modify the plot might need to occur. A shortcut menu
will appear (Figure M.2), with the possible commands:

Figure M.2 Plot Window – Element/Area Shortcut Menu Example

Title, Axis Label, etc. informational; name of element/area of a plot window

Edit Properties Displays the property editor for the select element/area of a plot window.

M.4.2 Plot - Title

To create/modify a title for a plot:

1. Right-click on a plot window where the title is displayed or would be displayed (Figure
M.2). From the shortcut menu, click Edit Properties.

2. The Edit Title Properties dialog box will open (Figure M.3).

M-3
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure M.3 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box

3. To have the title of the plot display in the plot window, select Show Plot Title (Figure
M3.), click Apply. The title from the Text box (Figure M.3) will display.

4. From the Text box (Figure M.3), enter the title for the plot, click Apply. The title from
the Text box (Figure M.3) will display.

5. From the Font box (Figure M.4), from the Font list, the user can select a font type for the
plot. The user can choose to have the text, displayed bolded or italicized by select either
Bold or Italic (Figure M.4) from the Font box. From the Color list (Figure M.4) the user
can have the title display in a selected color. From the Size list (Figure M.4), the user can
set the size of font for the plot. The Use Font Scaling option (Figure M.4) allows for the
font size to adjust when the plot window is being resized. The scaling of the font is set in
the Min Size list and the Max Size list.

Figure M.4 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box – Font Box

6. From the Alignment list (Figure M.3) the user can center; right justify; or, left justify the
title on the plot window.

7. The Sample box (Figure M.3) provides a preview of the plot title.
M-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

8. From the Border box (Figure M.5), the user has the option to draw a border around the
title. Click Draw Border (Figure M.5), the user can select the color, style, and weight of
the border, click Apply. A border as defined will display around the title.

Figure M.5 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box – Border Box

9. From the Background box (Figure M.6), the user has the option to incorporate a
background as part of the title. Click Draw Background (Figure M.6), the user can
select the color, pattern, and set the transparency of the background, click Apply. The
title area of the plot will display with a background as defined.

Figure M.6 Edit Title Properties Dialog Box – Background Box

M.4.3 Plot - Markers

Create a Marker
To create a marker line for a plot:

1. Right-click on a plot window where a marker needs to be added (Figure M.7). From the
shortcut menu, point to Add Marker (Figure M.7), click on which axis the marker line
should be placed – On X-Axis or On Y-Axis.

2. An Input message window will open (Figure M.8), asking the user if the value is correct.
This value defaults to the location that the user pointed to on the plot area, for either the
X-axis or Y-axis. The user can change the value, but that means the maker line will be
drawn somewhere else. Click OK, the Input message window will close (Figure M.8)
and the marker line will display on the plot.

To create a marker point for a plot:

1. Right-click on a plot window where a marker needs to be added (Figure M.7). From the
shortcut menu, click to Add Marker Point (Figure M.7).

M-5
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure M.7 Plot – Viewport Shortcut Menu

Figure M.8 Input Message Window

2. A Point Location dialog box will open (Figure M.9), displaying the X-axis value and the
Y-axis value of where the user pointed to on the plot. The user can changes the values,
but that means the marker point will be drawn somewhere else. Click OK, the Point
Location dialog box will close (Figure M.9) and the marker point will display on the
plot.

Figure M.9 Point Location Dialog Box

3. Click Apply, either the marker line or point will display on the plot.

Edit a Marker
Edit a marker line:

M-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

1. Right-click on a marker line from a plot window (Figure M.10). From the shortcut menu,
click Edit Properties (Figure M.10), the Edit Marker Line Properties dialog box will
open (Figure M.11).

Figure M.10 Plot – Marker Line Shortcut Menu

Figure M.11 Edit Marker Line Plot Dialog Box

2. The Marker Value (Figure M.11) of the marker line is displayed.

3. From the Line box (Figure M.11), Draw Line should be selected so that the marker line
will be displayed on the plot (Figure M.10). The user can select the color, style, and
weight of the marker line from the Line box (Figure M.11). Also, the marker line can
have a fill associated with it. The user can choose to have the fill Below (to left of the
marker line) or Above (to the right of the marker line). The Sample box (Figure M.11)
will give the user a preview of the modifications to the marker line.

M-7
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

4. From the Label box (Figure M.11), the user can choose to display a label for the marker
by selecting Draw Label (Figure M.11). The user can provide a label for the marker, by
entering information in the Text box (Figure M.11). From the Font box (Figure M.4),
from the Font list, the user can select a font type for the plot. From the Color list (Figure
M.4) the user can have the label for the marker display in a selected color. The user can
choose to have the text, displayed bolded or italicized by select either Bold or Italic
(Figure M.4) from the Font box. From the Size list (Figure M.4), the user can set the size
of font for the plot. The Use Font Scaling option (Figure M.4) allows for the font size to
adjust when the plot window is being resized. The scaling of the font is set in the Min
Size list and the Max Size list.

5. From the Alignment list (Figure M.11) the user can center; right justify; or, left justify
the marker label on the plot window.

6. From the Position list (Figure M.11) the user can position the label Above, Below or
Center on the marker.

Edit a marker point:

1. Right-click on a marker point from a plot window (Figure M.12). From the shortcut
menu, click Edit Properties (Figure M.10), the Edit Marker Line Properties dialog
box will open (Figure M.13).

Figure M.12 Plot – Marker Point Shortcut Menu

2. The Location box (Figure M.13) displays the X- and Y-values of the marker point.

3. From the Point box (Figure M.13), the user can select the style, line color, fill color, and
the size of the marker point.

M-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

4. The Label box, Alignment list, and the Position list (Figure M.13) are same as Items 4
through 6 for a marker line.

Figure M.13 Edit Marker Line Plot Dialog Box – Marker Point

Delete a Marker
To delete a marker line or point, right-click on a marker line (Figure M.10) or point (Figure
M.12) from the plot window. From either shortcut menu, click Delete, the selected marker line
or point will be deleted from the plot window.

M.4.4 Plot – Curve

Customize Curves
To customize curves on a plot:

1. Right-click on a curve in a plot window (Figure M.14), from the shortcut menu, click
Edit Properties (Figure M.14), the curve name Properties dialog box will open (Figure
M.15). In Figure M.14, there are three curves displayed, and each of those curves has a
shortcut menu, which displays the label (label is generated from the DSS record
associated with the curve) associated with the curve.

2. For the selected curve to display on the plot window, click Draw Curve (Figure M.15);
and for the selected curve to appear in the legend of the plot window, click Show in
Legend (Figure M.15). Click Remove Curve (Figure M.15), if the user wishes to have
the selected curve no longer display in the plot window (option not functional in HEC-
WAT Version 1.0).

M-9
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure M.14 Plot – Curve Shortcut Menu

Figure M.15 curve name Properties Dialog Box

3. The curve name Properties dialog box (Figure M.15) allows the user to customize the
style, label, and the legend item associated with the selected curve. The user can also add
quality symbols to the selected curve. The following section discuss each of the tabs
associated with the curve name Properties dialog box (Figure M.15).

Style Tab
a. From the Line box (Figure M.15), if the user wishes to the curve to be a line, select
Draw Line (Figure M.15), the curve will be displayed on the plot as a line. The user
can select the color, style, and weight of the line from the Line box (Figure M.15).
Also, the line can have a fill, the user can choose to have the fill Below or Above the
M-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

line (Figure M.15). The Type of the line can be Stepped or Linear (Figure M.15)
will give the user a preview of the modifications to the marker line. If there are
missing values, to create a "smoother curve", click Interpolate for Missing Values
(Figure M.15). Click Apply, the line displayed is now a smoother curve.

b. From the Point box (Figure M.16), if the user wishes to the curve to be a series of
points, select Draw Point (Figure M.16), the curve will be displayed on the plot as a
series of points. The user can select the style of the point, line color of the point, fill
color of the point, and the size of the point from the Point box (Figure M.16). By
default a point is drawn for each data point on the curve (Draw Symbols on Data
Points), the user can Skip data points or set an Offset for the data points (Figure
M.16). If the user wants to display a "smoother curve of points" select Automatic
Symbol Drawing (Figure M.16). The Sample box (Figure M.16) provides the user
with a preview of the defined point.

Figure M.16 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Style Tab – Point Box

c. The Missing Value Symbols box (Figure M.17) allows the user to display any
missing values for the curve. Click Draw Missing Value Symbols (Figure M.17), if
there is any data related to the selected curve that is marked missing, the defined
symbol will display on the plot. The user can select the style, line color, fill color, and
the size of the missing value symbol from the Missing Value Symbols box (Figure
M.17).

Figure M.17 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Style Tab – Missing Value Symbols Box

M-11
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Label Tab
From the Label tab (Figure M.15), if the user wishes to a label for the curve to display
on the plot, click Show Label (Figure M.18). In the Label Text box (Figure M.18) is
the default label that is created from the DSS record that represents the selected curve.
The user can edit the label in the Label Text box (Figure M.18). From the Alignment
list (Figure M.18), the label can be centered, right or left justified on the selected curve.
From the Position list (Figure M.18), the label can be positioned above, below, or
centered on the selected curve.

Figure M.18 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Label Tab

Legend Item Tab

a. From the Legend Item tab (Figure M.15), if the user wishes to modify the selected
curve's legend label, enter new information in the Text box (Figure M.19).

Figure M.19 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Legend Item Tab – Text Box

b. From the Border box (Figure M.5), the user has the option to draw a border around
the selected curve's legend item. Click Draw Border (Figure M.5), the user can select
the color, style, and weight of the border, click Apply. A border as defined will
display around the selected curve's legend item.

c. From the Background box (Figure M.6), the user has the option to incorporate a
background as part of the selected curve's legend item. Click Draw Background
(Figure M.6), the user can select the color, pattern, and set the transparency of the
background, click Apply. The selected curve's legend item of the plot will display
with a background as defined.

Quality Symbols Tab

From the Quality Symbols tab (Figure M.15), if the user wants to display information
about data quality symbols related to the selected curve, select Draw Quality Symbols
(Figure M.20). Click Apply, the defined data quality symbols will display on the

M-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Figure M.20 curve name Properties Dialog Box – Quality Symbols Tab

selected curve on the plot. There are four data quality types available – Valid,
Questionable, Rejected, and Missing (Figure M.20). For each of the data quality types
the user can set the style, line color, fill color, and the size of the symbol that will
represent the different data quality types.

Hide/Show a Curve
The user can select a curve that for reporting purposes might not need to be displayed. From a
plot window (Figure M.14), right-click on a curve, from the shortcut menu, click Hide Curve
(Figure M.14), the selected curve will no longer be displayed in the plot. To display the curve
again, right-click on the area where the curve originally displayed, from the shortcut menu click
Show Curve. The selected curve now displays on the plot.

Add a Callout to a Curve

A callout is an annotation or additional information about the curves or points on a curve that are
display in a plot. Right-click on a curve, from the shortcut menu (Figure M.14), a user can add a
callout by clicking Add Callout (Figure M.14). The Add Callout message window will open
(Figure M.21), in the Callout Text box, the user can enter the required information. Click OK,
the Add Callout message window will close (Figure M.21), and the callout will display on the
plot along the selected curve.

Figure M.21 Add Callout Message Window

M-13
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Hide/Show Callouts
For reporting purposes, callouts for a selected curve might not need to be displayed. From a plot
window (Figure M.14), right-click on a curve, from the shortcut menu, click Hide Callouts,
from the selected curve, callouts will no longer display in the plot. To display callouts again,
right-click on the curve where the callouts originally displayed, from the shortcut menu click
Show Callouts. From the selected curve the callouts now display on the plot.

Clear Callouts
Callouts for a selected curve can be deleted, from a plot window (Figure M.14), right-click on a
curve, from the shortcut menu, click Clear Callouts, from the selected curve, all callouts have
been deleted.

M.4.5 Plot - Spacers

Spacers specify the distance between viewports, between a viewport and the legend, and the
width of side margins. From a plot window, right-click on the space between the title and the
plot (viewport), from the shortcut menu (Figure M.22), click Edit Properties. The Edit Space
Properties dialog box will open (Figure M.23), from the Size in Pixels box, enter a number that
will increase/decrease the distance between the title and the plot. Click OK, the Edit Space
Properties dialog box will close (Figure M.23), and the modification to the spacer will have
been adjusted.

Figure M.22 Plot – Spacer Shortcut Menu

M-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Figure M.23 Edit Space Properties Dialog Box

M.4.6 Plot - Viewport

Viewport is the polygon viewing region of a plot where the grid containing the curves are
displayed. From the plot window, right-click in the grid area of the plot, from the shortcut menu
(Figure M.24), right click Edit Properties, the Viewport Properties dialog box will open
(Figure M.25).

Figure M.24 Plot – Viewport Shortcut Menu

Figure M.25 Viewport Properties Dialog Box

M-15
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

From the Viewport Properties dialog box (Figure M.25), there are four boxes that are
concerned with the gird – Major X Grid, Minor X Grid, Major Y Grid, and Minor Y Grid
(Figure M.26). The user can set the color, style, and weight for each of the grid settings. By
default, the Major X- and Y-grids are set to display, if the user wants to have the minor X- and
Y- grids display, the user would select Draw Minor X Grid and Draw Minor Y Grid (Figure
M.26). Click Apply, and the minor gridlines will display in the plot.

Figure M.26 Viewport Properties Dialog Box - Gridlines

From the Border box (Figure M.5), by default a border around the viewport area is drawn. The
user can choose to not to have a border around the plot; select the color, style, and weight of the
border.

From the Background box (Figure M.6), the user has the option to incorporate a background as
part of the plot. Click Draw Background (Figure M.6), the user can select the color, pattern,
and set the transparency of the background, click Apply. The plot will display with a
background as defined.

M.4.7 Plot – X- and Y-Axis

For the X- and Y-axes, the user can create/modify the individual axis label; change the font
attributes; add a border; add a background color; adjust the scalability of the label; reverse the
axes; switch the axes (does not work in Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT); display major and/or minor
tic marks; and, set the axis type.

Axis Label
From the plot window, right-click on the axis label of a plot (X or Y), from the shortcut menu
(Figure M.27), right click Edit Properties, the Viewport – Axis Label Properties dialog box
will open (Figure M.28).

M-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Figure M.27 Axis Label and Tics Shortcut Menus

Figure M.28 Viewport – Axis Label Properties Dialog Box

M-17
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Axis Label Tab

a. From the default tab – Axis Label (Figure M.28), Show Axis Label displays an axis
title (Figure M.28). The user can define the title by entering information in the Text
box (Figure M.28). Click Apply, the title of an axis will display.

b. From the Font box (Figure M.4), from the Font list, the user can select a font type for
the selected axis label. The user can choose to have the selected axis label, displayed
bolded or italicized by select either Bold or Italic (Figure M.4) from the Font box.
From the Color list (Figure M.4) the user can have the selected axis label display in a
selected color. From the Size list (Figure M.4), the user can set the size of font for the
selected axis label. The Use Font Scaling option (Figure M.4) allows for the font size
to adjust when the plot window is being resized. The scaling of the font is set in the
Min Size list and the Max Size list.

c. From the Border box (Figure M.5), the user has the option to draw a border around
the selected axis label. Click Draw Border (Figure M.5), the user can select the color,
style, and weight of the border, click Apply. A border as defined will display around
the selected axis label.

d. From the Background box (Figure M.6), the user has the option to incorporate a
background as part of the selected axis label. Click Draw Background (Figure M.6),
the user can select the color, pattern, and set the transparency of the background, click
Apply. The selected axis label will display with a background as defined.

Scale Tab
From the Scale tab (Figure M.29), by default scaling of the axes and the axes tic marks
is set to Auto, all scaling items have a check mark by the description. If the user wishes
to set scaling, click an item (check mark no longer displays), and enter a new scaling
factor for the item. Click Apply, and the new scaling for the axes and the axes tic marks
is available. By selecting Reverse (invert) Axis (Figure M.29) the user can invert the
axes in the plot. The Switch X and Y Axis (Figure M.29) is not functional in HEC-
WAT Version 1.0.

Figure M.29 Viewport – Axis Label Properties Dialog Box – Scale Tab

M-18
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Tics Tab
From the Tic tab (Figure M.30), by default major tick marks are set – Use major tick
marks. If the user wants the minor tick marks to display, click Use minor tick marks
(figure M.30). In either sub tab – Major Tics or Minor Tics the user can display the
tick labels by selecting Show Tic Labels (Figure M.30). From the Font box (Figure
M.4), from the Font list, the user can select a font type for the tick labels. The user can
choose to have the tick labels displayed bolded or italicized by selecting either Bold or
Italic (Figure M.4) from the Font box. From the Color list (Figure M.4) the user can
have the tick labels display in a selected color. From the Size list (Figure M.4), the user
can set the size of font for the tick labels. The Use Font Scaling option (Figure M.4)
allows for the font size to adjust when the plot window is being resized. The scaling of
the font is set in the Min Size list and the Max Size list.

Figure M.30 Viewport – Axis Label Properties Dialog Box – Tics Tab

Axis Tics
From the plot window, right-click on an axis tic label, from the shortcut menu (Figure M.27),
right click Edit Properties, the Viewport – Axis Label Properties dialog box will open (Figure
M.28). The user can change the axis type, from the shortcut menu (Figure M.27), point to Set
Axis Type, click Linear Axis (in Figure M.27 the axis type is Log Axis). The plot will now
display as a linear plot. To change the plot to a log plot, from the shortcut menu (Figure M.27),
point to Set Axis Type, click Log Axis

M.4.8 Plot – Legend

The legend provides the user with information about the items displayed in the plot. The user
can modify the legend panel and the customize curves that displayed in the legend.

M-19
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Legend Panel
The Legend Panel on (Figure M.31) contains information about the items displayed in the plot.
From the plot window, right-click in the legend panel, from the shortcut menu (Figure M.31),
right click Edit Properties, the Edit Legend Properties dialog box will open (Figure M.32).
By default the legend panel displays, click Show Legend (check mark no longer displays) and
the legend panel will no longer display. The user can also position the legend panel from the
Legend Position list.

Figure M.31 Legend Panel and Legend Items Shortcut Menus

Legend Title Tab

a. From the default tab – Legend Title (Figure M.32), the user can add a title to the
legend panel. Click Draw Legend Title (Figure M.32), in the Text box the user can
enter the information for the legend panel title. Click Apply, the title will display in
the legend panel

b. From the Font box (Figure M.4), from the Font list, the user can select a font type for
the legend title. The user can choose to have the legend title displayed bolded or
italicized by select either Bold or Italic (Figure M.4) from the Font box. From the
Color list (Figure M.4) the user can have the legend title display in a selected color.
From the Size list (Figure M.4), the user can set the size of font for the legend title.
The Use Font Scaling option (Figure M.4) allows for the font size to adjust when the
plot window is being resized. The scaling of the font is set in the Min Size list and the
Max Size list.

M-20
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Figure M.32 Edit Legend Properties Dialog Box

c. From the Border box (Figure M.5), the user has the option to draw a border around
the selected legend title. Click Draw Border (Figure M.5), the user can select the
color, style, and weight of the border, click Apply. A border as defined will display
around the legend title.

d. From the Background box (Figure M.6), the user has the option to incorporate a
background as part of the legend title. Click Draw Background (Figure M.6), the
user can select the color, pattern, and set the transparency of the background, click
Apply. The legend title will display with a background as defined.

Left/Right Block Tabs

a. From the Left Block or Right Block tabs (Figure M.33), the user can add a block to
the left or right of the legend panel. To display the blocks the user clicks Draw Left
Legend Block/Draw Right Legend Block (Figure M.33), click Apply. On the
left/right side of the legend panel a block will be displayed. The user can add text to
the block, by entering information into the Text box (Figure M.33)

b. From the Font box (Figure M.4), from the Font list, the user can select a font type for
the legend panel block text. The user can choose to have the legend panel block text
displayed bolded or italicized by select either Bold or Italic (Figure M.4) from the
Font box. From the Color list (Figure M.4) the user can have the legend panel block
text display in a selected color. From the Size list (Figure M.4), the user can set the
size of font for the legend panel block text. The Use Font Scaling option (Figure
M.4) allows for the font size to adjust when the plot window is being resized. The
scaling of the font is set in the Min Size list and the Max Size list.

M-21
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure M.33 Edit Legend Properties Dialog Box – Left/Right Block Tabs

c. From the Icon box (Figure M.33), the user add a graphics file to a legend panel block.
Next to the File box (Figure M.22), click , an Open Browser will open (Figure
M.34). Browse to the location of a graphics file, select the file, click Open, the Open
Browser will close (Figure M.34). In the File box (Figure M.33), the location and
name of the selected file will be displayed. Click Apply, the selected graphic will
display in the legend panel block. Be sure to size the graphic before adding it to the
legend panel block.

Figure M.34 Open Browser

d. From the Border box (Figure M.5), the user has the option to draw a border around
the legend panel block. Click Draw Border (Figure M.5), the user can select the
color, style, and weight of the border, click Apply. A border as defined will display
around the legend panel block.

M-22
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

e. From the Background box (Figure M.6), the user has the option to incorporate a
background as part of the legend panel block. Click Draw Background (Figure M.6),
the user can select the color, pattern, and set the transparency of the background, click
Apply. The legend panel block will display with a background as defined.

Legend Panel – Customizing Curves

From the Legend Panel (Figure M.31), right-click on a curve label, from the shortcut menu
(Figure M.31), right click Edit Properties, the Curve Properties dialog box will open (Figure
M.15). Section M.4.4, Custom Curves, describes the various option available to a user for
customizing curves.

M.5 Customizing Plots – Edit Menu

If the user does not want to customize plots from the plot, from a plot window, from the Edit
menu, click Plot Properties. The Plot Properties dialog box will open (Figure M.35), from
seven tabs allows the user to configure multiple display properties of an individual plot. The
properties and options available from the Plot Properties dialog box (Figure M.35) are detailed
in Section M.4. The Layout tab (Figure M.35) is available for the user to set the plot window
size, add a background color to the panel around the plot, and set the space size in pixels. Before
adjusting any of the options, please review the HEC-DSSVue User's Manual.

Figure M.35 Frequency Viewer Properties Dialog Box – Layout Tab

M.6 Configure Plot Layout

The user can customize the layout of an individual plot, available options are: adding and
removing axes, arrange the order of viewports, add and remove viewports, and set the weight of
viewports. The plot components are displayed in a tree structure.

M-23
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

To add a viewport to an individual plot:

1. From the plot window, from the Edit menu, click Configure Plot Layout. The
Configure Plot dialog box will open (Figure M.36).

Figure M.36 Configure Plot Dialog Box

2. From Edit menu, click Add Viewport. A new viewport will be added to the bottom of
the tree on the Configure Plot dialog box (Figure M.37).

3. The user can now add data from one of the other viewports to the new viewport. If data
is not added, the new viewport will not be saved. Select a curve from one of the existing
viewports, using the down move arrow, move the curve to the new viewport.

4. Click Apply, the plot will now have an additional viewport that displays the curve that
was moved.

5. Click OK, the Configure Plot Editor (Figure M.36) will close, and the plot will display
the changes that were made.

M.7 All Plots

The user can customize all the plots for an entire HEC-WAT study. From the Plot window
(Figure M.1), from the Edit menu, there are two commands - Default Line Styles and Default
Plot Properties. These commands allow a user to customize all new plot windows that will be
accessed in a study.

M.7.1 Default Line Style Options

The Default Line Style Options dialog box (Figure M.37) is specifically for adjusting the
curves (lines) in all of the plots for a study. From this dialog box, the user can add curve (line)
M-24
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix M – Plots

Figure M.37 Default Line Style Options Dialog Box

types; change the color and fill of the curves (lines); and, add labels for the curves (lines) for all
plots in a study. For more detailed information on Default Line Style Options dialog box, refer
to the HEC-DSSVue User's Manual (Chapter 5).

From the Line tab (Figure M.37) the user can set the color, style, and weight for curves (lines) in
all plots. If the curves have points, the user can adjust the style, color, and fill color for the
points on curves in all plots.

From the Default Line Style Options dialog box (Figure M.37) labels can be added to the
curves and adjust the position of the label (Label tab) for all plots. The user can manually adjust
the maximum and minimum values for the X-axis, set viewport weight, and reverse the X-axis
(Defaults tab) for certain curve types such as Precip.

M.7.2 Default Plot Properties

The Default Plot Properties dialog box (Figure M.38) allows the configuration of all of plot
properties related to the active study. The worksheets for this dialog box allow a user to make
adjustment to the viewport; modify/create a title for all plots; adjust grids; modify/add axis
labels; marker lines; change the color of the plot background; change the layout of the legend,
and adjust the layout of the plots. The properties and options available from the Default Plot
Properties dialog box (Figure M.38) are detailed in Section M.4.

M.8 HEC-DSSVue User's Manual

There are many more options available from the HEC-WAT plot windows. Please review the
HEC-DSSVue User's Manual for further details on the available options.

M-25
Appendix M – Plots HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure M.38 Default Plot Properties Dialog Box

M-26
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

Appendix N

Printing and Copying Data

Plots and tables in HEC-WAT offer detailed views of data and model results that the user can
print or copy and paste into other applications. In addition, the user can print reports generated
by the individual models. The following sections provide information by the individual models
available from HEC-WAT on printing and copying data.

N.1 HEC-HMS
From an HEC-HMS plot the user is able to print the plot. For example, from an HEC-HMS plot
result (Figure N.1), click Print . A Print dialog box will open (Figure N.2). The user can
select the printer; set properties for the print job; print to a file; setup the pages; and adjust
appearance settings. When everything is setup, click Print, the Print dialog box (Figure N.2)
will close, and the HEC-HMS plot is printed.

Figure N.1 HEC-HMS Plot Results

N-1
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure N.2 HEC-HMS - Print Dialog Box

N.2 HEC-RAS

N.2.1 Printing

Plots
To print an HEC-RAS plot, for example, from a Cross Section Plot dialog box (Figure N.3),
from the File menu, click Print. The Print Options dialog box will open (Figure N.4). From
this dialog box the user can select a printer, select orientation, set margins, set printer scaling,
and other additional options. There are other options, for further information see the HEC-RAS
User's Manual.

Figure N.3 HEC-RAS - Cross Section Plot Dialog Box

N-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

Figure N.4 Print Options Dialog Box – HEC-RAS Plot

Click Print, the Print Options dialog box (Figure N.4) will close. A copy of the plot will be
sent to the selected printer.

Tables
To print a RAS table, for example from a Profile Output Table – Standard Table 1 dialog box
(Figure N.5), from the File menu, click Print. A Print Options dialog box will open (Figure
N.4) which is very similar to the Print Options dialog box for RAS plots. The user can select a
printer, select orientation, set margins, set options for the table, and additional options. There are
other options for further information see the HEC-RAS User's Manual.

Figure N.5 HEC-RAS - Profile Output Table – Standard Table 1 Dialog Box

N-3
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Click Print, the Print Options dialog box (Figure N.4) will close. A copy of a RAS table will
be sent to the selected printer.

N.2.2 Copying

Plots
In HEC-RAS there are several copying processes associated with a plot. The first is copying the
plot to the clipboard for use in other programs as a graphic. The graphic is a picture, which is
easily copied into most programs. For example, from a Profile Plot dialog box (Figure N.6),
from the File menu, click Copy Plot to Clipboard. The contents for the display area on the
Profile Plot dialog box (Figure N.6) will be copied to the clipboard and is available for pasting
into other programs.

Figure N.6 HEC-RAS - Profile Plot Dialog Box

Another way is to copy the data of a plot to the clipboard. The data is copied to the clipboard in
a tab delimited format, which is easily pasted into an Excel® spreadsheet for example. For
example, from a Profile Plot dialog box (Figure N.6), from the File menu, click Copy Values to
Clipboard. The data values that represent the plot on the Profile Plot dialog box (Figure N.6)
will be copied to the clipboard and is available for pasting into other programs.

The last way to copy RAS plot data, is to create an AutoCAD file – DXF. The DXF format is a
vector-based graphic and is commonly used for data export from other Computer-Aided Design
(CAD) and GIS program (Chapter 5, Section 5.2.1). For example, from a Profile Plot dialog
box (Figure N.6), from the File menu, click Write DXF File. An Enter the DXF Filename
Browser will open (Figure N.7). The user should search for a location to save the file and
provide a name in the File name box. Click Save, the Enter the DXF Filename Browser will
close (Figure N.7) and the DXF Export dialog box will open (Figure N.8). The user will need to
N-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

Figure N.7 HEC-RAS - Enter the DXF Filename Browser

Figure N.8 HEC-RAS - DXF Export Dialog Box

enter a filename (default name for a cross section plot is riverstation.dxf), and adjust some other
settings (see HEC-RAS User's Manual for further details) if needed. Click OK, the DXF Export
dialog box (Figure N.7) will close, and a message window will appear informing the user that the
DXF file has been created. Click OK, the message box will close and the DXF will have been
created.

Cross Section Table

From an HEC-RAS cross section table the user can copy the data and headings to the clipboard
in a tab delimited format, which can be easily pasted in to an Excel® spreadsheet for example.
For example, from a Cross Section Output dialog box (Figure N.9), from the File menu, click

N-5
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure N.9 HEC-RAS - Cross Section Output Dialog Box

Copy to Clipboard (Data and Headings). The data values and headings from the table on the
Cross Section Output dialog box (Figure N.9) will be copied to the clipboard and is available
for pasting into other programs.

Profile Table
From an HEC-RAS profile table the user can copy the data and headings to the clipboard, data
only to the clipboard, or create a text file. To copy items to the clipboard, for example, from a
Profile Output Table –Standard Table 1 dialog box (Figure N.5), from the File menu, click
Copy to Clipboard (Data and Headings) or Copy to Clipboard (Data Only). Either way the
data values and/or headings from the table are copied to the clipboard in a tab delimited format
which can be easily pasted into an Excel® spreadsheet.

To create a text file of an HEC-RAS profile table, for example from a Profile Output Table –
Standard Table 1 (Figure N.5), from the File menu, click Write to Text File. An Enter
Filename browser will open (Figure N.10). Select where you want the file copied to and enter a
filename. Click Save, the Enter Filename browser (Figure N.10) will close and the file will be
created.

N-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

Figure N.10 HEC-RAS – Enter Filename Browser

N.3 HEC-ResSim

N.3.1 Plots
Plots provide a graphical representation of your data. From the Plot Window (Figure N.11) the
user can view the plot, as well as print, save as a graphics file, copy the contents of the Plot
Window to the clipboard, and save the properties of the plot to a template to be used by other
plots. Following is an overview of the menu bar of the Plot Window. The commands available
from the menus are:

Figure N.11 HEC-ResSim Plot Window

N-7
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

File From this menu you can view the plotted data in a tabular format, save the plot as a
graphics file, save a template, use a template, copy the plot to the clipboard, and
print the plot. Available commands are: Tabulate, Save As, Save Template,
Apply Template, Save Specification, Print, Page Setup, Print Preview, Print
Multiple, and Close.

Edit From this menu you can customize the plot. Available commands are: Plot
Properties, Default Line Styles, and Default Plot Properties.

Plot From this menu you can customize the layout of an individual plot, and save a plot
type. Available commands are: Select Variables, Open Plot Type and Save Plot
Type.

View From this menu you can have the plot window always on top of your desktop, and
you can choose to use line styles. Available commands are: Always On Top, Use
Line Styles, and Zoom to all.

The Tools appear in a toolbar on the left side of the Plot window (Figure N.1). The tools change
the appearance of the mouse, as well as the functionality of the mouse:

Pointer/Selector Tool

With the Pointer/Selector Tool, the user can access shortcut menus that allow customization of
plots using the plot editing tools.

Zoom Tool

The Zoom Tool allows the user to view data closely at a specific time. To zoom in, hold the
mouse button down and outline the area the user wants to enlarge. To zoom out, click the right
mouse button (right-click). The zoom out is done by a factor of two and positions the clicked
location at the center of the display area.

Save As
The Save As command allows the user to save the active plot to a graphics file. HEC-ResSim
has four possible formats: Windows Metafile (*.wmf), Postscript (*.ps), JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg),
and Portable Network Graphics (*.png).

To create a graphics file:

1. On the File menu, click Save As, the Save browser will open (Figure N.12).

2. Find the location where to save the graphics file.

3. Enter a name for the file in the File name box.

N-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

Figure N.12 Save Browser

4. From the Files of type list, select the type of graphics file you wish to create.

5. Click Save, a file with the appropriate extension will be created in the selected location.
The file will contain the contents of the Plot Window (Figure N.11).

Copy to Clipboard
The Copy to Clipboard command will copy the contents of the Plot Window to the clipboard.
Once the copy is complete, the user can paste the plot as an image into other applications.

Print Commands
The Plot Window (Figure N.11) provides the user with several different commands to setup the
printing process and to print.

Print
The Print command opens a standard system Print dialog box (Figure N.13). From the dialog
box the user can select the printer, choose to print to a file, and the number of copies to print.
Click OK, the Print dialog box will close and the plot will print to the selected printer.

Page Setup
The Page Setup command opens the Page Setup dialog box (Figure N.14). When using this
dialog box, the user can setup the format of the printed page. Following is a list of the available
options:

N-9
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure N.13 HEC-ResSim - Print Dialog Box

Figure N.14 HEC- ResSim - Page Setup Dialog Box

N-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

Orientation
By default, the page will be printed in Portrait. In addition, you can choose to print in
Landscape or Reversed (does not work in HEC-WAT Version 1.0).

Margins
The default margin settings are displayed in the Margins area of the Page Setup dialog
box. If you want to set the margins, click Set Margins, the Printer Margins dialog box
(Figure N.15) will open. From this dialog box, you can adjust the top, left, bottom, and
right margins.

Figure N.15 HEC- ResSim – Printer Margins Dialog Box

Additional Options
If you would like page numbers included on your printed page, select the Page Numbers
check box (Figure N.14). The Frame around plot option is not available in HEC-WAT
Version 1.0.

Printer Scale
The default option is Maximum Plotting Area, and in Version 1.0 of HEC-WAT, is the
only available option.

Print Preview
The Print Preview command opens the Preview dialog box (Figure N.16). From this dialog
box, the user can view the plot, adjust the scaling of the plot, and print the plot. The Print
command automatically prints the plot to the default system printer.

Print Multiple
The Print Multiple command opens the Print Multiple dialog box (Figure N.17). To be able to
print multiple plots the user must have opened multiple individual plot windows. The open plots
are listed in the Available Plots list of the Print Multiple dialog box. To select plots to be
printed on one page, double-click on a plot name in the Available Plots list. The plot name will
move to the Selected Plots list. The user can adjust the way the plots are arranged on a page,
horizontally or vertically. Use the Number Across or Number Down sliders. The grid to the
right of the sliders reflects your choices. From the File menu, the Page Setup and Print
Preview commands are available.
N-11
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure N.16 HEC-ResSim - Preview Dialog Box - Plot

Figure N.17 HEC-ResSim - Print Multiple Dialog Box

N-12
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

N.3.2 Tables
Tables provide a tabular format of data. From the Tabulate Window (Figure N.18) the user can
view the data, as well as print the table, copy the selected contents of the Tabulate Window to
the clipboard, adjust the display of the data, and save the data to an ASCII file. Following is an
overview of the menu bar of the Tabulate Window. The commands available from the menus
are:

Figure N.18 HEC-ResSim - Tabulate Window

File From this menu, the user can print the data in a tabular format and view a plot of the
data. Available commands are: Print, Print Preview, Export, Plot, and Close.

Edit From this menu, select data to be copied to the clipboard. Available commands are:
Copy, Select All, Find, and Compare data sets.

View From this menu, the user can control the appearance of the data displayed in the
Tabulate Window. Available commands are: Commas, Date and Time
Separately, Date with 4 Digit Years, Show Decimal Places (auto, 1 - 6), and Show
Missing As (blank, -901.00, M, -M-).

Copy to Clipboard
To copy data from the Tabulate Window (Figure N.18) to the clipboard, there are several ways.
To use the Copy command from the Edit menu, the user must first select the cells in the table
that will be copied to the clipboard. If the user wants the whole table, from the Edit menu
choose Select All. If there is, only a certain area the user wishes to copy to the clipboard, from
the table click and drag over the cells to be copied, the selection will be highlighted. With either
method, then from the Edit menu choose Copy. The contents will then be copied to the
clipboard where the user can paste the data into other applications. In addition, if the user right-

N-13
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

clicks on the table, a shortcut menu will appear which will also allow you to copy data to the
clipboard.

Display Data
By default, data is displayed with commas and two decimal places. If the user wants to change
the way the data is displayed, from the View menu there are several options. If user does not
want commas displayed, from the View menu, click Commas.

For time series data the date and time are displayed in the following default format: ddmmmyy
hhmm. The user can change the way the date and time are displayed. From the View menu,
click Date and Time Separately; the date and time are now displayed in two separate columns
in the table. Another way is from the View menu, click Date with 4 Digit Years; the date and
time now displays a four-digit year instead of a two-digit year.

Numbers by default are displayed with two decimal places. If the user wants to see more or less
number of decimal places, from the View menu, point to Decimal Places, and click on the
number (zero through 6) of decimal places you would like displayed.

ASCII File
The user can save the table of data to an ASCII file, right-click on the table. From the shortcut
menu, click Export; the Table Export Options dialog box will open (Figure N.19). From this
dialog box, the user can set certain options for the ASCII file.

Figure N.19 HEC-ResSim - Table Export Options Dialog Box

The user can set the delimiter for the file from the Field Delimiter list. The hardwired choices
are TAB (default), SPACE, COMMA, and COLON. The user can also make choices on
whether the file contains fixed width columns, strings are set in quotes, whether to include
column headers in the file, include gridlines in the file, and whether to include the a title in the
file.

N-14
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data

When all of the options are set, click OK. A Save browser will open. Find the location where
the file will be saved, and provide a filename. Click Save, the file will be created without an
extension, since this is an ASCII file, you might want to give the file an extension of .txt.

Print
The Print command opens the Properties dialog box will open (Figure N.21). From this dialog
box, the user can set up the format of the table for output.

Figure N.20 HEC-ResSim Properties Dialog Box

From the Page Tab (Figure N.20), the user can set the orientation; fit the table to a page, and
choose whether to include the entire table or only a selection. In addition, the user can also
choose to print the table in ASCII, add headers, add background color to headers (non-ASCII
option), and add gridlines.

If the user wants to add header or foot information to the table report, click the Header/Footer
tab (Figure N.20). From the Header/Footer Worksheet enter header or footer information.

The title of the table report defaults to the pathname tag associated with the data. If the user
wants to change this title, click the Table Title Tab. From the Table Title Worksheet enter or
change the title, and decide if the title needs to be printed on each page of the report. When
everything is set, click Print, a standard system Print (Figure N.13) dialog box will open.

To preview the table report, right-click on the table, from the shortcut menu click Print Preview.
A dialog box similar to the Properties dialog box (Figure N.20) will open. Setup options for the
table report; click Preview, and the Print Preview dialog box (Figure N.21) will open. From
this dialog box, the user can view the table report, adjust the scaling of the report, and print the
report. The Print command automatically prints the report to the default system printer.

N-15
Appendix N – Printing and Copying Data HEC-WAT User's Manual

Figure N.21 HEC-ResSim - Preview Dialog Box - Tables

N-16
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix O - Glossary

Appendix O
Glossary
This glossary is a collection of definitions from throughout this user's manual, plus definitions of
other pertinent terms.

Acre: A unit of area in English units used in calculation of agricultural crop damage.

Activity: Linked with features and may involve changes to operations or institutional actions.

Alternative: A system of structural and/or nonstructural measures, strategies, or programs

formulated to alleviate problems or take advantage of specific opportunities
associated with water and related land resources in the planning area. An
alternative in HEC-WAT is a way to group a schematic with different operations
and model parameters. The HEC-WAT creates a base alternative (Without Project
Conditions) by default.

Analysis Period: Defines the time window and events that could be associated with an
alternative. Analysis periods are for determining damage and project
performance information for specific time periods, such as the base year or
the most likely future year. The analysis year results for a plan are also used
to perform equivalent annual damage computations. The analysis years are
used for all study evaluations. An analysis year represents a static time
period or year that the hydrology, hydraulics, and economic data represent.
Base year is the first year of the plan operation. The "most likely future
year" condition is a development projection for a specific future year; say
twenty years out from the base year. It usually is based on the projections of
local future development plans.

Arc Shapefile: This layer type is the native data structure for the ArcView® GIS program.
Shapefiles store non-topological geometry and attribute information for the
spatial features of a data set. Usually there are three files: *.dbf, *.shp, and
*.shx. The shp file contains the shapes (point, polylines, or polygons) that are
displayed in the layer. Each shape has a record in the dbf file containing
descriptive data called "attributes". The .shx file contains an index that links
each shape to its record in the .dbf file.

ArcInfo® DEM: This is an ASCII file format representation of a grid generated by ArcInfo®.
The file consists of keywords followed by values defining the number of
columns, number of rows, lower left corner, cell size, no data value, and each
cell value.

ASCII NetTin: This is an ASCII file format used to represent a triangulated irregular network
(TIN). The TIN data are stored in a simple format that defines the nodes,

O-1
Appendix O - Glossary HEC-WAT User's Manual

edges, and triangles contain in the TIN. This format is common for
transferring TIN data between software.

AutoCAD® DXF: A Drawing Interchange File (dxf) is created by a Computer-Aided Design

(CAD) package, AutoCAD®. This format is a tagged data representation
of an AutoCad® drawing file. Tagged data is where each data element is
preceded by a group code. A group code is an integer indicating the type
of data element. The file created is a vector-based graphic. The DXF
format is commonly used for data export from other CAD and GIS
programs.

CAP: Continuing Authorities Program; is a group of legislative authorities that give the Corps
of Engineers the authority to plan, design, and construct certain types of water resource
and ecosystem restoration projects without additional and specific congressional
authorization. The following are the most commonly used CAP authorities: Small Flood
control Projects (authorized by Section 205 of the 1948 Flood control Act); Emergency
Streambank Protection Projects (authorized by Section 14 of the 1946 Flood control Act),
Aquatic Ecosystem Restoration (authorized by Section 206 of the 1996 Water Resources
Development Act); and, Project Modifications of the Improvement of the Environment
(authorized by Section 1135 of the 1986 Water Resources Development Act).

Channel Modification: Physical alternation of the channel through re-sizing, re-configuration,

or re-vegetation, etc.

Channel Modification Tool to create, delete, rename, and edit channel

Tool: modifications. A channel modification has to be created on the stream
alignment.

Common Computation Locations where one model transfers data to

Point: another model, a location where results are needed for model
development or alternative analysis, or locations where input boundary
conditions are to be defined.

Common Computation Tool to create, delete, rename, and edit common computation points.
Point Tool: See Appendix H for more detail on creating, deleting, renaming, and
editing computation points.

Compute: Capability within HEC-WAT that allows the user to perform the calculations made
available through HEC-WAT. These calculations could be for one or more of the
models in an order chosen by the Project Delivery Team (PDT).

Also, a menu where the user can compute individual simulations; compute multiple
simulations; compute by individual program; and, view the compute log for the
active simulation.

Content Pane: Area of the HEC-WAT framework that provides details on the selected HEC-
WAT component in the Study Pane.
O-2
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix O - Glossary

Desktop Pane: Area of the HEC-WAT framework where the different map windows available
from HEC-WAT will display.

Diversion: Removal and redirection of water from its normal course for various reasons, water
supply, flood control, or environmental, etc.

Diversion Tool: Tool to create, delete, rename, and edit diversions. A diversion has to be
started on the stream alignment.

DXF: See AutoCAD® DXF.

Easting: The eastward measured distance in common map projections (X-coordinate).

Ecosystem Restoration Physical modifications or other actions that improve the value and
Measure: function of an ecosystem (e.g., channel improvements, removal of
drainage structures or levees).

Edit: A menu where the program order can be set; manipulate alternatives and simulations;
link individual model alternatives; and, access the individual program editors.

Event: A rainfall and/or flow episode. Normally the event is the time period over which the
model will retrieve data and produce results. An occurrence of precipitation/snowmelt
that leads to some sort of hydrologic response normally associated with a specific time
period. The event can be historical or represent the upper limit of a precipitation runoff
response.

File: A menu used for study management, printing the active map, and, importing and
exporting model alternatives.

FIA: Flood Impact Analysis, see HEC-FIA.

Feature: A physical element that generally requires site construction.

Flood Damage Can be a physical modification (structural measures) designed to

Reduction Measure : reduce the frequency of damaging levels of flood inundation (i.e.,
reservoirs, levees, channelization measures, walls, etc.); or, it can be an
activity (non-structural measure) that reduces flood damage without
significantly altering the nature or extent of flooding (e.g., flood
proofing, relocation of structures, raising structures).

Floodwall: A levee/floodwall is manmade barrier built along a stream to provide protection

from flooding. A levee/floodwall can reduce flood damage by preventing flood
stages from reaching a potential damage area.

GIS: Geographic Information System

O-3
Appendix O - Glossary HEC-WAT User's Manual

Group Code: In a DXF file an integer indicating the type of data element, see AutoCAD®
DXF.

GUI: Graphical User Interface, designed to make the program easy and efficient to enter data,
review output, and make comparisons.

Hectare: A unit of area in SI units used in calculation of agricultural crop damage.

HEC-DSS: The HEC database management system, HEC Data Storage System, stores data in
a convenient manner for inventory, retrieval, and archiving for water resource
applications.

HEC-DSSVue: The HEC software package, HEC Data Storage System Visual Utility Engine,
which provides a graphical user interface for viewing, editing, and
manipulating data in HEC-DSS files.

HEC-FIA: The HEC software package, HEC Flood Impact Analysis. This software package
provides the capability to estimate the impacts and damage associated with flood
events and the benefits attributed to flood control projects.

HEC-HMS: The HEC software package, HEC Hydrologic Modeling System. This software
package is designed to simulate the precipitation-runoff processes of dendritic
watershed systems and provides the capability to simulate the hydrologic response
in a watershed.

HEC-RAS: The HEC software package, HEC River Analysis System. This software package
is designed to perform one-dimensional hydraulic calculations for a full network
of natural and constructed channels, that allow the user the capability to perform
one-dimensional steady and unsteady flow river hydraulics calculations, sediment
transport-mobile be modeling, and water temperature analysis.

HEC-ResSim: The HEC software package, HEC Reservoir System Simulation. This software
package provides the capability to simulate the operation of a reservoir or
reservoir system for an observed, synthetic or predicted flow event using a
defined operation scheme.

HEC-SSP: The HEC software package, HEC Statistical Software Package. This software
package allows the user to perform statistical analyses of hydrologic data.

HEC-WAT: The HEC software package, HEC Watershed Analysis Tools. This software
package will provide an interface that will streamline the analytical process using
the tools commonly applied by multi-disciplinary teams at USACE offices.

Help: A menu that provides access to HEC-WAT documentation and displays current
information about HEC-WAT.

O-4
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix O - Glossary

Impact Area: Is any distinct portion of a study area that is affected by rising or falling stage in
a stream, river, lake, or reservoir. The boundaries of an impact area are defined
by a closed polygon, and the user characterize the effects of rising or falling
stage by describing the property and population at risk in the area bounded by
the polygon.

Impact Area Tool: Tool is used to create, edit, delete, and rename, impact areas. See
Appendix I for more detail on creating, deleting, renaming, and editing
impact areas.

JRE: Java Runtime Environment (JRE)

Layer: Layers are maps that can be placed as background images behind the workspace. They
are optional but do provide significant information. Layers can be many types (*.dlg,
*.shp (ARC/INFO® or Arc Shapefile), *.dxf (AutoCAD®), *.dem).

Levee : A levee/floodwall is a manmade barrier built along a stream to provide protection from
flooding. A levee/floodwall can reduce flood damage by preventing flood stages from
reaching a potential damage area.

Levee Tool: Tool to create, delete, rename, and edit levees. See Appendix G for more details
on creating, deleting, renaming, and editing levees.

Map Windows: A way to graphically display the major components of an HEC-WAT study
(stream alignments, schematics, alternatives, simulations). From these map
windows the user can created, edit, delete, open model editors, or view results.

Maps: A menu where the user can setup map layers and map windows. The user can set spatial
properties; zoom the active map window out to its full extents, add map layers, remove
map layers, open a new map window, adjust the active map windows properties, save
the contents of the active map window as a graphic file, import a stream alignment from
an ArcView® shapefile, import impact areas from an ArcView® shapefile, export a
stream alignment to an ArcView® shapefile, and, export impact areas to an ArcView®
shapefile.

Measure: Measures for HEC-WAT include structural/non-structural measures (flood damage

reduction), and/or ecosystem measures. Structural measures are physical
modifications designed to reduce the frequency of damaging levels of flood
inundation, and include dams with reservoirs, levees, channelization measures,
walls, diversion channels, pumps, bridge modifications, and ice-control structures.
Non-structural measures are activities that reduce flood damage without
significantly altering the nature or extent of flooding (e.g., flood proofing, relocation
of structures, raising structures). Ecosystem restoration measures are physical
modifications or other actions that improve the value and function of an ecosystem
(e.g., channel improvements, removal of drainage structures or levees).

Message Pane: Area of the HEC-WAT framework that contains messages that the HEC-WAT
software provides for informational purposes. The information in the Message
O-5
Appendix O - Glossary HEC-WAT User's Manual

Pane is a record of HEC-WAT software activity, recording the opening of the

study, opening map windows, accessing DSS, and many other HEC-WAT
activities.

NED: National Economic Development; usually referred to as the NED plan, which is the plan
USACE is required to compute and report. The NED plan provides the greatest
economic benefits. If a plan is recommended, most likely it is the NED plan.

NexGen: Next Generation Software Development Project

Northing: The northward measured distance in common ma projections (Y-coordinate).

Panes: Viewing areas of the HEC-WAT main window that allow viewing of HEC-WAT study
data.

Pan Tool: Tool to move the display area while zoomed in.

PDT: Project Delivery Team

Plan: A set of one or more flood damage reduction or ecosystem restoration measures or
actions designed to operate over a period of time (project life). The plan is inclusive of
the entire study area although it may have a flood damage reduction measure for a single
damage reach.

Plug-In: Provides the ability to access model parameters and view results of a model from
HEC-WAT.

PM: Project Manager

Pointer/Selector Tool: Allows the user to select components for editing and viewing (plots)
data or results.

Project: A man-made structure for the purpose of reducing flood damage or for ecosystem
restoration.

R&U: Risk and Uncertainty

Raster Image: Generally defined as a rectangular array of sampled values (pixels). Each pixel
has one or more number associated with it, generally specifying a color the
pixel should be display in. The raster image formats supported by HEC-WAT
are JPEG format (*.jpg) and Graphics Interchange Format (*.gif). For HEC-
WAT to access these file types an *.img (ASCII text) file must be created by
the user outside of HEC-WAT. The file needs to contain the following lines,
which need to match the easting and northing parameters stated in the Map
Default Properties for StudyName dialog box (Chapter 5, Section 5.2.5).

O-6
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix O - Glossary

Rating Curve: A graphical relationship that yields the stage for a given discharge at a
specific location on a stream or river.

Reservoir: The impoundment created behind dams, or behind navigation locks and dams. For
HEC-WAT a reservoir also includes the dam built on a stream to store water for
uses such as navigation, tribal resources, flood damage reduction, fish and wildlife
habitat considerations, hydroelectric power generation, recreation use, water
quality, water supply, erosion and sedimentation control, and sustaining hydrologic
function on lakes and rivers. The releases from a reservoir can reduce flood
damage by reducing flood stages.

Reservoir Tool: Tool to create, delete, rename, and edit reservoirs. See Appendix G for more
detail on creating, deleting, renaming, and editing reservoirs.

Results: A menu from which the user can select simulations for comparison; and, view results
from HEC-WAT and the individual software applications from within HEC-WAT.

Risk: The probability an area will be flooded, resulting in undesirable consequences.

Risk Analysis: An approach to evaluation and decision making that explicitly, and to the
extent practical, analytically, incorporates considerations of risk and
uncertainty in a flood damage reduction study.

Run: Capability within HEC-WAT that allows the PDT to select the models to execute for a
given event or events.

Schematic: In HEC-WAT, a physical representation of the study and it includes: common

computation points, impact areas, stream alignment, and flood damage reduction
and environmental measures that will be modeled.

Simulation: A combination of an analysis period and event(s) associated with an alternative.

Stage: The vertical distance in feet (meters) above or below a local or national datum
(N.G.V.D. for elevations).

Stage Hydrograph: A graphical relationship of stage as a function of time for a certain

location.

Status Bar: Displays the coordinates of the pointer on a map window. Outside of a map
window it reflects the status of the program.

Stream Alignment: Represents the stream system in the watershed. The alignment indicates
where confluences and bifurcations occur and provides a sense of distance
and scale. In HEC-WAT, stream alignments are composed of a series of
stream elements. See Appendix F for more detail on creating, deleting,
renaming, and editing stream alignments.

O-7
Appendix O - Glossary HEC-WAT User's Manual

Stream Alignment Properties of a stream alignment that include: line width, color of line,
Properties: font style, etc. See Appendix F for more detail on creating, deleting,
renaming, and editing stream alignments.

Stream Alignment Tool is used to create, delete, and edit the stream
Tool: elements that make up the stream alignments. See Appendix F for more
detail on creating, deleting, renaming, and editing stream alignment.

Stream Element: Segment of the stream alignment that is composed of vertex points, with
the beginning and ending vertex points being stream nodes. Typically
begins or ends at a confluence, bifurcation, or at the boundary of the river
system. See Appendix F for more detail on creating, deleting, renaming,
and editing stream elements.

Streamgage Records: Records of the stream elevation or stage taken at a streamgage location.

Stream Node: The beginning and ending point for each stream element. Stream nodes are also
created where stream elements meet. Also, a stream node can be used to
establish stationing for a stream element. See Appendix F for more detail on
creating, deleting, renaming, and editing stream nodes.

Stream Node Tool: Tool is used to create, delete, and edit stream nodes on the stream
alignment. See Appendix F for more detail on creating, deleting,
renaming, and editing stream nodes.

Stream Stationing: Watershed adopted stations along a stream normally denoted as miles
(kilometers) above the mouth of a stream.

Study: The basic component of HEC-WAT. An HEC-WAT study defines the watershed or
geographic are to be evaluated. The study includes alternative analyses which is the
investigation of with and without-project conditions involving hydrology, hydraulics,
economics, plan formulation and evaluation. In HEC-WAT, the study also includes all
of the necessary information to complete an analysis of a specific geographical area.

Study Pane: Area of the HEC-WAT framework that provides an overview of HEC-WAT
alternatives, simulations, and analysis periods that have been defined for a study.

System Units: This value is used as a label for data entry forms and output reports. Choices
are English or Metric, with the default being English.

Tabs: Provides different views of the available data in an HEC-WAT study. The user can
perform certain operations for a study from the tabs.

Toolbar: Provides quick access to the most frequently used options from the HEC-WAT menu
bar.

O-8
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix O - Glossary

Tools: A menu that provides access to DSS data (HEC-DSSVue); provides access to the
Statistical Software Package (HEC-SSP); allows the user to view general information
about the study; provides options for the HEC-WAT startup and system properties; view
HEC-WAT program activity; and, monitor memory usage.

Top of Levee: Stage at the top of the levee, floodwall or tidal barrier.

Uncertainty: A measure of imprecision of knowledge of parameters and functions used to

describe the hydraulic, hydrologic, geotechnical, and economic aspects of a
project plan.

USGS DEM: The U.Ss Geological Survey (USGS) publishes the file format USGS DEM
(Digital Elevation Map). A raster file format, DEM files usually contain terrain
elevations, but the file format can be used for representing any surface. The
format, published by the USGS, allows internal documentation of coordinate
system, date of publication, etc. These values are referenced horizontally either
to a Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection or to a geographic
coordinate system.

USGS Digital USGS Digital Line Graphs (DLG) are created from two sources using manual
Line Graph: and automated digitizing methods. The two sources are aerial photographs or
cartographic sources. DLG files are vector representations of the data. When
the HEC-WAT interacts with a dlg file it automatically creates a dlgbin file for
use.

Vertex Point: A point with known coordinates on a stream element in the stream alignment.

View: A menu that allows the user to setup the HEC-WAT main window; the user can select
toolbars and panes; set display unit for plotting and tabulating; and manage layouts for
the HEC-WAT main window.

WAT: Watershed Analysis Tool, see HEC-WAT.

Watershed: The total area of land that drains to a common stream system.

Window: A menu where the user can control the appearance of the map windows in the
Desktop Pane of the HEC-WAT main window.

With Project The economic, performance, and other conditions associated with
Conditions: implementing a flood damage reduction plan. It is compared to the without-
project condition. It includes the base-year and static future analysis year
periods to determine the equivalent values.

Without Project Base alternative in HEC-WAT for evaluating the benefits and performance of
Conditions: potential flood damage reduction plans and represents the conditions of the
study if no actions are taken. The without project conditions includes the base
year conditions and the most likely future year conditions.

O-9
Appendix O - Glossary HEC-WAT User's Manual

Zoom Tool: Tool that allows zooming in and out of map windows.

O-10
HEC-WAT User's Manual Appendix P – Terms and Conditions for Use

Appendix P

Terms and Conditions for Use

Use of the program is governed by the terms and conditions for use. They limit what can be
done with the program software, waive warranty, limit liability, and indemnify the developers
and the United States government. The program cannot be used unless the terms and conditions
for use are accepted; the full text is given below.

Terms and Conditions for Use

The United States Government, US Army Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center
("HEC") grants to the user the rights to install Watershed Analysis Tool (HEC-WAT) "the
Software" (either from a disk copy obtained from HEC, a distributor or another user or by
downloading it from a network) and to use, copy and/or distribute copies of the Software to other
users, subject to the following Terms and Conditions for Use:

All copies of the Software received or reproduced by or for user pursuant to the authority of this
Terms and Conditions for Use will be and remain the property of HEC.

User may reproduce and distribute the Software provided that the recipient agrees to the Terms
and Conditions for Use noted herein.

HEC is solely responsible for the content of the Software. The Software may not be modified,
abridged, decompiled, disassembled, unobfuscated or reverse engineered. The user is solely
responsible for the content, interactions, and effects of any and all amendments, if present,
whether they be extension modules, language resource bundles, scripts or any other amendment.

The name "HEC-WAT" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from the
Software. Products derived from the Software may not be called "HEC-WAT" nor may any part
of the "HEC-WAT" name appear within the name of derived products.

No part of this Terms and Conditions for Use may be modified, deleted or obliterated from the
Software.

No part of the Software may be exported or re-exported in contravention of U.S. export laws or
regulations.

Waiver of Warranty

THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND ITS AGENCIES, OFFICIALS,

REPRESENTATIVES, AND EMPLOYEES, INCLUDING ITS CONTRACTORS AND

P-1
Appendix P – Terms and Conditions for Use HEC-WAT User's Manual

SUPPLIERS PROVIDE HEC-WAT \"AS IS,\" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OR

CONDITION, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. Depending on state law, the
foregoing disclaimer may not apply to you, and you may also have other legal rights that vary
from state to state.

Limitation of Liability

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND ITS AGENCIES,

OFFICIALS, REPRESENTATIVES, AND EMPLOYEES, INCLUDING ITS CONTRACTORS
AND SUPPLIERS, BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH USE OF
HEC-WAT REGARDLESS OF CAUSE, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE.

THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT’S LIABILITY, AND THE LIABILITY OF ITS

AGENCIES, OFFICIALS, REPRESENTATIVES, AND EMPLOYEES, INCLUDING ITS
CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS, TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTIES IN ANY
CIRCUMSTANCE IS LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT OF CERTIFIED COPIES OF
HEC-WAT WITH IDENTIFIED ERRORS CORRECTED. Depending on state law, the above
limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

Indemnity

As a voluntary user of HEC-WAT you agree to indemnify and hold the United States
Government, and its agencies, officials, representatives, and employees, including its contractors
and suppliers, harmless from any claim or demand, including reasonable attorneys' fees, made by
any third party due to or arising out of your use of HEC-WAT or breach of this Agreement or
your violation of any law or the rights of a third party.

Assent

By using this program you voluntarily accept these terms and conditions. If you do not agree to
these terms and conditions, uninstall the program and return any program materials to HEC (if
you downloaded the program and do not have disk media, please delete all copies, and cease
using the program.)

P-2